Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
TECHNISCHE DOKUMENTATION
Loose Separator
REVISION / REVISION: 00
CONTENTS / INHALT
COVER SHEET
DECKBLATT
1 SAFETY
SICHERHEIT
1.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATIONS 7
SICHERHEITSHINWEISE FUER ANLAGEN
1.2 QUALIFICATION PERSONNEL 23
QUALIFIKATION PERSONAL.
1.3 SAFETY 31
SICHERHEIT
2 DOCUMENTS RELATING TO ORDERS
PROJEKTBEZOGENE DOKUMENTE
2.1 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS 61
GRAFIKSYMBOLE
2.2 ORDER INFORMATION SPARE PARTS FOR INSTALLATIONS 75
BESTELLINFO ERSATZTEILE F. ANLAGEN
2.3 EQUIPMENT LIST 81
GERAETELISTE
2.4 DATA SHEET 85
PROZESSDATENBLATT
2.5 INSTALLATION DIAGRAM 87
INSTALLATIONSSCHEMA
3 CONTROL UNIT
STEUER- UND REGELEINRICHTUNG
3.1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 89
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
3.2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 345
STROMLAUFPLAN
3.3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 465
STROMLAUFPLAN
4 CENTRIFUGE
ZENTRIFUGE
4.1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 587
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
6 FILTER
FILTER
6.1 STRAINER, COMPL.
SCHMUTZFAENGER VOLLST.
BR 927
BR 937
7 HEAT EXCHANGER
WAERMETAUSCHER
7.1 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
PLATTENWAERMETAUSCHER
OC* 943
WA-WM 1031
RE 1037
67.961 1039
SAFE 1057
10168 1137
TFU006 1139
10168 1145
PREMIO-1.6KN 1195
9 MEASUREMENT
MESSTECHNIK
9.1 PRESSURE GAUGE
DRUCKMESSGERAET
RGG-63 1211
R-P-RS-KP 1213
W083 1241
W083 1273
W083 1275
10 ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS
ZUSÄTZLICHE KOMPONENTEN
10.1 TABLE OF LUBRICATING OILS 1277
SCHMIEROELTABELLE
11 MOTOR
MOTOR
11.1 THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
DREHSTROMMOTOR
IM-133-MOT 1287
Edition: 0712
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
Subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to
• Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
otherwise danger to life.
Note: • This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-
mation which help to better understand the plant components and the
processes.
1 Safety precautions
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Fig. 3
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 4
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
CAUTION!
Operating, maintenance or repair work by unqualified or unauthorized
personnel can lead to operating, assembly and handling errors and severe
damage to persons and property.
For operation, maintenance and repair work, personnel may only be deployed
who
• have reached a minimum age of 18 years.
• are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
ing.
• are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
1.2.5 Start-up
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Note:
This is except for plants equipped for
operation in explosion-hazarded areas.
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
Fig. 18
Fig. 19
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
Subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to
Qualification of staff
NOTE
We reserve all rights to these documents. They may only be passed onto third parties after obtaining prior consent from Westfalia Separator Group GmbH.
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note
No.: 9953-9001-010
Version: 19.10.2016
About this document 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
GEA Germany
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
59302 Oelde, Germany
2 Safety precautions 9
3 Description 15
6 Repair 23
7 Decommissioning 25
8 Spare parts 27
Pos : 4 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Geltungs ber eich_Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e @ 38\mod_1472029688939_18.doc x @ 1383566 @ 2 @ 1
Pos : 7 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Struktur _der_D okumentati on @ 38\mod_1472030598771_18.doc x @ 1383638 @ 2 @ 1
There is a threat of serious injuries if the instructions in all documents are not fol-
lowed.
Refer to the instruction manuals for separators and/or start-up and shut-down
instructions for skids.
Pay attention to the safety precautions and user instructions in machine and skid
documentation.
Refer to the component manual.
All safety precautions and warning instructions given in the documents have to
be adhered to.
Access to the documentation must always be assured at the deployment site.
The direction arrow marks work and/or operating steps. Keep to the order shown
from top to bottom.
• The bullet point marks lists.
Pos : 9 /BA/Standar d/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Sig nal wörter /Signal wörter_für _War nhi nweise @ 8\mod_1385644090593_18.doc x @ 475171 @ 2444 @ 1
DANGER Denotes impending danger. If the preventive measures are not implemented, death
or serious injury will be the consequence.
WARNING Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, death or serious injury may be the consequence.
CAUTION Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, minor injury may be the consequence.
NOTICE Denotes a potentially damaging situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, the centrifuge or something else in its vicinity can get damaged.
Danger signals
2 Safety precautions
Pos : 12 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Allgemeines _Sic herheit @ 38\mod_1472109455088_18.doc x @ 1384479 @ @ 1
The machine or skid components have been designed state-of-the-art and in ac-
cordance with the recognised safety regulations. However, when using the compo-
nent, risks may arise for the user or third party or the component or other assets
might get impaired if it is
• operated by persons who have not been trained or briefed,
• not used for the intended application,
• not correctly repaired or maintained.
Pos : 13 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Besti mmungsgemäß e_Verwendung @ 38\mod_1472033909992_18.doc x @ 1383710 @ 2 @ 1
Pos : 16 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Res trisi ko @ 38\mod_1472037332032_18.doc x @ 1383780 @ 2 @ 1
When working on live leads, there is a risk of electric shock. An electric shock
leads to serious injury or death.
Work on electrical apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be per-
formed by qualified staff only.
Disconnect the power to electrical equipment if necessary.
Secure against unintentional switching back on.
Attach a warning sign that prohibits switching on.
Serious eye and/or skin injuries due to discharge of the medium under high
WARNING
pressure
Risk of burns when handling materials with abrasive or corrosive properties.
Wear protective goggles or mask with eye protection to offset the risk of medium
spurting out.
Pos : 17 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Sic her heits kennz eichnung @ 38\mod_1472038802245_18.doc x @ 1383815 @ 2 @ 1
3 Description
Pos : 24 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Bes chr eibung _und_F unkti ons weis e @ 38\mod_1472040215048_18.doc x @ 1383957 @ 2 @ 1
Pos : 28 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Tr ans port @ 38\mod_1472040425733_18.doc x @ 1384027 @ 2 @ 1
4.1 Transport
The following conditions must be observed:
The component can come in contact with substances potentially harmful to health
during operation.
De-contaminate the component prior to packing and/or transport.
• Use hoists to transport components that are too heavy to move by hand.
• Screw eye bolts or lugs into the component, attach properly to the hoist and then
transport the components.
• When using lifting straps, place them around the component, provide sharp-
edge protection if required, and watch for proper weight distribution.
• Protect the component against outside force during transport (impacts, vibra-
tions etc.).
• Protect the sealing surfaces of the connections against damage.
• Do not remove the corrosion protection layer.
Pos : 29 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Lag erung @ 38\mod_1472040914661_18.doc x @ 1384062 @ 2 @ 1
4.2 Storage
Protect the component against external impacts and contamination.
• Keep the storage room dry and dust-free.
• Avoid condensate formation.
• Protect connection openings against dirt.
Pos : 31 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/06_M ontage_und_Installati on @ 0\mod_1326806855797_18.doc x @ 12953 @ 1 @ 1
Pos : 32 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Allgemeines_Installati on @ 38\mod_1472041207296_18.doc x @ 1384097 @ @ 1
Transport and/or storage may result in damage to the packaging to the extent that
the component no longer meets the safety requirements.
Check for potential damage prior to fitting.
Do not fit a damaged component.
5.2 Assembly
Remove all the packaging parts directly before fitting.
No dirt particles must be allowed to enter the component.
When required, keep to the flow of direction shown on the component.
After fitting
Perform a leakage and function test.
Create the specified operating status.
When working on live leads, there is a risk of electric shock. An electric shock
leads to serious injury or death.
Work on electrical apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be per-
formed by qualified staff only.
Disconnect the power to electrical equipment if necessary.
Secure against unintentional switching back on.
Attach a warning sign that prohibits switching on.
Ground the component in accordance with the local regulations.
Comply with the protective measures when connecting the component in ac-
cordance with the provisions of the responsible power company.
Pos : 36 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Pneumatisc her _Ansc hlus s @ 38\mod_1472042436028_18.doc x @ 1384240 @ 2 @ 1
5.5 Ex zone
Usage in an explosion-hazarded zone is not permitted. The only exception: this is
confirmed in the order or is in the manual or technical data sheet of the manufac-
turer.
Pos : 39 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/12_Instands etzung @ 0\mod_1328003270613_18.doc x @ 14220 @ 1 @ 1
6 Repair
Pos : 40 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/Allgemei nes_Ins tandhaltung @ 38\mod_1472042876993_18.doc x @ 1384313 @ @ 1
This chapter is divided into the sections cleaning and care, maintenance and re-
pair.
Before carrying out maintenance and repair, read and follow the instructions in
the chapter “Safety precautions”.
Pos : 41 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/R einig ung_und_Pfleg e @ 38\mod_1472042973596_18.doc x @ 1384347 @ 2 @ 1
6.2 Maintenance
The maintenance intervals have to be re-determined (shortened) by the operator
according to prevailing operating conditions.
Check or maintain the component for safety reasons. Note the following mini-
mum requirements:
- Regular check of the outer condition of the component and the accessories.
- Regular actuation so as not to impair the smoothness of action of all movable
parts through excessively long standstill times.
Pos : 43 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/Ins tandsetz ung @ 38\mod_1472043537652_18.doc x @ 1384417 @ 2 @ 1
6.3 Repair
Tread load, stress through connected pipes, excessively high ambient temperature
destroy the component.
Fit without using force. Avoid stresses.
No additional stress, e.g. tread load (use as unauthorized climbing aid).
No welding and heat treatment.
No tool machining (e.g. drilling).
Pos : 45 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/13_Auß erbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1328016515064_18.doc x @ 14509 @ 1 @ 1
7 Decommissioning
After cleaning, hot lye and acid residues can still be in the machine and the pipe-
lines. When working on the machine, contact with the lyes and acids can cause
burns.
Wear acid-resistant safety gear, e.g. safety goggles, safety gloves, protective
overalls or protective suits.
Take special care.
Observe the plant operator's SOPs on handling acids and lyes as well as local
disposal regulations.
Be sure to adhere to applicable environmental protection legislation.
Drain residual liquids in feed lines and utility lines into suitable vessels and dis-
pose of them properly.
Observe regulations on product contact.
Dismantle feed lines and utility lines, clean superficial impurities caused by lubri-
cants or product with suitable media and dispose of separately.
Dismantle all seals and non-metallic materials, clean them to remove lubricants
and dispose of them separately or recycle.
Separate and sort metal parts and recycle them.
Pos : 48 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/14_Ersatzteile @ 0\mod_1328016648937_18.doc x @ 14543 @ 1 @ 1
8 Spare parts
Pos : 49 /BA/Standard/14_Ers atzteile/Original _Ersatzteile/Original _Ers atzteile_M asc hine @ 17\mod_1416476908928_18.doc x @ 872255 @ 2 @ 1
Fig. 1
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and operations in more than 50 countries.
Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innovative equipment and process technology.
GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 index.
GEA Germany
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 Tel +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com
59302 Oelde, Germany
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Ruec ks eite ===
Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS ACCORDING TO DIN ISO 10628-2 (DIN EN 62424)
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE IN ANLEHNUNG AN DIN ISO 10628-2 (DIN EN 62424)
GEA EQUIPMENT HEATER AND COOLING EQUIPMENT PUMPS / PUMPEN SEPARATION EQUIPMENT MIXING AND MILLING EQUIPMENT
ABSCHEIDER
AIR COOLER
DISPLACEMENT PUMP
MILL
SEPARATOR
DIRECT DRIVE COMPRESSING
VERDICHTER
CONICAL BOTTOM VESSEL VACUUM PUMP
STEAM / WATER COIL
DAMPF / WASSER ROHRSCHLANGE VAKUUMPUMPE
COMPRESSOR
VERDICHTER
STEAM JET INJECTOR
STRAHLPUMPE
HEAT EXCHANGER VENTILATOR
VENTILATOR
DOME ROOF VESSEL
SEPARATOR GEAR PUMP
INTEGRATED DIRECT DRIVE ZAHNRADPUMPE
M
SPIRAL HEATER
SCREW PUMP
SCHRAUBENSPINDELPUMPE MOTOR / MOTOR
HORIZONTAL VESSEL
NS On / Off
An/ Aus
ROTARY BRUSH STRAINER CYCLONE FC normal overload For small loads
NCN Bei geringen Belastungen
ZYKLON FU Normal Overload
350 mm
ELECTRIC PREHEATER
SETTLING VESSEL
Revision Description of Revision Rev.-Datum Rev.-Name
Revision Description of Revision Rev.-Date Rev.-Name
gez.
created 05.05.2015 2323VE GEA Group
D-59302 Oelde
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS 9901-8104-300
Copyright reserved Format
We reserve all rights on this drawing Sheet / Sheets Size
last modified 05.07.2017 BREG GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE 1/7 A2
wir uns alle Rechte vor.
SYMBOLS AND CODE LETTERS ACCORDING TO DIN EN 62424 - CATEGORY
Code letter /
Kenn- Application Verwendung
buchstabe
Analysis Analyse PCE CATEGORY PCE PROCESSING (NEXT LETTER)
A
PCE KATEGORIE PCE VERARBEITUNGSFUNKTION (FOLGEBUCHSTABEN)
Burner control, Brennersteuerung,
B
flame monitoring A ANALYSIS
Freely usable ANALYSE
C Frei verwendbar
N S T AH PART OF MCC OR PLC B BURNER CONTROL/ FLAME DETECTION
D Density Dichte xxx-9-xxx/M1 xxx-9-xxx FUNKTION IN DER STEUERUNG
E Electrical voltage Elektrische Spannung D DENSITY
DICHTE
F Flow rate Durchfluss TE LOCAL MEASURING ELEMENT E ELECTRICAL VOLTAGE
G Distance, length, position
M xxx-9-xxx/B1 LOKALER MESSAUFNEHMER ELEKTRISCHE SPANNUNG
F FLOW
Manual input, DURCHFLUSS
H Handeingabe, Handgriff
manual intervention G DISTANCE, LENGHT, POSITION, STRETCHING
I Electrical current Elektrischer Strom
H MANUAL
J Electrical output Elektrische Leistung MANUELL
T Temperature Temperatur
YC1
Q QUANTITY
xxx-7-xxx
U Do not use Nicht benutzen DN R RADIATION QUANTITY
NO STRAHLUNGSMENGE
V Vibration, oscillation Vibratin, Schwingung
S SPEED, rpm, FREQUENCY
GESCHWINDIGKEIT, rpm, FREQUENZ
W Weight, mass Gewicht, Masse 0 - xx bar
PAL PIS T TEMPERATURE
X Other variables *1 *1 xxx-9-xxx xxx-9-xxx/B1
TEMPERATUR
Regulating member V VIBRATION
Y Stellglied (Ventil) VIBRATION
(valve)
W WEIGHT, MASS
Z Freely usable Frei verwendbar GEWICHT, MASSE
Y ACTUATOR (VALVE)
STELLGLIED (VENTIL)
LOCAL DISPLAY RELEVANT TO GMP
LOKALE ANZEIGE GMP RELEVANT
Kenn- Verwendung
Appplication
buchstabe
A Alarm, message Alarm, Meldung PCE CATEGORY PCE PROCESSING (NEXT LETTER)
PCE KATEGORIE PCE VERARBEITUNGSFUNKTION (FOLGEBUCHSTABEN)
B Limit, restriction
A ALARM/ NOTIFICATION
C Control Regelung ALARM/ MELDUNG
D Difference Differenz N S T AH PART OF MCC OR PLC B LIMITATION / DEFINING
xxx-9-xxx/M1 xxx-9-xxx FUNKTION IN DER STEUERUNG
E Element Element
C CONTROLLER
REGLER
F Ratio
TE LOCAL MEASURING ELEMENT D DIFFERENCE
G Not applicable Nicht anwendbar M xxx-9-xxx/B1 LOKALER MESSAUFNEHMER DIFFERENZ
Top limit value, oberer Grenzwert, E ELEMENT
H on, open ELEMENT
an, offen
F PROPORTION
I Analogue display Analoganzeige PROPORTION
J Not applicable Nicht anwendbar H UPPER LIMIT/ ON/ OPEN
OBERER GRENZWERT/ AN/ OFFEN
K Not applicable Nicht anwendbar MEASURING AND CONTROL EXAMPLES I INDICATION
Bottom limit value, unterer Grenzwert, MESS - UND REGELUNGSBEISPIELE ANZEIGE
L LOWER LIMIT/ OFF / CLOSED
off, closed aus, geschlossen L
0 - xx m3/h UNTERER GRENZWERT/ AUS/ GESCHLOSSEN
M Not applicable Nicht anwendbar 0-xx bar
FI PI O LOCAL OR PCS STATUS OF BINARY SIGNALS
N Not applicable Nicht anwendbar xxx-9-xxx xxx-9-xxx
X *1 *1
gez.
created 05.05.2015 2323VE GEA Group
D-59302 Oelde
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS 9901-8104-300
Copyright reserved Format
We reserve all rights on this drawing Sheet / Sheets Size
last modified 05.07.2017 BREG GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE 3/7 A2
wir uns alle Rechte vor.
ACCESSORIEST LIST
1 60 - 3 - 001 / M1
LEVEL 4 / EBENE 4
LEVEL 4 / EBENE 4
LEVEL 3 / EBENE 3
COMPONENT TAGGING Component tag: 1 digit / Komponentennummer: 1 Zahl B1
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
KOMPONENTENBESCHREIBUNG M1 MOTOR
MOTOR
LEVEL 2 / EBENE 2
Subsection: 2 digits / Untersektion: 2 Zahlen L1 ILUMINATION
BELEUCHTUNG
LEVEL 1 / EBENE 1
GSH / GSL LIMIT SWITCHES
Section: 1 digit / Sektion: 1 Zahl GRENZSCHALTER
LEVEL 5 / EBENE 5
Insulation specification / Isolierspezifikation
Insulation type: 2 letters / Isoliertyp: 2 Buchstaben
LEVEL 4 / EBENE 4
PIPING DESCRIPTION Piping specification / Rohrleitungsspezifikation
Nominal pressure: 2 digits / Nenndruck: 2 Zahlen
ROHRLEITUNGSBESCHREIBUNG Pipe class: 1 letter + 2 digits / Rohrklasse: 1 Buchstabe + 2 Zahlen
LEVEL 3 / EBENE 3
Pipe line number: PL + 3 digits
Rohrleitungsnummer: PL + 3 Zahlen
LEVEL 2 / EBENE 2
Section + subsection number: 3 digits
Sektion + Untersektion Nummer: 3 Zahlen
LEVEL 1 / EBENE 1
Product short code: 2 to 4 letters
Medium Kurzzeichen: 2 bis 4 Buchstaben
gez.
created 05.05.2015 2323VE GEA Group
D-59302 Oelde
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS 9901-8104-300
Copyright reserved Format
We reserve all rights on this drawing Sheet / Sheets Size
last modified 05.07.2017 BREG GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE 4/7 A2
wir uns alle Rechte vor.
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS - PIPE FITTINS, VALVES
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE - LEITUNGSFITTINGE, ARMATUREN
Shut-off flap
Absperrklappe PULSATION DAMPER
Pressure valve
Druckventile Constant-pressure valve
Stopcock
Konstantdruckventil
Absperrhahn
STEAM TRAP
KONDENSATABSCHEIDER
Diaphragm valve Angle constant-pressure valve
Membranventil Konstantdruckventil in Eckform
FUNNEL
Needle valve PI TRICHTER
SELF ACTING BACK-PRESSURE REGULATOR INTERNAL SENSING
Nadelventil
xxx-7-xxx xxx-7-xxx
SPRAY BALL
Angle shut-off fitting PI
Absperrarmatur in Eckform xxx-9-xxx
TRAP
Angle shut-off valve ABSCHEIDER
ECK
Absperrventil in Eckform PI PI
PRESSURE REDUCER WITH STRAINER AIR FILTER
Angle stopcock DRUCKMINDERVENTIL MIT FILTER LUFTFILTER
xxx-7-xxx xxx-7-xxx
Absperrhahn in Eckform
OIL FILTER
Safety position
Angle diaphragm valve
Sicherheitsposition
Membranarmatur in Eckform
DIFFERENTIAL METERING PISTON
Three-way shut-off fitting DOSIERKOLBEN
DREIWEG
MULTIPORT
MULTIPORT
gez.
created 05.05.2015 2323VE GEA Group
D-59302 Oelde
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS 9901-8104-300
Copyright reserved Format
We reserve all rights on this drawing Sheet / Sheets Size
last modified 25.07.2017 KARA GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE 5/7 A2
wir uns alle Rechte vor.
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS - PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, LABELS, BREAK IDENTIFIERS
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE - ROHRLEITUNG, LEITUNGSFITTINGE, BESCHRIFTUNG, TRENNSTELLEN
BOTTOM
BODEN
gez.
created 05.05.2015 2323VE GEA Group
D-59302 Oelde
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS 9901-8104-300
Copyright reserved Format
We reserve all rights on this drawing Sheet / Sheets Size
last modified 05.07.2017 BREG GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE 6/7 A2
wir uns alle Rechte vor.
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS - MEDIUM CONSUMPTION, CROSS REFERENCE
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE - MEDIENVERBRAUCH, QUERVERWEIS
MEDIUM MEDIUM
MEDIUM MEDIUM
Product feed Product feed
PRESSURE Produktzulauf DRAWING CONNECTOR FUNCTION Produktzulauf DRAWING CONNECTOR
DRUCK 3 bar ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS FUNKTON Q001 ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS
15 m3/h PID002.A1
FLOW RATE P&ID NO. SQUARE
P&ID NR. QUADRAT
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATUR
MEDIUM MEDIUM
MEDIUM MEDIUM
Product feed DRAWING CONNECTOR Product feed DRAWING CONNECTOR
PRESSURE Produktzulauf ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS FUNCTION Produktzulauf ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS
DRUCK 3 bar FUNKTON Q001
15 m3/h PID002.A1
FLOW RATE P&ID NO. SQUARE
P&ID NR. QUADRAT
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATUR
gez.
created 05.05.2015 2323VE GEA Group
D-59302 Oelde
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS 9901-8104-300
Copyright reserved Format
We reserve all rights on this drawing Sheet / Sheets Size
last modified 05.07.2017 BREG GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE 7/7 A2
wir uns alle Rechte vor.
GEA Service
Ordering of replacement parts and other consumable items for centrifuge-specific GEA
systems.
For all questions concerning technical support, the ordering of replacement parts or to
request on-site support for your systems please contact your nearest GEA agent.
IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE CONTACT DETAILS TO HAND, YOU CAN ACCESS
THEM QUICKLY AND CONVENIENTLY AT:
gea.com/Service
If you do not have access to the internet please call our German head office in Oelde and
ask for the contact details for your location:
Tel.:+49 2522 77 – 0
To speed up your request and to ensure that we deliver the right parts please include the
following information:
- For model designation and serial number of the equipment please refer to the nameplate
- Number of parts required
- Part numbers and designations as per parts list
- Your enquiry / order number
- Preferred delivery date (from GEA works)
- Your company address
• Your complete company name or customer number
• Your invoice address (if it differs from the delivery address)
• Your delivery address
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Original GEA replacement parts provide reliability and protect your investment.
Our high quality replacement parts will keep your operation running with maximum efficiency.
Original replacement parts are manufactured to the highest quality standards. Moreover, the
advance identification of critical parts, short delivery periods and constant availability will
ensure the safe and reliable operation of your plant.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Our GEA PerformancePlus service concept takes an intelligent and economic approach to
ensuring plant availability and security.
The availability of historic and actual measurement data provides you and also GEA with a
detailed insight into the status of the plant. This enables a forward-looking introduction of
corrective, and in particular, planned measures.
We can guarantee:
• The planning of optimal service intervals
• Concise status information
• Minimum unplanned downtimes
• Enhanced plant security
• Optimised plant availability
PERFORMANCE AGREEMENTS
Even the best plant is worthless without the right service.GEA provides an approach for
preventing expensive cost traps.
Our service packages, individually tailored to your requirements, place particular emphasis
on plant availability, security and cost controls. Let the GEA experts take over the inspection,
maintenance and status control of your plant.
Our service modules can be adapted to changes in production conditions in all life cycle
phases without additional costs.
We can guarantee:
• A high level of plant availability
• A reduction in downtimes
• Optimised plant operation
• Maximum planning security
• Short response times
TRAINING
Our qualified staff will train your employees on site in one of our excellently equipped training
centres.
GEA training modules are tailored to your individual requirements. Our experienced
engineers offer comprehensive practical training, impart process expertise and raise
awareness in your employees of plant status to ensure safe, professional plant operation
from the outset.
We can guarantee:
• Optimal plant efficiency
• High availability and reliability
• Highly qualified personnel
• Awareness of plant status
• Motivation
SERVICE CONSULTANCY
Service consultancy is an essential stage in the optimisation and adaptation of operating
processes. Even in this area we have set ourselves the goal of fulfilling the requirements of
our clients with a market-leading service through the use of the latest technology – so that
you can provide your customers with superb products. That is why we bring all the necessary
tools and latest technical know-how together with our experience to bear on the problem
analysis, assessments and complex solutions to problems, in order to jointly overcome the
challenges.
Customer: Santierul Naval Constanta Project-/Order-No.: 30040524 / 1452846667
Order-No.: 1452846667
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explanations:
Priority(A): Procurement (B): Scope of supply (C):
N = Obligatory M = Must be obtained from Westfalia L = Scope of supply by WS
E = Recommended K = May be obtained from Westfalia S = Supplied by client
P = Possible Z = Supplied by client F = to be removed
U = --- V = --- W = loose supply
Created Date: 29/06/2017 Checked Date: 29/06/2017 Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
Created Date: 29/06/2017 Checked Date: 29/06/2017 Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
Created Date: 29/06/2017 Checked Date: 29/06/2017 Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
Created Date: 29/06/2017 Checked Date: 29/06/2017 Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
Order overview
Oil to be processed
Application: 1.0 DO
Viscosity: 15
Density: 0.9
Inlet temperature: 20 °C
Separating temperature: 60 °C
Throughput capacity: 2300 l/h
Separator
Type: 1 x OSE 5-91-037/5
Operation mode: 1.0
Ejection method: total
Clean oil discharge: 1 bar g
Finish color: RAL 6026 Opal Green
Total weight: 160 kg
Bowl speed: 12000 rpm
Bowl weight: 30 kg
Separator motor
Type: Frame size 112
Output: 4 kW
Speed: 3600 rpm
IP class: 55
Weight: 25 kg
Feed Pump
Kind : geartype
Type: KF 32 RF 2
Rated capacity: 2640 l/h
Suction height: 4 mWS (0,39 Bar)
Delivery height: 20 mWS (1,96 Bar)
Output: 1,3 kW
IP class: 55
Weight: 28 kg
Created Date: Checked Date: Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
29/06/2017 29/06/2017 P1452846667-9913-PDS010 1/2
By: PDM By: 2211-NI By:
Copyright. © All rights reserved
Customer: Project-/Order-No.:
Santierul Naval 30040524 / 1452846667
Constanta
Location: Project-title: GEA Westfalia Separator
H589-H591 1 x OSE 5-91-037/5
Process Condition Data Sheet
Ambient Conditions
Ambient temperature: +50°C
Humidity: up to 92%
Atmospheric pressure: up to 1000 m Above Sea Level
Electrical Supply
Control unit type: IO / Final color: RAL 7035 Light Grey
Infeed voltage: 440 Volt AC ± 10%
Frequency: 60 Hz ± 2%
Valve operating voltage: 24V DC DC
Control Voltage: 220...230V Volt AC
IP class: 54
Weight: See Circuit Diagram - Arrangement drawing
Operating water
Hardness: < 55°C 12° dH
> 55°C 6° dH
Chloride Ions: < 100 mg/l
PH - Value: 6,5 - 8,5
Temperature: +10°C up to +85°C
Feed Pressure: 3 - 10 bar (min.3bar)
Required Capacity: 0,5 l/h
Consumption / Ejection: 3-4l
Created Date: Checked Date: Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
29/06/2017 29/06/2017 P1452846667-9913-PDS010 2/2
By: PDM By: 2211-NI By:
Copyright. © All rights reserved
CONNECTIONTABLE
CONNECTIONS
10-8-001
DN40
10-3-001
1 1/2"
M
10-7-002
G1/2"
05
16-7-002
DN20
16-8-001 M 17-8-001
DN20 10-5-001 1"
TC
10-9-007
TE
TAH
TE
10-9-006
2 x PT 100 TAL 10-7-005
DN25
12-7-001
10-7-006
18-7-002 DN 25
DN25
1/4"
PT
10-9-009
08 10-7-018
1/4"
09
19-7-002
3/4"
19-8-001
3/4"
19-7-003
3/4"
PI
19-9-001
11-7-001
Sinnbilder siehe: DIN ISO 10628-2
1/2"
19-7-004 19-7-005
1/2" 1/4"
(DIN EN 62424)
FOR SYMBOLS REFER TO: DIN ISO 10628-2
(DIN EN 62424)
PI PT
11-9-001 11-9-002
PT 11-7-003
10-9-014 1/4" Installationsrichtlinien
10-7-012
1/4"
TE
M 10-9-010
beachtet werden
IAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
10-9-011 NO. 2058-9601-020 HAVE
10-1-001/M1 TO BE OBSERVED
10-1-001
OSE 5-91-037 +
SIS
10-9-018
13 14 -
14-7-001
DN80
ZS
14-9-001
Client
Santierul Naval Constanta
NB-No. Country
H589-H591 Romania
Copyright reserved
Revision proof
is electronically stored
We reserve all rights
on this drawing
CAD-Drawing
Date Name Description Drawing-No.
29/06/2017 PDM
Created
P&ID
Checked 29/06/2017 2211-NI GEA Westfalia Separator 1.0 DO P1452846667-9913-PID010
Scale Sheet / Sheets Size
30040524
Approved D-59302 Oelde 1 x OSE 5-91-037/5 1:1 1 1 A0
Instruction manual
Operating panel
Type: GEA IO OSE
No.: 8555-9001-040
Version: 14.07.2017
About this document 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
GEA Germany
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
59302 Oelde, Germany
2 Safety precautions 15
3 Description 21
7 Settings 161
8 Commissioning 199
9 Operation 213
11 Maintenance 245
12 Repair 249
13 Decommissioning 251
DANGER Denotes impending danger. If the preventive measures are not implemented, death
or serious injury will be the consequence.
WARNING Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, death or serious injury may be the consequence.
CAUTION Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, minor injury may be the consequence.
NOTICE Denotes a potentially damaging situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, the device or something else in its vicinity may be damaged.
Danger signals
1.4.1 Operator
Abbreviation: Op
The operator is employed by the customer and has been briefed in the following
operations:
• Starting and shutting down the machine.
• Monitoring the machine and process (e.g. by means of indicators).
• Execution of easy re-lubrication and cleaning operations.
When given specific directions, the operator is able to carry out simple modifica-
tions to the process, e.g.:
• Adjusting temperatures, pressures and throughput capacities.
• Dosing additives.
1.5.1 Service
GEA Westfalia Separator offers comprehensive service for the following areas:
• Assembly
• Commissioning
• Regular maintenance
• Repairs
• Checking the operating state
• Checking in dismantled state
• Decommissioning for a long-term shut-down
• Storage and conservation during long-term standstill
• Restarting
• Decommissioning and disposal
• Training
1.5.2 Training
GEA Westfalia Separator regularly holds training courses for customer employees.
Training content is aimed at the customer's operating and service staff who work
with the machine. The operator must know how the machine functions.
Trained operators assure the operating safety of the machine.
Many different applications require competent process engineering know-how. On-
ly adequately trained employees in service ensure a high quality standard. This re-
quires ongoing further training.
The demands on the qualification of the service staff are growing increasingly.
GEA Westfalia Separator consequently offers a qualification model and training
concept.
• Contact the following addresses for training courses for operating and service
staff.
• GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH • Werner Habig Straße 1 • 59302 Oelde
(Germany) • Tel. +49 (0)2522 77-1469 • Fax +49 (0)2522 77-31469 • in-
fo.learningcenter@gea.com • gea.com
• GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH • Hammerbrook Straße 90 • 20097 Ham-
burg (Germany) • Phone +49 40 589650-0 • Fax +49 40 7380585 • in-
fo.learningcenter@gea.com • gea.com
2 Safety precautions
Any misuse of the control may cause personal injury and property damage.
Use the unit only as intended.
Place of use
The HMI device is not intended for use in residential areas. If the HMI device is
used in residential areas, radio or television reception may be affected.
If the HMI device is used in a residential area, limit value class B to EN 55011 with
regard to the emission of radio interference must be ensured.
Suitable measures for achieving radio interference suppression of limit value class
B include, for example:
• fitting the HMI device in earthed switch cabinets
• using filters in power supply cables
Separate approval is also required.
2.5 Liability
Reasons for the immediate passing of liability to the plant operator independent of
existing warranty and guarantee periods.
• Improper installation by inadequately trained persons.
• Improper handling in deviation from the intended use.
• Non-observance of the user instructions.
Warranty and liability conditions in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery of GEA
Westfalia Separator are not extended by the above information.
Note:
GEA Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified or
unauthorised personnel.
3 Description
Important: The plant operator is not authorised to carry out program modifications.
The plant operator can make the following settings on the touchscreen of the HMI
device:
• machine-specific, product-specific and process-specific preselections
• threshold values
• System-specific settings
1 Nameplate
3 Labelling strips
Side view
2 Interfaces
3 Mounting gasket
Rear view
1 Nameplate
2 Interfaces
3 Mounting gasket
3.3.3 Interfaces
Interfaces for the 4" HMI device
NOTES:
Use interface X1 or interface X60 for connecting a projecting PC.
Use interfaces X61/X62 for connecting peripherals like a printer or keyboard.
Use interface X90 for connecting a loudspeaker.
Fix the connecting cables for USB and PROFINET on the rear of the HMI device
using cable ties.
On the 4” and 7" variants, secure cables with a separate strain relief plate. Fit the
strain relief plate to the HMI device.
3.4 Features
The HMI device has the following features:
• Graphic display for machine monitoring and machine control
• Control system with modular expandability
• Multilingual text display
• Touch screen or function keys with LED status display
• Programmable logic control
• Control voltage 24V
• High operational reliability
• Long service life
Fig. 9 Start screen after switching on and booting of the HMI device
If you press one of the symbols with your finger, the respective menu opens.
The following points should be observed when operating the touchscreen:
Fig. 10
S8555002 Fig. 11
Startup Assistant
Operation Assistant
Help Desk
Service Assistant
Training
Company portrait
Screenshot
Status display
02.00 Fig. 12 Example for start screen of Operating Assistant with status displays
Icons can display a status using indicator colours. Status displays can be found on
modules or complex components.
Status relates to the complete sensor system on this module or the component.
The indicator colours correspond to traffic light colours.
Important: Persons with restricted ability to perceive colour may only be able to
assign these colours correctly to a restricted extent under certain conditions. This
should be taken into account when selecting operating staff.
When the status display is pressed, the message screen for associated active
warnings and alarms opens.
Status displays are found only on modules which are also equipped with sensor
systems. The sensor system must be able to generate warnings and alarms.
Faults and alarms can be acknowledged, see the section entitled "Alarms, warn-
ings and message screens".
"Operation Assistant" icon starts flashing red. This alarm can al-
ways be seen, regardless of the current display being shown.
Important: No additional pop-up screen appears.
Once the "Operation Assistant" icon is pressed, the "Process" overview screen ap-
pears.
Pressing on a yellow or red status indicator opens a screen containing the associ-
ated and currently active alarms or warnings.
The status of the messages is "K", i.e. "Alarm message has arrived".
The following designations show the status of the alarm message:
Acknowledgement key
Active alarms and warnings are acknowledged with the "Acknowledgement" key.
The status of the acknowledged warnings and alarms in each case switches to
"KQ". When all active alarms and warnings have been acknowledged, the colour of
the acknowledgement key switches from red to white.
Alarm key
The "Alarm memory" screen can also be opened via the "Alarm
key" in the toolbar of the "Active alarm messages/warnings"
screen.
The "Alarm memory" shows all the alarms including active ones.
Pressing the "Alarm key" again returns you to the "Active alarm messag-
es/warnings" screen
Activate process.
Close valve.
Open valve.
1)
Black Contaminated media
Blue Freshwater
Brown Fuel
2)
Green Sea water
Silver Vapour
Rectangles with
• rounded corners,
• a white edge and
• green typeface on a
• black background.
Other output values or display values which are not measured values are shown in
white typeface on a black background.
Example: Displaying output values which are not measured values
07.00.01 Fig. 14
For changing data and entering characters, see the chapter entitled "Editing data
in input fields".
The numerical or alphanumerical input field for manual entry appears on the
screen.
Manual input
Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the
previous menu level.
Manual input
Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the
previous menu level.
Fig. 16
IMPORTANT: However, the menu opened now is not protected. This means that
unauthorised persons can make changes in this menu.
To protect the control unit against unauthorised access, go back in the menu until
only the freely accessible menus are shown on the display.
1.2 I/O check Digital and analogue inputs and outputs can be
tested, see section entitled "I/O check".
1.3 Process settings Process data and machine data can be en-
tered.
Switch on the HMI device and wait until the project starts.
To change data, press the respective input field and enter the desired data in the
selection window.
The following machine data are entered on this and the following pages:
01.02.01.01
An icon in the form of a square shows the status of the signal and links to the rele-
vant screen.
The following icons are used:
Icons for inputs and outputs
When any input or output is selected, the associated screen component in which
simulation or manual mode can be selected opens.
Designation Description
DI 0.0 The separator in ope- Feedback separator motor ON/OFF
ration
DI 0.1 Separator with fault Feedback separator motor PTC
DI 0.2 Speed bowl Speed sensor bowl
DI 0.3 Free
DI 0.4 LSL sludge tank Feedback level switch sludge tank empty
Designation Description
DI 0.5 LSH sludge tank Feedback level switch sludge tank full
DI 0.6 LSHH sludge tank, Feedback level switch 1 sludge tank overflow
level 1
DI 0.7 LSHH sludge tank, Feedback level switch 2 sludge tank overflow
level 2
DI 1.0 Feed pump operation Feedback feed pump motor ON/OFF
DI 1.1 Feed pump fault Feedback feed pump motor PTC
Designation Description
Designation Description
DI 2.1 Sludge pump fault Feedback sludge pump motor PTC
DI 2.2 PSL discharge pres- Feedback pressure sensor product discharge
sure too low
DI 2.3 PSH discharge pres- Feedback pressure sensor product discharge
sure too high
DI 2.4 PSL SMS pressure Feedback pressure sensor sludge space too
low
DI 2.5 FSH water discharge Feedback pressure sensor water discharge
too high
Designation Description
DI 2.6 Fill level sludge Monitoring of sludge discharge with automatic
discharge sludge flap.
DI 2.7 EMERGENCY STOP Emergency stop active
DI 3.0 Remote: Separator Separator motor ON / external
ON
DI 3.1 Remote: Separator Separator motor OFF / external
OFF
DI 3.2 Remote: Pump ON Feed pump motor ON / external
Designation Description
DI 3.3 Remote: Pump OFF Feed pump motor OFF / external
DI 3.4 Remote: Process ON Process ON / external
DI 3.5 Remote: Process Process OFF / external
OFF
DI 3.6 SPS voltage supply Feedback SPS voltage supply ok
OK
DI 3.7 Voltage supply OK Feedback voltage supply ok
Designation Description
DQ 0.0 Feed valve Control product valve Closed / Open
DQ 0.1 Displacement and Control displacement and filling water valve
filling water valve Open / Closed
DQ 0.2 Control water valve Control operating water valve Closed / Open
DQ 0.3 Free
DQ 0.4 Free
Designation Description
DQ 0.5 Free
DQ 0.6 Lamp test When pressing the key the output is set for 2
sec.
DQ 0.7 Release of heater Release of an external heater
DQ 1.0 Heater control valve Vapour or thermal oil valve open.
Open
DQ 1.1 Heater control valve Vapour or thermal oil valve closed.
Closed
Designation Description
DQ 2.5 Free
DQ 2.6 Free
DQ 2.7 Floating contact: Col- Floating signal exchange to customer collec-
lective alarm tive alarm.
DQ 3.0 Floating contact: Wa- Floating signal exchange to customer alarm
ter seal broken water lock lost
DQ 3.1 Floating contact Floating signal exchange to customer alarm
alarm TSH temperature too high
Designation Description
DQ 3.2 Floating contact Floating signal exchange to customer alarm
alarm TSL temperature too low
DQ 3.3 Free
DQ 3.4 Free
DQ 3.5 Free
DQ 3.6 Free
Designation Description
DQ 3.7 Free
Designation Description
AI 100 Product temperature PT Measurement of product temperature Shut-
100 min./max. down if the min/max settings are undercut and
exceeded.
AI 102 PI controller PT 100 Measurement of the product temperature,
with set PI controller.
AI 104 Control cabinet PT 100 Measurement of the control cabinet tempera-
ture (optional)
AI 106 Motor current separator Power consumption of the separator motor
For changing data and entering characters, see the chapter entitled "Editing data
in input fields".
Designation Description
AI 110 Discharge pressure Measurement of the product discharge with
pure oil pressure transmitter.
AI 112 SMS pressure Measurement of the sludge monitoring sys-
tem with pressure transmitter.
AI 114 Free
AI 116 Flow feed Measurement of the flow in the feed with a
pressure transmitter.
For changing data and entering characters, see the chapter entitled "Editing data
in input fields".
Designation Description
AQ 90 Current separator motor Current power consumption of the
separator motor
AQ 92 Product temperature Current product temperature
AQ 110 Free
AQ 112 Free
01.03.01 Fig. 26
Process-relevant data such as fair values and counter can be read and/or set.
Further information on timers and counters see chapter “Settings”, sections
“Timer” and “Counter”.
If data has to be changed, the input of a password is required for some timers.
All timers, with number, designations and descriptions see chapter “Timer de-
scriptions....”.
All counters, numbers, descriptions and the machine types in which they are
used, see chapter “Settings” sections “Description counters and time record-
ings”.
The data backup, loading of data from a memory card or resetting to factory set-
tings is reserved to authorised persons after having entered a password.
Enter password.
Press again on the field “Data backup”
to open the menu “Data backup”.
Should you have any questions, kindly
contact GEA Service, see chapter
“Service”.
Fig. 29
01.05.01 Fig. 30
Insert suitable memory card in HMI device, see chapter “HMI devices 4“ – 9“.
Press the arrow to exit the data backup and to return to the first
window of the startup assistant.
3.13 Operation
Open the "Operation" menu
Open mode
Press the "Operation" icon in the navigation bar.
The "operation" overview shows the feed, the centrifuge and the discharge in a
general overview.
Basic measured values are assigned to the following areas here:
07.03.01
Fig. 33 3. Menu level: Settings feed pump motor
Description of the icons and timer see chapter “Display “Motor” window”.
To amend input, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the previous
menu level.
Back
Settings for the timers of the step motor can be effected in this window.
Description of the icons and timer see chapter “Display “Step motor valve” win-
dow”.
To amend values, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Description of data and descriptions see chapter “Display “Analogue input” win-
dow”.
To amend limit and areas, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Press the "X" icon to return to the overview on the first menu lev-
el.
Back
Press the "Mode" icon to return to the overview on the first menu
level.
Press icon to display and set motor current data and speeds.
Note: Input is protected and a password is required to make amend-
ments.
Exiting screen
Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the previous
menu level.
Drive motor
Separator valves
Exiting screen
Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the
previous menu level.
NOTE: The display will vary depending on the sensors and/or actuators used in the
discharge. The preselection is made in the factory settings, see chapter entitled
"Factory configurator“.
For an explanation of the icons for inputs and outputs, see chapter entitled "I/O
check".
02.05.01 Fig. 43 From first + second menu level: Displaying alarm messages
Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the
previous menu level.
Switch on motor.
Alarm delay
Switch-on delay
Switch-off delay
Motor fault
Motor Off
Motor On
No motor feedback.
Description of the icons in the top level of the 3 “Analogue input” screens
Alarm delay
No digital signal/input 0
Fault
The top level displays information about the valve and an icon for closing the
"Valve" screen.
The next level includes the manual/automatic modes and a status display for the
valve.
In the bottom level, delay times can be set.
Close valve.
Open valve.
Alarm delay
Alarm delay
Switch-off delay
Valve fault.
Valve closed.
Valve open.
No valve response.
Setpoint
Back
Press the "Mode" icon to return to the overview on the first menu
level.
The top level displays information about the step motor valve and an icon for clos-
ing the "Valve" screen.
The next level includes the manual/automatic modes and a status display for the
valve.
In the bottom level, delay times can be set.
Settings for the timers of the step motor can be effected in this window.
To change timer settings, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Description of the icons in the “Step motor valve” screen in manual mode
Valve fault.
Valve closed.
Valve open.
No valve response.
3.14 Help
Open Help
Press the “Help” icon in the navigation bar.
Help menu
3.2 Colour concept Details on the colour concept of the control panel,
colour allocations, notes on standards and suitable
operating staff.
Further information on the colour concept can
be found in chapter “Getting to know the operat-
ing panel”.
3.6 Machine information In this menu different information about the system
can be displayed, e.g. Series number of the sepa-
rator, date of commissioning, program number etc.
3.14.1 Documentation
Open documentation
Open documentation
Enlarge view
Reduce view.
03.02.01 Fig. 56 Help: Information about color concept of the IO-control panel
Important:
• On an application-specific basis, standards which deviate from this colour sys-
tem may be followed.
• Persons with restricted ability to perceive colour may only be able to assign
these colours to a restricted extent under certain conditions. This should be tak-
en into account when selecting operating staff.
03.01.02.01 Fig. 57 Help: Information about messaging funktion of the control panel
Important: All GEA Westfalia Separator IO HMI devices provide the option of
sending SMS or e-mail messages to fixed addresses in defined operating situa-
tions. Essentially this requires an e-mail address for the HMI device and a link be-
tween the control unit and a local SMTP server. SMS messaging is also dependent
on the provider and the receiver's associated mobile wireless contract.
For details, please contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
Important: All GEA Westfalia Separator IO HMI devices offer the option of visualiz-
ing or even operating the control unit via remote IT components (PCs, mobile
phones, tablets …). This essentially requires the control unit to be connected to a
local network or the Internet. Additional measures (for the technical security of this
"Smart Service", for example) may be necessary depending on use.
For details, please contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
Terminate Runtime
Press the icon to terminate the programme. The execution requires
the input of a password and is accessible only to authorised per-
sons.
Changing language
Changing language
Important: Depending on the philosophy of the "IO" control unit, the items which
can currently be selected will be displayed. For language selection in the exam-
ple screen above, this means that as an alternative to the current screen lan-
guage, the display will be switched to "English" after the icon is pressed.
The screen should be cleaned with a soft cloth. During screen cleaning, remaining
time is indicated by a grey progress bar shrinking to the left.
Clean the screen, see also chapter entitled “Maintenance”.
Proceed as outlined above for each of the following four positions of the calibra-
tion target.
When the calibration target has been contacted in all positions, the following dia-
logue is displayed:
Further information, see chapter "Description”, section “Editing data in input fields".
3.15 Service
This menu provides the relevant information for servicing and maintenance of the
system, e.g. service intervals or contact data.
4.1 Contact/hotline Contact data and hotline for GEA Westfalia Separator.
4.2 Service intervals Information about the maintenance intervals of the ma-
chine/system.
4.3 Spare parts Information about the available spare parts sets for the
machine/system.
4.4 Alarm counters Information about the alarm counters of the ma-
chine/system.
4.7 Unitrol Information about values and settings for Unitrol con-
trol.
NOTE: This function is available only for particular sep-
arator types.
Stop runtime.
The programme is terminated and the windows interface is shown.
NOTE: A password only accessible by authorised persons is required
for the execution of this command.
Press on the associated input field to set the time for which
the valve remains closed.
NOTE: A password is required for changes.
Press on the associated input field to set the time for which
the valve remains open.
NOTE: A password is required for changes.
3.16 Training
In this menu, general information about centrifuges, their safety, centrifugal separa-
tion technology and also about training sessions for operating staff run by GEA
Westfalia Separator can be retrieved.
Open Training
Press the "Training" icon in the navigation bar.
"Training" menu
5.2 GEA Westfalia Separator Information about the concept of the new genera-
IO tion of IO controls.
Open GEA
Press the "Company portrait" icon in the navigation bar.
Customer
IO control
control unit
Functions executed Signals
Fault
Setpoint
Offset
Time
Fig. 71
Current
Safety water
greater
pulse
than 1 A
Time
Cleaning
Motor start Separation cycle
Time
Fig. 73
Time
Fig. 74
Ac tive in
Tim e r De s ig n a tio n Ac tio n De s c rip tio n
-0136- -0196- -91-
triggered.
T26 Vibration 2 -delay After this time has expired, Time delay for the vibration 2 alarm which is
the product feed valve is triggered in the case of a continuous signal on the
closed and an alarm is trig- vibration measuring device.
gered.
– Filling water valve V2 is
opened and safety water is X X X
fed into the bowl.
– Pneumatic brake is acti-
vated (option).
– The separator motor is
switched off immediately.
T27 PSL delay SMS After this time has expired,The time expires when the SMS pressure has
the product feed valve is dropped off and T21 “minimum separating time”
closed and an ejection is has elapsed. An ejection is triggered. Accumulat- X --- ---
triggered. ed solids in the solids space of the space has
caused the pressure drop.
T28 Ejection monitoring The motor current or speed is The motor current or speed is monitored during
monitored within this time. An the ejection phase. If the motor current or speed
alarm is triggered after this does not exceed the adjusted offset during this X X X
time has expired. time, an alarm is triggered.
T29 Brake for separator The brake is actuated for this Time to brake the separator automatically after an
time. alarm “Vibration 2”. X X X
T30 Brake for separator The brake is actuated for this Time to brake the separator automatically after an
time. alarm “Vibration 2”. X X X
T31 Wait water pressure The ejection time is delayed Monitoring time for control water pressure The
and after this time has ex- separation time is extended until the control water
pired, the product feed valve pressure exceeds again the nominal value PT3 or X X X
is closed and an ejection is an alarm #51 control water pressure is triggered
triggered. when the time has expired.
T32 WMS mode Water discharge valve V6 is Time for water content monitoring during the
closed; it opens only when the separating process. The separator functions as a
SMS pressure transmitter PT2 purifier. --- X ---
is activated.
Circulation valve V5 is closed.
T33 SMS mode Water discharge valve V6 is Time for solids space monitoring. Only the SMS
closed. sensor PT2 is activated. The solid content of the --- X ---
Circulation valve V5 is closed. bowl is monitored.
T34 WMS pressure test Circulation valve V5 is closed. Time to flush the WMS sensor.
Water discharge V6 is opened
and closes after this time has --- X ---
expired.
T35 Water seal broken Circulation valve V5 is open. Time in which the alarm “no water seal” triggers
Water discharge valve V6 is when the WMS sensor oil and the SMS sensor
closed. PT2 indicate pressure during the running time of --- X ---
Alarm “no water seal” is trig- the timer.
gered.
T36 SMS pressure test Filling water valve V2 is open. Bowl is filled with filling water pulse-wise for
SMS sensor PT2 is activated. checking the solids space. If the solids space is
not filled with solids, the SMS pressure switch X --- ---
PT2 must output a pressure signal. If no pressure
builds up, an ejection is triggered.
T37 SMS Waiting Filling water valve V2 is Time interval between two filling water pulses
closed. during solids space monitoring. X --- ---
SMS sensor PT2 is activated.
T38 WMS sensor WMS sensor not active. Time to rinse the sensor line after the first pro-
flushing SMS sensor PT2 not activat- gram start and to let the surplus filling water dis-
ed. charge. --- X ---
Water discharge valve V6 is
open.
T39 Separator motor off After this time has expired, Time delay to switch off the separator motor. The
the separator motor is function must be pre-selected in the program. X X X
switched off.
T40 CU sludge pump On Sludge pump is activated. Time in which the sludge pump is switched on to
ensure that the sludge tank is emptied completely. X X X
T41 CU sludge pump Sludge pump is not activated. Time interval between two sludge pump starts.
pause X X X
T42 Free
T43 Free
T44 SMS sensor test Water discharge valve V6 is Time in which the function of the SMS sensor PT2
closed. is checked. X X ---
Circulation valve V5 is closed. If no pressure signal is identified on the SMS
Ac tive in
Tim e r De s ig n a tio n Ac tio n De s c rip tio n
-0136- -0196- -91-
SMS sensor PT2 is activated. sensor PT2 after this time has elapsed, an alarm
“SMS sensor error” is triggered.
T45 Free –
T46 Free
T47 Min.SMS Time If the SMS sensor P2T is Capacity and machine-type specific time with
activated during this time, the which the increase in water in the product feed is
water discharge valve V6 is determined during WMS mode. The pressure
opened for 3 seconds and the increase is evaluated as a function of T47 via --- X ---
counter Z5 “water content” several successful cycles which are defined via
evaluates the signal. counter Z5 “water content”.
T60 Start impulse Filling water valve V2 is open. Time to fill the filling water into the separator bowl.
This time works before the timers T61 „sensor
pause“ and T62 „sensor pulse“.
The total time is required for the automatic calcu- X X ---
lation of the timers T01 “Displacement” and T02”
“Filling”. The time T60 is protected.
T61 Sensor pause Filling water valve V2 is Time interval between two closing water pulses.
closed. The time T61 is protected. X X ---
T62 Sensor impulse Filling water valve V2 is open. Time to fill the filling water into the separator bowl.
This time works pulse-wise in accordance with
timer T61 „sensor pause“. The time is required for
the automatic calculation of the timers T01 “Dis- X X ---
placement” and T02” “Filling”. The time T62 is
protected.
V4 Orifice plate
V1 Feed valve
Dirty oil feed TI Temperature indication
TT Temperature transmitter
- -
Dirty oil return
V5 Circuit valve
V6 Water discharge valve
WMS Water monitoring sensor
Sensor line
PT2 Pressure transmitter (SMS)
PI2 Pressure display (option)
A
A
Power supply ON
Self-test of the
control unit
B
B
Start of the
separating sequence
Process mo-
nitoring acti-
vated
E
Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Waiting after displacement (T08)
Total ejection (T04)
Waiting after 1st ejection (T12)
Total ejection (T04)
Speed recovery (T05)
C
C
Stop of the separating sequence
Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Waiting after displacement (T08)
Total ejection (T04)
Waiting after 1st ejection (T12)
Total ejection (T04)
Speed recovery (T05)
Separator
Ready for operation
A
D
D
Process
Options
activated
Alarm
“Separator motor OFF”
activated
A
E
E
Process mo-
nitoring
activated
Option CU:
CU sludge pump ON (T40)
CU sludge pump pause (T41)
Alarm
CU = Compact Unit
PAL / PAH
TAL / TAH
LAHH
A
V4 Orifice plate
V1 Feed valve
Dirty oil feed TI Temperature indication
TT Temperature transmitter
- -
Dirty oil return
V5 Circuit valve
V6 Water discharge valve
WMS Water monitoring sensor
Sensor line
PT2 Pressure transmitter (SMS)
PI2 Pressure display (option)
A
A
Power supply ON
Self test
Control unit
B
B
Start of separating
sequence
Process mo-
nitoring acti-
vated
E
Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Waiting after displacement (T08)
Total ejection (T04)
Waiting after 1st ejection (T12)
Total ejection (T04)
Speed recovery (T05)
Separating programme
Closing water impulse (T06)
Filling water (T02)
Waiting after filling (T09)
Separating (T20)
WMS sensor flushing (T38)
Alarm bypass (T11)
C
C
Stop of the separating se-
quence
Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Waiting after displacement (T08)
Total ejection (T04)
Waiting after 1st ejection (T12)
Total ejection (T04)
Speed recovery (T05)
Separator
Ready for operati-
on
A
D
D
Process
Options
activated
Alarm
“Separator motor OFF”
activated
A
E
E
Process mo-
nitoring acti-
vated
Option CU:
CU sludge pump ON (T40)
CU sludge pump pause (T41)
Alarm
PAL / PAH CU = Compact Unit
TAL / TAH
LAHH
A
V4 Orifice plate
V1 Feed valve
Dirty oil feed TI Temperature indication
TT Temperature transmitter
- -
Dirty oil return
PT2 Pressure transmitter (SMS)
PI2 Pressure display (option)
Sensor line
A
A
Power supply ON
Self test
Control unit
Process
options
activated
D
B
B
Start of separating sequence
Process mo-
nitoring acti-
vated
E
Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Waiting after displacement (T08)
Total ejection (T04)
Waiting after 1st ejection (T12)
Total ejection (T04)
Speed recovery (T05)
Separating programme
Closing water impulse (T06)
Filling water (T02)
Waiting after filling (T09)
Separating (T20)
Alarm bypass (T11)
C
C
Stop of the separating sequence
Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Waiting after displacement (T08)
Total ejection (T04)
Waiting after 1st ejection (T12)
Total ejection (T04)
Speed recovery (T05)
Separator
Ready for operation
A
D
D
Process
Options
activated
Alarm
“Separator motor OFF”
activated
A
E
E
Process mo-
nitoring acti-
vated
Option CU:
CU sludge pump ON (T40)
CU sludge pump pause (T41)
Alarm
PAL / PAH CU = Compact Unit
TAL / TAH
LAHH
A
Blue Freshwater 5015 023 097 171 PMS 2925 c 2.5PB 3.5/10
Brown Fuel 8001 145 082 046 PMS 154 c 5YR 3.5/4
Green Sea water 2) 6018 079 168 051 PMS 362 c 10GY 4/10
Red-brown/ Masses (dry and moist) 3) 8015 077 031 028 PMS 490 c 2.5RP 4/12
mahogany
Orange Oils, other than fuels 2003 255 099 054 PMS 158 c 2.5YR 6/14
Red Fire extinguishing media 3000 171 031 028 PMS 1797 c 7.5R 4/14
Purple Acids, lyes 4001 130 064 128 OMS 2633 c 2.5O 4/11
White Air in ventilation systems 9010 250 255 255 White N9.5
Yellow-ochre Flammable gases 1021 252 189 031 PMS 116 c 2.5Y 8/14
1 Lock
2 HMI IO
6 Main switch
5 Interface relay
7 Terminal strip
8 Motor starter
9 Contactor
11 Safety cutout
4 Technical data
Device type
Unit 4“ 7“ 9“ 15“
Weight [kg] 0.6 1.4 1.9 5.2
Active display area [mm] 4.3“ 7.0“ 9.0“ 15.4“
95x53 152x91 195x117 331x207
Resolution [Pixels] 480x272 800x480 800x480 1280x800
Device type
Unit 4“ 7“ 9“ 15“
Pixel error class accord- II I
ing
ISO 9241-307
Function keys 4 - - -
Labelling strips Yes - - -
Usable memory for [Mbytes] 4 12 12 24
user data
Usable memory for [Mbytes] 0.512 2 2 4
Recipe data
Additional memory for [Mbytes] 4 12 12 24
options
Memory card 2 x MMC/SD combination slot
Interfaces
1 x RS 422/485 [Mbps] 12
(PROFIBUS) (Applies to DP mode)
Device type
Unit 4“ 7“ 9“ 15“
100 A/m RMS
Temperature [°C]:
Vertical installation 0 to 50 °C
(Landscape)
0 to 40 °C
(Portrait) Inclination angle
Inclined installation 0 to 40 °C max. 35°
(Landscape)
0 to 35 °C
(Portrait)
Relative humidity 10 to 90%
without condensation
Air pressure 1 080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an alti-
tude of
-1000 m to 2000 m
Pollutant concentration SO2: < 0.5 vpm; Test : 10 cm³/m³;
Relative humidity 10 days
< 60%,
no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 vpm; Test : 10 cm³/m³;
Relative humidity 10 days
< 60%,
no condensation
Insulation test
Test voltages
The insulation strength is demonstrated by the type test using the following test
voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Protection class
Protection class I acc. to IEC 61140, i.e. earthing conductor connected to mounting
rail required!
Note:
The protection class at the front can only be ensured if the mounting seal rests
completely against the mounting cut-out.
Avoid condensation
If the HMI device was exposed to low temperatures or extreme temperature fluctu-
ations, moisture may condense on or inside the HMI device. Condensation may
occur. This can cause malfunction.
Before commissioning, the HMI device must be allowed to reach room tempera-
ture.
Do not exposed the HMI device to direct heat radiation from a heater.
In case of condensation, switch on the HMI device only after complete drying af-
ter a waiting time of approximately 4 hours.
Problem-free and safe operation of the HMI device requires proper transport, stor-
age, installation and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Failure to comply with these provisions will void the warranty of the HMI device.
Reducing vibrations
If the HMI device is subjected to greater shocks or vibrations, acceleration or the
amplitude must be reduced by appropriate measures.
We recommend to mount the HMI device or the control cabinet on damping mate-
rials, for example, elastic mounts.
Fig. 77
Damage by overheating
When installed at an angle, the convection through the HMI device is reduced,
which also lowers the maximum permissible ambient temperature during operation.
If there is sufficient forced ventilation, the HMI device can also be operated at an
inclined mounting position up to the maximum permissible ambient temperature for
vertical installation. Otherwise, the HMI device may be damaged and its approvals
and warranty may be void.
For information on the ambient conditions, see Chapter “Technical data”, Section
“Ambient conditions”.
Check clearances
Required clearance around the HMI device to ensure sufficient self-ventilation must
be maintained.
Fig. 78
NOTE:
For installation in control cabinets and specifically in closed housings, be sure not
to exceed the permitted ambient temperature.
Protection classes
For the requirements to comply with the protection classes, see also the manufac-
turer's operating instructions for the HMI device:
• material thickness for protection class IP65 or protection class front face only
Type 4X/Type 12 (indoor use only) at the mounting cut-out: 2 mm to 6 mm
• Permissible deviation from flatness at the mounting cut-out: ≤ 0.5 mm
• This condition must be fulfilled also for the installed HMI device.
• Permissible surface roughness in the area of the mounting gasket: ≤ 120 μm (Rz
120)
Note:
For vertical installation, width and height
have to be changed accordingly.
Fig. 79
The table below shows the type, number and location of the clamps for the respec-
tive HMI device.
7“ Aluminium clamps 10
9“ Aluminium 12
clamps
The following requirements must be met before installing the HMI device:
• All the packaging components and protective foils on the HMI device have been
removed.
• The mounting clamps from the accessory kit are complete.
• The mounting gasket on the HMI device is present.
The assured protection class is not ensured If the mounting gasket is damaged,
twisted or protrudes beyond the HMI device.
Check the fit of the mounting gasket; it must not be damaged, twisted or pro-
trude in order to avoid leaks.
Replace damaged mounting gasket.
Fig. 80
7” - 9” HMI device
Fig. 81
Order of connections
Failure to follow the proper order in making the connections may cause
NOTICE
damage to the HMI device.
The HMI device may be damaged if it is not connected in the order described be-
low.
Connect the HMI device in the order listed below.
Important: If the HMI device must ever be disconnected, the order must be re-
versed.
Connection diagram
1 Earth connection
2 Cable tie
3 PROFIBUS data line
4 PROFINET data line
5 Equipotential bonding conductor
6 Equipotential bonding rail
7 Control cabinet
Fig. 84
Note:
HMI devices from 7" have an internal switch. This allows setting up a ring topology
without an external switch.
If the HMI device does not start, the wires on the mains terminal may be reversed.
Check the connected wires and change their connection if necessary.
After starting the operating system, the loader is displayed.
Under the following conditions, the HMI device automatically enters “transfer”
mode during commissioning:
• No project is defined on the HMI device.
• At least one data channel is configured.
Meanwhile, the transfer is performed.
If the transfer is to be aborted, use the “Cancel” button.
IMPORTANT:
When restarting the system, a project may already exist on the HMI device. The
project will then start after an adjustable delay time or via the “Start” button.
The project is exited with the appropriate control object.
Refer to the system documentation for more detailed information.
Function test
After commissioning, run a functional test.
If any of the following conditions occurs, the HMI device is functional:
• The “Transfer” dialogue box is displayed.
• The loader is displayed.
• A project is started.
7 Settings
The following parameter can be shown and set on the overview page in the operat-
ing system of the HMI:
Symbol Description
Import and delete certificates.
Country-specific settings
For more information on settings, refer to the operating instructions of the manu-
facturer of the HMI device.
Machine type
Date of initial commissioning __–__–____
Settings
Timer limit values OFF/ON OFF/ON
Sludge tank Without sludge tank Without sludge tank
LSHH – LSHH LSHH – LSHH
LSHH – LSH LSHH – LSH
LSHH – LSH – LSL LSHH – LSH – LSL
Bowl monitoring OFF/ON OFF/ON
Sensor check OFF/ON OFF/ON
Temperature regulation OFF/ON OFF/ON
Partial ejection OFF/ON OFF/ON
Speed monitoring OFF/ON OFF/ON
Series mode OFF/ON OFF/ON
01 & 01/36 with filling OFF/ON OFF/ON
Motor current end value OFF/ON OFF/ON
Sep. off in standby OFF/ON OFF/ON
Vibration monitoring OFF/ON OFF/ON
CIP cleaning OFF/ON OFF/ON
FSH signal OFF/ON OFF/ON
PSL monitoring OFF/ON OFF/ON
Flowmeter OFF/ON OFF/ON
SMS signal/ FSH signal Analogue / digital Analogue / digital
Pure oil monitoring Analogue / digital Analogue / digital
Operating-water pressure OFF/ON OFF/ON
CatFineMaster OFF/ON OFF/ON
Optimum bowl cleaning OFF/ON OFF/ON
Sludge drain flap OFF/ON OFF/ON
Leakage sludge drain flap OFF/ON OFF/ON
Local remote control OFF/ON OFF/ON
Data backup on memory card Date:
Fig. 86
1 Slot “X51”
Fig. 87
Fig. 88
Fig. 89
Fig. 90
Fig. 91
Fig. 92
IMPORTANT: The “Delete” button is used to delete the selected file from the stor-
age medium.
Selecting the “Details” and “Delete” buttons opens another screen that can be
closed by touching the “X” icon.
Fig. 93
Fig. 94
When the restore operation is complete, the system displays an appropriate mes-
sage in an additional screen.
Touch the “OK” button to confirm.
The panel will then automatically reboot, which may take a few minutes.
Fig. 95
1 Slot “X51”
Fig. 96
Fig. 97
Fig. 98
Fig. 99
Fig. 100
Fig. 101
Fig. 102
Fig. 103
Enter a file name for the backup of the current visualisation file.
Fig. 104
Fig. 105
Fig. 106
Fig. 107
Fig. 108
Fig. 109
Fig. 110
In the settings screen of the Ethernet interface, enter the “IP Address” and the as-
sociated “Subnet Mask”.
IMPORTANT: The alphanumeric keyboard can be moved on the screen so the in-
put field remain visible during the entry.
Fig. 112
Fig. 113
MOTOR PROTECTION Control active Not possible Disconnect PTC Separation Stop
Temp. >max temp. sensor V1 in circ.
Motor switched off Collective alarm
Alarm#01 Motor OFF
Free
Alarm#02
Free
Alarm#03
Free
Alarm#04
TAL PRODUCT FEED Separation Not possible Set temperature set- Separation Stop
Temp.< min ting higher than the V1 in circ.
Separation Stop actual temperature. Collective alarm
Alarm#05 Draining
TAH – PRODUCT FEED Separation Not possible Set temperature set- Separation Stop
Temp. >max ting lower than the V1 in circ.
Separation Stop actual temperature. Collective alarm
Alarm#06 Draining
EJECTION MONITORING Draining Close ball valve Loosen cable head Separation Stop
Eject. Curr.< offset ahead of V3 shortly from V3 or increase V1 in circ.
Separation Stop before and during the offset of ejection Collective alarm
Alarm#07 ejection cycle T04. current during the
ejection cycle T04.
LAHH – SLUDGE TANK Control active Immerse or dampen Loosen cable head of Separation Stop
Sludge tank - full LSHH sensor. LSHH sensor. V1 in circ.
Separation - stop Collective alarm
Alarm#08 Draining
FEED PUMP FAULT Control active Not possible Trigger motor protec- Separation Stop
Motor protection tion switch. V1 in circ.
Separation - stop Collective alarm
Alarm#09 Pump motor off
SLUDGE PUMP FAULT Control active Not possible Trigger motor protec- Separation Stop
Programme stop tion switch. V1 in circ.
Collective alarm
Alarm#10 Pump motor off
VIBRATION STAGE 1: Separation Not possible Disconnect contact. Separation Stop
Motor off after T25 V1 in circ.
Draining
Alarm#11 Motor off after
T26
VIBRATION STAGE 2: Control active Not possible Disconnect contact. Separation Stop
Separator - off V1 in circ.
Alarm#12
Alarm#13
Free
Alarm#14
WMS – SYSTEM FAULT Separation Not possible WMS sensor bypass, Separation Stop
Too much water bridge pressure V1 in circ.
Separation - stop switch PSL 2. Collective alarm
Draining
Alarm#15
Free
Alarm#16
Free
Alarm#17
BOWL MONITORING Separation Not possible Extend T06 to 3 secs, Collective alarm
Current too high while T20 runs and
During TIMER 06 reduce T14 to 30
secs.
Alarm#18 Wait until T14 has run
down.
SEPARATOR MOTOR OFF Control active Not possible Reduce T39 to 5 secs Collective alarm
Sep. in circ. TIMER 39 Circ. while T20 runs. Motor Off
Expired Motor off Press “Process
STOP”.
Alarm#19
Free
Alarm#20
Free
Alarm #21
SLUDGE PUMP CLOSED Control active To start the Reduce TR2 to 1 min Collective alarm
TIME LONG sludge/solid pump: and trigger the test
In TR3 hours - Reduce TR2 to function of the LSH
1 min and function by means of
Alarm#22 - immerse or a magnet.
dampen LSH
sensor in liquid.
WMS ACTIVATES TOO Separation Not possible Extend T22 to 300 Collective alarm
OFTEN secs, reduce TR1 to 1
min and bridge WMS
Alarm#23 sensor.
Free
Alarm#24
Free
Alarm#25
Free
Alarm#26
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Control active Not possible Set setting to the Message in dis-
For execution, see value of the actual play
Instruction manual counter plus 1 min
and wait until the
Alarm#27 minute has expired.
WARNING After expiry of Not possible Set counter 5 to 1 Message in dis-
WATER CONTENT T17 during and bridge pressure play
separation switch PSL2 in short Valve V6 opens.
Alarm#28 intervals or optionally
set pressure transmit-
ter PT2 alternately to
0 bar and 1 bar.
Free
Alarm#29
Free
Alarm#30
Free
Alarm#31
Free
Alarm#32
EJECTION MONITORING Draining Close ball valve Loosen cable head Separation Stop
Eject. Speed< offset ahead of V3 shortly from V3 or increase V1 in circ.
Separation - stop before and during the offset of ejection Collective alarm
ejection cycle T04. speed during the
Alarm#33 ejection cycle T04.
BOWL MONITORING Separation Not possible Extend T06 to 3 secs, Collective alarm
Speed drop too large while T20 runs and
During TIMER 06 reduce T14 to 30
secs!
Alarm#34 Wait until T14 has
expired.
Separator-start Separator Set T10 to 10 secs Set min. speed higher Motor Off
Monitoring motor start and press key “Sepa- than the normal oper- Message in
during T10 rator ON”. ating speed. display
Collective alarm
Alarm#35
Belt monitoring Separator Not possible Loosen cable connec- Motor Off
Belt defective during motor start tion of the speed Message in
separator start pickup and press key display
“Separator ON”. Collective alarm
Alarm#36
Max. speed Separator Not possible Set max. speed lower Motor Off
Monitoring motor start than the normal oper- Message in
during operation Separation ating speed. display
Alarm#37 Collective alarm
Alarm#47
WATER DISCHARGE: Separation Close clean oil dis- Set setting of pres- Separation Stop
Overflow charge valve V7. sure transmitter PT2 V1 in circ.
Separation - stop Keep in mind that the to 0 in operating Collective alarm
optional PAH1 (PT1) mode. Draining
Alarm#48 in the clean oil dis-
charge must have a
higher pressure set-
ting.
MAINTENANCE WMS sensor Separation See chapter “Mainte- See chapter “Mainte-
nance”. nance”.
Alarm#49
Free
Alarm#50
For a simulation, the respective function must be activated and valid for the prod-
uct.
IMPORTANT: Following simulation, all altered settings must be rest to their initial
values.
Ac tive in
No . De s ig n a tio n Ac tio n /s ta tu s De s c rip tio n
-0136- -0196- -91-
Co u n te r (Z… or C… = counter …)
Z01 Flush ejection Counter for performing Counter with which it is defined after
a double total ejection. how many individual ejections a dou- X X X
ble flush ejection is carried out.
Z02 Partial ejection Counter for performing Counter with which it is defined after
(Op tio n)
a double total ejection. how many partial ejections a double X X X
total ejection is carried out.
Z03 SMS filling Counter for filling wa- Counter with which the filling water
ter pulses in SMS mo- pulses are defined.
de after T33. After expiry of the SMM mode T33 for --- X ---
solids space monitoring, filling water
pulses are activated.
Z04 Sensor check Counter for sensor Counter with which it is defined after
(Op tio n)
check. how many ejections an SMS check is X X ---
carried out.
Z05 Water imp.start Counter for SMS sen- Counter which registers the SMS sen-
sor signals during the sor signals PT2 which are activated
WMS mode. within the time T47 „min. SMS time”.
The counter is reset when the pres-
sure signal is activated after expiry of --- X ---
T47 „min. SMS time”.
When the counter has run down, a
warning is output tat there is a high
water content in the product feed.
Settings counter/time recording (NOTE: Table extends across the left and right side)
Control unit
Complete text Text display Remarks
(P= nominal value; A=
actual value)
Counter
Z01 Flush ejection Counter flush ejection Z1 flush ejection:
P: 5
A: 0
Z02 Partial ejection Counter partial ejection Z2 partial ejection:
P: 5
A: 0
Z03 SMS filling Counter SMS filling: Z3 SMS filling:
P: 3
A: 0
Z04 Sensor check Counter for sensor check. Z 4 Sensor check:
P: 10
A: 0
Z05 Water imp.start Counter for water content Z5 water content
alarm P: 5
A: 0
(continuation)
Control unit
OSE OSE OSE OSE OSE OSE
5 10 20 40 80 120
Counter
Z01 Flush ejection 5 5 5 5 5 5
Separator model
OSE 5 / OSE 10 / OSE 20 OSE 40 OSE 80 OSE 120
Speed in rpm
Max. speed 12 200 8 400 7 000 6 100
Min. speed 11 500 7 700 6 300 5 400
Rated speed 12 000 8 200 6 800 5 900
Speed offset
100 100 100 100
ejection monitoring
Speed offset
100 100 100 100
bowl monitoring
Temperature monitoring
Ejection monitoring
Eject. Curr.< offset Alarm for monitoring Ejection monitor Settings dependent on state of
the ejection after end Eject. Curr.< offset the energy supply and the
of separating time or Separation Stop clutch shoes.
after SMS ejection. Alarm #07 bet. Help
The motor current is
monitored.
Eject. Speed< offset Alarm for monitoring Ejection monitor Settings dependent on state of
(Option) the ejection after end Eject. Speed< offset the energy supply and the
of separating time or Separation Stop clutch shoes.
after SMS ejection. Alarm #33 bet. Help
The bowl speed is
monitored.
Alarms Product
OSE
Temperature monito- DO MDO LO HFO
ring
Separating tempera- 20 40 95 98
ture [°C]
TAH product feed 30 50 105 105
Temp. >max. [°C]
Eject. Speed < offset 100 100 100 100 100 100
(option) [1/min]
4.2 Maintenance intervals Press symbols to show and change the ser-
vice intervals.
At the factory, a maintenance interval of 4000 operating hours is set after the point
“nominal value”. Under "actual value", the number of separator operating hours is
displayed.
After reaching the preset operating hours, a message is output and a correspond-
ing service notification appears in the display. The message does not interrupt the
separating program. It must be acknowledged by means of the ACK key. The
acknowledgement resets the actual value.
NOTE: Refer to the different maintenance intervals of the separator used in the
separator manual, see section "Maintenance schedule".
Under “nominal value" a maintenance interval of 168 operating hours (1 week con-
tinuous operation) is factory-set. Under "actual value", the number of operating
hours of the water detector (WMS sensor) is registered.
After reaching the preset operating hours, a message is output and a correspond-
ing service notification appears in the display. The water detector (WMS sensor)
must be checked for functionality.
Check water detector, see operating manual of the machine/system chapter
“maintenance”, “check water detector”.
The message does not interrupt the separating program. It must be acknowledged
by means of the ACK key. The acknowledgement resets the actual value. A water
signal likewise resets the actual value.
Under the item "last water signal WMS", the operating hours since the last water
signal registration are recorded. A water signal resets the operating hours "Last
water signal WMS".
NOTE: Refer to the different maintenance intervals of the separator used in the
separator manual, see section "Maintenance schedule".
8 Commissioning
Internal memory
The following data is stored in the internal memory:
• Operating system
• Project file
• Licence keys
• User management
• Control program
Note:
Cyclic write access to internal memory is not allowed; see the operating instruc-
tions of the manufacturer of the HMI device.
Use only external memory cards for the storage of data and archives.
Memory card
The following data is stored on the memory card:
• Archives
• Backups
• Control program
Standard SD(IO/HC) or MMC type commercial memory cards can be used. For da-
ta consistency, we recommend memory cards of the manufacturer; see the opera-
ting instructions of the manufacturer of the HMI device.
NOTE:
Data consistency:
• If the HMI device is switched off, consistency of stored data is only ensured for
the 2 GB or higher memory card recommended by the manufacturer.
• In commercially available memory cards, shutdown of the device may result in
the loss of stored data, e.g. due to a power outage.
• In archives, consistency of the stored data is only ensured if you use the RDB
format.
NOTE:
Format of the system memory card:
• Only the 2GB or more memory card offered by the manufacturer is allowed as
system memory card. All other memory cards are not recognised as system
memory card by the HMI device.
CAUTION Potential data loss if memory card is pulled out during data transfer.
If the HMI device is accessing data on the memory card when pulling the memory
card, the data may be destroyed on the memory card.
Do not pull the memory card during data access.
NOTE: The project is terminated if the system memory card is pulled out during a
running project.
Prerequisite
There is no write access to the memory cards.
Fig. 116
Result
The project is transferred to the HMI device from the projecting PC via the selected
data channel. If required, set the data channel also on the projecting PC. The data
are written to the internal memory of the HMI device.
Further information see operating manual of the HMI device’s manufacturer, e.g.
“Alternative procedure” when setting the “Transfer” operating mode and “Parame-
terise data channel”.
The dialogue “Load preview” is opened. The project is translated at the same time.
The result is shown in the dialogue “Load preview”.
Check shown presettings and edit if required.
Click on “load”.
The project is not transferred to the selected HMI device.
If errors or warnings occur during transfer, appropriate messages will be displayed
under "Info > Load".
The project can be run on the HMI device after successful transfer.
Note
Always test the project on the HMI device on that the project is used.
Test the following:
Check images for proper display.
Check image hierarchy.
Check input objects.
Enter variable values.
The test increases the safety that the project runs without errors on the HMI de-
vice.
Offine test
Pre-conditions:
• Project was transferred to the HMI device.
• HMI device is in “Offline” mode.
The project can be tested without influence from the control. Control variables are
not changed.
Note
Customer-specific machine parameters/ system parameters can be entered in off-
line test, see chapter “Description”, section “Show and edit input fields”.
Online test
Note
An online test corresponds to a test run of the machine/ system, see operating ma-
nual of the machine/ system, section “Carry out test run”. The checks and instruc-
tions listed there are to be followed to prevent risks with consequences for life and
limb.
Pre-conditions:
• Project was transferred to the HMI device.
• HMI device is in “Online” mode.
• Customer-specific parameters were checked and updated, if needed.
• I/O test was carried out and all errors rectified.
The project can be tested with influence from the control. Control variables are
changed.
If complete restoring is interrupted by a power cut at the HMI device, the operating
system of the HMI device can be deleted. In this case, reset the HMI device to fac-
tory settings. The operating device changes automatically to “bootstrapping” mode.
Further information see operating instructions of the HMI device’s manufacturer
in chapter “Backup and restore”.
The overview image of the menu "operation of the machine or system” is shown.
Fig. 118
Fig. 119
Result:
• The bowl motor is switched on.
• The time "ramp up separator" starts.
• The feed pump is switched on.
After termination of the ramp up phase, the message "Separator ready for opera-
tion" appears in the menu.
Result:
• The message “Separator product” appears in the “Mode” menu.
• The bowl motor is switched on.
• The feed pump is switched on.
Result:
• The process of the total ejection starts and the progress is shown in the menu
window at the top.
Result
The message "Product stop" appears in the menu.
• The feed is stopped.
Fig. 120
Stop separator
When pressing “Separator OFF”, the production is stopped if it is still active.
Switch off the separator at the control
cabinet.
Fig. 121
9 Operation
Fig. 122
Fig. 123
Fig. 125
Fig. 126
IMPORTANT:
• Regularly check plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for signs of
aging and mechanical damage.
• Replace damaged installation components with new parts immediately.
In the event of damage or deviations, inform the service personnel of GEA West-
falia Separator.
Fig. 127
Depending on the software installed, other icons can be shown in the status bar of
the desktop.
IMPORTANT: With some valves it is necessary to shut down the machine/plant for
maintenance work or repairs before manual operation is possible. This includes all
of the control water valves of the centrifuge bowl.
07.05.01.02 Fig. 129 Example: Operating water valve 002, valve is in manual mode (example)
NOTE: Operation and information see chapter “Description”, section “Show valve
screen”.
Fig. 130
Fig. 131
A:
Position 1: closed
Position 2: open
Fig. 132
If there is no signal change, dismantle the water detector (WMS sensor) and
check its function.
Should the malfunction continue to exist, replace water detector (WMS sensor).
NOTE: Refer to the different maintenance intervals of the separator used in the
manual, see section "Maintenance schedule".
Fig. 133
10 Trouble shooting
List of alarms
List of alarms
10.3 Troubleshooting
Legend of the target groups for persons carrying out the elimination of faults:
• OP = Operator (semi-skilled worker)
• Skilled = Instructed skilled worker (skilled worker IHK, e.g. electrician or installer)
• Tspec = Trained specialist (service specialist from GEA or authorised skilled
worker trained at GEA)
Further details on skills and activities of the target groups, see chapter “About
this document”.
WATER DISCHARGE: Water content in product feed Check product feed. Skilled
Overflow too high.
Separation - stop Clean oil discharge pressure Check clean oil discharge Skilled
Alarm#48 (product discharge pressure) valve (product discharge
too high.. valve) V7.
Filling water volume too Check function V2 and Skilled
small. filling water volume.
Product temperature too low. Check product tempera- Skilled
ture.
Regulating ring too large. Fit next smallest regulating Skilled
ring.
Water pressure for hydraulics Check water pressure with Skilled
too high or closing water open valve and
pulse T06 too long. Check T06.
Polyamide gasket in bowl top Check polyamide gasket in Tspec
defective. bowl top.
Gaskets in bowl defective. Check gaskets. Tspec
MAINTENANCE WMS The actual value of the WMS A WMS sensor test must Tspec
SENSOR sensor monitoring has ex- be carried out.
Alarm #49 ceeded the nominal value.
No water signal was detected
Press the “ACK” key after having eliminated the fault to acknowledge the fault.
Observe the chapter "Troubleshooting" in the operating manual of the ma-
chine/system.
Press “x” icon on the help text window to exit the help text window
and to return to the alarm list.
Acknowledge alarm
The causes of the alarms are described in the chapter “Remedy operational faults”.
Legend of the target groups for persons carrying out the elimination of faults:
• OP = Operator (semi-skilled worker)
Further details on skills and activities of the target groups, see chapter “About
this document”.
Press the “ACK” key after having eliminated the fault to acknowledge the fault.
Observe the chapter "Troubleshooting" in the operating manual of the machi-
ne/system.
Fig. 134
The operating mode indicator (1) indicates the different operating modes by way of
colour-coded LEDs. The states of the digital inputs integrated in the processor unit
are indicated via LEDs (2). The same apples for the digital outputs(3).
Fault and status are indicated by the following LEDs:
Display Meaning
RUN / STOP (green • Yellow continuous light indicates the operating state
/ yellow) STOP.
• Green continuous light indicates the operating state
RUN.
• Flashing (green and yellow alternately) indicates that
the CPU is in the operating mode STARTUP.
ERROR (red) • Flashing indicates a fault, e.g. an internal fault in the
CPU, a fault in the memory card or a configuration fault
(incompatible modules).
• A red continuous light indicates defective hardware.
• All LEDs flash when a fault is identified in the firmware.
MAINT (green) • Flashing, when starting the CPU, when the memory
card is inserted, during the LED test, in the case of de-
fective CPU firmware or unknown/incompatible version
of the CPU configuration.
• A green continuous light indicates that servicing is re-
quired.
RUN (green)
Operating state RUN of the control unit CPU.
• This LED lights up when the control unit is processing
the user program.
• This LED flashes (2 Hz) during the control start-up (the
STOP LED then also lights up; when the STOP LED
goes out the outputs are released).
Display Meaning
STOP (yellow)
Operating state STOP of the control unit CPU.
The LED:
• lights up when the control unit is not processing the user
program.
• flashes slowly when the control unit requests a master
reset.
• flashes fast when the control unit executes a master
reset.
11 Maintenance
12 Repair
12.2 Repair
For repairs, the HMI device must be returned to GEA Westfalia Separator or to an
authorised representative.
The operator is not authorised to carry out any repairs.
Assign only a qualified specialist, such as an electrician, with disconnecting and
removing the HMI device.
13 Decommissioning
14 Spare parts
Fig. 135
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and operations in more than 50 countries.
Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innovative equipment and process technology.
GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 index.
GEA Germany
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 Tel +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com
59302 Oelde, Germany Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kunde : -
Customer
Anlagenbezeichnung : -
Designation of plant
Zeichnungsnummer : 0505-0105-001
Drawing no.
Kommission : -
Internal order no.
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Dokumentenart Seite Seitenbeschreibung Anlage Einbauort Datum Bearbeiter
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
Titel- / Deckblatt
&EAA 1 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Title- / cover sheet
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 2 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 3 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 4 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 5 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Revisionsübersicht
&EBH 6 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Revision overview
Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
&EDB 7 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Overview structure indicator
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 8 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Information-sheet
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 9 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Information-sheet
Einspeisung
&EFS 10 =0 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Incoming
Steuerspannung
&EFS 11 =0 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Control voltage
Not-Halt
&EFS 12 =0 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Emergency stop
Separator
&EFS 13 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator
Separator
&EFS 14 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator
Separator Drehzahlmessung
&EFS 15 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator speed measuring
Separator Signale
&EFS 16 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator signals
Separator Vibro
&EFS 17 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator vibro
Separator Ventile
&EFS 18 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator valves
Separator Schlammklappe
&EFS 19 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator sludge flap
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Dokumentenart Seite Seitenbeschreibung Anlage Einbauort Datum Bearbeiter
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
Zulaufpumpe
&EFS 20 =11 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Feed pump
Zulaufpumpe
&EFS 21 =11 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Feed pump
Produkt Temperaturregelung
&EFS 22 =11 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Product temperature control
FI Durchflussmessung
&EFS 23 =11 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
FI flow measuring
Schlammpumpe
&EFS 24 =16 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Sludge pump
Schlammpumpe
&EFS 25 =100 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Sludge pump
Signalaustausch
&EFS 26 =100 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Signal exchange
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 27 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
Prozessanzeige KPT 400
&EFS 28 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Process display KPT 400
SPS Spannungsversorgung
&EFS 29 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC power supply
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 30 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 31 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 32 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 33 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 34 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
Aufbauplan
&ELU 35 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Arrangement drawing
Aufbauplan
&ELU 36 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Arrangement drawing
Not-Halt Box
&ELU 38 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Emergency stop box
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Dokumentenart Seite Seitenbeschreibung Anlage Einbauort Datum Bearbeiter
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-24M
&EMA 39 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-24M
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-PE
&EMA 40 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-PE
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-PE
&EMA 41 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-PE
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-SC
&EMA 42 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-SC
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-X1
&EMA 43 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-X1
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-XQ1
&EMA 44 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-XQ1
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+-X1
&EMA 45 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =01+-X1
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+-X2
&EMA 46 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =01+-X2
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+JB-1X10
&EMA 47 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =01+JB-1X10
Klemmenanschlussplan =11+-X1
&EMA 48 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =11+-X1
Klemmenanschlussplan =11+-X2
&EMA 49 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =11+-X2
Klemmenanschlussplan =16+-X2
&EMA 50 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =16+-X2
Klemmenanschlussplan =100+-X2
&EMA 51 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =100+-X2
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 52 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Cable layout
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 53 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Cable layout
Klemmenkasten Übersicht
&EMB 54 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal box overview
Hinweise zur Installation
&EMB 55 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Instructions for installation
Potentialausgleich Separator
&EMB 56 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Potential equalization separator
Stückliste
&EPB 57 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Dokumentenart Seite Seitenbeschreibung Anlage Einbauort Datum Bearbeiter
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
Stückliste
&EPB 58 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 59 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 60 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Revisionsübersicht
Revision overview
Revisionsname Revisionskommentar Revisionsänderungsgrund Seitenname Ersteller Datum
Revision name Revision comment Revision on the basis of change Page name Author Date
Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
Overview structure indicator
Vollständige Bezeichnung Beschriftung Strukturbeschreibung Vollständige Bezeichnung Beschriftung Strukturbeschreibung
Complete name Labelling Structure descprition Complete name Labelling Structure descprition
Dokumentenart Deckblatt
&EAA
Document type Cover sheet
Dokumentenart Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB
Document type Table of contents
Dokumentenart Revisionsübersicht
&EBH
Document type Revision overview
Dokumentenart Strukturkennzeichen Übersicht / Vorschriften
&EDB
Document type Structure indentification overview / instructions
Dokumentenart Stromlaufplan
&EFS
Document type Circuit diagram
Dokumentenart Aufbauplan
&ELU
Document type Arrangement drawing
Dokumentenart Klemmenanschlussplan
&EMA
Document type Terminal connecting plan
Dokumentenart Kabelübersicht
&EMB
Document type Cable layout
Dokumentenart Stückliste
&EPB
Document type Parts list
Anlage Einspeisung
=0
Plant Incoming
Anlage Separator
=01
Plant Separator
Anlage Zulaufpumpe
=11
Plant Feed pump
Anlage Schlammpumpe
=16
Plant Sludge pump
Anlage Signalaustausch
=100
Plant Signal exchange
Anlage SPS
=00
Plant PLC
Anlage Zugabe
=Additions
Plant Addition
Anlage Kunde
=Customer
Plant Customer
Anlage Erhitzer
=Heater
Plant Heater
Einbauort Abzweigdose
+JB
Mounting place Junction box
Einbauort Lokal
+L
Mounting place Local
Einbauort Kommandostelle Zulaufpumpe
+OP_FP
Mounting place Control station feed pump
Vorschriften / Spezifikation
Instruction / specification
Schaltschrank : Ausführung:
Control cabinet : Version:
Bezeichnung Schaltschrank Aderkennzeichnung
CC Core indentification
YES
Denomination control cabinet
Schutzart Potentialbezeichnung
Protective rating
IP54 Potential designation
NO
Kabelkennzeichnungsschilder
Cable marking plates
YES
Sprache Kennzeichnungsschilder
Language labels
de/en
Schnittstelle:
Interface:
Bus Verbindung zum Kunden PLC
Bus connection to customer PLC
NO
Einspeisung:
Power supply
Netz-/ Anschlussspannung 380-420VAC/
Mains-/ input voltage 440-480VAC
Netzfrequenz
Mains frequency
50/60 Hz
Drehfeld
Rotary field
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
Spannungstoleranz
Voltage tolerance
+/-5 %
Kabeleinführung
Cable inlet
BOTTOM
Einspeisung redundant
Incoming redundant
NO
Steuerspannungen:
Control voltages:
Steuerspannung 1
Control voltage 1
230V AC
Steuerspannung 2
Control voltage 2
24V DC
Verdrahtung
Wiring
Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt
Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section
Hauptstromkreise 380-420VAC/ L1 Schwarz ≥ 1,5mm² Steuerspannung 230V AC L Rot ≥ 0,75mm²
Main circuits 440-480VAC Black Control voltage Red
L2 Schwarz N Rot / weiß
Black " Red / white "
L3 Schwarz
Black "
N Hellblau ≥ 1,5mm²
Light blue
PE Grün / gelb ≥ 2,5mm²
Green / yellow
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC
L1 / 13.0
L2 / 13.0
L3 / 13.0
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC
L1.2 / 20.0
L2.2 / 11.0
L3.2 / 11.0
13
21
1
-Q1
14
22
17...23A
In: 18A
/26.1
Daten Einspeisung:
Data Power supply
Min. Querschnitt:
4 mm²
Min. Cross-section:
-PE -PE -SC -PE -PE -PE
Vorsicherung:
-
Pre-fuse:
Umgebungstemperatur:
(+5) - (+50) °C
-WD001 Ambient temperature:
_-J
4x4 mm² Max. Kabellänge:
50 m
PE
PE
PE
Max. Cable length:
L2
L3
440-480VAC
+L-X
Erdung Gehäuse 1
Earthing cabinet 1
Icn: 50/10 kA
Earthing screen
Earthing door 1
Erdung Schirm
Erdung Tür 1
Vollaststrom:
~18 A
Einspeisung Full load current:
Incoming
380-420VAC/ 380-420VAC/
440-480VAC 440-480VAC
10.9 / L2.2 L2.2 / 20.0
10.9 / L3.2 L3.2 / 20.0
230V AC
L.A / 13.4
N.A / 12.0
230V AC
L.X / 12.0
1
5
-F1 N.X / 20.4
0,9...1,25A
EW: see table
I> I> I>
2
N/L2
L1
Primär Spannung T1 Anschluss (X1, X2) Verbindung (X3, X4) Einstellung F1
X1 X3 X4 X2 Primary voltage T1 Connection (X1, X2) Connection (X3, X4) Setting F1
-T1 -T2 INPUT
400VA 380VAC B-H C-E 1,22A 120/230VAC GEA
400VAC B-J C-E 1,16A 24VDC/5A power
420VAC B-J C-F 1,10A
GND 440VAC A-J C-F 1,05A
OFF
ON
ua va PE ub vb 460VAC A-K D-E 1,01A
230V AC
230V AC
-PE
L+
L+'
PE
M'
1
M.A / 15.0
-F2
-PE M.K / 27.0
2
C6A
M.R / 14.0
2
-24M
-PE
M.T / 28.0
=00-K2 =00-K2 M.X / 18.0
PT100 PT100 24V DC
L+.A / 12.7
/31.5 24V DC
L+.K / 29.0
AI104 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 24V DC
L+.X / 16.0
24V DC
X12 X12 X12 X12 L+.T / 28.0
AI 2 I+
6
AI 2 I-
7
AI 2 M+
4
AI 2 M-
5
1
-X1
-PE
N
-PE
L
-M1
M -R1
19/18W 1~ PT100
2
Schaltschranklüfter
PE
Cabinet fan
230V AC 230V AC
11.9 / L.X L.X / 22.0
230V AC
1L.X / 13.4
230V AC
1L.A / 20.4
24V DC 24V DC
11.9 / L+.A L+.A / 14.0
11
-K1
12
14
/12.6
DI a .7
7
X11
DI2.7
/33.5
=00-K4
Separator
Not-Halt
Separator
emergency stop
A1
-K1
A2
11.9 / N.A N.A / 13.4
-PE
Brücke entfernen bei
Anschluß eines
7
externen Not-Halt!
(Option) -X1
Remove link in case of
an external emergency
stop! (optional)
-WG001
.-J
3x1,5 mm²
21
14
PE
11 /12.8
12
-S01
22
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC 230V AC 230V AC
10.9 / L1 11.9 / L.A L.A / 22.0
230V AC
10.9 / L2 12.9 / 1L.X
10.9 / L3
Strommessung
Separator
Current measuring
separator
=00-K2
/31.5
AI106
X13
AI 3 I1~
1
AI 3 I2~
2
13
-F1
14
/13.4
11
1
-Q1 -K1
2
12
14
/13.8 /14.1
S1
21
-B1
S2
50/1A -S1
22
/13.8
13
13
-S1 -Q1
14
14
/13.8 /13.8
A1
A1
T1
-F1 M -Q1
T2
A2
A2
12.9 / N.A N.A / 20.4
-PE -PE
1
-X1 -X2
-WD001 -WG003
_-J .-J
Linkslauf 4x4 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
Anti-clockwise rotation
W1
U1
V1
PE
13 14 /13.8 1 2 /13.1
M 21 22 /14.2 3 4 /13.1
*0_1_001 3~ 5 6 /13.1
13 14 /13.9
380-420VAC/50Hz/4kW/6,9-8,2A Θ
440-480VAC/60Hz/4kW/6,9-8,2A 21 22
T2
T1
33 34 /14.1
43 44 /26.2
24V DC 24V DC
12.9 / L+.A L+.A / 15.0
33
21
-Q1 34 -F1
22
/13.8 /13.4
DI a .0
DI a .1
7
X10 8
X10
DI0.0 DI0.1
/30.3 /30.3
=00-K1 =00-K1
Separator Separator
Betrieb Störung
Separator Separator
operation failure
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.0
X10
DQ a .0
4
A1
-K1
A2
14
11 /13.8
12
Separator
Start/Stop
Separator
start/stop
24V DC 24V DC
14.9 / L+.A L+.A / 17.0
11.9 / M.A
=00-K1
0-12000 r.p.m.
/30.3
DI0.2
X10
DI a .2
5 9
6
-T1
8-
24V DC
7+
1+
2-
3+
4-
3
-X2
-WG004
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/16.1
+JB
-1X10 1 2
+JB-WG101
.-O
2x0,34 mm²
+
*0_9_020
SI
-
+ BN = brown
- BU = blue
Drehzahlüberwachung
Speed monitoring device
=00-K3 =00-K3
4-20mA 4-20mA
/32.5 /32.5
AI110 AI112
X10 X10
=00-K1
AI 0+
4
AI 1+
6
/30.3
-SC -SC
DI1.3
=0-SC
=0-SC
X10
DI b .3
18
24V DC 24V DC
11.9 / L+.X L+.X / 19.0
-PE
10
5
-X2 9
-WG004
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/15.1
+JB
PE_1X10 / 18.3
L+_1X10 / 17.1
4
-1X10
+JB-WG102 +JB-WG103
.-O .-O
2x0,34 mm² 2x0,34 mm²
1
*1_9_002 I *0_9_014 I
PSL/H P PSH P
4-20mA 4-20mA
24V DC 24V DC
15.9 / L+.A L+.A / 21.0
=00-K1 =00-K1
/30.3 /30.3
DI1.4 DI1.5
X10 X10
DI b .4
19
DI b .5
20
11
-X2
-WG011
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/18.3
+JB 16.3 / L+_1X10
M_1X10 / 18.3
-1X10 8 9 10 11
+JB-WG104
_CY-O
4x0,75 mm²
SC
1
*1_9_012
PCH 1220
+24V DC
0V
NAHH
-D1
Relais
Relay
DQ a .2
5
DQ a .1
4
DQ a .3
6
DQ a .4
7
11.9 / M.X M.X / 19.0
PE -PE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
-X2
-WG011
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/17.4
+JB 17.1 / M_1X10
16.3
PE_1X10
12
13
15
14
16
-1X10 PE PE
PE
PE
PE
+
-
-
=00-K5 =00-K1
/34.5 /30.3
DQ3.5 DI1.2
X13 X10
DQ b .5
5
DI b .2
17
24V DC 24V DC
16.9 / L+.X L+.X / 23.0
18.9 / M.X M.X / 24.0
PE PE
20
21
22
23
-X2 -X2
-WG012 -WG013
.-J .-J
3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
13
+
PE
PE
*4_7_001 *4_9_001
14
-
230V AC
10.9 / L1.2 12.9 / 1L.A
11.9 / L2.2
11.9 / L3.2
5
-Q1
17
LUB12 L1 L2 L3
13
21
A1
/20.9
-Q1
18
/20.2
14
22
A2
1,25...5A
110-220V DC/AC Steuereinheit
LUCA05FU Control unit
In:...A
21
11
-S1 -K2
22
14
12
/20.7 /21.1
LUA1C20
17
97
18
98
/20.7 /21.2
T1 T2 T3
2
11
13
11
2,5 BK2,5 BK2,5 BK
-K1 -S1 =100-K1
12
14
14
12
14
/20.7 /20.7 /26.1
A1
A1
-K1 -Q1
A2
A2
/20.2
13.9 / N.A
11.9 / N.X N.X / 22.0
-PE -PE
10
11
12
13
=0-PE
=0-PE
1
9
-X1 -X1
remove bridge for
remote start/stop!
-WD001 -WG005
_-J .-J
4x2,5 mm² 7x1,5 mm²
Rechtslauf
Clockwise rotation Achtung! 14
W1
U1
11 /20.7
V1
PE
-BP 12
X1
13
21
Vor dem Einschalten der Zulaufpumpe
PE
Option! 24
*0_3_001
M den Leistungsschalter auf Nennstrom Optional!
-S1 -S2 14 -P1 22
21 /21.1
X2
0,55-2,2kW
3 des Motors einstellen (s. Typenschild des Motors)
22
1,32-4,8A
Attention!
binary contacts for
Before switch-on feed pump, adjust the circuit breaker remote start/stop
to nominal current of the motor (look at motor label)
Zulaufpumpe (Option) (Option) (Option) Zulaufpumpe
Feed pump Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe Feed pump
Stop Extern Start Extern Betrieb Extern
(optional)feed pump(optional)feed pump(optional)feed pump
stop external start external operation external
Date 25.08.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: Rev.00 = 11
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Zulaufpumpe
Tested TE - Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 20
Project: Feed pump
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0105-001 & EFS 60 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
17.9 / L+.A
21
97
-K1 -Q1
22
24
98
/20.7 /20.3
DI b .0
DI b .1
15
X10 16
X10
DI1.0 DI1.1
/30.3 /30.3
=00-K1 =00-K1
Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe
Betrieb Störung
Feed pump Feed pump
operation failure
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.1
X10
DQ a .1
A15
-K2
A2
14
11 /20.8
12
Zulaufpumpe
Ein / Aus
Feed pump on
/ off
230V AC
13.9 / L.A
230V AC
12.9 / L.X
20.9 / N.X
13.
13.
13
13
PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100
-K3 -K4 /31.5 /31.5
14
14.
14
14.
/22.3 /22.4 AI102 AI100
/31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5
open close
X11 X11 X11 X11 X10 X10 X10 X10
AI 1 M+
4
AI 1 M-
5
AI 1 I+
6
AI 1 I-
7
AI 0 I-
7
AI 0 M+
4
AI 0 M-
5
AI 0 I+
Clamp 7 is attached only with "Spring-loaded"
=00-K1 =00-K1
Klemme 7 wird nur bei "Spring-loaded"
=0-SC
=0-SC
X12 X12
Stellventil angeschlossen
DQ b .0
11
DQ b .1
12
control valve
A1
A1
-K3 -K4
A2
A2
SC
4
4
-X1 -X2
-WG002 -WG003
.-J .CY-O
5x1,5 mm² 4x1,5 mm²
13 14 /22.2 13 14 /22.2
close
open
3
1 2/14 3/11 40 PE
PT100 PT100
Motor valve
M
2
4
1 ~
=00-K3
4-20mA
/32.5
AI116
X11
AI 3+
6
-SC
=0-SC
24V DC 24V DC
19.9 / L+.X L+.X / 24.0
5
-X2
-WG004
.-O
2x0,34 mm²
1
*0_9_002 I
FI P
4-20mA
FI Durchflussmessung
FI flow measuring
Option A
applicable for 2 x
LSHH Liquitec
L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT
LOW 1 LOW 1 LOW 0 LOW 0 STUs
HIGH 0 HIGH 0 HIGH 1 HIGH 1 2024-1165-020
ALARM 0 ALARM 0 2025-1165-020
2026-1165-030
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1
2027-1165-040
/30.3 /30.3 /30.3 /30.3
DI0.6 DI0.7 DI0.5 DI0.4
X10 X10 X10 X10
DI a .6
13
DI a .7
14
DI a .5
12
DI a .4
11
24V DC
23.9 / L+.X
19.9 / M.X
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.2
X10
DQ a .2
6
-PE -PE -PE
10
11
12
14
13
15
16
17
18
2
-X2 -X2
PE
3
+ - PE + - PE 98_7_002
90_9_001 90_9_002 /25.7
-
/25.1 /25.4
2
Niveauschalter 1 Niveauschalter 2
Level switch 1 Level switch 2
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank (Option) LAHH Schlammtank Reserve Reserve (Option) Ventil Pneumatische
Füllstand max. / max. Füllstand max. / max. Spare Spare Schlammpumpe
(optional) LAHH sludge tank (optional) LAHH sludge tank (optional) valve pneumatic
level max. / max. level max. / max. sludge pump
Option B
applicable for
1 x LSHH + 1 x LSH Baumer
L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT
LOW 1 LOW 1 LOW 0 LOW 0 STUs
HIGH 0 HIGH 0 HIGH 1 HIGH 1 2024-1165-060
ALARM 0 ALARM 0 2025-1165-050
2026-1165-060
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1
2027-1165-050
/30.3 /30.3 /30.3 /30.3
DI0.6 DI0.7 DI0.5 DI0.4
X10 X10 X10 X10
DI a .6
13
DI a .7
14
DI a .5
12
DI a .4
11
24V DC
/ L+.X
/ M.X
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.2
X10
DQ a .2
6
-PE
11
12
10
14
13
15
16
17
18
1
-X2 -X2
WH
WH
BN
BN
BU
BU
BK
BK
3
1
PE
+ -
+ -
90_9_002 98_7_002
90_9_001 /24.7
-
/24.1 /24.3
Niveauschalter 1 Niveauschalter 2
2
4
2
DQ b .0
4
DQ b .1
5
DQ b .2
6
DQ a .7
10
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
-K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
22.4 / M.R
14 14 14 14 14
11 /20.8 11 /26.3 11 /26.4 11 /26.5 11 /26.7
12 12 12 12 12
24
21 /26.0
22
22
24
21
43
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
-K1 =0-Q1 =01-Q1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5
21
22
44
11
11
11
11
/26.1 /10.1 /13.8 /26.3 /26.4 /26.6 /26.7
PE PE PE PE PE
10
11
12
1
3
4
9
-X2 -X2
-WG001 -WG002 -WG003 -WG004 -WG005
.-J .-J .-J .-J .-J
5x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
=Customer+L-X =Heater
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
Kunde +L-X
-X -X -X -X -X -X
AI 1
6
AI 0-
5
AI 1-
7
AI 2-
5
AI 3-
7
AQ 0M
4
AQ 1M
6
11.9 / M.K M.K / 29.0
Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog
Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog
-P1
KTP400
X2 X61
Profibus Profinet USB
X1
POWER DC
SC
SC
A
A
B
B
24V
0V
PA
=0-PE
24V DC
11.9 / L+.T
11.9 / M.T
-PE
Ethernet / 29.0
SIMATIC
S7 1200
AQ90 - AQ92
DI0.0 - DI1.5 AI100 - AI102 AI110 - AI116 DI2.0 - DI2.7 DQ2.0 - DQ2.7
AI90 - AI92
RUN / STOP
ERROR
MAINT
DIAG
DIAG
DIAG
DIAG
SM 1231 SM 1234 SM 1221 SM 1222
GEA LV DC
DQ0.0 - DQ1.1 AI104 - AI106 AQ110 - AQ112 DI3.0 - DI3.7 DQ3.0 - DQ3.7
DQ a 4L+ /30.5
DQ a 4M /30.5
Ethernet Ethernet
DQ a L+ /34.5
DI b 3M /33.5
DI b 4M /33.5
DI a 1M /30.3
DI a 1M /33.5
DI a 2M /33.5
DQ a M /34.5
AQ 2M /30.3
AI 3M /30.3
AI L+ /32.5
AI M /32.5
24V DC 24V DC
L+ /31.5
X1 P1 X1 P2
M /31.5
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
L+
L+
M
M
X10:1
X10:2
X10:3
X10:4
X10:5
X10:6
X11:1
X11:4
X12:1
X12:2
X10:3
X10:1
X10:2
X10:3
X10:1
X10:2
X11:1
X10:3
X11:3
X12:3
X13:3
X11:1
X10:1
X10:2
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
24V DC -PE -PE -PE -PE -PE
11.9 / L+.K
27.9 / M.K
28.9 / Ethernet
-K1
X10:6 X12:1
0V /29.3 /29.4 24V
DI a 1M DQ a 4L+
Separator Betrieb X10:7 X12:2
=01-Q1:34 /14.1 DI0.0 /29.4 0V
Separator operation DI a .0 DQ a 4M
Separator Störung X10:8 X12:3 Zulaufventil
=01-F1:22 /14.2 DI0.1 DQ0.0 /18.1 =01-X2:12
Separator failure DI a .1 DQ a .0 Feed valve
Drehzahlüberwachung X10:9 X12:4 Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser
=01-T1:5 /15.2 DI0.2 DQ0.1 /18.4 =01-X2:15
Speed monitoring device DI a .2 DQ a .1 Displacem- and filling water
X10:10 X12:5 Steuerwasser
DI0.3 DQ0.2 /18.3 =01-X2:14
DI a .3 DQ a .2 Operating water
Reserve /24.5 X10:11 X12:6 Reserve
=16-X2:14 DI0.4 DQ0.3 /18.5 =01-X2:17
Spare /25.5 DI a .4 DQ a .3 Spare
Reserve /24.4 X10:12 X12:7 Reserve
=16-X2:10 DI0.5 DQ0.4 /18.6 =01-X2:18
Spare /25.4 DI a .5 DQ a .4 Spare
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. /24.1 X10:13 X12:8
=16-X2:2 DI0.6 DQ0.5
(optional) LAHH sludge tank level max. / max. /25.1 DI a .6 DQ a .5
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. /24.2 X10:14 X12:9
=16-X2:7 DI0.7 DQ0.6
(optional) LAHH sludge tank level max. / max. /25.2 DI a .7 DQ a .6
Zulaufpumpe Betrieb X10:15 X12:10 Erhitzerfreigabe
=11-K1:24 /21.1 DI1.0 DQ0.7 /26.7 =100-K5:A1
Feed pump operation DI b .0 DQ a .7 Heater release
Zulaufpumpe Störung X10:16 X12:11 Stellventil Auf
=11-Q1:98 /21.2 DI1.1 DQ1.0 /22.3 =11-K3:A1
Feed pump failure DI b .1 DQ b .0 Regulating valve open
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe X10:17 X12:12 Stellventil Zu
=01-X2:22 /19.3 DI1.2 DQ1.1 /22.4 =11-K4:A1
(optional) feed back sludge discharge flap DI b .2 DQ b .1 Regulating valve closed
Reserve X10:18
=01-X2:10 /16.3 DI1.3
Spare DI b .3
(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung X10:19
=01-T1:7+ /17.3 DI1.4
(optional) NAHH separator vibration monitoring DI b .4
(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung X10:20
=01-X2:11 /17.4 DI1.5
(optional) NAHH separator vibration monitoring DI b .5
X11:1
0V /29.3
AQ 2M
X11:2
AQ90
AQ 0
X11:3
AQ92
AQ 1
X11:4
0V /29.3
AI 3M
Masse Analog X11:5
=0-T2:M' /27.1 AI90 V
Earth analog AI 0
Masse Analog X11:6
-K1:X11:5 /27.2 AI92 V
Earth analog AI 1
-K2
X10:1
/29.5 24V
L+
X10:2
/29.5 0V
M
X10:4 Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
/22.7
AI 0 M+ Min / max temperature monitoring
X10:5 Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
/22.7
AI 0 M- Min / max temperature monitoring
X10:6 Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
AI100 /22.6 =11-X2:3
AI 0 I+ Min / max temperature monitoring
X10:7 Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
/22.6
AI 0 I- Min / max temperature monitoring
-K3
X10:1
/29.6 24V
AI L+
X10:2
/29.6 0V
AI M
X10:4 Reinoel Ablaufdruck
AI110 /16.1 =01-X2:6
AI 0+ Clean-oil discharge pressure
V X10:5 Masse Analog
A /27.3
AI 0- Earth analog
X10:6 Wasserablauf
AI112 /16.2 =01-X2:8
AI 1+ Water discharge
V X10:7 Masse Analog
A /27.4
AI 1- Earth analog
X11:4
AI114
AI 2+
V X11:5 Masse Analog
A /27.4
AI 2- Earth analog
X11:6 FI Durchflussmessung
AI116 /23.1 =11-*0_9_002:2
AI 3+ FI flow measuring
V X11:7 Masse Analog
A /27.5
AI 3- Earth analog
-K4
X10:3
/29.7 0V
DI a 1M
X10:4
DI2.0
DI a .0
X10:5
DI2.1
DI a .1
X10:6
DI2.2
DI a .2
X10:7
DI2.3
DI a .3
X11:3
/29.7 0V
DI a 2M
X11:4
DI2.4
DI a .4
X11:5
DI2.5
DI a .5
X11:6
DI2.6
DI a .6
X11:7 Separator Not-Halt
DI2.7 /12.8 =0-K1:14
DI a .7 Separator emergency stop
X12:3
/29.7 0V
DI b 3M
X12:4
DI3.0
DI b .0
X12:5
DI3.1
DI b .1
X12:6
DI3.2
DI b .2
X12:7
DI3.3
DI b .3
X13:3
/29.8 0V
DI b 4M
X13:4
DI3.4
DI b .4
X13:5
DI3.5
DI b .5
X13:6
DI3.6
DI b .6
X13:7
DI3.7
DI b .7
-K5
X10:1
/29.9 24V
DQ a L+
X10:2
/29.9 0V
DQ a M
X10:4 Separator Start/Stop
DQ2.0 /14.1 =01-K1:A1
DQ a .0 Separator start/stop
X10:5 Zulaufpumpe Ein / Aus
DQ2.1 /21.1 =11-K2:A1
DQ a .1 Feed pump on / off
X10:6 /24.7 (Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe
DQ2.2 =16-X2:17
DQ a .2 /25.7 (optional) valve pneumatic sludge pump
X10:7
DQ2.3
DQ a .3
X11:4
DQ2.4
DQ a .4
X11:5
DQ2.5
DQ a .5
X11:6
DQ2.6
DQ a .6
X11:7 Sammelstörung
DQ2.7 /26.1 =100-K1:A1
DQ a .7 Common failure
X13:4
DQ3.4
DQ b .4
X13:5 (Option) Ventil Schlammablauf Klappe
DQ3.5 /19.2 =01-X2:20
DQ b .5 (optional) valve sludge discharge flap
X13:6
DQ3.6
DQ b .6
X13:7
DQ3.7
DQ b .7
30 mm
=0-M1
100 mm
TOUCH
320 mm
=00-P1
65 mm
F1 F2 F3 F4
Filter
filter
540 mm
=01-S1 =11-S1
800 mm
760 mm
110 mm
=0-Q1
TRIP. I
On
RESET
O =0-M1
Off
Maßstab 1:3,5 mm
Scale 1:3,5 mm
50 mm
Moutingplate
25x80
25x80
=0-T1
=01-T1
=01-F1
=100-K1
=100-K2
=100-K3
=100-K4
=100-K5
=11-K1
=01-K1
=11-K2
=11-K3
=11-K4
=0-K1
40x80
=100-X2
=16-X2
=00-K1
=00-K2
=00-K3
=00-K4
=00-K5
PE
25x80
40x80
40x80
=0-24M
=01-Q1
=0-T2
=01-B1
=11-Q1
=0-F1
=0-F2
25x80
Cable glands Yard cable size WS part-no..
=0-Q1
13x M16 5,0 - 10,0mm 0005-4486-930
9x M20 8,0 - 13,0mm 0005-4487-930
3x M16 Spare 0005-4442-900
40x80
=01-X1
=11-X1
=01-X2
=11-X2
=0-X1
PE
Bestell-nr.
0005-4760-400
order no.
Programm-Nr.
8107-0004-000...199
program-no.
TOUCH
160
Tiefe: 54mm
depth:
Ausschnittmass: 134x114mm
cutout dimension:
Gewicht: _,__kg
F1 F2 F3 F4 weight:
158
=Additions 71 mm
-S01
Not-Halt-Box
85 mm
54 mm
mm
ø5
85 mm
109 mm
M20
8-13mm Note: Installation should be carry out by customer!
18 mm
WDU1,5/ZZ
WDU1,5/ZZ
&EFS/11.6
&EFS/11.6
&EFS/11.6
Querverweis
Cross reference
X80:0V
PE
Ziel intern
=00-P1
Target internal -T2
-PE
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-24M
Klemmennummer
1
Terminal number
Steuerspannung DC
Control voltage DC
=
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=11-BP-P1
Editor
&EFS/20.7
Tested
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Betrieb Extern PE PE
PE
=11-WG005
PE
PE
(optional)feed pump operation external
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
=11-*0_3_001 &EFS/20.1
Zulaufpumpe PE
PE
25.08.2017
U1 =11-WD001
PE
PE
Feed pump
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
3
U1
V1
M
W1
V1
Kunde:
PE
Project:
Projekt:
W1
Customer:
-
-
2
=Customer+L-X &EFS/10.1
Einspeisung PE
PE
PE
-WD001
PE
PE
Incoming
_-J 4x4 mm²
-SC &EFS/10.3
Erdung Schirm PE
SC
SC
Earthing screen
-1M &EFS/10.6
Erdung Montageplatte 1 PE PE
PE
Earthing mounting plate 1 -PE
3
GN/YE
GN/YE
-1T &EFS/10.6
Erdung Tür 1 PE PE
PE
-1G &EFS/10.6
Erdung Gehäuse 1 PE PE
PE
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
-T1 &EFS/11.1
4
GND
Separator
Steuerspannung AC PE
GND
GEA Westfalia
Control voltage AC
GN/YE
GN/YE
-T2 &EFS/11.6
Steuerspannung DC PE PE
PE
Control voltage DC
GN/YE
GN/YE
-24M &EFS/11.6
= PE
2
2
GN/YE
GN/YE
Benennung/Description:
5
-X1 &EFS/11.2
Steuerspannung AC PE
6
6
Control voltage AC -PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-PE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-PE
=01-*0_1_001 &EFS/13.2
Separator PE
PE
=01-WD001
PE
PE
Separator -PE
_-J 4x4 mm²
PTC-Fühler Separator PE &EFS/13.3
PE
=01-WG003
PE
PE
V1
Θ
M
3~
V1
T1 W1
PE
W1
T2
-
T1
Sprache:
Language:
7
-M1 &EFS/11.2
Steuerspannung AC PE
PE
M
1~
PE N
de/en
N
-S01 &EFS/12.2
Not-Halt extern PE PE
Drawing No.:
PE
-WG001
PE
PE
=01+JB-1X10 &EFS/16.3
Reserve PE
PE
PE
=01-WG004
PE
PE
Spare
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
=01-*8_7_002 &EFS/18.2
Zulaufventil PE PE
PE
0505-0105-001
=01-WG010
PE
PE
DCC
=01-*4_7_001 &EFS/19.2
(Option) Ventil Schlammablauf Klappe PE PE
& EMA
PE
9
=01-WG012
PE
PE
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=01-*4_9_001
Editor
&EFS/19.3
Tested
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe PE PE
PE
=01-WG013
PE
PE
(optional) feed back sludge discharge flap -PE
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
=01+JB-1X10 &EFS/18.4
Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser PE
PE
25.08.2017
PE
=01-WG011
PE
PE
Displacem- and filling water -PE
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
=11-*6_7_002 &EFS/22.2
Stellventil - Heizmedium PE
PE
PE
=11-WG002
PE
PE
Regulating valve - heating medium -PE
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
Customer:
-
-
=16-90_9_001 &EFS/24.2
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. PE PE
PE
=16-WG001
PE
PE
2
=Customer+L-X &EFS/26.2
Separator Betrieb PE
PE
PE
=100-WG001
PE
PE
Separator operation
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
=16-90_9_002 &EFS/24.3
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. PE PE
PE
=16-WG002
PE
PE
=Customer+L-X &EFS/26.3
Wasserschlossalarm (nur bei LO -0196) PE
PE
PE
=100-WG002
PE
PE
=16-98_7_002 &EFS/24.8
(Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe PE PE
PE
=16-WG005
PE
PE
=Customer+L-X &EFS/26.5
TAH Temperatur Alarm max PE
PE
=100-WG003
PE
PE
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
PE
&EFS/26.6
4
Separator
TAL Temperatur Alarm min PE
PE
=100-WG004
GEA Westfalia
PE
PE
=Heater+L-X &EFS/26.8
Erhitzerfreigabe PE
PE
PE
=100-WG005
PE
PE
Heater release
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1
PA PE
-PE
X80:PA
GN/YE
GN/YE
Benennung/Description:
5
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1
Spannungsversorgung 3 PE
X10:3
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-PE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-PE
=00-K2 &EFS/29.4
= 3 PE
X10:3
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
=00-K3 &EFS/29.5
= 3 PE
X10:3
-PE
6
GN/YE
GN/YE
=00-K4 &EFS/29.6
= 1 PE
X11:1
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
- =00-K5 &EFS/29.8
= 1 PE
X11:1
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0105-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/23.1
&EFS/10.3
&EFS/16.1
&EFS/16.2
&EFS/22.7
Querverweis
Cross reference
Ziel intern
Target internal -SC
-SC
-SC
-SC
-SC
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-SC
Klemmennummer
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
Terminal number
PE SC
PE SC
-PE
=11-X2
Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
Min / max temperature monitoring
Clean-oil discharge pressure
FI Durchflussmessung
Reinoel Ablaufdruck
FI flow measuring
Water discharge
Earthing screen
Erdung Schirm
Wasserablauf
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
&EFS/11.0
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.2
&EFS/12.1
&EFS/12.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
vb
PE
21
13
Ziel intern
=01-F1
Target internal
-S01
-M1
-T1
-PE
-F2
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-X1
Klemmennummer
1
8
Terminal number
RDWHU 1 2
RDWHU 1 2
N L PE 21 22
N
L
21
M
1~
PE
22
-M1
-S01
Emergency stop external
Steuerspannung AC
Control voltage AC
Not-Halt extern
Reserve
Spare
=
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
6
Ziel intern
Target internal -Q1
-Q1
-Q1
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-XQ1
Klemmennummer
2
Terminal number
1 2 3
_-J 4x4 mm²
-WD001
1 2 3
L1 L2 L3
L1
=Customer+L-X
Einspeisung
Incoming
=
WDU4
WDU4
WDU4
&EFS/13.1
&EFS/13.1
&EFS/13.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
6
Ziel intern
Target internal -Q1
-Q1
-Q1
Brücken
Bridges
=01+-X1
Klemmennummer
1
Terminal number
1 2 3
_-J 4x4 mm²
-WD001
1 2 3
U1 V1 W1 T2 T1 PE
W1
U1
V1
PE
M
3~
Θ
T2
T1
-*0_1_001
Separator
Separator
=
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*0_1_001
Editor
&EFS/13.3
Tested
PTC-Fühler Separator 1
T1
1
1
PTC-feeler separator -F1 T1 WDU2,5
TE
= -WG003 2 &EFS/13.3
T2
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
1
2
2
T2 U1
-F1 T2 WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
U1
25.08.2017
V1
Θ
M
3~
T1 W1
V1
PE
W1
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
PE
Customer:
-
-
2
+JB-1X10 &EFS/15.2
Drehzahlüberwachung 3
1
1
1
2
2
2
-T1 2- WDU2,5
Reinoel Ablaufdruck 5 &EFS/16.1
4
4
4
3
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
3
3
WDU2,5
Wasserablauf 7 &EFS/16.2
1
Water discharge WDU2,5
3
= 8 &EFS/16.2
6
5
5
WDU2,5
Reserve 9 &EFS/16.3
Spare WDU2,5
= 10 &EFS/16.3
=00-K1 X10:18 WDU2,5
(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung 11 &EFS/17.4
10
1
1
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
-*8_7_002 - + &EFS/18.1
4
Separator
Zulaufventil 12
+
1
1
GEA Westfalia
Feed valve =00-K1 X12:3 WDU2,5
-WG010 &EFS/18.1
-
=0-24M 1 WDU2,5
+JB-1X10 &EFS/18.3
Steuerwasser 14
12
2
2
-WG011 &EFS/18.4
Benennung/Description:
= 16
13
3
3
WDU2,5
Reserve 17 &EFS/18.5
16
5
5
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+-X2
=00-K1 X12:7 WDU2,5
=16-X2 3
6
WDU2,5
-*4_9_001 &EFS/19.3
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe 22
13
1
1
=11-X2 5 WDU2,5
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0105-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
46
=01+JB-1X10
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*9_7_004
Editor
&EFS/18.3
Tested
Steuerwasser PE PE
PE
-WG105
PE
PE
Operating water =0-PE PE
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
-*0_9_020 &EFS/15.2
Drehzahlüberwachung - + 1
25.08.2017
Speed monitoring device -X2 3
BN
BN
-WG101 &EFS/15.2
-
= .-O 2x0,34 mm² 2
-X2 4
BU
BU
-*1_9_002
I
1
Kunde:
&EFS/16.1
Project:
Projekt:
Reinoel Ablaufdruck 3
Customer:
-
-
Clean-oil discharge pressure -X2 6
WH
WH
= 2
-WG102 4 &EFS/16.1
1
.-O 2x0,34 mm²
-X2 5
2
BK
BK
P
-*0_9_014
I
1 &EFS/16.2
Wasserablauf 5
1
BK
BK
Water discharge
= 2
-WG103 6 &EFS/16.2
2
.-O 2x0,34 mm²
-X2 8
P
WH
WH
Reserve 7 &EFS/16.3
Spare
-*1_9_012 &EFS/17.1
(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung 8
1
(optional) NAHH separator vibration monitoring -*1_9_012 3
BN
BN
3
= 9 &EFS/17.1
2
1
-WG104
BU
BU
-X2 11
WH
WH
= 11 &EFS/17.4
-*9_7_004 - + &EFS/18.3
Steuerwasser 12
+
-WG105 &EFS/18.3
-
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia
-*9_7_005 - + &EFS/18.4
-
= 15 &EFS/18.4
+
-X2 15
BN
BN
Benennung/Description:
5
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+JB-1X10
Terminal connecting plan =01+JB-1X10
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0105-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
47
=11+-X1
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*0_3_001
Editor
&EFS/20.1
Tested
Zulaufpumpe 1
U1
1
1
Feed pump U1 -Q1 2 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/20.1
V1
3
V1
1
2
2
-WD001 -Q1 4
M
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
= W1 3 &EFS/20.1
25.08.2017
W1
3
3
-Q1 6 WDU2,5
PE
PE
-*6_7_002
Kunde:
&EFS/22.1
Project:
Projekt:
Stellventil - Heizmedium 4
1
1
1
Customer:
-
-
Regulating valve - heating medium WDU2,5
= 5 &EFS/22.1
1
2
2
2/14
-WG002 -K3 14
2
3
3
3/11
-K4 14 WDU2,5
= 7 &EFS/22.1
=0-X1 7 WDU2,5
-BP-S1 &EFS/20.5
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Stop Extern 8
21
1
1
22
2
2
WDU2,5
3
-BP-S2 &EFS/20.6
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Start Extern 13
10
3
3
-K1 14 WDU2,5
-BP-P1 &EFS/20.6
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Betrieb Extern 12
X1
5
5
=0-X1 6 WDU2,5
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description:
5
Klemmenanschlussplan =11+-X1
Terminal connecting plan =11+-X1
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0105-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
48
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
&EFS/22.5
&EFS/22.5
&EFS/22.6
&EFS/22.6
&EFS/22.7
&EFS/23.1
&EFS/23.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
X11:6
X11:7
X10:6
X10:7
SC
23
X11:6
Ziel intern
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K3
=01-X2
=0-SC
Target internal
Brücken
Bridges
=11+-X2
Klemmennummer
SC
1
6
Terminal number
1 2 3 4 WH BK
.CY-O 4x1,5 mm²
-WG004
1 2 3 4 WH BK
1 2 3 4 1 2
1
2
1
I
P
2
-*0_9_006
-*0_9_002
Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
Min / max temperature monitoring
Produkt Temperaturregelung
Product temperature control
FI Durchflussmessung
FI flow measuring
=
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-90_9_001
Editor
&EFS/24.1
Tested
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. 1
3
1
1
(optional) LAHH sludge tank level max. / max. 2 3 =11-X2 5 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/24.1
2
1
2
2
1 -WG001 WDU2,5
-
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
MIL/PLE
= 3 &EFS/24.1
25.08.2017
3
3
=01-X2 21 WDU2,5
= 4 &EFS/24.1
WDU2,5
-90_9_002 &EFS/24.3
= 5
1
1
1
2 3 WDU2,5
Kunde:
&EFS/24.3
Project:
Projekt:
= 6
3
2
2
Customer:
-WG002
-
-
1 WDU2,5
-
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
= 7 &EFS/24.2
2
3
3
2
WDU2,5
= 8 &EFS/24.3
WDU2,5
Reserve 9 &EFS/24.4
Spare WDU2,5
= 10 &EFS/24.4
=00-K1 X10:12 WDU2,5
= 11 &EFS/24.4
WDU2,5
= 12 &EFS/24.4
WDU2,5
3
= 13 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
= 14 &EFS/24.5
=00-K1 X10:11 WDU2,5
= 15 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
= 16 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
-98_7_002 - + &EFS/24.7
(Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe 17
+
1
1
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
-WG005 &EFS/24.7
4
Separator
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 18
2
2
GEA Westfalia
WDU2,5
Benennung/Description:
5
Klemmenanschlussplan =16+-X2
Terminal connecting plan =16+-X2
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0105-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
50
=100+-X2
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=Customer+L-X
Editor
&EFS/26.1
Tested
Sammelstörung 1
1
1
Common failure -K1 21 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/26.1
1
2
2
-K1 24 WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
Separator Betrieb -WG001 3 &EFS/26.2
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
25.08.2017
3
3
Separator operation =01-Q1 44 WDU2,5
= 4 &EFS/26.2
4
4
=01-Q1 43 WDU2,5
Wasserschlossalarm (nur bei LO -0196) 5 &EFS/26.3
1
1
Water seal broken alarm (only at LO -0196) -K2 11 WDU2,5
Kunde:
-WG002 &EFS/26.3
Project:
Projekt:
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 6
2
2
Customer:
-
-
-K2 14 WDU2,5
TAH Temperatur Alarm max 7 &EFS/26.4
1
1
-K3 11
2
2
2
-K3 14 WDU2,5
TAL Temperatur Alarm min 9 &EFS/26.6
1
1
2
2
-K4 14 WDU2,5
=Heater+L-X &EFS/26.7
Erhitzerfreigabe 11
1
1
= -WG005 12 &EFS/26.7
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
2
2
-K5 14 WDU2,5
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description:
5
Klemmenanschlussplan =100+-X2
Terminal connecting plan =100+-X2
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0105-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
51
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kabelübersicht
Cable layout
Adern
Kabelname /Seite.Pfad Quelle (von) Ziel (bis) Kabeltyp Adern gesamt
verwendet
Querschnitt Länge Verschraubung / Klemmbereich Bemerkung
Cable name /page.path Source (from) Target (to) Cable type Wires total Cross-section Length Cable gland / clamping range Remark
Wires used
=11-BP-P1;=11-BP-S1
=11-WG005 &EFS/20.5 =0-PE;=11-X1 .-J 7x 7 1,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=11-BP-S2
Kabelübersicht
Cable layout
Adern
Kabelname /Seite.Pfad Quelle (von) Ziel (bis) Kabeltyp Adern gesamt
verwendet
Querschnitt Länge Verschraubung / Klemmbereich Bemerkung
Cable name /page.path Source (from) Target (to) Cable type Wires total Cross-section Length Cable gland / clamping range Remark
Wires used
PE
=01+-X2 +JB-1X10
PE PE
PE
1
1 brown
N Drehzahlueberwachung
1
2
2
-WG004
3
2
7x1,5mm² 3 white PSL/H Reinoel
P
3
M20 (8-13mm)
4
2x0,34mm² Ablaufdruck
4 4 black PSL/H clean oil
+
+
+
5
discharge pressure
3 black
+ P
+
6
6
7
5 black black
7
8
brown
9
+
8
+
-
9
-
1
11
1 white
10
12
11
2
13
- brown
12
Steuerwasser
-WG011 3x1,5mm²
2 operating water
14
7x1,5mm² 3 blue
13
-
-
M20 (8-13mm)
4
15
blue
14
-
-
Verdraengungs-u. fuellwasser
3x1,5mm²
displacem. a. filling water
3
16
- 4 brown
15
5
17
5
16
18
PE
PE
19
PE
PE-BUS
Bestell-Nr.:0005-1539-280
order-no.:0005-1539-280
FU
FC
=..-U.
Generelle Information zum Potentialausgleich.
Die Informationen auf diesem Blatt sind nicht
kundenspezifisch angepasst.
IP54
PE-Schiene
protective earth - rail
IDM
≥25 mm²
GN YE
≥10 mm²
GN YE
PA
Potentialausgleichsschiene
equipotential bonding strip
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
≥10 mm²
GN YE
equipotential bonding building
Potentialausgleich Gebäude
≥25 mm²
GN YE
Fundamenterder
foundation earth
Stückliste
Parts list
Funktionszeichen /Seite.Pfad WS Teil-Nr Hersteller Bestell-Nr. Bezeichnung Hersteller
Function sign /page.path WS part-no. Manufacturer order no.. Name Manufacturer
Stückliste
Parts list
Funktionszeichen /Seite.Pfad WS Teil-Nr Hersteller Bestell-Nr. Bezeichnung Hersteller
Function sign /page.path WS part-no. Manufacturer order no.. Name Manufacturer
=01-X1 &EFS/13.1 0005-3504-890 1020100000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 4 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal
=01-X2 &EFS/13.3; 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=01-K1 &EFS/14.1 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=01-T1 &EFS/15.1 0005-4509-010 7505501 Schaltverstärker Turck
Amplifier
=11-K1 &EFS/20.7 0005-4033-120 2967099 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 2 Wechsler, Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact, 230 VAC/220 VDC
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-000 LUB12 Motorabgang Grundgerät - 12A AC-43, 440V Groupe Schneider
Motor outlet of basic unit - 12 A AC-43, 440 V
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-120 LUCA05FU Steuereinheit Standard LUCA, 1,25...5A, 110/220VAC/DC, Class 10 Groupe Schneider
Control unit, standard LUCA, 1,25...5A, 110/220VAC/DC, Class 10
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-310 LUA1C20 Hilfsschaltermodul MSS LUA, 2S Groupe Schneider
Aux. switch module, MSS LUA, 2 NO.
=11-S1 &EFS/20.7 0005-0082-190 3SB3100-8AC21-BC Doppeldrucktaster komplett, tastend, grün/rot, 1x1NO+1x1NC Siemens
Double push button complete
=11-X1 &EFS/20.1; 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=11-K2 &EFS/21.1 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=11-K3 &EFS/22.3 0005-4033-140 2967604 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais, für hohe Einschaltströme, 1 Schließer Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact
=11-K4 &EFS/22.4 0005-4033-140 2967604 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais, für hohe Einschaltströme, 1 Schließer Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact
=11-X2 &EFS/22.5.. 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=16-X2 &EFS/24.1.. 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=100-K1 &EFS/26.1 0005-4033-080 2967060 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 2 Wechsler, Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact
=100-K2 &EFS/26.3 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=100-K3 &EFS/26.4 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=100-K4 &EFS/26.6 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
Date 25.08.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: Rev.00 =
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Stückliste
Tested TE - Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 58
Project: Parts list
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0105-001 & EPB 60 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
Funktionszeichen /Seite.Pfad WS Teil-Nr Hersteller Bestell-Nr. Bezeichnung Hersteller
Function sign /page.path WS part-no. Manufacturer order no.. Name Manufacturer
=100-K5 &EFS/26.7 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=100-X2 &EFS/26.1.. 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1 0005-4760-010 6AV2124-5DC00-0AC0 Touchpanel KTP400 Comfort, 4" Farb-Display, 24VDC Siemens
Touch panel KTP400 Comfort
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1 0005-3668-100 6AV2181-8XP00-0AX0 Speicherkarte, 2 GByte, SD Siemens
Memory card, 2 GByte, SD
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 Zentralbaugruppe, SIMATIC S7-1200, CPU 1215C, 14DI/10DO/2AI/2AO Siemens
CPU module
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 0005-4278-060 6XV1850-2GH20 SIMATIC NET, IND. ETHERNET TP CORD RJ45/RJ45, LAENGE 2 M Siemens
SIMATIC NET, IND. ETHERNET TP CORD
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 Speicherkarte, 12 MByte, MMC Siemens
Memory card, 12 MByte, MMC
=00-K2 &EFS/29.4 0005-4281-060 6ES7231-5PD30-4AC0 Analog Eingangsmodul, SM 1231, 4AI Siemens
Analog module input
=00-K3 &EFS/29.5 0005-4281-100 6ES7234-4HE32-0XB0 Analogein-/ausgabe, SM 1234, 4AE/2AA, U/I, 13/14BIT Siemens
Analoge module in-/output
=00-K4 &EFS/29.6 0005-4280-040 6ES7221-1BH32-0XB0 Digital Eingangsmodul, SM 1221, 16DI Siemens
Digital input module
=00-K5 &EFS/29.8 0005-4280-060 6ES7222-1BH32-0XB0 Digital Ausgangsmodul, SM 1222, 16 DO, 24VDC/0,5A Siemens
Digital output module
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 0005-0058-500 1058500 Kompakt-Schaltschrank AE, lackiert RAL 7035, mit Montageplatte, eintürig Rittal
Compact enclosure AE, painted RAL 7035, with mount. plate, single door
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 0005-1412-000 2519000 Türarretierung für das AE Programm Rittal
Door stay for the AE range
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 AKZ, Kabelcenter AKZ, Kabelcenter Aderkennzeichnung, Kabelcenter Plenge
Wire marking, cable center
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 8556-9999-000 KLEINMATERIAL Kleinmaterial Schaltschrank Plenge
Incidentals control cabinet
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0005-4486-930 70-16-060-000-10-041 Verschraubung Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7032, halogenfrei, d=5-10mm Jacob
Screw connection polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7032, halogen free, 5-10mm
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0013-0130-900 50.216 PA7035 Gegenmutter Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7035 Jacob
Counter nut polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7035
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0005-4487-930 70-20-060-000-13-041 Verschraubung Polyamid, M20x1,5, RAL 7032, halogenfrei, d=8-13mm Jacob
Screw connection polyamide, M20x1,5, RAL 7032, halogen free, 8-13mm
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0013-0131-900 50.220 PA7035 Gegenmutter Polyamid, M20x1,5, RAL 7035 Jacob
Counter nut polyamide, M20x1,5, RAL 7035
Date 25.08.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: Rev.00 =
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Stückliste
Tested TE - Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 59
Project: Parts list
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0105-001 & EPB 60 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
Funktionszeichen /Seite.Pfad WS Teil-Nr Hersteller Bestell-Nr. Bezeichnung Hersteller
Function sign /page.path WS part-no. Manufacturer order no.. Name Manufacturer
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0005-4442-900 81-16-866-0000-04 Blindstopfen Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7035 Jacob
Blanking plug polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7035
=Additions &ELU/36.9 0830407 0830407 Kabelmarker, weiß, Schriftfeldgröße: 40 x 12 mm Phoenix Contakt
Cable marker
=Additions &ELU/36.9 8555-9001-040 8555-9001-040 Betriebsanleitung IO, englisch WS Mineraloil Systems
Instruction manual IO
Kunde : -
Customer
Anlagenbezeichnung : -
Designation of plant
Zeichnungsnummer : 0505-0605-001
Drawing no.
Kommission : -
Internal order no.
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Dokumentenart Seite Seitenbeschreibung Anlage Einbauort Datum Bearbeiter
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
Titel- / Deckblatt
&EAA 1 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Title- / cover sheet
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 2 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 3 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 4 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 5 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Revisionsübersicht
&EBH 6 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Revision overview
Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
&EDB 7 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Overview structure indicator
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 8 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Information-sheet
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 9 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Information-sheet
Einspeisung
&EFS 10 =0 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Incoming
Steuerspannung
&EFS 11 =0 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Control voltage
Not-Halt
&EFS 12 =0 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Emergency stop
Separator
&EFS 13 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator
Separator
&EFS 14 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator
Separator Drehzahlmessung
&EFS 15 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator speed measuring
Separator Signale
&EFS 16 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator signals
Separator Vibro
&EFS 17 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator vibro
Separator Ventile
&EFS 18 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator valves
Separator Schlammklappe
&EFS 19 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator sludge flap
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Dokumentenart Seite Seitenbeschreibung Anlage Einbauort Datum Bearbeiter
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
Zulaufpumpe
&EFS 20 =11 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Feed pump
Zulaufpumpe
&EFS 21 =11 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Feed pump
Produkt Temperaturregelung
&EFS 22 =11 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Product temperature control
FI Durchflussmessung
&EFS 23 =11 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
FI flow measuring
Schlammpumpe
&EFS 24 =16 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Sludge pump
Schlammpumpe
&EFS 25 =16 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Sludge pump
Signalaustausch
&EFS 26 =100 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Signal exchange
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 27 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
Prozessanzeige KPT 400
&EFS 28 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Process display KPT 400
SPS Spannungsversorgung
&EFS 29 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC power supply
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 30 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 31 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 32 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 33 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 34 =00 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
Aufbauplan
&ELU 35 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Arrangement drawing
Aufbauplan
&ELU 36 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Arrangement drawing
Not-Halt Box
&ELU 38 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Emergency stop box
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Dokumentenart Seite Seitenbeschreibung Anlage Einbauort Datum Bearbeiter
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-24M
&EMA 39 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-24M
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-PE
&EMA 40 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-PE
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-PE
&EMA 41 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-PE
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-SC
&EMA 42 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-SC
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-X1
&EMA 43 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-X1
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-XQ1
&EMA 44 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-XQ1
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+-X1
&EMA 45 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =01+-X1
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+-X2
&EMA 46 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =01+-X2
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+JB-1X10
&EMA 47 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =01+JB-1X10
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+SB-1X20
&EMA 48 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =01+SB-1X20
Klemmenanschlussplan =11+-X1
&EMA 49 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =11+-X1
Klemmenanschlussplan =11+-X2
&EMA 50 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =11+-X2
Klemmenanschlussplan =16+-X2
&EMA 51 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =16+-X2
Klemmenanschlussplan =100+-X2
&EMA 52 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =100+-X2
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 53 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Cable layout
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 54 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Cable layout
Klemmenkasten Übersicht
&EMB 55 =01 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal box overview
Hinweise zur Installation
&EMB 56 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Instructions for installation
Potentialausgleich Separator
&EMB 57 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Potential equalization separator
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Dokumentenart Seite Seitenbeschreibung Anlage Einbauort Datum Bearbeiter
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
Stückliste
&EPB 58 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 59 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 60 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 61 25.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Revisionsübersicht
Revision overview
Revisionsname Revisionskommentar Revisionsänderungsgrund Seitenname Ersteller Datum
Revision name Revision comment Revision on the basis of change Page name Author Date
Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
Overview structure indicator
Vollständige Bezeichnung Beschriftung Strukturbeschreibung Vollständige Bezeichnung Beschriftung Strukturbeschreibung
Complete name Labelling Structure descprition Complete name Labelling Structure descprition
Dokumentenart Deckblatt
&EAA
Document type Cover sheet
Dokumentenart Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB
Document type Table of contents
Dokumentenart Revisionsübersicht
&EBH
Document type Revision overview
Dokumentenart Strukturkennzeichen Übersicht / Vorschriften
&EDB
Document type Structure indentification overview / instructions
Dokumentenart Stromlaufplan
&EFS
Document type Circuit diagram
Dokumentenart Aufbauplan
&ELU
Document type Arrangement drawing
Dokumentenart Klemmenanschlussplan
&EMA
Document type Terminal connecting plan
Dokumentenart Kabelübersicht
&EMB
Document type Cable layout
Dokumentenart Stückliste
&EPB
Document type Parts list
Anlage Einspeisung
=0
Plant Incoming
Anlage Separator
=01
Plant Separator
Anlage Zulaufpumpe
=11
Plant Feed pump
Anlage Schlammpumpe
=16
Plant Sludge pump
Anlage Signalaustausch
=100
Plant Signal exchange
Anlage SPS
=00
Plant PLC
Anlage Zugabe
=Additions
Plant Addition
Anlage Kunde
=Customer
Plant Customer
Anlage Erhitzer
=Heater
Plant Heater
Einbauort Abzweigdose
+JB
Mounting place Junction box
Einbauort Sensorblock
+SB
Mounting place Sensor bloc
Einbauort Lokal
+L
Mounting place Local
Einbauort Kommandostelle Zulaufpumpe
+OP_FP
Mounting place Control station feed pump
Vorschriften / Spezifikation
Instruction / specification
Schaltschrank : Ausführung:
Control cabinet : Version:
Bezeichnung Schaltschrank Aderkennzeichnung
CC Core indentification
YES
Denomination control cabinet
Schutzart Potentialbezeichnung
Protective rating
IP54 Potential designation
NO
Kabelkennzeichnungsschilder
Cable marking plates
YES
Sprache Kennzeichnungsschilder
Language labels
de/en
Schnittstelle:
Interface:
Bus Verbindung zum Kunden PLC
Bus connection to customer PLC
NO
Einspeisung:
Power supply
Netz-/ Anschlussspannung 380-420VAC/
Mains-/ input voltage 440-480VAC
Netzfrequenz
Mains frequency
50/60 Hz
Drehfeld
Rotary field
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
Spannungstoleranz
Voltage tolerance
+/-5 %
Kabeleinführung
Cable inlet
BOTTOM
Einspeisung redundant
Incoming redundant
NO
Steuerspannungen:
Control voltages:
Steuerspannung 1
Control voltage 1
230V AC
Steuerspannung 2
Control voltage 2
24V DC
Verdrahtung
Wiring
Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt
Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section
Hauptstromkreise 380-420VAC/ L1 Schwarz ≥ 1,5mm² Steuerspannung 230V AC L Rot ≥ 0,75mm²
Main circuits 440-480VAC Black Control voltage Red
L2 Schwarz N Rot / weiß
Black " Red / white "
L3 Schwarz
Black "
N Hellblau ≥ 1,5mm²
Light blue
PE Grün / gelb ≥ 2,5mm²
Green / yellow
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC
L1 / 13.0
L2 / 13.0
L3 / 13.0
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC
L1.2 / 20.0
L2.2 / 11.0
L3.2 / 11.0
13
21
1
-Q1
14
22
17...23A
In: 18A
/26.1
Daten Einspeisung:
Data Power supply
Min. Querschnitt:
4 mm²
Min. Cross-section:
-PE -PE -SC -PE -PE -PE
Vorsicherung:
-
Pre-fuse:
Umgebungstemperatur:
(+5) - (+50) °C
-WD001 Ambient temperature:
_-J
4x4 mm² Max. Kabellänge:
50 m
PE
PE
PE
Max. Cable length:
L2
L3
440-480VAC
+L-X
Erdung Gehäuse 1
Earthing cabinet 1
Icn: 50/10 kA
Earthing screen
Earthing door 1
Erdung Schirm
Erdung Tür 1
Vollaststrom:
~18 A
Einspeisung Full load current:
Incoming
380-420VAC/ 380-420VAC/
440-480VAC 440-480VAC
10.9 / L2.2 L2.2 / 20.0
10.9 / L3.2 L3.2 / 20.0
230V AC
L.A / 13.4
N.A / 12.0
230V AC
L.X / 12.0
1
5
-F1 N.X / 20.4
0,9...1,25A
EW: see table
I> I> I>
2
N/L2
L1
Primär Spannung T1 Anschluss (X1, X2) Verbindung (X3, X4) Einstellung F1
X1 X3 X4 X2 Primary voltage T1 Connection (X1, X2) Connection (X3, X4) Setting F1
-T1 -T2 INPUT
400VA 380VAC B-H C-E 1,22A 120/230VAC GEA
400VAC B-J C-E 1,16A 24VDC/5A power
420VAC B-J C-F 1,10A
GND 440VAC A-J C-F 1,05A
OFF
ON
ua va PE ub vb 460VAC A-K D-E 1,01A
230V AC
230V AC
-PE
L+
L+'
PE
M'
1
M.A / 15.0
-F2
-PE M.K / 27.0
2
C6A
M.R / 14.0
2
-24M
-PE
M.T / 28.0
=00-K2 =00-K2 M.X / 18.0
PT100 PT100 24V DC
L+.A / 12.7
/31.5 24V DC
L+.K / 29.0
AI104 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 24V DC
L+.X / 16.0
24V DC
X12 X12 X12 X12 L+.T / 28.0
AI 2 I+
6
AI 2 I-
7
AI 2 M+
4
AI 2 M-
5
1
-X1
-PE
N
-PE
L
-M1
M -R1
19/18W 1~ PT100
2
Schaltschranklüfter
PE
Cabinet fan
230V AC 230V AC
11.9 / L.X L.X / 22.0
230V AC
1L.X / 13.4
230V AC
1L.A / 20.4
24V DC 24V DC
11.9 / L+.A L+.A / 14.0
11
-K1
12
14
/12.6
DI a .7
7
X11
DI2.7
/33.5
=00-K4
Separator
Not-Halt
Separator
emergency stop
A1
-K1
A2
11.9 / N.A N.A / 13.4
-PE
Brücke entfernen bei
Anschluß eines
7
externen Not-Halt!
(Option) -X1
Remove link in case of
an external emergency
stop! (optional)
-WG001
.-J
3x1,5 mm²
21
14
PE
11 /12.8
12
-S01
22
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC 230V AC 230V AC
10.9 / L1 11.9 / L.A L.A / 22.0
230V AC
10.9 / L2 12.9 / 1L.X
10.9 / L3
Strommessung
Separator
Current measuring
separator
=00-K2
/31.5
AI106
X13
AI 3 I1~
1
AI 3 I2~
2
13
-F1
14
/13.4
11
1
-Q1 -K1
2
12
14
/13.8 /14.1
S1
21
-B1
S2
50/1A -S1
22
/13.8
13
13
-S1 -Q1
14
14
/13.8 /13.8
A1
A1
T1
-F1 M -Q1
T2
A2
A2
12.9 / N.A N.A / 20.4
-PE -PE
1
-X1 -X2
-WD001 -WG003
_-J .-J
Linkslauf 4x4 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
Anti-clockwise rotation
W1
U1
V1
PE
13 14 /13.8 1 2 /13.1
M 21 22 /14.2 3 4 /13.1
*0_1_001 3~ 5 6 /13.1
13 14 /13.9
380-420VAC/50Hz/4kW/6,9-8,2A Θ
440-480VAC/60Hz/4kW/6,9-8,2A 21 22
T2
T1
33 34 /14.1
43 44 /26.2
24V DC 24V DC
12.9 / L+.A L+.A / 15.0
33
21
-Q1 34 -F1
22
/13.8 /13.4
DI a .0
DI a .1
7
X10 8
X10
DI0.0 DI0.1
/30.3 /30.3
=00-K1 =00-K1
Separator Separator
Betrieb Störung
Separator Separator
operation failure
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.0
X10
DQ a .0
4
A1
-K1
A2
14
11 /13.8
12
Separator
Start/Stop
Separator
start/stop
24V DC 24V DC
14.9 / L+.A L+.A / 17.0
11.9 / M.A
=00-K1
0-12000 r.p.m.
/30.3
DI0.2
X10
DI a .2
5 9
6
-T1
8-
24V DC
7+
1+
2-
3+
4-
3
-X2
-WG004
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/16.1
+JB
-1X10 1 2
+JB-WG101
.-O
2x0,34 mm²
+
*0_9_020
SI
-
+ BN = brown
- BU = blue
Drehzahlüberwachung
Speed monitoring device
=00-K3 =00-K3
4-20mA 4-20mA
/32.5 /32.5
AI110 AI112
X10 X10
=00-K1
AI 0+
4
AI 1+
6
/30.3
-SC -SC
DI1.3
=0-SC
=0-SC
X10
DI b .3
18
24V DC 24V DC
11.9 / L+.X L+.X / 19.0
-PE
10
5
-X2 9
-WG004
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/15.1
+JB
L+_1X10 / 17.1
PE
4
-1X10 PE
+JB-WG121
.-J
5x1,5 mm²
+SB
PE_1X20 / 18.6
M_1X20 / 18.5
2
-1X20
24V DC 24V DC
15.9 / L+.A L+.A / 21.0
=00-K1 =00-K1
/30.3 /30.3
DI1.4 DI1.5
X10 X10
DI b .4
19
DI b .5
20
11
-X2
-WG011
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/18.3
+JB 16.3 / L+_1X10
M_1X10 / 18.3
-1X10 8 11 9 10
+JB-WG104
_CY-O
4x0,75 mm²
SC
1
*1_9_012
PCH 1220
+24V DC
0V
NAHH
-D1
Relais
Relay
DQ a .2
5
DQ a .1
4
DQ a .3
6
DQ a .4
7
11.9 / M.X M.X / 19.0
PE -PE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
-X2
-WG011
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/17.4
+JB
17.1 / M_1X10
-PE -PE
12
13
15
14
16
18
17
PE
-1X10 PE PE -1X10 PE
+JB-WG122
.-J
4x1,5 mm²
+SB
16.3 / M_1X20
16.3
PE_1X20
11
10
PE
PE
8
9
-1X20 PE PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
+
+
*8_7_002 *9_7_004 *9_7_005 *0_7_010 *0_7_011
-
-
-
=00-K5 =00-K1
/34.5 /30.3
DQ3.5 DI1.2
X13 X10
DQ b .5
5
DI b .2
17
24V DC 24V DC
16.9 / L+.X L+.X / 23.0
18.9 / M.X M.X / 24.0
PE PE
20
21
22
23
-X2 -X2
-WG012 -WG013
.-J .-J
3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
13
+
PE
PE
*4_7_001 *4_9_001
14
-
230V AC
10.9 / L1.2 12.9 / 1L.A
11.9 / L2.2
11.9 / L3.2
5
-Q1
17
LUB12 L1 L2 L3
13
21
A1
/20.9
-Q1
18
/20.2
14
22
A2
1,25...5A
110-220V DC/AC Steuereinheit
LUCA05FU Control unit
In:...A
21
11
-S1 -K2
22
14
12
/20.7 /21.1
LUA1C20
17
97
18
98
/20.7 /21.2
T1 T2 T3
2
11
13
11
2,5 BK2,5 BK2,5 BK
-K1 -S1 =100-K1
12
14
14
12
14
/20.7 /20.7 /26.1
A1
A1
-K1 -Q1
A2
A2
/20.2
13.9 / N.A
11.9 / N.X N.X / 22.0
-PE -PE
10
11
12
13
=0-PE
=0-PE
1
9
-X1 -X1
remove bridge for
remote start/stop!
-WD001 -WG005
_-J .-J
4x2,5 mm² 7x1,5 mm²
Rechtslauf
Clockwise rotation Achtung! 14
W1
U1
11 /20.7
V1
PE
-BP 12
X1
13
21
Vor dem Einschalten der Zulaufpumpe
PE
Option! 24
*0_3_001
M den Leistungsschalter auf Nennstrom Optional!
-S1 -S2 14 -P1 22
21 /21.1
X2
0,55-2,2kW
3 des Motors einstellen (s. Typenschild des Motors)
22
1,32-4,8A
Attention!
binary contacts for
Before switch-on feed pump, adjust the circuit breaker remote start/stop
to nominal current of the motor (look at motor label)
Zulaufpumpe (Option) (Option) (Option) Zulaufpumpe
Feed pump Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe Feed pump
Stop Extern Start Extern Betrieb Extern
(optional)feed pump(optional)feed pump(optional)feed pump
stop external start external operation external
Date 25.08.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: Rev.00 = 11
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Zulaufpumpe
Tested TE - Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 20
Project: Feed pump
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0605-001 & EFS 61 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
17.9 / L+.A
21
97
-K1 -Q1
22
24
98
/20.7 /20.3
DI b .0
DI b .1
15
X10 16
X10
DI1.0 DI1.1
/30.3 /30.3
=00-K1 =00-K1
Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe
Betrieb Störung
Feed pump Feed pump
operation failure
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.1
X10
DQ a .1
A15
-K2
A2
14
11 /20.8
12
Zulaufpumpe
Ein / Aus
Feed pump on
/ off
230V AC
13.9 / L.A
230V AC
12.9 / L.X
20.9 / N.X
13.
13.
13
13
PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100
-K3 -K4 /31.5 /31.5
14
14.
14
14.
/22.3 /22.4 AI102 AI100
/31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5
open close
X11 X11 X11 X11 X10 X10 X10 X10
AI 1 M+
4
AI 1 M-
5
AI 1 I+
6
AI 1 I-
7
AI 0 I-
7
AI 0 M+
4
AI 0 M-
5
AI 0 I+
Clamp 7 is attached only with "Spring-loaded"
=00-K1 =00-K1
Klemme 7 wird nur bei "Spring-loaded"
=0-SC
=0-SC
X12 X12
Stellventil angeschlossen
DQ b .0
11
DQ b .1
12
control valve
A1
A1
-K3 -K4
A2
A2
SC
4
4
-X1 -X2
-WG002 -WG003
.-J .CY-O
5x1,5 mm² 4x1,5 mm²
13 14 /22.2 13 14 /22.2
close
open
3
1 2/14 3/11 40 PE
PT100 PT100
Motor valve
M
2
4
1 ~
=00-K3
4-20mA
/32.5
AI116
X11
AI 3+
6
-SC
=0-SC
24V DC 24V DC
19.9 / L+.X L+.X / 24.0
5
-X2
-WG004
.-O
2x0,34 mm²
1
*0_9_002 I
FI P
4-20mA
FI Durchflussmessung
FI flow measuring
Option A
applicable for 2 x
LSHH Liquitec
L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT
LOW 1 LOW 1 LOW 0 LOW 0 STUs
HIGH 0 HIGH 0 HIGH 1 HIGH 1 2024-1165-020
ALARM 0 ALARM 0 2025-1165-020
2026-1165-030
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1
2027-1165-040
/30.3 /30.3 /30.3 /30.3
DI0.6 DI0.7 DI0.5 DI0.4
X10 X10 X10 X10
DI a .6
13
DI a .7
14
DI a .5
12
DI a .4
11
24V DC
23.9 / L+.X
19.9 / M.X
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.2
X10
DQ a .2
6
-PE -PE -PE
10
11
12
14
13
15
16
17
18
2
-X2 -X2
PE
3
+ - PE + - PE 98_7_002
90_9_001 90_9_002 /25.7
-
/25.1 /25.4
2
Niveauschalter 1 Niveauschalter 2
Level switch 1 Level switch 2
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank (Option) LAHH Schlammtank Reserve Reserve (Option) Ventil Pneumatische
Füllstand max. / max. Füllstand max. / max. Spare Spare Schlammpumpe
(optional) LAHH sludge tank (optional) LAHH sludge tank (optional) valve pneumatic
level max. / max. level max. / max. sludge pump
Option B
applicable for
1 x LSHH + 1 x LSH Baumer
L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT
LOW 1 LOW 1 LOW 0 LOW 0 STUs
HIGH 0 HIGH 0 HIGH 1 HIGH 1 2024-1165-060
ALARM 0 ALARM 0 2025-1165-050
2026-1165-060
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1
2027-1165-050
/30.3 /30.3 /30.3 /30.3
DI0.6 DI0.7 DI0.5 DI0.4
X10 X10 X10 X10
DI a .6
13
DI a .7
14
DI a .5
12
DI a .4
11
24V DC
/ L+.X
/ M.X
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.2
X10
DQ a .2
6
-PE
11
12
10
14
13
15
16
17
18
1
-X2 -X2
WH
WH
BN
BN
BU
BU
BK
BK
3
1
PE
+ -
+ -
90_9_002 98_7_002
90_9_001 /24.7
-
/24.1 /24.3
Niveauschalter 1 Niveauschalter 2
2
4
2
DQ b .0
4
DQ b .1
5
DQ b .2
6
DQ a .7
10
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
-K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
22.4 / M.R
14 14 14 14 14
11 /20.8 11 /26.3 11 /26.4 11 /26.5 11 /26.7
12 12 12 12 12
24
21 /26.0
22
22
24
21
43
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
-K1 =0-Q1 =01-Q1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5
21
22
44
11
11
11
11
/26.1 /10.1 /13.8 /26.3 /26.4 /26.6 /26.7
PE PE PE PE PE
10
11
12
1
3
4
9
-X2 -X2
-WG001 -WG002 -WG003 -WG004 -WG005
.-J .-J .-J .-J .-J
5x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
=Customer+L-X =Heater
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
Kunde +L-X
-X -X -X -X -X -X
AI 1
6
AI 0-
5
AI 1-
7
AI 2-
5
AI 3-
7
AQ 0M
4
AQ 1M
6
11.9 / M.K M.K / 29.0
Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog
Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog
-P1
KTP400
X2 X61
Profibus Profinet USB
X1
POWER DC
SC
SC
A
A
B
B
24V
0V
PA
=0-PE
24V DC
11.9 / L+.T
11.9 / M.T
-PE
Ethernet / 29.0
SIMATIC
S7 1200
AQ90 - AQ92
DI0.0 - DI1.5 AI100 - AI102 AI110 - AI116 DI2.0 - DI2.7 DQ2.0 - DQ2.7
AI90 - AI92
RUN / STOP
ERROR
MAINT
DIAG
DIAG
DIAG
DIAG
SM 1231 SM 1234 SM 1221 SM 1222
GEA LV DC
DQ0.0 - DQ1.1 AI104 - AI106 AQ110 - AQ112 DI3.0 - DI3.7 DQ3.0 - DQ3.7
DQ a 4L+ /30.5
DQ a 4M /30.5
Ethernet Ethernet
DQ a L+ /34.5
DI b 3M /33.5
DI b 4M /33.5
DI a 1M /30.3
DI a 1M /33.5
DI a 2M /33.5
DQ a M /34.5
AQ 2M /30.3
AI 3M /30.3
AI L+ /32.5
AI M /32.5
24V DC 24V DC
L+ /31.5
X1 P1 X1 P2
M /31.5
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
L+
L+
M
M
X10:1
X10:2
X10:3
X10:4
X10:5
X10:6
X11:1
X11:4
X12:1
X12:2
X10:3
X10:1
X10:2
X10:3
X10:1
X10:2
X11:1
X10:3
X11:3
X12:3
X13:3
X11:1
X10:1
X10:2
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
24V DC -PE -PE -PE -PE -PE
11.9 / L+.K
27.9 / M.K
28.9 / Ethernet
-K1
X10:6 X12:1
0V /29.3 /29.4 24V
DI a 1M DQ a 4L+
Separator Betrieb X10:7 X12:2
=01-Q1:34 /14.1 DI0.0 /29.4 0V
Separator operation DI a .0 DQ a 4M
Separator Störung X10:8 X12:3 Zulaufventil
=01-F1:22 /14.2 DI0.1 DQ0.0 /18.1 =01-X2:12
Separator failure DI a .1 DQ a .0 Feed valve
Drehzahlüberwachung X10:9 X12:4 Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser
=01-T1:5 /15.2 DI0.2 DQ0.1 /18.4 =01-X2:15
Speed monitoring device DI a .2 DQ a .1 Displacem- and filling water
X10:10 X12:5 Steuerwasser
DI0.3 DQ0.2 /18.3 =01-X2:14
DI a .3 DQ a .2 Operating water
Reserve /24.5 X10:11 X12:6 Kreislaufventil
=16-X2:14 DI0.4 DQ0.3 /18.5 =01-X2:17
Spare /25.5 DI a .4 DQ a .3 Circulation valve
Reserve /24.4 X10:12 X12:7 Wasserabfuhrventil
=16-X2:10 DI0.5 DQ0.4 /18.6 =01-X2:18
Spare /25.4 DI a .5 DQ a .4 Water discharge valve
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. /24.1 X10:13 X12:8
=16-X2:2 DI0.6 DQ0.5
(optional) LAHH sludge tank level max. / max. /25.1 DI a .6 DQ a .5
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. /24.2 X10:14 X12:9
=16-X2:7 DI0.7 DQ0.6
(optional) LAHH sludge tank level max. / max. /25.2 DI a .7 DQ a .6
Zulaufpumpe Betrieb X10:15 X12:10 Erhitzerfreigabe
=11-K1:24 /21.1 DI1.0 DQ0.7 /26.7 =100-K5:A1
Feed pump operation DI b .0 DQ a .7 Heater release
Zulaufpumpe Störung X10:16 X12:11 Stellventil Auf
=11-Q1:98 /21.2 DI1.1 DQ1.0 /22.3 =11-K3:A1
Feed pump failure DI b .1 DQ b .0 Regulating valve open
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe X10:17 X12:12 Stellventil Zu
=01-X2:22 /19.3 DI1.2 DQ1.1 /22.4 =11-K4:A1
(optional) feed back sludge discharge flap DI b .2 DQ b .1 Regulating valve closed
Wasserabfuhr X10:18
=01-X2:10 /16.3 DI1.3
Water discharge DI b .3
(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung X10:19
=01-T1:7+ /17.3 DI1.4
(optional) NAHH separator vibration monitoring DI b .4
(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung X10:20
=01-X2:11 /17.4 DI1.5
(optional) NAHH separator vibration monitoring DI b .5
X11:1
0V /29.3
AQ 2M
X11:2
AQ90
AQ 0
X11:3
AQ92
AQ 1
X11:4
0V /29.3
AI 3M
Masse Analog X11:5
=0-T2:M' /27.1 AI90 V
Earth analog AI 0
Masse Analog X11:6
-K1:X11:5 /27.2 AI92 V
Earth analog AI 1
-K2
X10:1
/29.5 24V
L+
X10:2
/29.5 0V
M
X10:4 Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
/22.7
AI 0 M+ Min / max temperature monitoring
X10:5 Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
/22.7
AI 0 M- Min / max temperature monitoring
X10:6 Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
AI100 /22.6 =11-X2:3
AI 0 I+ Min / max temperature monitoring
X10:7 Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
/22.6
AI 0 I- Min / max temperature monitoring
-K3
X10:1
/29.6 24V
AI L+
X10:2
/29.6 0V
AI M
X10:4 Reinoel Ablaufdruck
AI110 /16.1 =01-X2:6
AI 0+ Clean-oil discharge pressure
V X10:5 Masse Analog
A /27.3
AI 0- Earth analog
X10:6 Schlammraumüberwachung
AI112 /16.2 =01-X2:8
AI 1+ Sludge room monitoring
V X10:7 Masse Analog
A /27.4
AI 1- Earth analog
X11:4
AI114
AI 2+
V X11:5 Masse Analog
A /27.4
AI 2- Earth analog
X11:6 FI Durchflussmessung
AI116 /23.1 =11-*0_9_002:2
AI 3+ FI flow measuring
V X11:7 Masse Analog
A /27.5
AI 3- Earth analog
-K4
X10:3
/29.7 0V
DI a 1M
X10:4
DI2.0
DI a .0
X10:5
DI2.1
DI a .1
X10:6
DI2.2
DI a .2
X10:7
DI2.3
DI a .3
X11:3
/29.7 0V
DI a 2M
X11:4
DI2.4
DI a .4
X11:5
DI2.5
DI a .5
X11:6
DI2.6
DI a .6
X11:7 Separator Not-Halt
DI2.7 /12.8 =0-K1:14
DI a .7 Separator emergency stop
X12:3
/29.7 0V
DI b 3M
X12:4
DI3.0
DI b .0
X12:5
DI3.1
DI b .1
X12:6
DI3.2
DI b .2
X12:7
DI3.3
DI b .3
X13:3
/29.8 0V
DI b 4M
X13:4
DI3.4
DI b .4
X13:5
DI3.5
DI b .5
X13:6
DI3.6
DI b .6
X13:7
DI3.7
DI b .7
-K5
X10:1
/29.9 24V
DQ a L+
X10:2
/29.9 0V
DQ a M
X10:4 Separator Start/Stop
DQ2.0 /14.1 =01-K1:A1
DQ a .0 Separator start/stop
X10:5 Zulaufpumpe Ein / Aus
DQ2.1 /21.1 =11-K2:A1
DQ a .1 Feed pump on / off
X10:6 /24.7 (Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe
DQ2.2 =16-X2:17
DQ a .2 /25.7 (optional) valve pneumatic sludge pump
X10:7
DQ2.3
DQ a .3
X11:4
DQ2.4
DQ a .4
X11:5
DQ2.5
DQ a .5
X11:6
DQ2.6
DQ a .6
X11:7 Sammelstörung
DQ2.7 /26.1 =100-K1:A1
DQ a .7 Common failure
X13:4
DQ3.4
DQ b .4
X13:5 (Option) Ventil Schlammablauf Klappe
DQ3.5 /19.2 =01-X2:20
DQ b .5 (optional) valve sludge discharge flap
X13:6
DQ3.6
DQ b .6
X13:7
DQ3.7
DQ b .7
30 mm
=0-M1
100 mm
TOUCH
320 mm
=00-P1
65 mm
F1 F2 F3 F4
Filter
filter
540 mm
=01-S1 =11-S1
800 mm
760 mm
110 mm
=0-Q1
TRIP. I
On
RESET
O =0-M1
Off
Maßstab 1:3,5 mm
Scale 1:3,5 mm
50 mm
Moutingplate
25x80
25x80
=0-T1
=01-T1
=01-F1
=100-K1
=100-K2
=100-K3
=100-K4
=100-K5
=11-K1
=01-K1
=11-K2
=11-K3
=11-K4
=0-K1
40x80
=100-X2
=16-X2
=00-K1
=00-K2
=00-K3
=00-K4
=00-K5
PE
25x80
40x80
40x80
=0-24M
=01-Q1
=0-T2
=01-B1
=11-Q1
=0-F1
=0-F2
25x80
Cable glands Yard cable size WS part-no..
=0-Q1
13x M16 5,0 - 10,0mm 0005-4486-930
9x M20 8,0 - 13,0mm 0005-4487-930
3x M16 Spare 0005-4442-900
40x80
=01-X1
=11-X1
=01-X2
=11-X2
=0-X1
PE
Bestell-nr.
0005-4760-400
order no.
Programm-Nr.
8107-0004-000...199
program-no.
TOUCH
160
Tiefe: 54mm
depth:
Ausschnittmass: 134x114mm
cutout dimension:
Gewicht: _,__kg
F1 F2 F3 F4 weight:
158
=Additions 71 mm
-S01
Not-Halt-Box
85 mm
54 mm
mm
ø5
85 mm
109 mm
M20
8-13mm Note: Installation should be carry out by customer!
18 mm
WDU1,5/ZZ
WDU1,5/ZZ
&EFS/11.6
&EFS/11.6
&EFS/11.6
Querverweis
Cross reference
X80:0V
PE
Ziel intern
=00-P1
Target internal -T2
-PE
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-24M
Klemmennummer
1
Terminal number
Steuerspannung DC
Control voltage DC
=
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=11-BP-P1
Editor
&EFS/20.7
Tested
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Betrieb Extern PE PE
PE
=11-WG005
PE
PE
(optional)feed pump operation external
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
=11-*0_3_001 &EFS/20.1
Zulaufpumpe PE
PE
25.08.2017
U1 =11-WD001
PE
PE
Feed pump AK 4
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
3
U1
V1
M
W1
V1
Kunde:
PE
Project:
Projekt:
W1
Customer:
-
-
2
=Customer+L-X &EFS/10.1
Einspeisung PE
PE
PE
-WD001
PE
PE
Incoming
_-J 4x4 mm²
-SC &EFS/10.3
Erdung Schirm PE
SC
SC
Earthing screen
-1M &EFS/10.6
Erdung Montageplatte 1 PE PE
PE
Earthing mounting plate 1 -PE
3
GN/YE
GN/YE
-1T &EFS/10.6
Erdung Tür 1 PE PE
PE
-1G &EFS/10.6
Erdung Gehäuse 1 PE PE
PE
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
-T1 &EFS/11.1
4
GND
Separator
Steuerspannung AC PE
GND
GEA Westfalia
Control voltage AC
GN/YE
GN/YE
-T2 &EFS/11.6
Steuerspannung DC PE PE
PE
Control voltage DC
GN/YE
GN/YE
-24M &EFS/11.6
= PE
2
2
GN/YE
GN/YE
Benennung/Description:
5
-X1 &EFS/11.2
Steuerspannung AC PE
6
6
Control voltage AC -PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-PE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-PE
=01-*0_1_001 &EFS/13.2
Separator PE
PE
=01-WD001
PE
PE
Separator -PE
_-J 4x4 mm²
PTC-Fühler Separator PE &EFS/13.3
PE
=01-WG003
PE
PE
V1
Θ
M
3~
V1
T1 W1
PE
W1
T2
-
T1
Sprache:
Language:
7
-M1 &EFS/11.2
Steuerspannung AC PE
PE
M
1~
PE N
de/en
N
-S01 &EFS/12.2
Not-Halt extern PE PE
Drawing No.:
PE
-WG001
PE
PE
=01+JB-1X10 PE &EFS/16.3
Wasserabfuhr PE
PE:PE
=01-WG004
PE
PE
Water discharge
PE
=01-*8_7_002 &EFS/18.2
Zulaufventil PE PE
PE
0505-0605-001
=01-WG010
PE
PE
DCC
=01-*4_7_001 &EFS/19.2
(Option) Ventil Schlammablauf Klappe PE PE
& EMA
PE
9
=01-WG012
PE
PE
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=01-*4_9_001
Editor
&EFS/19.3
Tested
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe PE PE
PE
=01-WG013
PE
PE
(optional) feed back sludge discharge flap -PE
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
=01+JB-1X10 PE &EFS/18.7
Wasserabfuhrventil PE
25.08.2017
PE:PE
=01-WG011
PE
PE
Water discharge valve -PE
PE
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
=11-*6_7_002 &EFS/22.2
Stellventil - Heizmedium PE
PE
PE
=11-WG002
PE
PE
Regulating valve - heating medium -PE
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
Customer:
-
-
=16-90_9_001 &EFS/24.2
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. PE PE
PE
=16-WG001
PE
PE
2
=Customer+L-X &EFS/26.2
Separator Betrieb PE
PE
PE
=100-WG001
PE
PE
Separator operation
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
=16-90_9_002 &EFS/24.3
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. PE PE
PE
=16-WG002
PE
PE
=Customer+L-X &EFS/26.3
Wasserschlossalarm (nur bei LO -0196) PE
PE
PE
=100-WG002
PE
PE
=16-98_7_002 &EFS/24.8
(Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe PE PE
PE
=16-WG005
PE
PE
=Customer+L-X &EFS/26.5
TAH Temperatur Alarm max PE
PE
=100-WG003
PE
PE
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
PE
&EFS/26.6
4
Separator
TAL Temperatur Alarm min PE
PE
=100-WG004
GEA Westfalia
PE
PE
=Heater+L-X &EFS/26.8
Erhitzerfreigabe PE
PE
PE
=100-WG005
PE
PE
Heater release
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1
PA PE
-PE
X80:PA
GN/YE
GN/YE
Benennung/Description:
5
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1
Spannungsversorgung 3 PE
X10:3
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-PE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-PE
=00-K2 &EFS/29.4
= 3 PE
X10:3
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
=00-K3 &EFS/29.5
= 3 PE
X10:3
-PE
6
GN/YE
GN/YE
=00-K4 &EFS/29.6
= 1 PE
X11:1
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
- =00-K5 &EFS/29.8
= 1 PE
X11:1
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0605-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/23.1
&EFS/10.3
&EFS/16.1
&EFS/16.2
&EFS/22.7
Querverweis
Cross reference
Ziel intern
Target internal -SC
-SC
-SC
-SC
-SC
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-SC
Klemmennummer
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
Terminal number
PE SC
PE SC
-PE
=11-X2
Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
Min / max temperature monitoring
Clean-oil discharge pressure
Schlammraumüberwachung
Sludge room monitoring
FI Durchflussmessung
Reinoel Ablaufdruck
FI flow measuring
Earthing screen
Erdung Schirm
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
&EFS/11.0
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.2
&EFS/12.1
&EFS/12.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
vb
PE
21
13
Ziel intern
=01-F1
Target internal
-S01
-M1
-T1
-PE
-F2
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-X1
Klemmennummer
1
8
Terminal number
RDWHU 1 2
RDWHU 1 2
N L PE 21 22
N
L
21
M
1~
PE
22
-M1
-S01
Emergency stop external
Steuerspannung AC
Control voltage AC
Not-Halt extern
Reserve
Spare
=
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
6
Ziel intern
Target internal -Q1
-Q1
-Q1
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-XQ1
Klemmennummer
2
Terminal number
1 2 3
_-J 4x4 mm²
-WD001
1 2 3
L1 L2 L3
L1
=Customer+L-X
Einspeisung
Incoming
=
WDU4
WDU4
WDU4
&EFS/13.1
&EFS/13.1
&EFS/13.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
6
Ziel intern
Target internal -Q1
-Q1
-Q1
Brücken
Bridges
=01+-X1
Klemmennummer
1
Terminal number
1 2 3
_-J 4x4 mm²
-WD001
1 2 3
U1 V1 W1 T2 T1 PE
W1
U1
V1
PE
M
3~
Θ
T2
T1
-*0_1_001
Separator
Separator
=
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*0_1_001
Editor
&EFS/13.3
Tested
PTC-Fühler Separator 1
T1
1
1
PTC-feeler separator -F1 T1 WDU2,5
TE
= -WG003 2 &EFS/13.3
T2
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
1
2
2
T2 U1
-F1 T2 WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
U1
25.08.2017
V1
Θ
M
3~
T1 W1
V1
PE
W1
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
PE
Customer:
-
-
2
+JB-1X10 &EFS/15.2
Drehzahlüberwachung 3
1
1
1
2
2
2
-T1 2- WDU2,5
Reinoel Ablaufdruck 5 &EFS/16.1
4
3
3
3
4
4
1
Sludge room monitoring WDU2,5
3
= 8 &EFS/16.2
6
5
5
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
-*8_7_002 - + &EFS/18.1
4
Separator
Zulaufventil 12
+
1
1
GEA Westfalia
Feed valve =00-K1 X12:3 WDU2,5
-WG010 &EFS/18.1
-
=0-24M 1 WDU2,5
+JB-1X10 &EFS/18.3
Steuerwasser 14
12
2
2
Benennung/Description:
= 16
5
WDU2,5
12
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+-X2
Water discharge valve =00-K1 X12:7 WDU2,5
WDU2,5
-*4_7_001 - + &EFS/19.2
(Option) Ventil Schlammablauf Klappe 20
+
1
1
=00-K5 X13:5
6
=16-X2 3 WDU2,5
-*4_9_001 &EFS/19.3
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe 22
13
1
1
0505-0605-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
46
=01+JB-1X10
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*9_7_004
Editor
&EFS/18.3
Tested
Steuerwasser PE PE
PE
-WG105
PE
PE
Operating water -PE
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
+SB-1X20 PE &EFS/16.3
Wasserabfuhr PE
25.08.2017
PE:PE
-WG121
PE
PE
Water discharge =0-PE PE
PE
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
-*0_9_020 &EFS/15.2
Drehzahlüberwachung - + 1
+
Speed monitoring device -X2 3
BN
BN
Kunde:
-WG101 &EFS/15.2
Project:
Projekt:
-
= .-O 2x0,34 mm² 2
Customer:
-
-
-X2 4
BU
BU
2
+SB-1X20 &EFS/16.1
Reinoel Ablaufdruck 3
1
1
1
2
2
2
-X2 5
= 5 &EFS/16.1
1
-WG121
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
Schlammraumüberwachung 6 &EFS/16.2
4
3
3
5
4
4
-*1_9_012 &EFS/17.1
(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung 8
1
= 9 &EFS/17.3
3
BK
BK
= -WG104 10 &EFS/17.4
4
= 11 &EFS/17.1
2
BU
BU
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia
-*9_7_004 - + &EFS/18.3
Steuerwasser 12
+
-WG105 &EFS/18.3
-
-*9_7_005 - + &EFS/18.4
-
-WG106 &EFS/18.4
Benennung/Description:
= 15
+
-X2 15
BN
BN
+SB-1X20 &EFS/18.5
Kreislaufventil 16
8
1
1
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+JB-1X10
2
2
= -WG122 18 &EFS/18.6
11
-X2 18
= PE &EFS/18.7
PE:PE
PE
PE
=0-PE PE
6
-*9_7_005 &EFS/18.4
Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser PE PE
PE
-WG106
PE
PE
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0605-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
47
=01+SB-1X20
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*1_9_002
I
1
Editor
&EFS/16.1
Tested
Reinoel Ablaufdruck 1
2
Clean-oil discharge pressure +JB-1X10 3
WH
WH
TE
= 2
-WG201 2 &EFS/16.1
1
.-O 2x0,34 mm²
1
+JB-1X10 4
BK
BK
MIL/PLE
25.08.2017
-*0_9_014
I
1 &EFS/16.2
Schlammraumüberwachung 3
1
BK
BK
Sludge room monitoring
= 2
-WG202 4 &EFS/16.2
2
.-O 2x0,34 mm²
+JB-1X10 6
P
WH
WH
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
Customer:
-
-
-*0_9_013 &EFS/16.3
Wasserabfuhr +
5
A/Q
+JB-1X10 7
2
BK
BK
Water discharge
= A/Q 6 &EFS/16.3
+
-WG203
BN
BN
-
= 7
GY
GY
-*0_7_010 - + &EFS/18.5
Kreislaufventil 8
+
Circulation valve +JB-1X10 16
BN
BN
-WG204 &EFS/18.5
-
= .-J 3x0,75 mm² 9
BU
BU
3
-*0_7_011 - + &EFS/18.7
-
Wasserabfuhrventil 10
Water discharge valve +JB-1X10 17
BU
BU
= -WG205 11 &EFS/18.6
+
-*0_7_010 &EFS/18.6
Kreislaufventil PE PE
PE
-WG204
PE
PE
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia
-*0_7_011 &EFS/18.7
Wasserabfuhrventil PE PE
PE
-WG205
PE
PE
Benennung/Description:
5
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+SB-1X20
Terminal connecting plan =01+SB-1X20
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0605-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
48
=11+-X1
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*0_3_001
Editor
&EFS/20.1
Tested
Zulaufpumpe 1
U1
1
1
Feed pump U1 -Q1 2 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/20.1
V1
3
V1
1
2
2
-WD001 -Q1 4
M
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
= W1 3 &EFS/20.1
25.08.2017
W1
3
3
-Q1 6 WDU2,5
PE
PE
-*6_7_002
Kunde:
&EFS/22.1
Project:
Projekt:
Stellventil - Heizmedium 4
1
1
1
Customer:
-
-
Regulating valve - heating medium WDU2,5
= 5 &EFS/22.1
1
2
2
2/14
-WG002 -K3 14
2
3
3
3/11
-K4 14 WDU2,5
= 7 &EFS/22.1
=0-X1 7 WDU2,5
-BP-S1 &EFS/20.5
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Stop Extern 8
21
1
1
22
2
2
WDU2,5
3
-BP-S2 &EFS/20.6
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Start Extern 13
10
3
3
-K1 14 WDU2,5
-BP-P1 &EFS/20.6
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Betrieb Extern 12
X1
5
5
=0-X1 6 WDU2,5
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description:
5
Klemmenanschlussplan =11+-X1
Terminal connecting plan =11+-X1
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0605-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
49
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
&EFS/22.5
&EFS/22.5
&EFS/22.6
&EFS/22.6
&EFS/22.7
&EFS/23.1
&EFS/23.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
X11:6
X11:7
X10:6
X10:7
SC
23
X11:6
Ziel intern
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K3
=01-X2
=0-SC
Target internal
Brücken
Bridges
=11+-X2
Klemmennummer
SC
1
6
Terminal number
1 2 3 4 WH BK
.CY-O 4x1,5 mm²
-WG004
1 2 3 4 WH BK
1 2 3 4 1 2
1
2
1
I
P
2
-*0_9_006
-*0_9_002
Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
Min / max temperature monitoring
Produkt Temperaturregelung
Product temperature control
FI Durchflussmessung
FI flow measuring
=
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-90_9_001
Editor
&EFS/24.1
Tested
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. 1
3
1
1
(optional) LAHH sludge tank level max. / max. 2 3 =11-X2 5 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/24.1
2
1
2
2
1 -WG001 =00-K1 X10:13 WDU2,5
-
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
MIL/PLE
= 3 &EFS/24.1
25.08.2017
3
3
=01-X2 21 WDU2,5
= 4 &EFS/24.1
WDU2,5
-90_9_002 &EFS/24.3
= 5
1
1
1
2 3 WDU2,5
Kunde:
&EFS/24.3
Project:
Projekt:
= 6
3
2
2
Customer:
-WG002
-
-
1 WDU2,5
-
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
= 7 &EFS/24.2
2
3
3
=00-K1 X10:14
2
WDU2,5
= 8 &EFS/24.3
WDU2,5
Reserve 9 &EFS/24.4
Spare WDU2,5
= 10 &EFS/24.4
=00-K1 X10:12 WDU2,5
= 11 &EFS/24.4
WDU2,5
= 12 &EFS/24.4
WDU2,5
3
= 13 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
= 14 &EFS/24.5
=00-K1 X10:11 WDU2,5
= 15 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
= 16 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
-98_7_002 - + &EFS/24.7
(Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe 17
+
1
1
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
-WG005 &EFS/24.7
4
Separator
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 18
2
2
GEA Westfalia
WDU2,5
Benennung/Description:
5
Klemmenanschlussplan =16+-X2
Terminal connecting plan =16+-X2
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0605-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
51
=100+-X2
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=Customer+L-X
Editor
&EFS/26.1
Tested
Sammelstörung 1
1
1
Common failure -K1 21 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/26.1
1
2
2
-K1 24 WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
Separator Betrieb -WG001 3 &EFS/26.2
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
25.08.2017
3
3
Separator operation =01-Q1 44 WDU2,5
= 4 &EFS/26.2
4
4
=01-Q1 43 WDU2,5
Wasserschlossalarm (nur bei LO -0196) 5 &EFS/26.3
1
1
Water seal broken alarm (only at LO -0196) -K2 11 WDU2,5
Kunde:
-WG002 &EFS/26.3
Project:
Projekt:
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 6
2
2
Customer:
-
-
-K2 14 WDU2,5
TAH Temperatur Alarm max 7 &EFS/26.4
1
1
-K3 11
2
2
2
-K3 14 WDU2,5
TAL Temperatur Alarm min 9 &EFS/26.6
1
1
2
2
-K4 14 WDU2,5
=Heater+L-X &EFS/26.7
Erhitzerfreigabe 11
1
1
= -WG005 12 &EFS/26.7
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
2
2
-K5 14 WDU2,5
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description:
5
Klemmenanschlussplan =100+-X2
Terminal connecting plan =100+-X2
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
0505-0605-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kabelübersicht
Cable layout
Adern
Kabelname /Seite.Pfad Quelle (von) Ziel (bis) Kabeltyp Adern gesamt
verwendet
Querschnitt Länge Verschraubung / Klemmbereich Bemerkung
Cable name /page.path Source (from) Target (to) Cable type Wires total Cross-section Length Cable gland / clamping range Remark
Wires used
=11-BP-P1;=11-BP-S1
=11-WG005 &EFS/20.5 =0-PE;=11-X1 .-J 7x 7 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=11-BP-S2
Kabelübersicht
Cable layout
Adern
Kabelname /Seite.Pfad Quelle (von) Ziel (bis) Kabeltyp Adern gesamt
verwendet
Querschnitt Länge Verschraubung / Klemmbereich Bemerkung
Cable name /page.path Source (from) Target (to) Cable type Wires total Cross-section Length Cable gland / clamping range Remark
Wires used
PE
+JB-1X10
PE
PE
=01-X2 PE PE
PE
1
1 brown
N Drehzahlueberwachung
1
2
2
-WG004
+SB-1X20
3
7x1,5mm² 3 1
2
3
M20 (8-13mm) 1 white PSL/H Reinoel
4
-WG121 P
1
2x0,34mm² Ablaufdruck
4 4 2 5x1,5mm² -WG201 PSL/H clean oil
+
+
+ 2 black
5
M16 (5-10mm) + I
+
discharge pressure
3 +
6
+
black
+ P
+
3
2x0,34mm² SMS Schlammraumueberwachung
5 3 SMS sludge space monitoring
-WG202
7
6
+ 3 white
I
4
6 4
5
8
S
4 black
S
5
brown Wasserabfuhr
+
+
9
8
+ brown 3x0,75mm²
+ water monitoring system
+
-WG203
6 black
+ Vibro PCH1220
10
+
grey
-
7
4x0,25mm²
-
vibro PCH1220
-WG104 PCH
1 white
10
1
11
1 brown
-WG122
8
Kreislaufventil
3x0,75mm²
blue 4x1,5mm² circulation valve
11
- -WG204
12
-
blue
M16 (5-10mm) -
-
2 brown
12
13
- Steuerwasser 2 blue
10
3x1,5mm² -
-
-WG011 operating water 3x0,75mm² Wasserabfuhrventil
blue -WG105
water discharge valve
13
2 - -WG205
7x1,5mm²
14
3
-
brown
11
M20 (8-13mm) blue
14
3 - PE
15
PE
-
Verdraengungs-u. fuellwasser
PE
3x1,5mm²
-WG106 displacem. a. filling water
3 brown
15
16
- PE PE
PE
4 1
16
4
17
6 2
17
5 -
18
5 3
18
6
19
PE PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE-BUS
Bestell-Nr.:0005-1827-280
order-no.:0005-1827-280
FU
FC
=..-U.
Generelle Information zum Potentialausgleich.
Die Informationen auf diesem Blatt sind nicht
kundenspezifisch angepasst.
IP54
PE-Schiene
protective earth - rail
IDM
≥25 mm²
GN YE
≥10 mm²
GN YE
PA
Potentialausgleichsschiene
equipotential bonding strip
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
≥10 mm²
GN YE
equipotential bonding building
Potentialausgleich Gebäude
≥25 mm²
GN YE
Fundamenterder
foundation earth
Stückliste
Parts list
Funktionszeichen /Seite.Pfad WS Teil-Nr Hersteller Bestell-Nr. Bezeichnung Hersteller
Function sign /page.path WS part-no. Manufacturer order no.. Name Manufacturer
Stückliste
Parts list
Funktionszeichen /Seite.Pfad WS Teil-Nr Hersteller Bestell-Nr. Bezeichnung Hersteller
Function sign /page.path WS part-no. Manufacturer order no.. Name Manufacturer
=01-X1 &EFS/13.1 0005-3504-890 1020100000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 4 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal
=01-X2 &EFS/13.3; 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=01-K1 &EFS/14.1 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=01-T1 &EFS/15.1 0005-4509-010 7505501 Schaltverstärker Turck
Amplifier
=0-PE &EFS/20.1 0404017 404017 Einspeiseklemme, Belastungsstrom: 41 A, Querschnitt: 0,5 mm² - 6 mm², Breite: 7 mm, Phoenix Contakt
Power terminal block, Load current : 41 A, Cross section: 0.5 mm² - 6 mm², Width: 7 mm,
=11-K1 &EFS/20.7 0005-4033-120 2967099 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 2 Wechsler, Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact, 230 VAC/220 VDC
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-000 LUB12 Motorabgang Grundgerät - 12A AC-43, 440V Groupe Schneider
Motor outlet of basic unit - 12 A AC-43, 440 V
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-120 LUCA05FU Steuereinheit Standard LUCA, 1,25...5A, 110/220VAC/DC, Class 10 Groupe Schneider
Control unit, standard LUCA, 1,25...5A, 110/220VAC/DC, Class 10
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-310 LUA1C20 Hilfsschaltermodul MSS LUA, 2S Groupe Schneider
Aux. switch module, MSS LUA, 2 NO.
=11-S1 &EFS/20.7 0005-0082-190 3SB3100-8AC21-BC Doppeldrucktaster komplett, tastend, grün/rot, 1x1NO+1x1NC Siemens
Double push button complete
=11-X1 &EFS/20.1; 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=11-K2 &EFS/21.1 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=11-K3 &EFS/22.3 0005-4033-140 2967604 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais, für hohe Einschaltströme, 1 Schließer Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact
=11-K4 &EFS/22.4 0005-4033-140 2967604 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais, für hohe Einschaltströme, 1 Schließer Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact
=11-X2 &EFS/22.5.. 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=16-X2 &EFS/24.1.. 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=100-K1 &EFS/26.1 0005-4033-080 2967060 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 2 Wechsler, Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact
=100-K2 &EFS/26.3 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=100-K3 &EFS/26.4 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
Date 25.08.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: Rev.00 =
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Stückliste
Tested TE - Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 59
Project: Parts list
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0605-001 & EPB 61 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
Funktionszeichen /Seite.Pfad WS Teil-Nr Hersteller Bestell-Nr. Bezeichnung Hersteller
Function sign /page.path WS part-no. Manufacturer order no.. Name Manufacturer
=100-K4 &EFS/26.6 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=100-K5 &EFS/26.7 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=100-X2 &EFS/26.1.. 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1 0005-4760-010 6AV2124-5DC00-0AC0 Touchpanel KTP400 Comfort, 4" Farb-Display, 24VDC Siemens
Touch panel KTP400 Comfort
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1 0005-3668-100 6AV2181-8XP00-0AX0 Speicherkarte, 2 GByte, SD Siemens
Memory card, 2 GByte, SD
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 Zentralbaugruppe, SIMATIC S7-1200, CPU 1215C, 14DI/10DO/2AI/2AO Siemens
CPU module
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 0005-4278-060 6XV1850-2GH20 SIMATIC NET, IND. ETHERNET TP CORD RJ45/RJ45, LAENGE 2 M Siemens
SIMATIC NET, IND. ETHERNET TP CORD
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 Speicherkarte, 12 MByte, MMC Siemens
Memory card, 12 MByte, MMC
=00-K2 &EFS/29.4 0005-4281-060 6ES7231-5PD30-4AC0 Analog Eingangsmodul, SM 1231, 4AI Siemens
Analog module input
=00-K3 &EFS/29.5 0005-4281-100 6ES7234-4HE32-0XB0 Analogein-/ausgabe, SM 1234, 4AE/2AA, U/I, 13/14BIT Siemens
Analoge module in-/output
=00-K4 &EFS/29.6 0005-4280-040 6ES7221-1BH32-0XB0 Digital Eingangsmodul, SM 1221, 16DI Siemens
Digital input module
=00-K5 &EFS/29.8 0005-4280-060 6ES7222-1BH32-0XB0 Digital Ausgangsmodul, SM 1222, 16 DO, 24VDC/0,5A Siemens
Digital output module
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 0005-0058-500 1058500 Kompakt-Schaltschrank AE, lackiert RAL 7035, mit Montageplatte, eintürig Rittal
Compact enclosure AE, painted RAL 7035, with mount. plate, single door
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 0005-1412-000 2519000 Türarretierung für das AE Programm Rittal
Door stay for the AE range
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 AKZ, Kabelcenter AKZ, Kabelcenter Aderkennzeichnung, Kabelcenter Plenge
Wire marking, cable center
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 8556-9999-000 KLEINMATERIAL Kleinmaterial Schaltschrank Plenge
Incidentals control cabinet
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0005-4486-930 70-16-060-000-10-041 Verschraubung Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7032, halogenfrei, d=5-10mm Jacob
Screw connection polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7032, halogen free, 5-10mm
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0013-0130-900 50.216 PA7035 Gegenmutter Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7035 Jacob
Counter nut polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7035
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0005-4487-930 70-20-060-000-13-041 Verschraubung Polyamid, M20x1,5, RAL 7032, halogenfrei, d=8-13mm Jacob
Screw connection polyamide, M20x1,5, RAL 7032, halogen free, 8-13mm
Date 25.08.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: Rev.00 =
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Stückliste
Tested TE - Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 60
Project: Parts list
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0605-001 & EPB 61 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
Funktionszeichen /Seite.Pfad WS Teil-Nr Hersteller Bestell-Nr. Bezeichnung Hersteller
Function sign /page.path WS part-no. Manufacturer order no.. Name Manufacturer
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0013-0131-900 50.220 PA7035 Gegenmutter Polyamid, M20x1,5, RAL 7035 Jacob
Counter nut polyamide, M20x1,5, RAL 7035
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0005-4442-900 81-16-866-0000-04 Blindstopfen Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7035 Jacob
Blanking plug polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7035
=Additions &ELU/36.9 0830407 0830407 Kabelmarker, weiß, Schriftfeldgröße: 40 x 12 mm Phoenix Contakt
Cable marker
=Additions &ELU/36.9 8555-9001-040 8555-9001-040 Betriebsanleitung IO, englisch WS Mineraloil Systems
Instruction manual IO
No. 2066-9001-200
Edition 0410
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving
the documentation. They can be addressed to:
Type S/N:
Year of manufacture
-1
Max. admissible rated bowl speed in min
3
Max. admissible density in kg/dm of product
Heavy 3
liquid kg/dm
3 Solids kg/dm
3
Min/max throughput m /h
Note: • This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-
mation which help to better understand the separator or plant compo-
nents and the processes.
1 Safety precautions 9
2 Machine description 37
3 Operation 67
1 Safety precautions
Any operating mode deviating from this is not intended use and can result
in severe damage to property and persons!
Fig. 2
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Fig. 7
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
CAUTION:
The parts marked in this way can carry voltage even when the main
switch is off!
• Lock the separator/plant to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.
• Take adequate preventive measures according to the national provisions (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein
Deutscher Elektriker / Association of German Electrical Engineers) or of the
local electric power company.
• The work may only be carried out by competent persons (qualified technical
specialists).
CAUTION:
The circuits marked in this way can
carry voltage even when the main
switch is off!
Fig. 10 Example 1
Fig. 11 Example 2
No te :
Orange coloured leads are fitted as standard at GEA Westfalia Separator.
Different colour leads can be fitted if requested by the customer!
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Under the influence of the centrifugal forces, separation of the liquid mixture
and/or ejection of the solids particles takes place most rapidly.
The specifically heavier components are displaced to the bowl periphery,
whereas the specifically lighter components are displaced towards the centre of
the bowl.
The high centrifugal force is produced by very high bowl speeds. On the one
hand, high bowl speeds signify high efficiency, while on the other hand, they
signify high material stressing of the separator.
Fig. 14
CAUTION!
Operating, maintenance or repair work by unqualified or unauthorized
personnel can lead to operating, assembly and handling errors and severe
damage to persons and property.
For operation, maintenance and repair work, personnel may only be deployed
• are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
• are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
ing.
1.5.3 Assembly
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
Fig. 18
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
CAUTION:
A loose lock ring can endanger life!
marks!
Fig. 23
CAUTION:
A loose spindle screw can endanger
life!
Fig. 24
CAUTION:
A loose centripetal pump lock ring
or cover can endanger life!
Fig. 25
Fig. 26
Fig. 27
Fig. 29
Fig. 30
Fig. 31
Fig. 32
Fig. 33
Fig. 34
1.5.6 Start-up
Fig. 35
Fig. 36
Fig. 37
Fig. 38
Fig. 39
Fig. 40
Fig. 41
Fig. 42
Fig. 43
Fig. 44
Fig. 45
Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out to the extent described in
this instruction manual.
Maintenance and repair work not described in this manual may only be
carried out by the manufacturer or by "repair shops" authorized by the
manufacturer.
We, therefore, recommend in your own interest to have your separator inspect-
ed by our service engineers at regular intervals. These checks help to maintain
the operating safety and avoid unexpected downtime.
Fig. 46
Fig. 47
Fig. 48
Fig. 49
Fig. 50
Fig. 51
• All load suspension devices have to be checked for completeness and for
possible damage at least once a year.
• In addition, when using load suspension devices and hoists, the applicable
legislation and safety rules have to be strictly observed.
• Special tools (e.g. compressing, assembly devices, pin spanners) may only
be used for their intended purpose, i.e. the work routines as described in this
instruction manual.
• Before using the standard and special tools supplied, check them for damage
and completeness.
Make sure that
– all moving parts are correctly aligned and not seized.
– that no parts are broken and that there is otherwise no damage which could
affect the operation of the tool.
• Have damaged tools repaired by specialists before using them again.
– Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator. Otherwise, the
safety of the tool can be impaired.
• Keep the tools clean and keep them in a dry, safe place.
Properly maintained and cleaned tools work more precisely and can be
checked better.
Fig. 52
1.6 Corrosion
Corrosion can also affect bowl parts made of stainless steel. This corrosion can
be flat-spread or pit- or crack-shaped and merits special attention.
Corrosion on stainless steel bowl material should be examined thoroughly and
documented.
Flat-spread corrosion can usually be measured (reduction of wall thickness)
Pit- or crack-shaped corrosion cannot be measured without the risk of damage.
At the initial stage pit-shaped corrosion is generally caused by chlorine ions.
Depending on the stressing of the part, pit-shaped corrosion can result in crack-
shaped corrosion.
Fig. 53
Pittings
Pittings which are close together or
form a linear pattern can signify crack
formation beneath the surface.
Such pittings should be investigated by
a materials expert.
Fig. 54
1.7 Erosion
Erosion is caused by solid particles in the process liquid.
These solid particles grind marks into the surfaces with which they come into
contact.
The following factors favour the occurrence of erosion:
• hard solids particles
• high throughput capacities
The first signs of erosion should be carefully observed and documented. Ero-
sion can deepen rapidly, thereby weakening the bowl material.
Fig. 55
1) the bottom of the distributor, the rising channels and the ribs,
2) the centripetal pump (cavitation),
3) all surfaces in the area of the solids discharge ports,
4) the nozzles.
Fig. 56
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils
As a result of the deterioration in quality of fuel oils, the danger has arisen that the heavy oils used on
board contain greater amounts of substances injurious to health. These include:
- polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons,
- lead compounds,
- chemical residues.
An increased amount of polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons is also present in used lube oils (waste oils).
The health hazards for the engine room staff depend to a large extent
• on the concentrations of the dangerous substances,
• the ambient air (inhalation of oil vapours/oil mist),
• the intensity and duration of the contact with the skin or mucous membrane.
2 Machine description
Centre of gravity
Solids discharge
Product discharge
Product feed
Solids discharge
Water discharge / operating water
discharge
Centre of gravity
Product discharge
Product feed
Product discharge
Product feed
Solids discharge
Terminal box
Water discharge
Operating water discharge
The separator foundation must not have contact with the foundations of other units (e.g.
auxiliary diesel engines, pumps) to avoid damage to roller bearings.
Fig. 59
2.3 General
The machine described in this manual is a high-speed centrifugal separator with
self-cleaning bowl.
"Separation" means the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liq-
uids, with simultaneous removal of the solids contained in the liquids.
"Clarification" is the removal of solids from a liquid.
Prerequisite for treatment technology (separation) is that the components of the
product
– can be separated mechanically,
– have different densities and
– do not emulsify.
• is used for clarification and separation in fuel and lube oil treatment plants.
• operates with regulating rings (see section 2.6).
The bowl is automatically opened and closed for desludging at full bowl speed
by means of a remote controlled solenoid valve (17) in the operating water line.
The opening time of the solenoid valve is up to 3 seconds.
The control and monitoring unit (8) ensures unmanned operation.
Fig. 63
2.8).
Fig. 64
system.
2.5.2 Bowl
Fig. 65
4 Solids holding space collects the solids separated in the disk stack.
Fig. 66
• is axially movable.
other bowl parts,
• is axially movable.
other bowl parts,
Fig. 67
After starting the separator the solenoid valve for operating liquid is actuated
with the aid of the control unit, and the bowl is closed as follows:
chamber 6.
This initiates closing of the bowl.
Fig. 68
The solenoid valve for operating liquid is opened with the aid of the control unit,
and the ejection cycle is triggered as follows:
• rises and
• empties closing chamber 6.
2 Annular piston
2.5.4 Drive
Fig. 69
Important!
– The driving effect of new clutch shoes will
improve after several starts.
– Smoking of the centrifugal clutch during the
first few starts is perfectly normal and will dis-
appear after a short time of operation.
– Wear to the clutch shoes depends on the
number of starts and the ejection frequency
(see section 4.3.1).
Fig. 70
Manual override A
1 closed
2 open
Fig. 71
SW = jaw span
Fig. 72
Technical data
• Note the specifications on the nameplate of the solenoid valve block and
ATTENTION:
• Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.
• Refer to the instruction manual and nameplate of the solenoid valve block.
ATTENTION:
The inner diameter of the regulating ring to be selected can be determined from
0,79 – 0,81 76
0,82 – 0,85 73
0,86 – 0,89 70
0,90 – 0,94 68
0,95 – 0,97 64
0,98 – 0,991 62
Important!
If light liquid discharges through the heavy liquid discharge, the next smaller
regulating ring must be fitted.
Effect:
– The discharging clean oil is free of
water.
– The discharging water is free of oil.
Fig. 74
Fig. 75
Effect:
– The discharging clean oil contains
water.
– The discharging water is free of oil.
Fig. 76
Note:
Refer to the circuit diagram in the control cabinet and the manual of the control
system.
Factory settings
Product discharge Water discharge
Pressure transmitter Pressure transmitter
PT1 PT2
PAL PAH PAH
(1) (2)
1.0 bar 3.0 bar 1.0 bar
(1)
The product discharge pressure on the pressure gauge (separator) must be 0.5 to
1 bar above the switching point.
(2)
The product discharge pressure on the pressure gauge (separator) must be 0.5 to
1 bar below the switching point.
Technical data
Voltage 24 V DC
Range 0 – 16 bar
Output signal 4 – 20 mA
Pressure connection G 1/4in outer (O-ring seal)
Tightening torque
Pressure connection max. 25 Nm
Connector plug M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Cable PUR-2 core, 1.5 m
Cable box M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Pin1-, white; Pin4+, black
Enclosure IP 67
Working temperature
-40 to +125 °C (-40 to +257 °F)
Medium temperature
signals.
2 Terminal box • is mounted at the lower part of the frame.
Vibration monitoring • is installed in the control cabinet.
• evaluates the signals coming from the vibra-
3
unit
tion pickup.
The evaluation of the signal – depending on the version – takes place
in the control cabinet, on the control unit or directly on the vibration
pickup.
When the limit value or values are exceeded, an alarm and follow-up
measures are triggered and the separator motor switches off automati-
cally.
The operating status can be read off on the control unit.
ATTENTION!
Fig. 79
ATTENTION!
Pay attention to the terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the
refer to the instruction manual of the control unit.
Fig. 80
Flowmeter – Scale: 0 – 10
Inner diameter of orifice
Throughput capacity
plate
[l/h] [mm]
300 – 600 4
600 – 1 000 5
1 000 – 1 400 6
1 400 – 1 800 7
1 800 – 2 300 8
2 300 – 3 500 no orifice plate
Procedure:
• Read the value on the scale of flowmeter 2 (see Fig. 80).
e.g. 3
• From the value read from the scale (e.g. 3) draw a line up to the curve of the
inner diameter of the built-in orifice plate A (e.g. Ø 6).
• Read the throughput rate B appearing vertically below:
e.g. 1.06 (= 1060 l/h)
Bowl
3
Solids holding space (total) 0.5 dm
–1
Speed 12 000 min
– for densities of the product up to
3 o (see name-plate)
0.991 kg/dm (at 15 C) and
– for densities of the separated solids up to
3
1.4 kg/dm
Speed for higher densities contact the factory
Centripetal pump
Output (depending on medium) 3 000 l/h
Pressure head 1 – 2 bar
Operating water
DO 20 °C (68 °F)
LO 90 °C (194 °F)
LO HD 95 °C (203 °F)
Motor
Power rating 50 Hz 4 kW
60 Hz 4.6 kW
Design IM V1
Enclosure IP 55
Drive 50/60 Hz
Oil filling approx. 1 l
Oil quality, see section 4.3.3
Weights
Separator (with motor, without bowl) 110 kg
Bowl 30 kg
Motor 47 kg
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note
3 Operation
Procedure:
• Select the desired operating mode on the control unit.
• Set the separating time on the control unit.
• Start the separator (see 3.2).
Displacement
• When separating, the loss of feed liquid unavoidable during ejection can be
reduced to a minimum by displacing the feed liquid with water before sludge
ejection takes place (especially important when processing valuable feed liq-
uid).
• The duration of displacement water supply is given in the timer overview (see
control unit manual).
• If the displacement time is too long, water will discharge through the light liq-
uid outlet.
• If the displacement time is too short, part of the product remains in the bowl
and is lost during desludging.
Flush ejection
If the solids cant be completely ejected,
– due to an excessively long dwell time in the bowl or
– are stuck too firmly on the wall of the solids holding space due to the solids
properties,
• either the separating time must be shortened or
• a flush ejection must be carried out after the total ejection by filling the bowl
with water or product and emptying it again.
Program control
• "Displacement", "ejection" and "flush ejections" at precisely defined intervals
are best carried out with the automatic control unit.
• The clean oil discharge and water discharge can be monitored.
• Faults can be signalled visually or audibly.
Note:
• Safety precautions in chapter 1.
• Instruction manual of the corresponding control unit.
• Instructions “Settings and malfunctions”
• Instruction manuals for other auxiliary equipment
• Process-related deviations are possible
(refer to the order-specific operating data sheet!)
ATTENTION!
In order not to endanger the operating safety of the separator, keep
to the recommended maintenance intervals.
If the bowl has been out of operation for longer than 6 months (e.g. due
• Replace if necessary.
“Maintenance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest”).
If the separator has been out of operation for longer than 12 months (e.g.
(table “Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the lat-
• Replace if necessary.
est).
Ensure that
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean.
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
• the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.3.3.
• the bowl height is correct (see section 4.7.1).
• the bowl can be rotated by hand.
• the machine is correctly assembled.
– Tighten the bowl top securely (left-hand thread).
– Tighten the centripetal pump chamber lock ring securely (left-hand
thread).
• the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5).
• the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.5).
• the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).
• the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5).
Important!
• Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
signs of aging and mechanical damage.
• Damaged plant components must be replaced immediately by new parts.
Ensure that
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean.
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
• the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.3.3.
• the machine is correctly assembled.
– Tighten the bowl top securely (left-hand thread).
– Tighten the centripetal pump chamber lock ring securely (left-hand
thread).
• the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5).
• the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.5).
• the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).
• the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5).
• the supervisory equipment is complete, mechanically and electrically func-
tional.
• the product and supply lines are ready-for-operation.
– Pay attention to the air and water pressures (see order-specific operating
data sheet).
• the product heating devices are ready for operation (option).
– Pay attention to the volumes, pressure and temperature (see order-specific
operating data sheet).
• the plant components such as valves, water pressure reducer, compressed
air control unit etc. are operational.
• the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
• Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
signs of aging and mechanical damage.
• Damaged plant components must be replaced immediately by new parts.
ATTENTION! Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair work
The bowl must rotate in clockwise direction when looked at from above.
Fig. 82
ATTENTION! Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair work
The direction of rotation of the product feed pump is correct when the fan
wheel of the pump motor rotates clockwise.
• Put the preheater in operation (option).
P re -c o n d itio n s :
– Steam or thermal oil feed and discharge valves are open!
– Electric preheater is switched on!
• Open the product discharge valve in the product discharge line (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 83
• Check the discharges for solids and dirty water; there must be no oil flow
ATTENTION!
Im p o rta n t!
• Regularly check plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for signs
of aging and mechanical damage.
• Damaged plant components must be replaced immediately by new parts.
V’ 0.375
t = ——— • 60 • 100 = —————— • 6 000 = 45 min = 0.75 h
V° • p 1 000 • 0.05
(1)
Solids content and throughput capacity must be determined on site or taken from
the order specification.
Automatic operation
Automatic operation
ATTENTION!
If the control unit or the control voltage 24 VDC fails, the automatic post-run
phase of the product feed pump is disabled.
The product feed pump may never be switched off to the steam shut-off valve
without a delay time. The pre-heater could get damaged!
All heaters (e.g. steam-fired, thermal oil, electric heaters) must be manually
shut down.
Manual shut-down of the product feed pump must be carried out delayed.
• Close the product feed valve in the suction side of the product feed pump (op-
tion).
• Switch the separator motor off.
• Close the discharges.
• Close the supply lines such as heating steam, water, compressed air lines
with hand valves.
• Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
CAUTION: Danger to life through high-speed rotating separator parts!
still.
– The run-down time of the bowl is 20 minutes after switching off the motor.
– Bowl standstill is indicated by standstill of the drive belt.
no longer moving.
Fig. 84
– Do NOT touch the drive belt through the sight glass opening in the frame!
• Clean the sight glass and screw it back in.
• Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
In the case of torn or defective drive belts or if the belts have come off:
separator!
ATTENTION!
discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 85
Fig. 86
Fig. 87 Example 1
“Emergency-Off”-switch (yellow-
red) and main switch (grey-black)
• Actuate the “Emergency-Off switch.
– The complete drives of the control
unit are de-energised.
– The separator is shut down in a
controlled manner with two total
ejections.
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note
Liquid or dirt has collected in the upper • Check operating water discharge:
trifugal clutch and bowl spindle.
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping • Replace the drive belt.
vent!
• The O marks of
the bowl bottom
and the bowl top
must be aligned.
The operating water solenoid valve 23 • Check solenoid valve 23 and re-
ber.
Gaskets and piston guide ring are • Replace all sealing elements.
damaged or Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
(see list of spare parts).
Important: Time-consuming instal-
The operating water solenoid valve 23 • Check solenoid valve 23 and re-
ber.
The separating time has been set too • Shorten the separating time (see
3 secs
long with the result that the solids con- section 3.5).
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note
Centre of gravity
Solids discharge
Product discharge
Product feed
Solids discharge
Water discharge / operating water
discharge
Centre of gravity
Product discharge
Product feed
Product discharge
Product feed
Solids discharge
Terminal box
Water discharge
Operating water discharge
The separator foundation must not have contact with the foundations of other units (e.g.
auxiliary diesel engines, pumps) to avoid damage to roller bearings.
Fig. 94
Fig. 95
Fig. 96
Fig. 97
Fig. 98
Fig. 99
4.1.3 Motor
at
De- Enclo-
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
sign sure *
rpm min s kW rpm rpm
IP 55
* WS standard
The separator is driven by a three-phase AC motor via a centrifugal clutch and
the drive belt.
The specified motor ratings are minimum values which are based on the in-
creased starting current. Since the current consumption of the motor drops after
start-up, overloading of the motor during operation is not possible.
The starting time depends on the
– flywheel effect of the bowl,
– number of clutch shoes used,
– condition of the clutch shoes.
The starting current can peak at about 1.8 - 2 times the rated current (see start-
up diagram). This is to be considered when selecting switches, lead-in wires
and fuses.
The motor
– can be started direct online (WS standard) or via a motor control for star-
delta switching (Ex-zone).
Note:
• The temperature feelers must be connected to a commercial tripping device.
• External voltage higher than 2.5 volts must not be applied to the connection
terminals of the temperature feelers.
• When testing for continuity, use an ohmmeter and not a test lamp.
Electrical connection
The terminal board in the terminal box can be connected in star or delta.
• Check correct switching of the motor (star or delta).
Refer to the motor instruction manual.
Fig. 102
Fig. 103
Shipboard operation
• When operating the machine on board of ship, pay attention to the installation
guidelines issued by the respective classification societies.
• When using ship wiring cables, cable entry must be by means of marine-type
glands.
provided that:
– The drive chamber is filled with oil
roughly up to the lower edge of the
charge hole.
• Switch on motor.
Fig. 104
The bowl must rotate in clockwise direction when looked at from above.
Fig. 105
The bowl speed has been rated so as to ensure the operating safety of the sep-
arator.
Fig. 108
• Select the orifice plates from the set of plates supplied, according to the re-
Orifice plates 1 and 2
Fig. 109
Fig. 110
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note
ATTENTION!
The following maintenance intervals are recommendations which apply only for normal operating
conditions.
Negative operating conditions (e.g. low-grade fuel, excessively high temperature, strong vibrations,
frequent starting and stopping of the separator etc.) can necessitate shorter maintenance intervals.
Fig. 111 Set of spare parts „bowl/hood“ (operation: 1 year or 8,000 hours)
Date of commissioning:
(to be filled in by user)
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed • See section 4.4.4.
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber
Carefully clean the holes in the non-return valve in the • See section 4.5.
system on the self-cleaning separator.
Fig. 112 Set of spare parts „bowl/hood“ (operation: 1 year or 8,000 hours)
Replace gaskets and piston guide ring (see adjacent fig- • Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
when fitting.
• Remove bowl.
section 4.4.9).
Clean the inside of the upper section of frame.
Replace gaskets. • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).
Replace grooved ball bearings and angular contact ball See parts list.
bearings of spindle.
Check grooved ball bearings of centrifugal clutch and re- • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace vibration absorber.
Carefully clean the holes in the non-return valve in the • See section 4.5.
system on the self-cleaning separator.
Fig. 113 Set of spare parts „bowl/hood“ (operation: 1 year or 8,000 hours)
Replace gaskets and piston guide ring (see adjacent fig- • Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
when fitting.
• Remove bowl.
section 4.4.9).
Clean the inside of the upper section of frame.
Replace gaskets. • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).
Replace grooved ball bearings and angular contact ball See parts list.
bearings of spindle.
Replace vibration absorber.
Replace grooved ball bearings of centrifugal clutch.
Check thickness of the clutch shoes (1) and replace when
h smaller than 18 mm.
Carefully clean the holes in the non-return valve in the • See section 4.5.
system on the self-cleaning separator.
Maintenance work
– After 48,000 operating hours – after 6 years at the latest
Protective hose 1
Fig. 114
4.3.3 Lubrication
The spindle bearings are splash-lubricated from a central oil bath.
MOTOR BEARINGS
For re-greasing the motor bearings, refer to the instructions of the motor manu-
facturer.
Designation
according to DIN 51502 CLP
100
Designation as per ISO 3498 CC 100
Viscosity class SAE 30
o o 2
Viscosity (at 40 C/104 F) 100 ± 10 mm /s (cSt)
Part Number 0015-0003-080 (2.5 litres)
Dispose of the oil as per instructions of the oil manufacturer.
The viscosity class SAE 30 covers a larger viscosity range than specified here.
However, only oils with the viscosity range specified here may be used.
OIL QUANTITY
Filling in oil
Fill the drive with oil before commis-
sioning the separator.
• Unscrew the screw plug and
• fill in oil through the charge hole.
Filling quantity: approx. 1 litres
Fig. 115
Oil level
OIL CHECK
• Check the oil level every week!
• From time to time undo the oil drain screw and check whether there is water
in the oil bath. When the oil exhibits a milky colouring (emulsification), the oil
must be changed immediately.
OIL CHANGE
• Change oil after about
– 4000 operating hours or 6 months at the latest (mineral oil).
– 8000 operating hours or 1 year at the latest (synthetic oil).
• Clean sight glass.
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note
CLP
100
Lube oil 3
ISO VG 68 8 000 1x 1 000 cm Drive chamber
(synthetic)
Manufac-
Viscosity
Designation at 40 °C (104 °F)
turer
mm2/s (cSt)
Lubricating oil table
for separators in onshore and shipboard opera- BLASIA 100
tion RADULA 100 100
DIESEL GAMMA 30
Separator Lube oil
ATLANTA MARINE 30
Viscosity 105
(Designation accord-
DISOLA M 3015
ing to DIN 51502)
Symbol
Kinematic
Type viscosity ENERGOL GR-XP 100 100
at 40 °C ENERGOL DL-MP 30 114
(104 °F)
2
l mm /s (cSt) HYSPIN AWS 100
100
BTC 3 ALPHA ZN 100
CTC 1 MARINE HEAVY 99
CTC 3
MTC 3 1.3 GST OIL 100
100
OTC 2 NL Gear Compound 100
OTC 3 Veritas Marine Oil R&O 30 108
WTC 2 DELO 3000 Marine Oil 30 104
OSE 5 1
ATLANTA MARINE 30
105
CSD 1 DISOLA M 3015
OSD 2 TURBINE T 100 95
SD 1 1.3
SSD 2 EXX-MAR XP 110
TSD 2 NUTO H 100
100
SPARTAN EP 100
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from GEA Westfalia Separator
Faultless functioning of separators very much depends on the proper type of lubricating oil used, since a
high grade oil, selected to meet all service requirements, will minimize the wear, thus extending the ser-
vice life and increasing the operating safety.
For the lubrication of our separators we recommend to use the oils specified by us since continuous qual-
ity checks are performed by GEA Westfalia Separator. Oils proposed from some firms are not subjected
to these tests.
Therefore, GEA Westfalia Separator cannot give a performance guarantee for those oils.
Be sure to select only high grade solvent refined products.
The specified oil types meet the requirements according to DIN. Under unfavourable operating condi-
tions, e.g. high temperatures, the quality of the oils may be insufficient so that more efficient oils, e.g.
synthetic oils, must be used. If necessary, consult GEA Westfalia Separator.
For the different separator types and oil types the viscosity ranges are specified in the table of lubricating
oils.
The operating temperature of the separator exceeds normally 80 oC (176 oF). At those temperatures
some oils age quickly, so that they have to be changed prematurely.
Be sure not to use lubricating oils with viscosities lower than those specified in the table. Due to the pos-
sibility of the oil film breaking down, oil of too low a viscosity will give insufficient lubrication, resulting in
increased wear. However, oils with a slightly higher viscosity than specified may be used.
Bear in mind that the viscosity groups SAE 30, 40 and 50 (SAE = Society of Automotive Engineers) cov-
er larger viscosity ranges and be sure to select lubricating oils with viscosities not lower than the mini-
mum values of the viscosity ranges restricted for the different separator types.
4.4 Bowl
• Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
CAUTION: Danger to life through high-speed rotating separator parts!
still.
– The run-down time of the bowl is 20 minutes after switching off the motor.
– Bowl standstill is indicated by standstill of the drive belt.
no longer moving.
Fig. 119
– Do NOT touch the drive belt through the sight glass opening in the frame!
• Clean the sight glass and screw it back in.
• Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
In the case of torn or defective drive belts or if the belts have come off:
separator!
The bowl parts are marked with the serial number of the machine or the last
three digits of the serial number.
Fig. 120
Fig. 121
screwdriver 2.
Fig. 122
connection piece.
Fig. 123
Note:
The connectors 4 must be glued in
with Loctite 275.
Fig. 124
Fig. 125
Fig. 127
Fig. 128
Fig. 129
ring.
Fig. 131
Fig. 132
Fig. 133
show upwards.
Fig. 134
Fig. 135
top.
Fig. 136
Fig. 137
Fig. 138
Fig. 139
tool 3.
Fig. 140
Fig. 141
Fig. 142
shaped piece.
Fig. 143
Fig. 144
Fig. 145
shaped piece.
Fig. 146
Fig. 147
piston groove.
Fig. 148
Fig. 149
Fig. 150
Fig. 151
Fig. 153
Fig. 154
Fig. 155
guide ring 3.
Fig. 156
side down).
• Unscrew four hex head screws 1.
• Force off disk 2 with the screwdriver
Fig. 157
Fig. 158
• Clean the small holes for the feed and discharge of the operating liquid with
particular care to ensure trouble-free bowl ejections.
• Apply a thin coat of grease to the guide surfaces and threads of the bowl
parts after drying (see 4.3.4 Lubrication schedule).
• Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
Fig. 159
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system
• The strainer and the operating water feeding system must be cleaned de-
pending on the quality of the operating water and overall load. See section
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule
• Use citric acid in case of furring.
• Thoroughly clean the parts with water.
• Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.
Fig. 160
• Before assembling the bowl, check to be sure that the guide and contact sur-
ATTENTION!
Fig. 161
Fig. 162
Fig. 163
Fig. 164
side down).
• Insert gasket 3 in the bowl bottom.
• Screw in the four hex head screws 1
connecting disk 2 with the bowl bot-
tom tight.
Torque: 25 Nm
• Turn the bowl bottom through 180
o
(fitting position).
Fig. 165
Fig. 166
Fig. 167
Fig. 168
piston 2.
Fig. 169
Fig. 170
Fig. 171
Fig. 172
Fig. 173
Fig. 174
Fig. 175
Fig. 176
Fig. 177
Fig. 178
Fig. 179
Fig. 180
Fig. 181
visible.
– Do NOT hide them under ring
Fig. 182
show upwards.
• Bolt ring spanner 1 to the bowl top.
– Screw in two hex head screws 2 of the ring spanner and tighten firmly.
CAUTION:
A loose bowl top can endanger life!
Fig. 183
Fig. 184
Fig. 185
Fig. 186
Fig. 187
Fig. 188
Fig. 189
Fig. 190
Fig. 191
Fig. 192
Fig. 193
Fig. 194
CAUTION:
Fig. 195
Fig. 196
Fig. 197
Fig. 198
Fig. 199
Fig. 200
Fig. 201
Fig. 202
Fig. 203
Fig. 204
Fig. 205
REMOVAL
ATTENTION: Sensitive bowl part!
– Do NOT damage the bowl top
groove when drilling!
Fig. 207
using a screwdriver.
Fig. 208
Note:
If the polyamide gasket cannot be removed, repeat this procedure.
FITTING
• Thoroughly clean and dry the groove.
• Heat the gasket in approx. 80 C (176 °F) water for 5 minutes.
o
Fig. 209
Fig. 210
REMOVAL
Fig. 211
using a screwdriver.
Fig. 212
Note:
If the polyamide gasket can’t be removed, repeat this procedure.
FITTING
Fig. 213
Fig. 214
piston 2.
Fig. 215
Fig. 216
Fig. 217
Fig. 218
• the sealing surface A of the sliding piston (Fig. 219) (Sealing surface A as de-
The bowl seal consists of
Fig. 219
Fig. 220
Fig. 221
Fig. 222
• Mount hood 1.
Fig. 223
Fig. 224
Fig. 225
Fig. 226
Fig. 227
Fig. 228
Note:
The connectors 4 must be glued in
with Loctite 275.
Fig. 229
4.6 Drive
1 Retaining ring 95 x 3
2 Retaining ring 60 x 2
3 Clutch pulley
4 Grooved ball bearing
5 Spacer bush
6 Grooved ball bearing
7 Retaining ring 95 x 3
8 Clutch driver
9 Clutch shoe
10 Washer 11 x 27 x 4
11 Retaining ring 60 x 2
12 Washer
13 Hex head screw M 10 x 65
14 Drive belt
15 Spindle
16 Hex head screw M 10 x 20
17 Bearing cover
18 Bearing cover
19 Grooved ball bearing
20 Retaining ring 35 x 1,5
21 Ball bearing protection ring
22 Angular contact ball bearing
23 Bearing sleeve
24 Gasket
25 Rubber-metal cushion
26 Pivoting bearing
27 Retaining ring 90 x 3
28 Gasket
29 Bearing cover
30 Hex head screw M 10 x 20
31 Hex head screw M 6 x 16
(This hex head screw is glued in with Loctite
275.)
32 Hex head screw M 12 x 18
(This hex head screw is glued in with Loc-
tite 275.)
33 Washer
34 Cup spring
• Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
CAUTION: Danger to life through high-speed rotating separator parts!
still.
– The run-down time of the bowl is 20 minutes after switching off the motor.
– Bowl standstill is indicated by standstill of the drive belt.
no longer moving.
Fig. 231
– Do NOT touch the drive belt through the sight glass opening in the frame!
• Clean the sight glass and screw it back in.
• Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
In the case of torn or defective drive belts or if the belts have come off:
separator!
Fig. 232
Fig. 233
Fig. 234
Fig. 235
Fig. 236
• Undo nut 2.
frame:
Fig. 237
Fig. 238
Fig. 239
Fig. 240
Fig. 241
Note:
If the vibration absorber is also pulled out
Fig. 242
Fig. 243
If necessary:
• Undo three hex head screws 1.
• remove bearing cover 2 with sealed
hex head screws, disk and cup
springs 3 from the lower part of the
frame.
Fig. 244
If necessary:
• Take out gasket 1.
Fig. 245
Spindle assembly
Required tools:
– Pulling device
– Open ended wrench
– Pliers with outer snap jaws
Fig. 246
Fig. 247
Fig. 248
Fig. 249
Fig. 250
Fig. 251
Fig. 252
Fig. 253
Fig. 254
Fig. 255
Fig. 256
Fig. 257
Fig. 258
Fig. 259
Fig. 261
Fig. 262
Fig. 263
Fig. 264
Required tools
– Disk (Ø 86 – 94 mm)
– Wooden block
– Hammer
shown.
• Drive the grooved ball bearing and
spacer bush out of the clutch pulley.
Fig. 265
Fig. 266
If necessary:
Fig. 267
Fig. 268
down).
Fig. 271
Fig. 273
Required tools:
– Disk 2 (Ø 86 – 94 mm)
– Wooden block
– Hammer
Fig. 274
Fig. 275
Fig. 276
Fig. 277
Required tool:
– Disk 1 (Ø 61 – 69 mm)
Fig. 278
Fig. 279
Required tools:
– Wooden block
– Rubber hammer
Fig. 280
Fig. 281
Fig. 282
Required tools:
– ring spanner 2
– Hex head screw 3 (M 10 x 200)
– Hexagon nut 4 (M 10)
Fig. 283
Fig. 284
Fig. 285
Fig. 286
Fig. 287
• Insert disk 2.
• Fit the retaining ring 1 in the groove
of the clutch driver.
Fig. 288
Fig. 289
Fig. 291
Fig. 293
Fig. 294
Note:
Due to the design concept used, the spindle is at an inclined angle relative to
the opposite side of the motor when the drive belt has not been fitted or ten-
sioned (see Fig. 295, pos. 2).
The spindle is pulled into the centric axis when the belt is tensioned (see Fig.
295, pos 1)!
• Check
– that the spindle 1 can be turned
easily.
– whether the spindle 3 has been
pulled into the centric axis by
tensioning the drive belt 3 (see
Fig. 198.
Fig. 296
ATTENTION!
The distance X between the spindle
and the proximity switch must be 2.5
mm.
Fig. 297
1 (M 8 x 12).
Fig. 298
Fig. 299
Fig. 301
Fig. 302
• bowl height
For reasons of operating reliability, adjustment of
CAUTION:
A loose bowl top can endanger life!
Fig. 303
Fig. 304
If it does prove necessary to readjust the bowl height, consult the factory.
Fig. 305
Fig. 306
Fig. 307
Fig. 308
Checks Section
1. Bowl height 4.7.1
2. Oil level in drive chamber 4.3.3
3. Direction of rotation of the bowl 4.1.4
4. Bowl speed 4.1.5
5. Starting time of bowl / current consumption 4.1.5
6. Running characteristics of the separator 3.8.1
7. Suction line of the product pump (if installed) for leakage
Checks Section
1. Temperature of product
2. Observe discharges for water, solids and oil to see if the 3.3
bowl is operating correctly.
CAUTION!
• After switching off the separator, wait until the spindle has stopped rotating.
• Take off the drive belt.
4.10 Storage
ATTENTION!
Improper and incorrect storage of the separator and control unit can dam-
age or destroy their components.
Note:
Gaskets, hoses and hosepipes, for example, change their physical properties in
unfavourable storage conditions. This can result in a shorter service life. They
can be rendered useless due to excessive hardening, softening, permanent de-
formation, flaking, cracks or other surface damage.
• store the separator and control unit in the original transport packaging.
If the separator and control unit are not installed immediately after delivery,
IMPORTANT:
A storage time of more than 12 months of the separator and control unit is only
possible after consulting the manufacturer.
4.10.2 Separator
The following procedure applies
– for storing the separator before commissioning and
– for storing the separator before a prolonged standstill period.
Note:
If the bowl has been out of operation for longer than 6 months (e.g. due to a
• check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table “Mainte-
long standstill period or storage),
• Replace if necessary.
nance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest”).
If the separator has been out of operation for longer than 12 months (e.g. due
• check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule (table
to a long standstill period or storage),
• Replace if necessary.
“Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the latest).
Procedure:
• Drain the slushing oil.
Observe the local regulations on disposal of the slushing oil.
• Remove the grease from all unpainted machine parts.
• Check gaskets.
Replace damaged, very swollen, hardened or brittle gaskets immediately.
• Check the ball bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch (if applicable).
When damaged, replace the ball bearings immediately!
4.12 Disposal
When the equipment is no more useful or the separator has reached the end of
its service life, the operator is responsible for appropriate, environmentally
friendly disposal of its components and materials such as
– metal,
– caoutchouc and rubber
– plastics,
– glass,
– gear and lube oils on a mineral-oil basis,
– synthetic gear and lube oils,
– cleaning liquids,
– electric and electronic apparatus.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION!
Be sure to adhere to applicable environment-protection legislation!
More information on disposal matters can be obtained from local authorities.
Note:
Fig. 309
Special attention must be paid to
the directive issued by the operator
on handling waste oils and the local
regulations.
Note:
Pay particular attention to the directive issued by the operator on handling the
cleaning agents used and the local disposal regulations.
4.12.3 Separator
Before disposing of the separator
• Drain the gear oil and dispose of it properly in accordance with section 4.12.1.
• Dismantle the separator, remove any lubricant sticking to separator parts and
dispose of them separately or recycle them where appropriate.
Fig. 310
Pos. Designation
1 Screwdriver
2 Torque wrench (0 - 100 Nm)
with inserts and extension
3 Caliper gauge
4 Electric oil heater for ball bearings
5 Ratchet
6 Standard hammer and mallet
7 Inner snap pliers with offset jaws
(Ø 40 mm)
8 Outer snap pliers (Ø 35 mm)
9 Hand tachometer
10 Wrench, adjustable
11 Brushes
12 Puller (200 x 200 mm (H x W))
13 Open-ended wrench (jaw widths: 17, 19, 32, 55 mm)
14 Wooden blocks
15 Drill
16 Drill bit (Ø 2 mm)
17 Wood screws (max. Ø 4 mm x 50 mm length)
Fig. 311
Pos. Designation
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note
5 Spare parts
Only required when ordering spare parts for pump and pump connection parts:
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note
Material-No.: 99870449875
Version: 20.03.2018
2 OSE 5-91-037/ 5 | 1941846667/012000 | 20.03.2018
ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
GEA Deutschland
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
59302 Oelde, Germany
Non-compliance with this datasheet can not only result in danger for centrifuges,
material and the environment but also endanger persons working on or in the
vicinity of the centrifuge.
ºC degrees Celsius
% per cent
Y star
Δ delta
Centrifuge
Comments
Type OSE 5-91-037/ 5
Serial no. 9077-917
Year of construction see centrifuge nameplate
Ex range of centrifuge
Comments
Suitable for operation in an "Ex" area ? yes / no
Process data
Comments
Intended use, feed material MGO
Permitted operating pressure, light liquid bar (g) 2 Water at nominal
output
Permitted operating pressure, heavy liquid bar (g) 2 Water at nominal
output
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and operations in more than 50 countries.
Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innovative equipment and Process technology.
GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 Index.
GEA Germany
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 Tel. +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com
59302 Oelde, Germany Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
Ersatzteilkatalog / Spare Parts Catalog
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
GEA Germany
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, D 59302 Oelde
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
ETS Ersatzteilschlüssel / Spare part code
Teil oder Baugruppe bedingt lieferbar. Rücksprache mit dem Herstellerwerk nehmen.
Part or assembly available to a limited extent. Contact manufacturer.
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
4/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
5/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
9987-0449-875 SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 5
1941846667 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR OSE 5-91-037_ 5 SEPARADOR
0001 2066-0001-000 1 SEPARATOR VOLLST. 7
SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
SEPARADOR, COMP.
3530 0024-3530-010 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
7825 5289-7825-139 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR 33
THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
9928 2058-9928-060 1 SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN 35
SET OF SHIPBOARD SCREW COUPLINGS
JUEGO RACORES DE TIPO MARINO
8829 2066-8829-010 1 SATZ VENTILE 37
SET OF VALVES
JUEGO DE VÁLVULAS
9902 2066-9902-530 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE 39
Typ / Model SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR 2 YEARS
JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO PARA 2 AÑOS
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 9769 2066-9769-010 1 SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE 49
SET OF COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT
JUEGO PZAS. PUESTA EN FUNCIONAMIENTO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 9901 2066-9901-000 1 SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE 51
SET OF TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
9077-917 JUEGO HERRAMIENTAS Y ACCESORIOS
2058-3002-101 1 SCHMIEROELTABELLE EN
110 2058-3002-101 1 SCHMIEROELTABELLE EN
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n 9001 2066-9001-200 1 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG EN
INSTRUCTION MANUAL EN
9077-917 MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES EN
9001 8555-9001-040 1 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG EN
INSTRUCTION MANUAL EN
Ausgabe / Edition MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES EN
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
6/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
7/53
8/53
9/53
10/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 2066-1001-000 1 GESTELLUNTERTEIL
2066-0001-000 LOWER SECTION OF FRAME
SEPARATOR VOLLST. PARTE INFERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
30 0019-6970-400 4 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
35 0026-1371-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
40 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
50 2058-3385-010 1 FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. 18
CENTRIFUGAL CLUTCH, COMPL.
EMBRAGUE CENTRÍFUGO, COMP.
60 0026-2418-400 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
70 0019-6517-300 1 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
Typ / Model HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 80 2057-3367-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0026-6011-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
9077-917 ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
100 2058-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 20
FOOT, COMPL.
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n PIE, COMP.
110 0018-7614-000 1 MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. 22
9077-917 SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY, COMPL.
BLOQUE DE ELECTROVÁLVULA, COMP.
120 0018-7943-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
Ausgabe / Edition LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
07.03.2018 130 0018-8012-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
135 0018-7940-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
Seite/Page
11/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
140 0018-3817-300 2 SCHLAUCHSCHELLE
2066-0001-000 HOSE CLIP
SEPARATOR VOLLST. ABRAZADERA DE MANGUERA
150 0018-8262-710 1 SCHLAUCH
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
HOSE
MANGUERA
160 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
170 0011-8060-000 1 GELENKLAGER
SPHERICAL PLAIN BEARING
COJINETE ARTICULADO
190 0026-5841-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
200 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 2065-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
Typ / Model BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 225 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 230 0019-6933-300 6 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
9077-917 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
240 0005-0868-000 1 NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
PROXIMITY SWITCH
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n INICIADOR DE APROXIMACIÓN
250 2065-1145-000 1 HALTER
9077-917 HOLDER
SOPORTE
260 0005-1601-700 1 KABELDURCHFUEHRUNGSTUELLE
Ausgabe / Edition CABLE SLEEVE
TUBO DE PROTECCIÓN PARA CABLES
07.03.2018 270 0019-6105-400 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
290 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
CASQUILLO ELASTO-METÁLICO
Seite/Page
12/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
300 0007-2566-390 1 DICHTRING
2066-0001-000 GASKET
SEPARATOR VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
310 2066-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
PROTECTIVE CAP
TAPA PROTECTORA
320 2058-1089-000 1 RING
RING
ANILLO
330 0019-6900-300 7 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
340 2066-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
350 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
360 0018-3215-030 1 STUTZEN
Typ / Model CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 370 0018-2477-030 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 380 2066-1464-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
LENGTH OF PIPE
9077-917 EMPALME DE TUBOS
390 0019-7625-400 3 STIFTSCHRAUBE
STUD
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n PRISIONERO
400 0026-1369-300 3 SCHEIBE
9077-917 WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
410 0013-0279-400 3 SECHSKANTMUTTER
Ausgabe / Edition HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
07.03.2018 420 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
COVER
TAPA
430 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
MIRILLA
Seite/Page
13/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
440 0019-8899-030 1 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
2066-0001-000 SCREW PLUG
SEPARATOR VOLLST. TORNILLO DE TOPE
450 0007-1796-550 1 DICHTRING
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
460 0019-1442-900 1 GEWINDESTOPFEN
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
565 0007-1780-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
580 0007-2733-600 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
600 2066-6600-510 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 24
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
700 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 710 2066-6464-020 1 GEWINDERING
THREADED RING
ANILLO ROSCADO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 800 2066-2241-000 1 GREIFER VOLLST.
CENTRIPETAL PUMP, COMPL.
9077-917 PINZA, COMP.
801 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUNTA ANULAR
802 2168-2337-020 1 STEUERGREIFER
9077-917 SENSING LIQUID PUMP
RODETE DE MANDO
803 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
Ausgabe / Edition GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
07.03.2018 810 2066-8808-000 1 HAUBE
HOOD
CAPÓ
820 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
14/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
830 2171-2191-020 1 GRIFFKOERPER
2066-0001-000 HANDLE CONNECTION PIECE
SEPARATOR VOLLST. CUERPO DE LA EMPUÑADURA
840 0013-1006-600 1 UEBERWURFMUTTER
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
COUPLING NUT
TUERCA DE RACOR
850 2058-8839-000 1 RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL
NON-RETURN VALVE
VÁLVULA DE RETENCIÓN
860 0018-6676-030 3 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
870 2066-8829-000 1 SATZ BLENDEN
SET OF ORIFICE PLATES
JUEGO DE PLACAS PERFORADAS
880 0018-6820-100 2 WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
CORRUGATED TUBE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE ONDULADO, COMP.
0007-2871-830 4 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 890 0018-5907-000 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 900 0018-6282-600 1 RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL VOLLST.
NON-RETURN VALVE, COMPL.
9077-917 VÁLVULA DE RETENCIÓN, COMP.
920 0018-3804-300 2 SCHLAUCHSCHELLE
HOSE CLIP
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ABRAZADERA DE MANGUERA
930 0018-6744-710 1 SCHLAUCH
9077-917 HOSE
MANGUERA
940 0001-1572-600 1 DRUCKMESSGERAET
Ausgabe / Edition PRESSURE GAUGE
TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
07.03.2018 950 2058-8846-000 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG M.BLENDE
SCREW COUPLING WITH ORIFICE PLATE
UNIÓN ROSCADA CON PLACA PERFORADA
960 0018-6620-030 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Seite/Page
15/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
970 0005-1529-300 2 DRUCKTRANSMITTER
2066-0001-000 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
SEPARATOR VOLLST. TRANSMISOR DE PRESIÓN
980 0005-1539-280 1 KLEMMENKASTEN
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
990 0019-6110-300 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
1000 2066-3060-000 1 SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE 29
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE ACCIONAMIENTO
1010 0024-4382-010 1 SATZ SCHILDER
SET OF PLATES
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
0024-6327-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6326-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
Typ / Model ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 0024-6426-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 0024-5220-000 1 ABZIEHBILD _PFEIL
DECAL _ARROW
9077-917 CALCOMANÍA DE «FLECHA»
0024-6330-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6329-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
9077-917 ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6328-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
Ausgabe / Edition ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
07.03.2018 0024-6325-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-3500-010 1 TYPENSCHILD
TYPE PLATE
PLACA DE CARACTERÍSTICAS
Seite/Page
16/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
2066-0001-000 NOTCHED NAIL
SEPARATOR VOLLST. REMACHE ESTRIADO
0024-6580-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
SEPARATOR, COMPL.
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-5380-000 1 SCHILD
PLATE
RÓTULO
2000 0005-1740-808 0.2 m SCHUTZSCHLAUCH
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
2010 0005-1741-808 1.4 m SCHUTZSCHLAUCH
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
17/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
18/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 2058-3365-000 1 KUPPLUNGSSCHEIBE
2058-3385-010 CLUTCH PULLEY
FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. DISCO DEL EMBRAGUE
20 0011-6012-680 2 RILLENKUGELLAGER
CENTRIFUGAL CLUTCH, COMPL.
GROOVED BALL BEARING
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
30 0026-2501-400 1 ABSTANDSBUCHSE
DISTANCE SLEEVE
CASQUILLO DE SEPARACIÓN
40 0026-0851-170 2 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 2058-3483-000 1 MITNEHMERSCHEIBE MHPA
DRIVER, BALANCED WITH HALF KEY
DISCO ARRASTRADOR EQUILIBRADA CMCH
60 0026-6011-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
19/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
20/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 2058-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2058-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
20 0021-3308-750 4 MASCHINENFUSS
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
30 0019-6933-300 8 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
40 0019-6972-300 4 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
21/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
22/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
0018-7614-000 PRESSURE REGULATOR
MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. REGULADOR DE PRESIÓN
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY, COMPL.
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
30 0001-1572-600 1 DRUCKMESSGERAET
PRESSURE GAUGE
TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
40 0018-7614-900 1 FILTEREINSATZ
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
Typ / Model SOLENOID
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0018-5947-820 2 MEMBRANE
DIAPHRAGM
9077-917 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n NÚCLEO MAGNÉTICO
110 0018-5118-040 2 GERAETESTECKDOSE
9077-917 COUPLER SOCKET
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
Ausgabe / Edition HOSE
MANGUERA
07.03.2018 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
150 0019-6131-300 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
Seite/Page
23/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
24/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
245 2066-6600-508 1 TROMMEL VORMONTIERT 26
2066-6600-510 BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
TROMMEL VOLLST. TAMBOR PREMONTADO
250 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
280 2058-6642-030 1 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL
CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
TAPA DE LA CÁMARA DEL RODETE
290 2066-6691-000 1 SATZ REGULIERSCHEIBEN
SET OF REGULATING RINGS
JUEGO DE DIAFRAGMAS
2059-6726-100 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
REGULATING RING
DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
2059-6726-110 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
Typ / Model REGULATING RING
DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 2059-6726-150 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
REGULATING RING
DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 2059-6726-160 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
REGULATING RING
9077-917 DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
2059-6726-180 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
REGULATING RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
2059-6726-220 1 REGULIERSCHEIBE
9077-917 REGULATING RING
DIAFRAGMA DE REGULACIÓN
300 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
Ausgabe / Edition GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
07.03.2018 310 2146-6642-010 1 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL
CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
TAPA DE LA CÁMARA DEL RODETE
Seite/Page
25/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
26/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
20 0007-2868-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
TROMMEL VORMONTIERT JUNTA ANULAR
30 2066-6687-000 1 SCHEIBE
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
40 0019-6900-300 4 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
50 0007-3364-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 2066-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
PISTÓN ANULAR
80 0007-3314-760 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 90 2066-6426-000 1 SCHLIESSKAMMERBODEN
w2OSING CHAMBER BOTTOM
FONDO DE LA CÁMARA DE CIERRE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 100 0004-3274-810 1 KOLBENFUEHRUNGSRING
PISTON GUIDE RING
9077-917 ANILLO DE GUÍA DE PISTÓN
110 0007-3313-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUNTA ANULAR
120 0007-3678-760 1 DICHTRING
9077-917 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
130 2066-6501-000 1 KOLBENSCHIEBER
Ausgabe / Edition SLIDING PISTON
VÁLVULA DE MANGUITO
07.03.2018 140 0007-3690-840 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
150 2066-6629-010 1 VERTEILERFUSS
DISTRIBUTOR BASE
BASE DEL DISTRIBUIDOR
Seite/Page
27/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
160 0007-2927-750 1 DICHTRING
2066-6600-508 GASKET
TROMMEL VORMONTIERT JUNTA ANULAR
170 0007-3541-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, PRE-ASSEMBLED
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
180 0007-3912-830 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 2066-6611-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL
BOWL TOP
TAPA DEL TAMBOR
200 2066-6663-000 68 DELLER VOLLST.
DISC, COMPL.
PLATO, COMP.
210 2066-6666-010 2 ABSCHLUSSTELLER
BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
220 2066-6666-000 1 ABSCHLUSSTELLER
Typ / Model BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 230 0019-6324-400 2 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
PRISIONERO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 240 0007-1988-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
9077-917 JUNTA ANULAR
270 2168-6631-020 1 VERSCHLUSSRING
LOCK RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ANILLO DE CIERRE
9077-917
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
28/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
29/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 2066-3429-010 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 31
2066-3060-000 SPINDLE, COMPL.
SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE HUSILLO, COMP.
20 0021-3822-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
DRIVE BELT
CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
30 0021-3293-870 2 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
30/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
31/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 2066-3410-010 1 SPINDEL
2066-3429-010 SPINDLE
SPINDEL VOLLST. HUSILLO
20 2058-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
SPINDLE, COMPL.
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
30 2058-3375-010 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
40 0011-6207-000 1 RILLENKUGELLAGER
GROOVED BALL BEARING
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
50 0026-5866-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0008-2008-000 1 KUGELLAGERSCHLUSSRING
BALL BEARING PROTECTION RING
ARO PROTECTOR DE RODAMIENTO DE BOLAS
70 0011-7304-250 1 SCHRAEGKUGELLAGER
Typ / Model ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
BOLAS DE CONTACTO ANGULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 80 0010-5205-010 1 LAGERHUELSE
BEARING SLEEVE
MANGUITO DE COJINETE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n
9077-917
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
32/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
33/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 0005-4863-000 1 FLANSCH
5289-7825-139 FLANGE
DREHSTROMMOTOR BRIDA
20 0005-4863-010 1 LAGERSCHILD
THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
END SHIELD
PLATO DE COJINETE
30 0005-4863-020 1 LUEFTER
FAN
VENTILADOR
40 0005-4863-030 1 LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
TOBERA DEL VENTILADOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
34/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
35/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 0005-4487-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
2058-9928-060 SCREW COUPLING
SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN RACOR
20 0005-4487-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SET OF SHIPBOARD SCREW COUPLINGS
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
36/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
37/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 0018-6092-600 2 MANOMETERHAHN
2066-8829-010 PRESSURE GAUGE COCK
SATZ VENTILE GRIFO MANÓMETRO
15 0018-3413-050 1 ANSCHLUSSSTUECK
SET OF VALVES
CONNECTING PIECE
PIEZA DE CONEXIÓN
20 0018-3525-030 3 ANSCHLUSSSTUTZEN
CONNECTION PIECE
BOQUILLA DE CONEXIÓN
30 0018-1061-030 2 WINKELANSCHLUSSVERSCHRAUBUNG
ANGULAR SCREW CONNECTION
UNIÓN ROSCADA DE CONEXIÓN ACODADA
40 0018-2461-030 3 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
50 0018-3413-050 1 ANSCHLUSSSTUECK
CONNECTING PIECE
PIEZA DE CONEXIÓN
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
38/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
39/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 2066-9902-000 2 SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE 41
2066-9902-530 SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE JUEGO PIEZAS REPUESTO TAMBOR_CAPÓ
20 2066-9902-020 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB 45
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR 2 YEARS
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR DRIVE
JUEGO PIEZAS RECAMBIO ACCIONAMIENTO
30 2066-9902-040 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB 47
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR DRIVE
JUEGO PIEZAS RECAMBIO ACCIONAMIENTO
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
40/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
41/53
42/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
30 0007-1904-750 8 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1936-750 4 DICHTRING
SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-3690-840 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
300 0007-2566-390 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
350 0007-2730-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
480 0007-2868-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
510 0007-3364-760 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 520 0007-2069-720 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 540 0007-3314-760 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
9077-917 JUNTA ANULAR
560 0004-3274-810 2 KOLBENFUEHRUNGSRING
PISTON GUIDE RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ANILLO DE GUÍA DE PISTÓN
565 0007-1780-750 8 DICHTRING
9077-917 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
570 0007-3313-760 2 DICHTRING
Ausgabe / Edition GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
07.03.2018 580 0007-2733-390 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
590 0007-3678-760 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
43/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
610 0007-3690-840 2 DICHTRING
2066-9902-000 GASKET
SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE JUNTA ANULAR
630 0007-2927-750 4 DICHTRING
SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
640 0007-3541-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
650 0007-3912-830 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
700 0007-2932-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
720 0007-1988-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
730 0007-1987-750 4 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 740 0007-1861-750 8 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 780 0007-1997-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
9077-917 JUNTA ANULAR
820 0007-1936-750 8 DICHTRING
GASKET
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUNTA ANULAR
900 0015-0082-000 2 SCHMIERFETT
9077-917 LUBRICATING GREASE
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
44/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
45/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
2066-9902-020 RUBBER-METAL BUSH
SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB CASQUILLO ELASTO-METÁLICO
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR DRIVE
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0011-6207-000 1 RILLENKUGELLAGER
GROOVED BALL BEARING
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
40 0026-5866-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 0011-7304-250 1 SCHRAEGKUGELLAGER
ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
BOLAS DE CONTACTO ANGULAR
60 0021-3822-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
Typ / Model DRIVE BELT
CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
46/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
47/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
2066-9902-040 RUBBER-METAL BUSH
SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB CASQUILLO ELASTO-METÁLICO
20 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR DRIVE
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
25 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0011-6207-000 1 RILLENKUGELLAGER
GROOVED BALL BEARING
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
40 0026-5866-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 0011-7304-250 1 SCHRAEGKUGELLAGER
ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
BOLAS DE CONTACTO ANGULAR
60 0021-3822-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
Typ / Model DRIVE BELT
CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 70 0021-3293-870 2 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 80 0011-6012-680 2 RILLENKUGELLAGER
GROOVED BALL BEARING
9077-917 RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
48/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
49/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
2066-9769-010 GASKET
SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
SET OF COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1988-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 80 0007-2932-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0015-0003-080 1 SCHMIEROEL
LUBRICATING OIL
9077-917 ACEITE LUBRICANTE
100 0021-3822-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
DRIVE BELT
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
110 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
9077-917 LUBRICATING GREASE
GRASA LUBRICANTE
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
50/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
51/53
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
10 2066-9943-000 1 RINGSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
2066-9901-000 ANNULAR WRENCH, COMPL.
SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE LLAVE ANULAR, COMP.
20 2066-9894-000 1 STECKSCHLUESSEL
SET OF TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
SOCKET WRENCH
LLAVE DE TUBO
30 2066-9860-000 1 MONTAGEVORRICHTUNG VOLLST.
MOUNTING TOOL, COMPL.
DISPOSITIVO DE MONTAJE, COMP.
40 2066-9822-000 1 GLOCKE
BELL-SHAPED PIECE
CAMPANA
50 0003-3685-000 1 DOPPEL-HAKENSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
DOUBLE HOOK WRENCH, COMPL.
LLAVE DE DOBLE GANCHO, COMP.
0026-1558-300 1 KERBSTIFT
NOTCHED PIN
PASADOR ESTRIADO
0026-1671-300 1 KERBSTIFT
Typ / Model NOTCHED PIN
PASADOR ESTRIADO
OSE 5-91-037_ 5 60 2064-9982-000 1 RINGSCHRAUBE VOLLST.
EYE BOLT, COMPL.
ANILLA, COMP.
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 70 0019-6142-400 1 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
9077-917 TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
80 0018-2916-050 1 DOPPELNIPPEL
DOUBLE NIPPLE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n BOQUILLA DOBLE
90 0003-3796-320 1 WINKELSCHRAUBENDREHER
9077-917 OFFSET SCREWDRIVER
DESTORNILLADOR ACODADO
110 0013-0279-300 1 SECHSKANTMUTTER
Ausgabe / Edition HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
07.03.2018 120 0026-0356-300 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
130 0019-6959-300 1 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Seite/Page
52/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
140 0019-6951-300 2 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
2066-9901-000 HEX HEAD SCREW
SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
150 2066-9939-000 1 SCHEIBE
SET OF TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
160 2058-9939-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
210 2064-9939-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Typ / Model
OSE 5-91-037_ 5
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
53/53 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
Operating instructions
BKF0004EN
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Englisch
2011-03-24
Table of Content
1 General points 5
7.1 Preparation 51
7.2 Pumps with liquid seal (quenching connection) 53
7.2.1 General points 53
7.2.2 Seal variants with liquid seal 54
7.3 Setting the pressure relief valve 55
7.4 Further operation start-up 57
8 Removal 58
1 General points
Kracht GmbH
Gewerbestraße 20
DE 58791 Werdohl
phone: +49 (0) 23 92 / 935-0
fax: +49 (0) 23 92 / 935-209
email: info@kracht.eu
web: www.kracht.eu
The device is a pump for continuous delivery of liquids. The various seal var-
iants and materials enable use with different media.
The device has been designed for operation with fluids. Dry operation is not
permitted. The medium must guarantee a minimum lubrication.
The medium must not contain any abrasive constituents.
Petrols, solvents, etc. are not permissible.
Use in explosive areas is not permissible.
The operator must guarantee that the medium to be conveyed is compatible
with the materials used in the device (see "Overview materials" in the chapter
4 “Technical data”). Chemical expertise is required for that.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 5
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
6 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
2 Safety
The safety notices in these operating instructions are marked with caution
symbols.
Non-compliance can lead to hazards for people and the device.
In addition, the safety instructions are marked with signal words. They have
the meanings as explained below:
Caution: Identification of a low risk hazard, which could lead to minor or
medium bodily injury if not avoided.
Warning: Identification of a potential medium risk hazard, which would lead
to death or severe bodily injury if not avoided.
Danger: Identification of an immediate hazard, which would result in death
or severe bodily injury if not avoided.
Flagging of special user tips and other especially useful or important infor-
mation.
The staff designated to install, operate and maintenance the device must be
properly qualified. This can be through training or specific instruction. Staff
must be familiar with the contents of this operating manual.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 7
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
DANGER
Danger due to breakage or squirting fluids!
Operating the device with impermissibly high pressures can lead to damage
to the device and to the up or downstream plant elements. Breakage can
lead to parts flying around uncontrolled or to fluids squirting out which can
lead to accidents and severe injuries or even result in death.
● Never allow positive displacement pumps to pump against "closed
gates".
● A pressure relief valve or other kind of over-pressure safeguard must
be installed as close as possible to the pump pressure connection. The
pressure relief device must be dimensioned so that the entire delivery
volume can be conducted through it with the lowest possible pressure
or must be depressurized.
● Do not put the device into operation without a pressure relief device.
DANGER
Danger due to breakage or squirting fluids!
Using unsuitable connections and lines can lead to breakage. Parts flying
around uncontrolled or squirting fluids can lead to accidents with severe
injuries or even lead to death.
● Use only connections and lines approved for the expected pressure
range.
● Comply with each manufacturer's regulations.
DANGER
Danger due to breakage or squirting fluids!
Using damaged connections and lines can cause parts to fly around un-
controlled or fluids to squirt out, which can lead to accidents and severe
injuries or even result in death.
● Immediately replace damaged connections, pipes and hose lines.
8 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
DANGER
Hazard caused by incorrect direction of rotation!
Operating the device with the incorrect direction of rotation can lead to
damage to the device and to the up or downstream plant elements. Break-
age can lead to parts flying around uncontrolled or to fluids squirting out
which can lead to accidents and severe injuries or even result in death.
● Always pay attention to the correct direction of rotation when installing
the pumps.
● Always pay attention to the correct direction of rotation when connecting
the motors.
● Secure the fitting keys against flying off when monitoring the direction
of rotation.
DANGER
Danger due to electric voltage!
Danger of death due to electric shock.
● Follow the special safety regulations during all work on electrical instal-
lations.
● Only allow electricians to work on electrical systems.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 9
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
WARNING
Hazard caused by rotating parts and fluid squirting out!
During all work on the device, rotating parts and squirting fluids can lead to
accidents and severe injuries or even restult in death..
● Depressurize all connections lines during all work on the device.
● Depressurize or disconnect the driving motor during all work on the de-
vice.
● Securely prevent the motor and device from restarting during work.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
WARNING
Danger due to hazardous fluid!
Danger of death upon contact with hazardous fluids and when inhaling va-
pours from these liquids.
● Comply with the safety data sheets and regulations on handling the
hazardous liquids!
● Collect and dispose leaks of hazardous materials so that no hazards
arise for people or the environment.
● Comply with national and international rules at the place of installation.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
WARNING
Hazard caused by rotating parts!
Rotating parts can cause accidents with severe injuries or result in death
due to body parts, hair or clothing getting caught or wrapped up.
● Protect rotating parts (e.g., coupling and shaft ends) against uninten-
tional contact.
● Close any maintenance openings when using bell housings.
● Do not operate the device without safeguards.
WARNING
Danger due to exposed gears!
Gears can pull in and crush or cut off fingers and hands.
● Do not reach into the gears.
● Put the device into operation with connected lines only.
10 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
WARNING
Danger due to falling and or loads falling over!
Due to the size and weight of the unit, accidents can occur resulting in se-
vere injuries or death during transport and shipping.
● Compliance with applicable industrial safety requirements is mandatory.
● Use only suitable means of conveyance and lifting tackle with sufficient
load-bearing capacity.
● Attach lifting tackle only to suitable points (see table 5.1 and table 5.2).
● Attach the lifting tackle in such a manner that it cannot slip.
● The device's centre of gravity must lie between the lifting tackle mount-
ing points on the device.
● Secure the device so that toppling over and falling down is impossible.
● Always avoid jerks, impacts and strong vibrations during transportation.
● Never walk under suspended loads, never work under suspended
loads.
● To prevent damage to the device, be extremely cautious when shipping
or transporting.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 11
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
CAUTION
Danger due to hot surfaces!
When operating the device with hot media, there is a danger of being
burned and scalded when touching the hot surfaces.
● At medium temperatures above 60 °C, take measures against uninten-
ded contact.
● Wear safety gloves.
CAUTION
Danger due to hot surfaces!
When operating the device with hot media, there is a danger of being
burned and scalded when touching the hot surfaces.
● Let the device cool off first when the medium temperature is over 48 °
C.
● Wear safety gloves.
12 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
3 Device description
KF series pumps are external gear pump types that work according to the
positive displacement principle.
When rotated, two gears being engaged with each other cause volume ex-
pansion by opening the tooth gaps in the pump inlet (suction side) so that the
medium can enter while a corresponding volume is being displaced in the
pump outlet (pressure side) through engagement of the teeth into the filled
tooth gap. Fluid transport takes place through entrainment in the tooth gaps
along the wall of the wheel chamber. The so-called geometric flow rate Vg is
being displaced per wheel rotation. A value that is stated in technical docu-
ments as rated volume Vgn to specify the pump size.
The actually delivered amount of liquid does not correspond with the theo-
retical value, it is being reduced through losses due to the necessary toler-
ances. The losses are less the lower the operating pressure and the higher
the viscosity.
Gear pumps are self-priming within wide limits. The displacement cycle de-
scribe initially takes place without exhibiting appreciable pressure build-up.
Only after setting external loads, for example, through delivery head, outlet
resistances, line elements, etc. the required working pressure will arise to
overcome these resistances.
As usual with so-called rigid pumps, i.e. non-axial play compensated pumps,
the lateral clearance between gear and front face has been set in such a way
that the maximum allowable operating pressure is managed in an adequate
and secure way.
The medium lubricates the pump's friction bearings and shaft seal. The
pump's operating life will be reduced if the medium contains abrasive ingre-
dients.
The shaft sealing pocket is connected to the pump's suction side. Therefore,
the max. permissible suction-side pressure is dependent on the type of seal.
pe = Suction side
pb = Pressure side
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 13
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
14 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Description
1. Cover 8. Retaining ring
2. O-Ring 9. Parallel key
3. Housing 10. Hexagonal screw
4. Driven shaft 11. Adapter sleeve
5. Driving shaft 12. Valve
6. Plain bearing bush 13. Adjusting washer
7. Rotary shaft lip seal 14. Retaining ring
See section section 3.3 “Types of seals” for further seal types.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 15
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
16 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Description
1. Valve cover 10. Set screw
2. O-Ring 11. Hexagonal nut
3. Housing 12. Retaining screw
4. Driven shaft 13. O-Ring
5. Driving shaft 14. Compression spring
6. Plain bearing bush 15. Valve cone
7. Retaining ring 16. Adapter sleeve
8. Rotary shaft lip seal 17. Hexagonal screw
9. Parallel key
See section section 3.3 “Types of seals” for further seal types.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 17
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
18 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Description
1. Valve housing 14. Valve washer
2. Gasket 15. Valve cone
3. Adapter piece 16. Socket head cap screw
4. Plain bearing bush 17. Socket head cap screw
5. O-Ring 18. Rotary shaft lip seal
6. Driven shaft 19. Retaining ring
7. Driving shaft 20. Parallel key
8. Plain bearing bush 21. Cover
9. Housing 22. O-Ring
10. Roller bearing 23. Rod
11. Retaining ring 24. Compression spring
12. Hexagonal screw 25. Centering star
13. Retaining ring 26. Piston
See section section 3.3 “Types of seals” for further seal types.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 19
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
20 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Description
1. Hexagonal screw 15. Parallel key
2. Screw plug 16. Retaining ring
3. Gasket 17. Roller bearing
4. Socket head cap screw 18. Retaining ring
5. Connection elbow 19. Rotary shaft lip seal
6. Gasket 20. Housing
7. Socket head cap screw 21. Plain bearing bush
8. Rod 22. Driving shaft
9. Piston 23. Driven shaft
10. Valve cone 24. O-Ring
11. Compression spring 25. Cover
12. Valve housing 26. Valve
13. O-Ring 27. Adjusting washer
14. Cover 28. Retaining ring
See section section 3.3 “Types of seals” for further seal types.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 21
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Pump with single rotary Pump with single rotary Pump with double rota- Pump with double rota-
shaft lip seal shaft lip seal and out- ry shaft lip seal with ry shaft lip seal for vac-
Mounting: F / W board bearing connection borehole G uum operation with
Sealing materials: Mounting: G / X 1/8 for liquid seal connection borehole G
1: NBR Sealing materials: (quench) 1/8 for liquid seal
2: FKM 1: NBR Mounting: F / W (quench)
3: PTFE 2: FKM Sealing materials: Special number 74
9: EPDM 3: PTFE 4: PTFE Mounting: F / W
23, 31: FKM (low tem- 7: FKM Sealing materials:
perature) 19: NBR 4: PTFE
32: EPDM 7: FKM
19: NBR
32: EPDM
Pump with triple rotary Pump with mechanical Pump with mechanical Pump without shaft
shaft lip seal for vac- seal seal and connection G seal
uum and normal oper- Mounting: F / W 1/8 (KF 4...25) or G 1/4 Mounting: F / W
ation with connection Sealing materials: (KF 32...80) for liquid Sealing material:
borehole G 1/8 for liq- 5: FKM seal (quench) 30: FKM (O-Ring)
uid seal (quench) 6: PTFE Special number 198
Mounting: F / W 20: EPDM Mounting: F / W
(on request) Sealing material:
5: FKM
22 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
KF 40 R F 1 /... - D 15 - ...
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 23
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Special Description
num-
bers
74 Pump with double rotary shaft lip seal for vacuum operation and connection for liquid
seal (quench), inner rotary shaft lip seal mounted with sealing lip towards shaft end
158 SAE ¾ connections for KF 4...12, SAE 1 connections for KF 16...25
197 Noise-optimized version for aerated oils and vacuum
198 Mechanical seal with connection for liquid seal (quench)
232 SAE 2 connections for KF 50...80, SAE 2 1/2 connections for KF 100...112
304 Bearing bushings Iglidur® X, Δpmax = 10 bar
317 Noise-optimized version for aerated oils and vacuum, bearing bushings Iglidur® X,
Δpmax = 10 bar
332 Version for low-viscous media (only in connection with material GJS), bearing bushings
Iglidur® X, νmin = 4 mm²/s at Δpmax = 10 bar
353 Noise-optimized version for aerated oils and vacuum, bearing bushings DP4 (leadfree)
355 Bearing bushings Iglidur® X, SAE ¾ connections for KF 4...12, SAE 1 connections for
KF 16...25, Δpmax = 10 bar
363 Version for low-viscous media (only in connection with material GJS), bearing bushings
Iglidur® X, νmin = 4 mm²/s at Δpmax = 10 bar, SAE ¾ connections for KF 4...12, SAE 1
connections for KF 16...25
391 Noise-optimized version for aerated oils and vacuum, SAE 2 connections for KF 50...80,
SAE 2 1/2 connections for KF 100...112
24 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
4 Technical data
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 25
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
26 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 27
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
28 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Tab. 4.6: Permissible operating pressures pe max for seal types 1, 2, 7 and 19
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to overload
Overloads in pumps with Iglidur® X bearings can cause the bearings to
wear prematurely.
● Never exceed the max. permissible Δp = 10 bar.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage when simultaneously utilizing multiple
operating limits
When simultaneously utilizing multiple operating limits (see chapter 4
“Technical data”), the pump could become damaged or prematurely wear.
● Do not use minimum and maximum parameters at the same time.
For example, maximum operating pressure ist not permissible in con-
nection with low speed and/or low viscosity.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage when pumping aqueous fluids
When pumping aqueous dispersions or solvents, low pressure on the inlet
port can lead to cavitation damage on the pump.
● Comply with the media-specific attributes.
● When designing the inlet line, make sure the inlet port pressure on the
pump inlet during operation is always higher than the steam pressure
of the pumping fluid. While doing so, also take the altitude of the site of
the device over mean sea level into consideration.
● For aqueous dispersions and solvents, limit the operating temperature
to max. 50 °C, install the pump underneath the liquid level and limit the
rotational speed to maximal 1500 rpm.
4.6 Dimensions
Dimensions of the device can be found in the relevant technical data sheets.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 29
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Inspect the device for shipping damage as soon as the delivery has been
received.
If shipping damage is discovered, inform the shipping company.
If proper operation of the device is impaired by the damage, the device must
be replaced or repaired. In that case, contact the manufacturer.
5.2 Transport
WARNING
Danger due to falling and or loads falling over!
Due to the size and weight of the unit, accidents can occur resulting in se-
vere injuries or death during transport and shipping.
● Compliance with applicable industrial safety requirements is mandatory.
● Use only suitable means of conveyance and lifting tackle with sufficient
load-bearing capacity.
● Attach lifting tackle only to suitable points (see table 5.1 and table 5.2).
● Attach the lifting tackle in such a manner that it cannot slip.
● The device's centre of gravity must lie between the lifting tackle mount-
ing points on the device.
● Secure the device so that toppling over and falling down is impossible.
● Always avoid jerks, impacts and strong vibrations during transportation.
● Never walk under suspended loads, never work under suspended
loads.
● To prevent damage to the device, be extremely cautious when shipping
or transporting.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
30 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Handling aid
● When transporting individuals devices, the eyebolts can be screwed into
the connectiing flange as a handling aid.
WARNING
Hazard from falling and tipping loads
Due to the size and weight of the device, accidents can occur resulting in
severe injuries or death during transport and shipping.
● For pump devices: do not use eyelets on the motor to transport the
pump devices. They can only support the weight of the motor.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 31
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
The device's function is tested in the plant with mineral hydraulic oil. Then all
connections are closed. The remaining residual oil protects the interior parts
for about 6 months.
Clean bare outer metal parts have also been protected by anti-corrosive oil
or protective metal paint for a period of 6 months against corrosion.
The device must not be exposed in the influence of the weather and major
fluctuations in temperature during transport and storage and must be stored
in a dry place.
If the device is stored over a longer period, it must be treated on the inside
and outside with a suitable corrosion protecting oil. In addition, it must be
protected from humidity by a humidity-absorbing agent.
If high air humidity or aggressive atmosphere is to be expected during trans-
port, suitable corrosion prevention measures must be carried out.
NOTICE
Corrosion damage on units with EPDM seals
The functionality of units with EPDM seals is not tested. There is no pres-
ervation of the interior parts. If the unit is not put into operation immediately,
corrosion damage can occur.
● Protect the unit by using suitable corrosion-preventing measures.
NOTICE
Chemical impact on the device and the sealing materials
Incompatibility between the preservation agents and the materials and
elastomers used in the device can lead to damage of the device and the
seals being used.
● Check to make sure the preservation agent is compatible with the ma-
terials and elastomers used in the device.
● Check to make sure the preservation agent is compatible with the media
to be pumped.
32 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
6 Installation
WARNING
Hazard caused by rotating parts and fluid squirting out!
During all work on the device, rotating parts and squirting fluids can lead to
accidents and severe injuries or even restult in death..
● Depressurize all connections lines during all work on the device.
● Depressurize or disconnect the driving motor during all work on the de-
vice.
● Securely prevent the motor and device from restarting during work.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to insufficiently qualified personnel
Improper work can lead to damages and malfunctions in the device and in
the plant.
● Permit only expert and technically qualified personnel to work on the
device.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to a lack of cleanliness
During installation, foreign bodies can get into the interior of the device or
the plant due to a lack of cleanliness and cause malfunctions there.
● Pay attention to cleanliness during all work.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 33
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
DANGER
Hazard caused by incorrect direction of rotation!
Operating the device with the incorrect direction of rotation can lead to
damage to the device and to the up or downstream plant elements. Break-
age can lead to parts flying around uncontrolled or to fluids squirting out
which can lead to accidents and severe injuries or even result in death.
● Always pay attention to the correct direction of rotation when installing
the pumps.
● Always pay attention to the correct direction of rotation when connecting
the motors.
● Secure the fitting keys against flying off when monitoring the direction
of rotation.
34 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
The following definition shall apply with respect to the rotation and delivery
direction of external gear pumps in case of pump connections being posi-
tioned below the drive shaft:
Looking at the pump shaft end, the Looking at the pump shaft end, the
pumping flow is from left to right pumping flow is from right to left
when the shaft is moving clock- when the shaft is moving anticlock-
wise. wise.
Without pressure relief valve
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 35
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
With regard to the direction of rotation and pumping flow of pumps with
universal device KF 4...25 the following definition shall apply when looking
at the pump shaft end:
Direction of rotation right Direction of discharge consistent
and left
With regard to the direction of rotation and pumping flow of pumps with
universal valve KF 32...80...U2 the following definition shall apply when
looking at the pump shaft end:
Direction of rotation right and left Direction of discharge consistent
36 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Change of the direction of rotation in the case of KF...R... and KF...L... pump
types, i.e. pure clockwise or anticlockwise rotating pumps, is only possible by
converting the pump.
The manufacturer normally carries out the conversion work and the customer
should do this only in case of an emergency.
Pumps in noise-optimized version cannot be converted.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to incorrect installation
Improper retrofitting can lead to damages and malfunctions in the unit and
in the plant.
● Permit only expert and technically qualified personnel to work on the
device.
NOTICE
Danger of leaks on the unit
When altering the unit, seals that are removed, damaged or jammed can
lead to leaks during operation.
● Do not remove, damage or jam seals.
NOTICE
Danger of damage on the device
The cover or pressure relief valve and housing are fixed to each other with
adapter sleeves or dwowel pins. If the bearings are damaged when as-
sembling or dismantling the cover or pressrue relief valve, e.g. by bending
out of line, there could be malfunctions and a decrease of the service life.
Furthermore, the seal faces on the cover or pressure relief valve could be
damaged. That can lead to leaks during operation.
● When mounting and dismantling the cover or pressure relief valve, do
not damage the bearings, e.g. by bending out of line.
● When dismantling the cover or pressure relief valve, do not lever in the
joint with a screwdiver or similar tools.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 37
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
In case of a pump's change of the direction of rotation the cover and/or pres-
sure relief valve must be rotated through 180°.
● Loose fastening screws.
● Remove the cover or the pressure relief valve respectively from the pump
housing and put it back on rotated by 180°.
● Tighten all fastening screws applying the below mentioned tightening
torques (see table 6.5).
When checking, pay attention to the following points:
● Pumps without pressure relief valve must have their leak oil hole on the
interior cover side at the pump's suction side.
● Pumps with pressure relief valve must have their pressure relief valve
adjusting screw point toward the pump's pressure side.
In the case of pumps having seal type 6, the mechanical seal must be re-
placed in addition. During this process, the spring coiling direction must be
observed. Heed the assembly instructions of the respective manufacturer
when replacing the mechanical seal.
38 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
DANGER
Danger due to breakage or squirting fluids!
Using unsuitable connections and lines can lead to breakage. Parts flying
around uncontrolled or squirting fluids can lead to accidents with severe
injuries or even lead to death.
● Use only connections and lines approved for the expected pressure
range.
● Comply with each manufacturer's regulations.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to distortion
The load on the device due to impermissible external loads can lead to
malfunctions or to breakage of the flange or housing.
● Pipelines must be fitted absolutely tension-free to the device connec-
tions.
● Pipelines must be designed in such a way that no tension e.g. caused
by changes in length due to fluctuations in temperature can be trans-
ferred to the device.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage caused by foreign bodies in the device
During installation, when using unsuitable sealing materials foreign bodies
can get into the interior of the device or the plant due to a lack of cleanliness
and cause malfunctions there.
● During installation, do not use any hemp or filler as sealing material.
NOTICE
Malfunction due to incorrectly designed inlet line
Due to excessive underpressure, an incorrectly designed inlet line can lead
to a reduction of the delivery rate, increased noise emissions and cavitation.
● Design the inlet line with extreme care since it will strongly influence the
pump's performance.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 39
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
The suction line must be piped as short as possible and in a straight line.
Avoid large suction heights.
Additional line resistance such as formed parts, fittings and closed meshed
suction filters increase the pipe resistance of the suction line and must be
avoided.
The negative pressure in the suction line is calculated from the sum of all
suction-side resistances and the suction height considering the media-spe-
cific data.
Ensure proper suction when piping the suction line and the distances to the
floor and to the bulkhead partitions must be sufficiently large.
The inlet port must have a sufficient distance to the lowest fluid level.
When hose lines are used on the pump suction side, care must be taken to
ensure that the hoses are sufficient stability so that they will not be constricted
through the sucking action.
The media-specific data need to be observed, for example, the device must
be arranged below the fluid level in case of aqueous dispersions and solu-
tions.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage when pumping aqueous fluids
When pumping aqueous dispersions or solvents, low pressure on the inlet
port can lead to cavitation damage on the pump.
● Comply with the media-specific attributes.
● When designing the inlet line, make sure the inlet port pressure on the
pump inlet during operation is always higher than the steam pressure
of the pumping fluid. While doing so, also take the altitude of the site of
the device over mean sea level into consideration.
● For aqueous dispersions and solvents, limit the operating temperature
to max. 50 °C, install the pump underneath the liquid level and limit the
rotational speed to maximal 1500 rpm.
40 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
The recommended flow velocity in the suction line is max. 1,5 m/s.
* = Vacuum
NOTICE
Malfunction due to excessive underpressure
Undercutting the permissible underpressure can lead to a decrease in the
delivery rate (due to short filling of the pump), high noise emission and cav-
itation. Furthermore, in shaft seals the sealing lip can lift up allowing air to
be sucked in.
● The permissible pressure at the pump inlet shall not be lower than value
pe min as stated in the chapter 4 “Technical data”.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 41
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
NOTICE
Damage or failure of the shaft seal due to high supply pressure
Exceeding the permissible supply pressure can lead to a failure of the shaft
seal or to impermissible heating and increased wear.
● The permissible pressure at the pump inlet must not exceed the value
pe max as stated in the chapter 4 “Technical data”.
DANGER
Danger due to breakage or squirting fluids!
Operating the device with impermissibly high pressures can lead to damage
to the device and to the up or downstream plant elements. Breakage can
lead to parts flying around uncontrolled or to fluids squirting out which can
lead to accidents and severe injuries or even result in death.
● Never allow positive displacement pumps to pump against "closed
gates".
● A pressure relief valve or other kind of over-pressure safeguard must
be installed as close as possible to the pump pressure connection. The
pressure relief device must be dimensioned so that the entire delivery
volume can be conducted through it with the lowest possible pressure
or must be depressurized.
● Do not put the device into operation without a pressure relief device.
The nominal width of the pressure line must be selected such that the maxi-
mum permissible pressures are not exceeded.
The pressure must be checked by a manometer installed as closely as pos-
sible to the pressure connection.
To avoid pump overload caused by an impermissibly high pressure, a pres-
sure relief valve or a rupture disc with return to the supply tank must be
installed as closely as possible to the pump's pressure connection.
Another option of pressure limiting is to mount a pressure relief valve directly
to the pump.
During operation of a pump that has to pump media via a non-return valve in
a pressurized circuit (e.g. reserve pump in a lubricant circuit), intake problems
can occur if the inlet pipe is filled with air. In this case the pressure pipe must
be bled directly upstream of the non-return valve.
This can be carried out by a bleeding valve with return or a throttled bypass,
for example.
42 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
If none of the measures described is carried out, the volume of the pressure
pipe between the pump and the non-return valve must be at least 75 % of the
inlet pipe volume.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 43
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to falsely dimensioned coupling.
An incorrect design can lead to premature failure of the coupling due to
breakage or wear.
● When dimensioning the coupling, pay attention to safe dimensioning to
be able to transfer the expected maximum torque reliably and perma-
nently.
● Take the vibrations, peak torques and temperatures into consideration.
The permissible values from the coupling manufacturer must not be ex-
ceeded.
● Comply with the coupling manufacturer's installation rules.
When mounting the clutch, keeping the "E" measure exactly is of the essence
so that the clutch will remain axially movable when used. In order to avoid
any frontal pressure against the elastic gear rim, measure "E" should each
be considered as minimum in the case of an axial displacement.
If the shaft clearance is less than clutch clearance "E", one of the shaft ends
can easily extend into the gear rim. Size "dW" corresponds to the max. shaft
diameter that may extend with the parallel key into the gear rim, size "dH". If
there is the chance to offset the parallel key, i.e. only the shaft extends into
the gear rim, the size of the shaft may be increased up to 2 mm below the
specified "dH" size in order not to obstruct the gear rim in its axial movability.
The permissible displacement values of the elastic clutches stated represent
general guide values taking a clutch loading up the the clutch nominal torque
and an operating speed n = 1500 rpm as well as an occurring ambient tem-
perature of +30 °C into account. Consultation with the manufacturer is
necessary for deviating operating conditions.
The displacement data may only be used individually in each case and in case
of simultaneous appearance in proportion only.
44 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
19 24 28 38 42 48 55 65 75
Type of coupling*
19/24 24/28 28/38 38/45 42/55 48/60 55/70 65/75 75/90
Clutch clearance** E 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 35 40
Dimension** s 2 2 2,5 3 3 3,5 4 4,5 5
Dimension** dH 18 27 30 38 46 51 60 68 80
Dimension** dW 12 20 22 28 36 40 48 55 65
Max. axial displace- ΔKa 1,2 1,4 1,5 1,8 2,0 2,1 2,2 2,6 3,0
ment**
Max. radial displace- ΔKr 0,20 0,22 0,25 0,28 0,32 0,36 0,38 0,42 0,48
ment**
n=1500 1/min
Max. angular dis- ΔKw 1,2° 0,9° 0,9° 1,0° 1,0° 1,1° 1,1° 1,2° 1,2°
placement
n=1500 rpm
* Example: RA19-Z25/14-Z25/19 or RA19/24-Z25/14-Z25/24
** Dimensions in mm
NOTICE
Danger of property damage when mounting other types of couplings
If other coupling types are used, when mounting the coupling the instruc-
tions from the respective manufacturer is binding.
● The respective manufacturer's installation instructions must be com-
plied with when using other coupling types.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 45
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
NOTICE
Danger of property damage if installation is not correct
Do not strike the shaft when installing the respective coupling half on the
motor and pump shaft. There is a danger that the built-in bearing could be
damaged.
● Do not knock onto the shafts during installation of the clutch halves!
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to displacement of the coupling
halves
When the coupling hub is not secured against axial displacement on each
shaft, there is a danger that the coupling hub will shift during operation. That
can lead to a failure of the coupling.
● Prevent axial displacement on every coupling hub on cylindrical shafts
with a threaded pin that presses against the fitting key or the shaft.
46 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
WARNING
Hazard caused by rotating parts and fluid squirting out!
During all work on the device, rotating parts and squirting fluids can lead to
accidents and severe injuries or even restult in death..
● Depressurize all connections lines during all work on the device.
● Depressurize or disconnect the driving motor during all work on the de-
vice.
● Securely prevent the motor and device from restarting during work.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
NOTICE
Malfunctions due to leaking lines and connections
Leaks can occur and air can be sucked in if lines or connections are not
tight. Suctioned air leads to a decrease of the delivery rate and foams up
the medium.
● Make sure all lines and connections are tight.
● Before installation, the device must be checked for transport damage and
soiling.
● Any preserving agents must be removed before installation using ben-
zine or solvent.
● Clean the pipework of dirt, scale, sand, swarf, etc. prior to installation.
Welded pipes in particularly must be pickled or flushed. Cotton waste
must not be used for cleaning.
● Mount clutch and clutch halves respectively to pump and drive (see sec-
tion 6.6 “Mounting the clutch”").
WARNING
Hazard caused by rotating parts!
Rotating parts can cause accidents with severe injuries or result in death
due to body parts, hair or clothing getting caught or wrapped up.
● Protect rotating parts (e.g., coupling and shaft ends) against uninten-
tional contact.
● Close any maintenance openings when using bell housings.
● Do not operate the device without safeguards.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 47
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
● Remove the protective plugs in the pump's suction and pressure con-
nections.
WARNING
Danger due to exposed gears!
Gears can pull in and crush or cut off fingers and hands.
● Do not reach into the gears.
● Put the device into operation with connected lines only.
WARNING
Danger due to hazardous fluid!
Danger of death upon contact with hazardous fluids and when inhaling va-
pours from these liquids.
● Comply with the safety data sheets and regulations on handling the
hazardous liquids!
● Collect and dispose leaks of hazardous materials so that no hazards
arise for people or the environment.
● Comply with national and international rules at the place of installation.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
DANGER
Danger due to breakage or squirting fluids!
Using unsuitable connections and lines can lead to breakage. Parts flying
around uncontrolled or squirting fluids can lead to accidents with severe
injuries or even lead to death.
● Use only connections and lines approved for the expected pressure
range.
● Comply with each manufacturer's regulations.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to distortion
The load on the device due to impermissible external loads can lead to
malfunctions or to breakage of the flange or housing.
● Pipelines must be fitted absolutely tension-free to the device connec-
tions.
● Pipelines must be designed in such a way that no tension e.g. caused
by changes in length due to fluctuations in temperature can be trans-
ferred to the device.
48 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
● Connect suction and pressure side according to the marking on the pump
or the information on the type plate (see section 6.3 “Definition of the
direction of rotation and pumping flow”).
● Connect the pipework to the suction and pressure piping. Always heed
the respective manufacturer's instructions.
● Mount a suitable tank for the liquid seal (see chapter 7 “Operation start-
up”, if applicable) when operating the pump with liquid seal (quench).
DANGER
Danger due to breakage or squirting fluids!
Operating the device with impermissibly high pressures can lead to damage
to the device and to the up or downstream plant elements. Breakage can
lead to parts flying around uncontrolled or to fluids squirting out which can
lead to accidents and severe injuries or even result in death.
● Never allow positive displacement pumps to pump against "closed
gates".
● A pressure relief valve or other kind of over-pressure safeguard must
be installed as close as possible to the pump pressure connection. The
pressure relief device must be dimensioned so that the entire delivery
volume can be conducted through it with the lowest possible pressure
or must be depressurized.
● Do not put the device into operation without a pressure relief device.
CAUTION
Danger due to hot surfaces!
When operating the device with hot media, there is a danger of being
burned and scalded when touching the hot surfaces.
● At medium temperatures above 60 °C, take measures against uninten-
ded contact.
● Wear safety gloves.
NOTICE
Danger of malfunctions through polluted medium
When filling the storage tank with the medium, impurities or small parts can
get into the tank and cause damage or malfunctions on the unit and in the
system.
● When filling the storage tank pay attention to the greatest possible
cleanliness.
● Before opening, clean filler screw and shutoff on fluid transport and stor-
age tank.
● Check media tank for contamination and clean if necessary. On no ac-
count remove the filter screen on the filler neck or the filter insert during
the filling process.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 49
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
NOTICE
Danger of property damage if installation is not correct
Incorrect assembly with components or devices from other manufacturers
can lead to breakdowns.
● Comply with each manufacturer's operating instructions when assem-
bling with additional components or devices.
DANGER
Danger due to electric voltage!
Danger of death due to electric shock.
● Follow the special safety regulations during all work on electrical instal-
lations.
● Only allow electricians to work on electrical systems.
DANGER
Hazard caused by incorrect direction of rotation!
Operating the device with the incorrect direction of rotation can lead to
damage to the device and to the up or downstream plant elements. Break-
age can lead to parts flying around uncontrolled or to fluids squirting out
which can lead to accidents and severe injuries or even result in death.
● Always pay attention to the correct direction of rotation when installing
the pumps.
● Always pay attention to the correct direction of rotation when connecting
the motors.
● Secure the fitting keys against flying off when monitoring the direction
of rotation.
● All data stated on the motor type plate must be checked for conformity
to the required operating data.
● Adjust the overload protection to the correct value.
● Check the rotational drive direction of the pump before switching on.
50 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
7 Operation start-up
7.1 Preparation
WARNING
Hazard caused by rotating parts!
Rotating parts can cause accidents with severe injuries or result in death
due to body parts, hair or clothing getting caught or wrapped up.
● Protect rotating parts (e.g., coupling and shaft ends) against uninten-
tional contact.
● Close any maintenance openings when using bell housings.
● Do not operate the device without safeguards.
WARNING
Danger due to exposed gears!
Gears can pull in and crush or cut off fingers and hands.
● Do not reach into the gears.
● Put the device into operation with connected lines only.
WARNING
Danger due to hazardous fluid!
Danger of death upon contact with hazardous fluids and when inhaling va-
pours from these liquids.
● Comply with the safety data sheets and regulations on handling the
hazardous liquids!
● Collect and dispose leaks of hazardous materials so that no hazards
arise for people or the environment.
● Comply with national and international rules at the place of installation.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
CAUTION
Danger due to hot surfaces!
When operating the device with hot media, there is a danger of being
burned and scalded when touching the hot surfaces.
● At medium temperatures above 60 °C, take measures against uninten-
ded contact.
● Wear safety gloves.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 51
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to incorrect commissioning
Improper commissioning can lead to damages and malfunctions in the de-
vice and in the plant.
● Permit only expert and technically qualified personnel to work on the
device.
● Comply with the permissible operating data such as rotational speed,
pressure temperature, permissible media, etc. (see chapter 4 “Techni-
cal data”).
● Pay attention to cleanliness during all work.
● Before starting the system make sure that a sufficient quantity of the
service fluid is extant to avoid dry running.
● Before starting the plant, pumps and inlet line must be filled with oper-
ating fluid to prevent damage to the pump and the shaft seal during dry
runs. That also guarantees pump suction.
● For pumps with liquid seal (quench), fill the sealing cavity with a suitable
confining fluid before it is used for the first time.
● Make sure that all lines and connections are tight and that no leakages
can occur or air can be sucked in.
52 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
NOTICE
Danger of the failure of the seal due to a lack of sealing fluid
A lack of sealing fluid can lead to a failure of the shaft seal and to increased
temperatures and increased wear.
● Fill the pump's sealing cavity with a suitable sealing medium. The seal-
ing fluid must be compatible with the seals and materials used as well
as with the pumping medium.
● The confining fluid's minimum and maximum filling level must be en-
sured using appropriate technical and/or organisational measures.
● The liquid seal in the quenching connection must not be subjected to
pressure or vacuum.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 53
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Types of seals: Types of seals: Triple rotary shaft lip Type of seal: 5
4, 7, 19, 32 4, 7, 19, 32 seal Special number 198
Special number 74 (on request)
54 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
NOTICE
Danger of the pump overheating
The series D.. pressure relief valves are exclusively used to protect the
pump. The valves must only respond for short durations. Permanent drain-
ing of the volumetric flow through the valve will destroy the pump through
overheating.
● Make sure the valve responds only briefly.
For pressure setting on the pressure relief valve see figure 7.1:
● loosen the hexagon nut (1)
● adjust set screw (2)
clockwise = response pressure higher
anticlockwise = response pressure lower
● secure the set screw (2) using hexagon nut (1) once the desired pressure
has been adjusted.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 55
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
DANGER
Danger due to breakage or squirting fluids!
When securing screw (3) is loose, set screw (2) can be screwed into the
valve until the valve is completely shut. That can result in inadmissibly high
pressures in the system if there is no other pressure relief device. Breakage
can lead to parts flying around uncontrolled or to fluids squirting out which
can lead to accidents and severe injuries or even result in death.
Fluid can spurt out from the valve if set screw (2) is completely screwed
out. That can lead to accidents with severe injuries or result in death.
● Never operate the unit with securing screw (3) loosened.
● Never completely screw set screw (2) into the valve.
● Never completely unscrew set screw (2) out of the valve.
56 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
● The pumps may only start without or with low pressure load. For this
purpose, open the existing shut-off elements and adjust the pressure
relief valve incorporated in the pressure pipe to the lowest opening pres-
sure.
● Start-up takes place by repeated quick on-off switching of the driving
motor (jog mode) without reaching full speed until proper operation of the
device is evident. This applies particularly when a cold pump is to start
with already heated medium. The reason for this is to achieve slow heat-
ing of the pump and prevent the pump seizing through thermal shock.
● Proper function indicated by noise generation or on the pressure gage
should be reached after max. 30 seconds.
● First of all, run the pump at zero pressure or low pressure for a couple
of minutes after switching on the motor.
● Bleed the plant on the distribution pipes, preferably at the highest point.
● Pressure loading can be gradually increased up to the desired operating
pressure (max. permissible pressures, see chapter 4 “Technical data”)
● Check the temperature of the medium and that of the pump after the
intended operating characteristics have been reached. Checkpoints on
the pump are the bearing locations, the housing and the shaft seal. The
temperatures observed on the pump surface may be approx. 10 °C
above medium temperature.
● Check the fluid level of the plant once more and top up if necessary.
● Check the final operating temperature after several hours running time
(see chapter 4 “Technical data” for max. permissible temperatures).
● Check the static seals on the suction and pressure connections and the
pump's joints for leakages.
● Check the threaded connections for leakages. Such leakages can be
easily eliminated by simply retightening the threaded connections.
● Also check all motor and pump fastening screws after a few hours of
operation.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 57
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
8 Removal
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to insufficiently qualified personnel
Improper work can lead to damages and malfunctions in the device and in
the plant.
● Permit only expert and technically qualified personnel to work on the
device.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to a lack of cleanliness
A lack of cleanliness can lead to damages and malfunctions in the device
and in the plant.
● Pay attention to cleanliness during all work.
● Close all openings with protective caps to prevent dirt from penetrating
into the system.
WARNING
Hazard caused by rotating parts and fluid squirting out!
During all work on the device, rotating parts and squirting fluids can lead to
accidents and severe injuries or even restult in death..
● Depressurize all connections lines during all work on the device.
● Depressurize or disconnect the driving motor during all work on the de-
vice.
● Securely prevent the motor and device from restarting during work.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
58 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
WARNING
Danger due to hazardous fluid!
Danger of death upon contact with hazardous fluids and when inhaling va-
pours from these liquids.
● Comply with the safety data sheets and regulations on handling the
hazardous liquids!
● Collect and dispose leaks of hazardous materials so that no hazards
arise for people or the environment.
● Comply with national and international rules at the place of installation.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
CAUTION
Danger due to hot surfaces!
When operating the device with hot media, there is a danger of being
burned and scalded when touching the hot surfaces.
● Let the device cool off first when the medium temperature is over 48 °
C.
● Wear safety gloves.
NOTICE
Danger of malfunction due to curing liquids
Curing liquids can engage the device mechanically and make it unusable.
● Immediately clean the pump or store it in such a way that curing is def-
initely prevented in cases where the pump was operated with curing
liquids.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 59
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
9 Maintenance
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to insufficiently qualified personnel
Improper work can lead to damages and malfunctions in the device and in
the plant.
● Permit only expert and technically qualified personnel to work on the
device.
NOTICE
Danger of damages and malfunctions due to a lack of maintenance
If the device is not regularly maintained, damage that is not discovered or
not repaired can lead to malfunctions and to the failure of the device.
● Maintain the device regularly.
● Check the device initially right after commissioning.
● Adapt the scope and time between maintenance intervals to the de-
mands posed by the location.
● During visual inspections, look purposefully for possible damages.
● The device must not be used if visible damages are found.
● Document the type and extent of the maintenance work. That allows the
fastest possible detection of a change in operating performance.
When designed to the conditions of use and fitted correctly, the devices are
able to be used for long and problem-free operation. They only require a little
maintenance. This is absolutely essential for problem-free operation, howev-
er. Experience shows that a high percentage of the problems and damage
that occur can be traced back to dirt and lack of maintenance.
The scope and time intervals for inspections and maintenance are generally
specified by the operator in a respective plan.
60 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to a lack of cleanliness
A lack of cleanliness can lead to damages and malfunctions in the device
and in the plant.
● Pay attention to cleanliness during all work.
● Close all openings with protective caps to prevent dirt from penetrating
into the system.
NOTICE
Malfunctions due to leaking lines and connections
Leaks can occur and air can be sucked in if lines or connections are not
tight. Suctioned air leads to a decrease of the delivery rate and foams up
the medium.
● Make sure all lines and connections are tight.
DANGER
Danger due to breakage or squirting fluids!
Using damaged connections and lines can cause parts to fly around un-
controlled or fluids to squirt out, which can lead to accidents and severe
injuries or even result in death.
● Immediately replace damaged connections, pipes and hose lines.
DANGER
Danger due to electric voltage!
Danger of death due to electric shock.
● Follow the special safety regulations during all work on electrical instal-
lations.
● Only allow electricians to work on electrical systems.
WARNING
Hazard caused by rotating parts and fluid squirting out!
During all work on the device, rotating parts and squirting fluids can lead to
accidents and severe injuries or even restult in death..
● Depressurize all connections lines during all work on the device.
● Depressurize or disconnect the driving motor during all work on the de-
vice.
● Securely prevent the motor and device from restarting during work.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 61
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
DANGER
Danger due to breakage or squirting fluids!
Operating the device with impermissibly high pressures can lead to damage
to the device and to the up or downstream plant elements. Breakage can
lead to parts flying around uncontrolled or to fluids squirting out which can
lead to accidents and severe injuries or even result in death.
● Never allow positive displacement pumps to pump against "closed
gates".
● A pressure relief valve or other kind of over-pressure safeguard must
be installed as close as possible to the pump pressure connection. The
pressure relief device must be dimensioned so that the entire delivery
volume can be conducted through it with the lowest possible pressure
or must be depressurized.
● Do not put the device into operation without a pressure relief device.
WARNING
Danger due to hazardous fluid!
Danger of death upon contact with hazardous fluids and when inhaling va-
pours from these liquids.
● Comply with the safety data sheets and regulations on handling the
hazardous liquids!
● Collect and dispose leaks of hazardous materials so that no hazards
arise for people or the environment.
● Comply with national and international rules at the place of installation.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
CAUTION
Danger due to hot surfaces!
When operating the device with hot media, there is a danger of being
burned and scalded when touching the hot surfaces.
● Let the device cool off first when the medium temperature is over 48 °
C.
● Wear safety gloves.
62 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
9.3 Cleaning
The pump shaft as well as the associated hardware must not run in dust ac-
cumulations.
Regular cleaning of the pump and its environment is therefore necessary.
Cleaning the pump using a steam jet cleaner is not permissible.
The static seals on the device's separation joints and the connection lines
must be periodically checked for leakproofness.
If there are any visible leaks, immediately stop plant operation.
If the leaks cannot be stopped by simply retightening the connection, replace
all affected seals.
Checking the confining fluid filling level is mandatory for safe pump operation.
Top up the confining fluid as required.
If there is no automatic monitoring, the filling level must be checked at least
befor each shift begins.
The outer but also the inner shaft seal could be leaking if the filling level should
dorp unusually fast within a short period of time. The confining fluid will then
leak into the coupling space or it will be sucked into the pump thereby mixing
with the medium.
If the filling level should rise, the inner shaft seal may probably be leaking and
the confining fluid is begin mixed with the pressurised medium.
Stop plant operation immediately in both cases.
Rotary shaft lip seals are particulary prone to wear for functional reasons and
must accordingly be carfully checked. Excessicely high supply pressure or
negative suction pressure, wrong rotational direction or pollution leads to in-
creased wear, increased and impermissible temperature rises.
Small amounts of leakage, however, are indispensable for function. The per-
missible amount of leakage, though, is highly dependet on the operational
conditions and cannot be quantified.
If there are excessive amounts of leakage, stop pump operation immediately.
Replace the rotary shaft lip seal.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 63
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
Increased wear on the rotary shaft lip seal should be taken into account in the
case of vertical pump installation.
Mechanical seals are particularly prone to wear for functional reasins and
must accordingly be carfully checked. Too high admission pressure, wrong
rotational direction, frequent star-ups, gas or air portions in the oil or contam-
ination lead to increased wear, increased leckage and impermissible tem-
perature rises.
Small amounts of leckages, however, are indispensable for mechanical seal
function. The permissible amount of leackage, though, is highly dependent
on the operational conditions and cannot be quantified.
If there are excessive amounts of leakage, stop pump operation immediately.
Replace the mechanical seal. In so doing, heed the assembly instructions of
the mechanical seal manufacturer.
Increased wear on the mechanical seal should be taken into account in the
case of vertical pump installation.
9.8 Clutch
All the screw joints must be checked at regular intervals to make sure they
are tight fit. Loose screw joints must be tightened and, if necessary, secured
against loosening by e.g. Loctite (medium stregth).
9.10 Damage
Check the pump as well as its environment regularly for damage such as
dents in the clutch guard.
64 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
This temperatures should never be much higher (max. 10 °C) than the media
temperature at the pump inlet. Checkpoints on the pump are the bearing lo-
cations, the housing and the shaft seal.
If the measured temperatures are higher than the permissible values, this is
an indication of wear or bearing damages. The pump must be replaced in this
case.
Like shaft seals, bearings, gear and wheel chamber housings are wear items.
Wear largely depends on the occurring loads, life cycle as well as type and
proportion of solids in the medium. Wear cannot be identified from the outside.
The condition of a pump, however, can be analysed by the volumetric effi-
ciency factor. Decrease of the efficiency factor would normally indicate wear.
Therefore, a check on all operating data such as delivery, pressure, temper-
ature, drive data, degree of filter contamination should also be carried out
during maintenance work.
Further investigations into the cause are necessary in the event of major de-
viations (> 10 %) to the reference values. This helps detecting premature
pump failure in time. The pump must immediately be taken out of service at
a drop of delivery or pressure to 80 % of the original values. The achieved
values at initial commissioning serve as reference in this case.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 65
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
10 Repairs
10.2 Troubleshooting
Leaks are the most frequent problem. If these occure on the pipelines, they
can be eliminated by straightforward tightening of the screw joints.
If the device itself is leaking, the respective seals have to be replaced.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to incorrect work and use of non-
original spare parts
Improper work can lead to damages and malfunctions in the device and in
the plant. That also applies to the use of non-original spare parts.
● Permit only expert and technically qualified personnel to work on the
device.
● Use only genuine original spare parts.
10.4 Return
66 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
10.5 Disposal
Disposal of the packaging and used parts must be garried out according to
the regualtions valid in the country where the device is installed.
The following table lists the possible causes of the most frequently occuring
malfunctions and notes on possible remedies.
If the problems cannot be identified, please request help from the manufac-
turer.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 67
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
68 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 69
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
70 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Operating and installation instructions
Strainer
PN6-160
Contents
1.0 General information on operating 6.0 Putting the valve into operation .............. 2-7
instructions ................................................2-2 7.0 Care and maintenance.............................. 2-8
2.0 Notes on possible dangers.......................2-2 8.0 Troubleshooting ........................................ 2-9
2.1 Significance of symbols .................................... 2-2
9.0 Troubleshooting table .............................. 2-9
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information ........... 2-2
10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part . 2-10
3.0 Storage and transport ..............................2-2
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee ............................ 2-10
4.0 Description .................................................2-3
4.1 Scope of applications ........................................ 2-3
4.2 Operating principles .......................................... 2-3
4.3 Diagram............................................................. 2-4
4.4 Technical data - remarks ................................... 2-5
4.5 Marking ............................................................. 2-5
4.5.1 PN6-40 ..................................................... 2-5
4.5.2 PN63-160 ................................................. 2-5
5.0 Installation..................................................2-6
5.1 General notes on installation............................. 2-6
5.2 Installing valves with butt weld ends ................. 2-7
4.0 Description
4.1 Scope of applications
Strainers are used for "cleanin flowing mediums“.
ATTENTION !
- Refer to the data sheet for applications, limits on use and possibilities.
- Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials.
- The valves are designed for standard operating conditions. If conditions exceed
these requirements, e.g. aggressive or abrasive media, the operator should
state the higher requirements when ordering.
- Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject
to TRD 110.
The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.
The special markings on the valve must be taken into account.
Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions.
4.5 Marking
4.5.1 PN6-40
Details of the CE-marking on the valve:
CE-marking
0525 Notified body
Manufacturer Address of manufacturer:
refer to item 11.0 Warranty / Guarantee
Typ Type
Bj. Year of manufacture
According to the Pressure Equipment Directive table 6, annex II, valves without safety
function are only allowed to bear the CE-marking DN32 onwards.
4.5.2 PN63-160
Notified body
Body material
Year of
manufacture
(clear speach)
5.0 Installation
5.1 General notes on installation
The following points should be taken into account besides the general principles governing
installation work:
ATTENTION !
- Remove flange covers if present.
- The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles.
- Note installation position with reference to flow direction, see mark on valve.
- Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation.
- Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are avoided.
- Protect valves from dirt during construction work.
- Connection flanges must mate exactly.
- Connecting bolts for pipe flanges should be mounted preferably from the
counter flange side (hexagon nuts from the valve side).
At DN15-32: If valves should be mounted directly to valves, the upper flange
connecting bolts should be preferably executed with studs and hexagon nuts on
both sides.
- Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, hoods must not be used to
take external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as
connecting points for lifting gear.
- Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used.
See data sheet for weights.
- Leave sufficient space to remove the screen basket during installation in
pipelines.
- Installation position:
a) The screen basket should never be at the top, otherwise the dirt will
fall back into the pipe.
b) If water hammer is possible due to condensation in steam lines,
never install the trap with the screen basket at the bottom, but install
it so that it is horizontal.
- Centre gaskets between the flanges.
- Install compensators to compensate for thermal expansion of the piping.
- Planners / construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and
installing products.
- The valves are designed for application, not influenced from weather.
- For application outside or in adverse environments like corrosion-promoting conditions
(sea water, chemical vapours, etc.), special constructions or protective measures are
recommended.
ATTENTION !
Refer to point 10.0 before opening the strainer.
- Contaminated strainers in suction-lines will result cavitation and damage the
pumps.
- Before reassembling the unit, remember that the bearing surface must be cleaned and a
new gasket (pos. 6) must be inserted.
- Set the strainer cover (pos. 2) in place.
- Tighten the hexagon nuts (pos. 4) evenly crosswise.
- Tightening torque‘s for hexagon nuts / bolts:
8.0 Troubleshooting
In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and
adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
-
It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.
Flange broken between Bolts tightened unevenly. Re-align piping and fit new valve!
unit and piping Mating flanges not properly aligned.
ARI-Strainer -
Y-pattern with flanges
• TRB 801 Annex II No. 45 (except EN-JL1040)
Grey cast
• EN ISO 15848-1 / TA - Luft iron
TÜV-Test-No. TA 09 2016 C04
SG iron
Cast steel
Fig. 050 Page 2
Fig. 050
ARI-Strainer -
Y-pattern with flanges
• TRB 801 Annex II No. 45
• EN ISO 15848-1 / TA - Luft
TÜV-Test-No. TA 09 2016 C04
Stainless
steel
Fig. 059 Page 3
ARI-Strainer -
Y-pattern with butt weld ends
• TRB 801 Annex II No. 45
• EN ISO 15848-1 / TA - Luft
TÜV-Test-No. TA 09 2016 C04
Cast steel
Fig. 080 Page 4
Features:
• Screen and supporting basket made of stainless steel
• Screen from DN50 with reinforced ring
• Screen from DN150 with supporting basket
• Precise guidance of screen in cover and body
Edition 06/17 - Data subject to alteration - Regularly updated data on www.ari-armaturen.com! Data sheet 050001 englisch (english)
ARI-Strainer 050
Technical data
Strainer - Y-pattern with flanges (Grey cast iron, SG iron, Cast steel)
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 10./12.050 Fig. 22./23.050 Fig. 34./35.050
1 Body EN-JL1040, EN-GJL-250 EN-JS1049, EN-GJS-400-18U-LT GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N
2 Cover DN ≤150: EN-JL1040, EN-GJL-250 DN ≤80: EN-JS1049, EN-GJS-400-18U-LT DN ≤80: P250 GH, 1.0460
DN >150: P265 GH, 1.0425 DN >80: P265 GH, 1.0425 DN >80: P265 GH, 1.0425
3 x Screen X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301
3.1 Supporting basket DN >125: X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301
4 Stud 25CrMo4, 1.7218
5 Hexagon nut C35E, 1.1181
6 x Gasket Pure graphite (CrNi laminated with graphite)
└ Spare parts
Face-to-face dimension FTF series 1 according to DIN EN 558 Standard-flange dimensions refer to page 6
L (mm) 130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350 400 480 600 730 850
Dimensions
H (mm) 90 100 115 125 150 160 180 215 235 275 305 390 540 680
H1 (mm) 135 150 180 205 235 250 285 330 365 425 480 610 915 1110
B (mm) 10 10 25 35 45 45 25 40 55 65 50 80 230 350
l1 (mm) 56 68 82 98 114 119 134 149 169 199 224 284 434 555
Ød1 (mm) 23 28 36 42 50 61,5 78,5 89,5 109,5 137,5 160 210 258 308
Mesh width (mm) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,25 1,25 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6
Standard screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,9 10,8 17,8 26,1 36,7 61 98,6 146 234 376 394 652 1225 1873
Zeta-value -- 1,7 2,2 2 2,5 3 2,7 2,9 3,1 2,9 2,8 5,2 6 4,2 3,7 on request
possible in straight
Mesh width (mm) 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 through form
Fine screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,2 10,1 16,8 24,3 32,9 49,5 80,3 115 189 303 405 590 1231 1883
Zeta-value -- 2,1 2,5 2,2 2,8 3,8 4,1 4,4 4,9 4,4 4,5 4,9 7,3 4,1 3,6
Ratio of the free screen surface area to the area of
10 8,4 8,3 7,1 6,8 5,2 4,4 3,7 2,8 2,7 2,4 2,3 2,7 2,9
the nominal diametSp.p.
1)
Zeta-value ... range of tolerance for Kvs-values acc. to VDI/VDE 2173 Kvs-values based upon clean screen !
Weights
10.050 (kg) 2,5 3 4,5 5,5 7 9 13 19 26 38 54 110 -- --
12.050 (kg) 3 4 5 7 9 12 16 21 30 43 61 121 154 335
22.050 (kg) 3,5 4 5,5 7 9 12 16 21 28 41 58 115 154 335
23.050 (kg) 3,5 4 5,5 7 9 12 16 21 32 47 64 -- -- --
34./35.050 (kg) 4 5 6 8 10 13 19 24,5 35 51 71 144 -- --
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 52./54./55.059
1 Body GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
2 Cover X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
3 x Screen X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
3.1 Supporting basket DN >125: X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
4 Stud A4-70
5 Hexagon nut A4
6 x Gasket Pure graphite (CrNi laminated with graphite)
└ Spare parts
Face-to-face dimension FTF series 1 according to DIN EN 558 Standard-flange dimensions refer to page 6
L (mm) 130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350 400 480 600
Dimensions
H2 (mm) 94 94 102 102 123 126 148 170 202 285 320 417
H3 (mm) 130 138 150 143 166 172 206 234 282 388 443 585
l2 (mm) 48 48 57 57 68 70 85 97 112 138 169 230
Ød2 (mm) 25 25 31 36 46 55,5 69,5 85,5 105,5 131,5 159 210
Mesh width (mm) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,25 1,25 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6
Standard screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,9 10,8 17,8 26,1 36,7 61 98,6 146 234 376 394 652 on request
Zeta-value -- 1,7 2,2 2 2,5 3 2,7 2,9 3,1 2,9 2,8 5,2 6
Mesh width (mm) 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25
Fine screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,2 10,1 16,8 24,3 32,9 49,5 80,3 115 189 303 405 590
Zeta-value -- 2,1 2,5 2,2 2,8 3,8 4,1 4,4 4,9 4,4 4,5 4,9 7,3
Ratio of the free screen surface area to the area of
10 8,4 8,3 7,1 6,8 5,2 4,4 3,7 2,8 2,7 2,4 2,3
the nominal diametSp.p.
1)
Zeta-value ... range of tolerance for Kvs-values acc. to VDI/VDE 2173 Kvs-values based upon clean screen !
Weights
52./54./55.059 (kg) 4 5 6 8 10 13 19 24,5 35,0 51 71 144
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 34./35.080
1 Body GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N
2 Cover DN ≤100: P250 GH, 1.0460
DN >100: P265 GH, 1.0425
3 x Screen X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301
3.1 Supporting basket DN >125: X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301
4 Stud 25CrMo4, 1.7218
5 Hexagon nut C35E, 1.1181
6 x Gasket Pure graphite (CrNi laminated with graphite)
└ Spare parts
Dimensions
H (mm) 90 100 115 125 150 160 180 215 235 275 305 390 540 680
H1 (mm) 135 150 180 205 235 250 285 330 365 425 480 610 915 1110
B (mm) 10 10 25 35 45 45 25 40 55 65 50 80 230 350
l1 (mm) 56 68 82 98 114 119 134 149 169 199 224 284 283 317
Ød1 (mm) 23 28 36 42 50 61,5 78,5 89,5 109,5 137,5 160 210 260 314
Mesh width (mm) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,25 1,25 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6
Standard screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,9 10,8 17,8 26,1 36,7 61 98,6 146 234 376 394 652 1225 1873
Zeta-value -- 1,7 2,2 2 2,5 3 2,7 2,9 3,1 2,9 2,8 5,2 6 4,2 3,7
Mesh width (mm) 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25
Fine screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,2 10,1 16,8 24,3 32,9 49,5 80,3 115 189 303 405 590 1231 1883
Zeta-value -- 2,1 2,5 2,2 2,8 3,8 4,1 4,4 4,9 4,4 4,5 4,9 7,3 4,1 3,6
Ratio of the free screen surface area to the area of
10 8,4 8,3 7,1 6,8 5,2 4,4 3,7 2,8 2,7 2,4 2,3 2,7 2,9
the nominal diametSp.p.
1)
Zeta-value ... range of tolerance for Kvs-values acc. to VDI/VDE 2173 Kvs-values based upon clean screen !
Weights
35.080 (kg) 2,5 3 3,5 4 5,5 7,5 12 15 23,5 33 49 106 135 240
Based on our experience we recommend electric welding process for connecting valves or strainers with tubes or with each other.
Lime based electrodes with an appropriate composite material should be used as filler material for welding.
Gas welding should be avoided.
Because of the different material compositions and wall thickness of the steam traps and the pipe gas welding shall not be applied. Quenching cracks and coarse grain
structure may develop.
Bar magnet
Operating temperature: up to +450°C
DN15 to DN300
Pos. Description Fig. 10./12./22./23./34./35.050; Fig. 52./54./55.059;
34./35.080
8 Drain screw C35E, 1.1181 A4
9 Bellows housing St Aramid Only DN15:
view on the cover flange Holes for differential pressure measurement
13 Bar magnet 1.4571 / AlNiCo 1.4571 / AlNiCo
(not for stainless steel) on request
DN G
(mm) (inch)
15-20 3/8
25-32 3/4 Permanent magnet
40-80 1
100-150 1 1/2
200-300 2
350-500 on request Alternative:
Permanent magnet
Drain screw Operating temperature: up to +210°C
Pos. Description Fig. 10./12./22./23./34./35.050; Fig. 52./54./55.059; Pos. Description Fig. 10./12./22./23./34./35.050; Fig. 52./54./55.059;
34./35.080 34./35.080
8 Drain screw C35E, 1.1181 A4 8 Permanent magnet C35E, 1.1181 / AlNiCo A4 / AlNiCo
9 Bellows housing St Aramid
Standard-flange dimensions Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1/-2 (Flange holes / -thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533/2544/2545)
ØD (mm) 80 90 100 120 130 140 160 190 210 240 265 320 -- --
PN6 ØK (mm) 55 65 75 90 100 110 130 150 170 200 225 280 -- --
n x Ød (mm) 4x11 4x11 4x11 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x18 -- --
ØD (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405 460
PN16 ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355 410
1)
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 12x22 12x26 12x26
ØD (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235 270 300 360 425 485
PN25 ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 310 370 430
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 8x26 8x26 12x26 12x30 16x30
ØD (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235 270 300 375 450 515
PN40 ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 320 385 450
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 8x26 8x26 12x30 12x33 16x33
1)
also with 8 bore holes acc. to DIN EN 1092-1/-2 possible.
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of
Pressure-temperature-ratings the given temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JL1040 6 (bar) -- 6 5,4 4,8 4,2 3,6 -- -- --
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
EN-JS1049 16 (bar) on request 16 15,5 14,7 13,9 12,8 11,2 -- --
EN-JS1049 25 (bar) on request 25 24,3 23 21,8 20 17,5 -- --
acc. to manufacturers standard -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.0619+N 25 (bar) 18,7 25 23,9 22 20 17,2 16 14,8 8,2
1.0619+N 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1
1.0460 25 (bar) 18,7 25 23,9 22 20 17,2 16 14,8 10
1.0460 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 16
acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.4408 16 (bar) 16 16 14,5 13,4 12,7 11,8 11,4 10,9 --
1.4408 25 (bar) 25 25 22,7 21 19,8 18,5 17,8 17,1 --
1.4408 40 (bar) 40 40 36,3 33,7 31,8 29,7 28,5 27,4 --
1)
Studs and nuts made of A4-70 (at temperatures below -10°C)
Achtung:
Lesen Sie diese Anleitung vor Montage und Inbetriebnahme sorgfältig durch. Gewährleistungsansprüche
entfallen, soweit die Montage-, Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung nicht beachtet wird.
Prüfen Sie bitte bei der Anlieferung, ob Beschädigungen vorhanden sind bzw. ob Teile fehlen. Vermerken
Sie entsprechendes auf den Speditionspapieren.
KELVION gelötete Plattenwärmetauscher haben scharfe Kanten. Bitte beachten Sie dieses bei der
Handhabung.
Bauliche Veränderungen am Produkt dürfen nur von autorisierten Kelvion Brazed PHE Mitarbeitern
vorgenommen werden. Andernfalls erlöschen die Gewährleistungsansprüche.
Attention:
Before proceeding with installation and operation please read entire guide carefully. Failure to do so can
cause injury or property damage. In case of noncompliance warranty claims are voided.
When receiving heat exchangers, any claims for damage or shortage of parts in shipment must be filed
immediately against the transportation company by the consignee.
KELVION heat exchangers may have some sharp edges so please handle with care.
Structural alterations on the product are allowed only by authorised Kelvion Brazed PHE employees.
Otherwise warranty claims are voided.
Attention:
Ces instructions sont à lire avec soin avant le montage et la mise en service de l’échangeur. Si ces
instructions ne sont pas suivies, nous ne pouvons donner suite à une éventuelle demande de garantie.
Contrôler dès réception si l’échangeur de chaleur présente des dommages ou bien si des pièces
manquent. Dans ce cas, faire les remarques appropriées sur les bordereaux du transporteur.
Les échangeurs de chaleur peuvent avoir des arêtes coupantes. Maniez-les avec prudence.
Toute modification apportée sur l’échangeur sans autorisation préalable donnée par les employés de
Kelvion brasé PHE ne pourra être couvert par notre garantie.
Beschreibung / Konformitätserklärung 1
Montageposition 2
Anschluss an das Rohrnetz 3
Lötanschluss, Schweißanschluss, Gewindeanschluss 4
Inbetriebnahme 5
Betrieb 6
Frostschutz 6
Verschmutzung / Fouling 7
Reinigung 7
Korrosionsbeständigkeit von gelöteten Plattenwärmetauschern gegenüber Wasserinhaltsstoffen 8
Volumenangaben 10
Montageanleitung Isolierungen 11
Montageanleitung Verteilerrohre 12
Table of contents
Sommaire
Werkstoffe:
Platten: Edelstahl 1.4404 - SA240 316L (Standard)
Edelstahl 1.4547 / SA240 S 31254 (XCR-Modelle, WP7M-40-XCR)
Lot: Kupfer Typ: GBE, GBS, GBH, GML, GMH, GBH-HP, GCS, GCH, GKE, GKS, GKH, GWH, WP, WH
Nickel Typ: GNS, NP, GKN
VacInox Typ: GVH, GVH-HP
Angaben zum Typ, Baujahr, Herstellernummer, Hersteller sowie die technischen Daten sind dem Typenschild zu entnehmen. Es sind
geeignete Maßnahmen zu treffen, damit die angegebenen zulässigen max. und min. Betriebsparameter weder im Betrieb noch im Stillstand
über- bzw. unterschritten werden.
Bitte beachten Sie die Angaben auf dem Typenschild des Wärmetauschers!
KELVION gelötete Plattenwärmetauscher sind Druckgeräte im Sinne der Richtlinie 2014/68/EU (DGRL). Die Prüfungen nach Modul B
(Baumuster) und Modul D erfolgten durch die benannte Stelle:
TÜV Thüringen e.V. - Melchendorfer Str. 64 - DE – 99096 Erfurt
Registrier-Nr. der benannten Stelle: 0090
Materials:
Plates: Stainless steel 1.4404 - SA240 316L (Standard)
Stainless steel 1.4547 / SA240 S 31254 (XCR-models)
Solder: Copper Type: GBE, GBS, GBH, GML, GMH, GBH-HP, GCS, GCH, GKE, GKS, GKH, GWH, WP, WH
Nickel Type: GNS, NP, GKN
VacInox Type: GVH, GVH-HP
Details on the type, year of construction, serial number, manufacturer as well as technical data have to be taken from the nameplate of the
heat exchanger. Suitable measures have to be taken so that the given permitted max. and min. technical data neither in operation or in
interruption are shouted down or falls exceed.
Please note the data on the nameplate of the heat exchanger!
KELVION heat exchangers are pressure equipment according to the directive 2014/68/EU (PED). Notified body for module B (production
type) and module D is:
TÜV Thüringen e.V. - Melchendorfer Str. 64 - DE – 99096 Erfurt
Registration No. of the Notified Body : 0090
Matériaux:
Plaques: Acier inox. 1.4404 - SA240 316L
Acier inox. 1.4547 / SA240 S 31254 (modèle XCR)
Brasure: au Cuivre Type : GBE, GBS, GBH, GML, GMH, GBH-HP, GCS, GCH, GKE, GKS, GKH, GWH, WP, WH
au Nickel Type: GNS, NP, GKN
au VacInox Type: GVH, GVH-HP
Le modèle, l’année de fabrication, le no. de série, le fabricant ainsi que les données techniques sont indiqués sur la plaque signalétique.
Veillez à prendre les mesures adéquates afin que les paramètres techniques de service indiqués soient respectés tant en fonctionnement
que pendant les arrêts.
Prière de tenir compte des indications données sur la plaque signalétique de l’échangeur !
Les échangeurs de chaleur à plaques brasées sont des appareils sous pression conformément à la circulaire 2014/68/EU. Le dépôt des
modèles EG (module B) et l’examen du QS System (Module D) ont été effectués auprès du :
TÜV Thüringen e.V. - Melchendorfer Str. 64 - DE – 99096 Erfurt
Enregistrement No.: 0090
3,300,4,400,418,
420,5,505,525, G1 2,5 10 65 385
530,535, 550
3,300,4,400,418,
420,5,505,525, G1*
2,5 25 65 765
530,535, 550 G1¼
7,700,757,760, G2
770,8,800,9,900, G2½ 11,5 30 740 1000
910 G3
Soldering connection
Clean the soldering assembly surface at the copper tube and heat
exchanger connections. Polish the surfaces to remove oxides.
Apply the flux to the surface. In order to prevent oxidation, the heat
exchanger is to be protected from the inside with nitrogen. Do not
aim the flame in the direction of the heat exchanger, solder at a
maximum temperature of 650 °C (1200 °F). Soldering material: 45 -
55 % silver filler for brazing. Use a wet rag (1) to prevent
overheating of the heat exchanger. Hold the tube in a fixed position
during soldering.
Warning: Excessive heating can lead to fusion of the copper and
thus to the destruction of the heat exchanger!
Welding connection
Use TIG (GTAW) welding.
Use a wet rag to prevent overheating of the heat exchanger.
In order to avoid oxidation the heat exchanger has to be protected
from the inside with nitrogen.
Threaded connection
Mount the heat exchanger and then connect the pipes to the heat
exchanger by means of the threaded connections.
Raccords brasés
Nettoyez les embouts du tuyau en cuivre et les raccords de
l’échangeur de chaleur. Enlevez toutes traces d’huile ou de
poussière. Polir la surface pour enlever toute trace d’oxydation.
Utiliser de l’azote pour protéger l’intérieur de l’échangeur de toute
oxydation. Ne pas diriger la flamme de brasage vers l’échangeur de
chaleur. Chauffer la surface à braser à une température max. de
650 °C, utiliser une brasure à l‘argent à 45 - 55 %. Utiliser des
linges mouillés (1) pour protéger l’échangeur d’une surchauffe.
Tenez le tuyau dans une position fixe pendant le brasage.
Attention: Un chauffage trop intense peut provoquer la fusion du
cuivre et la destruction de l’échangeur.
Raccords soudés
Utiliser un procédé de soudage de type WIG.
Utiliser un linge mouillé pour protéger l’échangeur de toute
surchauffe.
Utiliser de l’azote pour protéger l’intérieur de l’appareil de toute
oxydation.
Raccords filetés
Monter l’échangeur de chaleur et le raccorder aux tuyauteries à
l’aide de raccords filetés.
Start of operation
Before putting the device into operation it has to be checked to
ensure that the operation data shown on the nameplate are not
exceeded.
Check the tightness of the screw connections.
The pumps feeding the heat exchanger must be equipped with
shut-off valves. Pumps which generate higher pressures than
stated for the device must be fitted with safety valves. The pumps
must not aspirate any air so that no disruptions of operation due to
water hammer occur. In order to avoid pressure surges, the pumps
are to be started up against closed valves. The valves in the supply
and return lines are to be opened slowly and, as far as possible,
simultaneously, until the service temperature is reached. Pressure
surges are to be avoided. During filling the device is to be vented
via the vent valves located in the piping. Inadequately vented heat
exchangers do not yield their full performance as the complete
heating surface is not available. Remaining air increases the danger
of corrosion. Shutdown must be effected slowly and simultaneously
for both sides (primary and secondary sides). If this is not possible,
the hot side is to be shutdown first. For a relatively long downtime of
the plant the heat exchanger is to be completely drained and
cleaned. This applies in particular when there is a danger of frost, in
the case of aggressive fluids and fluids which have a biological
fouling tendency.
Mise en service
Avant la mise en service, vérifier que les conditions d’utilisation
prévues ne dépassent pas les indications mentionnées sur la
plaque signalétique.
En outre, contrôler que tous les raccords filetés soient bien serrés.
Les pompes doivent être équipées de vannes d’arrêt. Les pompes
produisant une perte de charges supérieure à celle donnée par
notre échangeur doivent être munies de vannes de sécurité. Pour
éviter tout dysfonctionnement, les pompes ne doivent en aucun cas
aspirer de l’air. Pour éviter de soudaines poussées de pression, les
pompes doivent être démarrées vannes fermées. Les vannes dans
les circuits départ et retour sont autant que possible à ouvrir
simultanément et lentement jusqu’à ce que la température de
fonctionnement soit atteinte. Eviter toute poussée soudaine de
pression. Durant le remplissage, l’air contenu dans l’échangeur est
à évacuer via les vis de purge montées sur les conduites.
Fonctionnement
Après la mise en service, vérifier qu’il n’y ait pas de variations de
pression pouvant s‘exercer sur l’échangeur. Lorsque l’échangeur
est monté entre une vanne de régulation et un régulateur de
pression, veiller à ce qu’il n’y ait pas de sous-pression lors de la
fermeture simultanée des deux dispositifs de réglage afin d’éviter
des coups de bélier. Dans les installations de chauffage urbain,
veiller tout spécialement à ce que la pression dans le circuit
secondaire soit adaptée à la température maximale côté départ du
chauffage urbain. Dans le cas contraire, des poussées soudaines
de pression pourraient se produire. Vérifier le bon fonctionnement
des dispositifs de régulation. (Voir aussi „Raccordement au
système de tuyauteries“).
En règle générale, veiller à ce qu’il ne se produise pas de
conditions d’utilisation contraires à nos instructions de montage, de
service et d’entretien.
Attention: Toutes poussées ou variations soudaines de
pression ou de température peuvent endommager l’appareil et
provoquer des fuites dans l’échangeur de chaleur.
Veiller à un équilibre potentiel électrique suffisant pour ne pas
endommager la protection anticorrosive.
Encrassement Nettoyage
Les instructions DIN concernant l’eau potable et l’eau chaude Si, en raison de la qualité de l’eau (dureté extrême ou forte pollution
sanitaire, les instructions Vd-TÜV et AGFW ainsi que nos par exemple) on peut s’attendre à des risques d’entartrage, il y a
instructions sur la composition de l’eau sont à respecter (Voir pages lieu de procéder à des nettoyages réguliers, à des rinçages par
suivantes). Divers facteurs sont en mesure d’influencer exemple.
l’encrassement, par ex. la vitesse, la température, la turbulence, la
répartition du fluide, la qualité de l‘eau. Le produit de nettoyage approprié circulera dans le sens opposé au
Si le débit devait être trop faible (charge partielle) la turbulence fluide. Pour certains encrassements et dépôts tenaces à la surface
dans l’échangeur serait également faible et le risque des plaques que cette méthode de nettoyage ne permet pas
d’encrassement augmenterait. d’éliminer, il est possible d’utiliser des produits chimiques. Veiller à
Des températures supérieures à 50° C (122°F) peuvent provoquer ce que ces produits soient compatibles avec l’inox, le cuivre ou le
des dépôts de calcaire sur les surfaces internes de l‘échangeur. nickel. Dans le cas contraire, il peut s’ensuivre une détérioration de
Une augmentation de la turbulence, du débit et des températures l’échangeur!
moins élevées réduisent les risques d’entartrage.
Lors de l’arrêt de l’installation, fermer d’abord le côté primaire et Respectez toujours les consignes de sécurité et les
ensuite le côté secondaire. Pour la remise en route, ouvrir en recommandations d’utilisation du produit de nettoyage du fabricant.
premier le côté secondaire et ensuite le côté primaire. Ceci permet Diluez le produit de nettoyage dans une eau ne contenant pas ou
d’éviter une surchauffe de l’échangeur. peu d’ions chlore et de très faible dureté.
Attention:
Une eau de mauvaise qualité accroit les risques de corrosion!
Résistance à la corrosion des échangeurs de chaleur à plaques brasées pour les composants contenus dans l‘eau
Les échangeurs de chaleur à plaques brasées sont constitués d’un empilage de plaques corruguées en acier inox 1.4404 ou
SA240 316L. Il faut donc tenir compte de la résistance à la corrosion de l’acier inox et du matériau de brasure, cuivre, nickel ou VacInox.
Folgende Werte für Wasserinhaltsstoffe und für Kennwerte sollten eingehalten werden (1.4404 - SA240 316L):
The following values for water constituents and parameters are to be observed (1.4404 - SA240 316L):
En ce qui concerne les éléments contenus dans l’eau ne pas dépasser les valeurs suivantes (1.4404 - SA240 316L):
The values stated are guide values which show variations under certain operating conditions.
Should you have any questions please call us on Phone +49 3447 55 39 0.
Les valeurs données sont des valeurs pilotes susceptibles de changer sous certaines conditions de fonctionnement. N’hésitez pas à
nous contacter si vous avez des questions Tel. +49 3447 55 39 0.
Cloridgehalt, Chloride content, Chlorue
10000
100
1
0 25 50 75 100
BPHE BPHE
G…; W…; NP… * Volumen/Kanal (Liter) G…; W…; NP… * Volumen/Kanal (Liter)
* Volume / Channel (Litre) * Volume / Channel (Litre)
* Volume / Canal (en Litres) * Volume / Canal (en Litres)
100; 1 0,025 525 0,125
108 0,010 700; 7 0,230
200; 2 0,030 757 0,310
220; 22 0,046 760 0,410
228 0,019 770 0,170
240; 24 0,070 800; 8 0,221
300; 3 0,030 900; 9 0,399
400; 4 0,065 910 0,480
418 0,055 1000H; 10 0,600
420 0,076 1000L;10L 0,466
Primär/primary/primaire
VP Volumen Primär:
Volume primary / Volume Côté primaire
Vs Volumen Sekundär
Volume secondary / Volume Côté secondaire
BPHE: GBS100M-30
: 30
: 0,025
Diffusionsdichte Isolierungen
Diffusionsdichte Isolierungen bestehen aus 10/20 mm starkem geschlossenzelligen
Kunstkautschuk auf NBR Basis. Die Dauerwärmebeständigkeit der Isolierung
beträgt 105°C. Alle Teile sind passend für den jeweiligen Wärmetauscher
zugeschnitten und mit einer Klebeschicht versehen.
Installieren Sie die Isolierung erst, nachdem alle Löt- oder Schweißarbeiten
abgeschlossen sind und der Wärmetauscher abgekühlt ist. Überprüfen Sie die
Übereinstimmung von Isolierung und Wärmetauschertyp.
Nehmen Sie den Frontdeckel (1) und entfernen Sie die Klebefolie. Kleben Sie den
Frontdeckel auf die Frontplatte des Wärmetauschers (4). Kleben Sie den Enddeckel
(2), nachdem Sie die Klebefolie entfernt haben, auf die Endplatte des
Wärmetauschers (4). Nehmen Sie den Mantel (3) und entfernen Sie die Trägerfolie
der Klebeausrüstung. Kleben Sie den Mantel unter leichtem Zug um das
Plattenpaket des Wärmetauschers (4). Entfernen Sie die Klebefolie an der
Stoßkante des Mantels und kleben Sie die zwei Enden aneinander. Entnehmen Sie
der Verpackung das Kunstkautschukband und kleben Sie dieses an den Nähten um
die Anschlüsse und am Mantelstoß auf.
Isolations NBR
Ces isolations sont faites en caoutchouc synthétique alvéolé à base de NBR.
L‘épaisseur est de 10 ou 20 mm et la surface est lisse. Cette isolation convient pour
des applications dont la température maximale est de 105°C. Elles sont livrées en
pièces autocollantes, prédécoupées et adaptées à chaque modèle d’échangeur.
Procéder au montage après achèvement de tous les travaux de brasage et de
soudure et lorsque l’échangeur est froid. Contrôler que l’isolation convient bien au
type d’échangeur.
Prenez la face avant (1), enlevez le film de protection et collez-la sur la face avant
de l’échangeur (4). Prenez maintenant la face arrière (2), enlevez le film de
protection et collez-la contre la face arrière de l’échangeur (4). Prenez l’enveloppe
(3) et enlevez le film de protection. Enveloppez l’échangeur (4) en tirant légèrement
sur l‘enveloppe. Enlevez le film de protection au point de rencontre des 2 extrémités
et appuyez ces 2 extrémités l’une contre l’autre pour bien les coller. Veiller
également à ce que l’isolation soit bien positionnée au niveau des raccordements.
Distribution pipes
Attention: Vaporiser applications only!
The distributor pipe consists of a lance-piece (2), whose length is
dependent on the number of plates of the heat exchanger and a
ring (1), whose circumference is determined by the type of heat
exchanger. Both parts are supplied as a screw-jointed fixture. The
lance is equipped with a slot.
The distribution slot has to be mounted in the refrigerant inlet of the
vaporizer, the distribution slot must be mounted downside (5
o`clock position). The fluid refrigerant is fed into the heat exchanger
through the slot and this ensures a uniform distribution of the
refrigerant in the primary channels.
The ring of the distributor pipe is brazed as a fixture in the primary
side connection (refrigerant inlet) of the heat exchanger. Please
note, that the installation of the distributor pipe will require the
Hart löten – Silberlot AF 319 selection of certain specific connection-pieces to the heat
AF 319 silver filler for brazing exchanger (compare table).
Brasure argent AF 319
Distributeurs
Attention: Uniquement pour les échangeurs utilisés en tant
qu’évaporateurs!
Le distributeur (voir plan ci-dessous) comporte un tube (2) dont la
longueur est fonction du nombre de plaques de l’échangeur et un
anneau (1) dont le diamètre dépend du type d’échangeur choisi.
Ces deux pièces sont livrées fixées l’une à l’autre.
Le tube comporte une fente. Lors du montage veiller à ce que cette
fente soit dirigée vers le bas (Pos. 5). C’est par cette fente que le
fluide frigorigène se trouvant encore à l’état liquide, pénètre dans
l’échangeur de chaleur, assurant une répartition régulière du produit
dans les canaux du primaire. L’anneau du distributeur sera brasé
dans le raccord côté primaire de l’échangeur.
Attention: Le montage du distributeur exige des raccords
particuliers sur l’échangeur à l’entrée du fluide frigorigène.
WP5, WH5
28,70 mm IA 18 mm GB…500, GWH500, GML500
GK…550
WP7, WH7
42,10 mm LZ 22 mm
GB…700, GWH700
GK…770
35,10 mm K WP8, GB…800
28 mm
WP9, WH9
GB…900, GWH900
170522_DE_EN_FR
Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung
Installation and Maintenance Manual
No. 9085-9000-000
Edition 0312
ORIGINALBETRIEBSANLEITUNG
Inhaltliche Änderungen vorbehalten!
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving
the documentation. They can be addressed to:
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 3
• Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung
sorgfältig durch.
• Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt wer-
den.
• Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!
________________________________________
• Before installing and maintaining your valve, please read this manual carefully.
• Installation and maintenance is allowed for skilled employees only.
• Please pay attention to the safety advices!
®
Westfalia Separator
4 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Anforderungen an Ersatzteile
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 5
1 DEUTSCH 7
Leistungsbeschreibung .................................................. 9
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ..................................................................... 9
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ........................................................................ 9
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen .......................................................................... 9
Gerätebeschreibung..................................................... 10
Notbetätigung ..................................................................................................... 11
Ersatzteilsets................................................................ 12
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ................................................ 14
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines druckgesteuerten 3/2-Wege-Ventils ...... 14
Wartung ....................................................................... 15
1. Kolbeneinheit .................................................................................................. 15
2. Obere Spindellagerung .................................................................................. 16
3. Rückschlagventil ............................................................................................ 17
2 ENGLISH 19
®
Westfalia Separator
6 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Maintenance ................................................................ 27
1. Piston unit ....................................................................................................... 27
2. Upper spindle bearing .................................................................................... 28
3. Check valve .................................................................................................... 29
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 7
1 DEUTSCH
Leistungsbeschreibung .................................................. 9
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ..................................................................... 9
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ........................................................................ 9
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen .......................................................................... 9
Gerätebeschreibung..................................................... 10
Notbetätigung ..................................................................................................... 11
Ersatzteilsets................................................................ 12
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ................................................ 14
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines druckgesteuerten 3/2-Wege-Ventils ...... 14
Wartung ....................................................................... 15
1. Kolbeneinheit .................................................................................................. 15
2. Obere Spindellagerung .................................................................................. 16
3. Rückschlagventil ............................................................................................ 17
®
Westfalia Separator
8 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Zu dieser Anleitung
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kun-
denbetreuer.
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente
Information beachten
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 9
Leistungsbeschreibung
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung
Die druckgesteuerte 3/2-Wege-Zulaufarmatur ist zum Einsatz im industriellen Be-
reich geeignet. Die Armatur ermöglicht das Steuern gasförmiger und flüssiger Me-
dien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien müssen für das eingesetzte Medium und
den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.
Verletzungsgefahr!
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchge-
spült werden. Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei
der Inbetriebnahme! Diese Geräte können im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingun-
gen getestet und eingestellt werden. Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert
und getestet werden. Die Endlagen (offen/geschlossen) müssen überprüft und
ggf. nachjustiert werden! Zusätzliche Wegschalter oder andere elektrische Geräte
zur Stellungsrückmeldung ebenfalls auf richtige Justierung überprüfen!
®
Westfalia Separator
10 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Gerätebeschreibung
1 Einstellschraube d. Drossel
2 Eingang
3 Ausgang (stromlos offen)
4 Ausgang nach Betätigung
5 Zylinder
6a Sicherungskappe
6b Notbetätigung [Druckventil] (SW 19)
7 Befestigungsbohrungen
8 Schalldämpfer
9 Stecker für Magnetventil
10 Magnetventil
11 Notbetätigung [Magnetventil]
12 Lufteinlass
13 Temperaturfühler PT100
14 Rückschlagventil
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 11
Notbetätigung
Sollte der Versorgungsdruck des Ventils einmal ausfallen, gehen Sie bitte
wie folgt vor:
Mit Schraubendreher die Notbetätigung (11) um 180° drehen , bis das Ven-
til öffnet.
Die Stellung der Notbetätigung ist mit den Buchstaben o = geöffnet (open) und
c = geschlossen (closed) gekennzeichnet. Im Lieferzustand ist die Notbetäti-
gung auf die Position „geschlossen“ eingestellt („c“ steht rechts).
Für die normale Funktion des Magnetventils muss die Notbetätigung wie-
der zurückgesetzt werden.
Das Bild „A“ zeigt die geschlossene Stellung, das Bild „B“ die geöffnete
Stellung.
®
Westfalia Separator
12 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Ersatzteilsets
Rückschlagventil (9) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-920
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 13
®
Westfalia Separator
14 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass die verwendeten Dichtungen für das Durch-
fluss-Medium geeignet ist!
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 15
Wartung
Eine vorbeugende Wartung oder Reinigung wird in Abhängigkeit von den Be-
triebsbedingungen und bei auffälliger Veränderung von Schaltzeiten oder Schalt-
geräuschen empfohlen.
Je nach Umgebungsbedingungen sind in regelmäßigen Abständen die Magnet-
spulen auf Risse und Schmutzablagerungen und der elektrische Anschluss auf
festen Sitz und sichere Abdichtung zu überprüfen.
Der Betreiber trägt die Verantwortung für die Festsetzung angemessener Prüf-
und Wartungsintervalle in Abhängigkeit von den Einsatzbedingungen der Ventile.
Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von geschultem Fachpersonal und mit geeigneten
Werkzeugen durchgeführt werden.
Ablagerungen, Schmutz, gealterte oder verschlissene Dichtungen können zu
Funktionsstörungen führen.
Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur bei drucklosem Rohrsystem und von der Span-
nungsversorgung getrennten Magneten durchgeführt werden.
1. Kolbeneinheit
Demontage
Kolbeneinheit demontieren.
Kolben mit Pneumatikfett (z. B. Molykote 55M) nachfetten oder ggf. austauschen.
Die Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge
®
Westfalia Separator
16 9085-9000-000 / 0312
2. Obere Spindellagerung
Demontage - Zylinder demontieren
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 17
3. Rückschlagventil
Demontage
®
Westfalia Separator
18 9085-9000-000 / 0312
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 19
2 ENGLISH
Maintenance ................................................................ 27
1. Piston unit ....................................................................................................... 27
2. Upper spindle bearing .................................................................................... 28
3. Check valve .................................................................................................... 29
®
Westfalia Separator
20 9085-9000-000 / 0312
This manual
Intention of this manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve. This manual is for
skilled employees only. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve
terminology and that you can read technical documents.
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer
advisor!
Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.
Supply items
needed!
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 21
Specification of service
Intended usage
These pressure controlled valves are suitable for industrial use. The valve enables
the control of gaseous and liquid media. The housing and sealing compounds
must be suitable for the assigned medium and temperature range.
Danger of injury! 1
Do not put parts of your body or articles into the valve. This can cause
heavy injuries and should be absolutely avoided!
®
Westfalia Separator
22 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Device description
1 Adjusting screw
2 Input
3 Output (normally open)
4 Output after operation
5 Cylinder
6a Safety cover
6b Emergency operation [valve] (SW 19)
7 fixing hole
8 Absorbing duct
9 Connector for solenoid valve
10 Solenoid valve
11 Emergency operation [solenoid valve]
12 Air input
13 Temperature sensor PT100
14 Non-return valve
Emergency operation:
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 23
Emergency operation
Turn the manual override (11) about 180° using a screwdriver until the
valve opens. The position of the manual override is marked with o = open
and c = closed. Delivery condition is closed (mark “c” on the right side).
Reset the manual override to restore normal function.
Picture „A“ shows the closed and picture B the open position.
®
Westfalia Separator
24 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Spare Parts
Non-return valve (pos. 9) Part no. 0018-7621-920
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 25
®
Westfalia Separator
26 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds are suita-
ble for the flowing medium!
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 27
Maintenance
Preventing maintenance or cleaning is recommended depending on the operating
conditions and in case of significant alteration of switching time or switching nois-
es.
Depending on ambient conditions the coil is to be checked regularly in terms of
cracks and dirt and the electric connection in terms of firm hold and safe sealing.
The operator is responsible for determining adequate maintenance intervals refer-
ring to the given operating conditions of the valve.
Any maintenance work is to be carried out by expert staff only. Adequate tooling is
required.
Functional failures can be provoked by disposal, dirt and aged or worn out sealing
material.
Any maintenance work has to be done with depressurized piping and disconnect-
ed solenoids only.
1. Piston unit
Disassembly
Lubricate piston with pneumatic grease (e.g. Molykote 55M) or replace piston
when necessary.
Assembly takes place in reverse order.
®
Westfalia Separator
28 9085-9000-000 / 0312
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 29
3. Check valve
Disassembly of check valve
Loosen retaining plate Dismount retaining plate
®
Westfalia Separator
30 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Attention: make sure the retaining plate is fixed in correct position prior to
mounting the system valve into the piping!
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 31
®
Westfalia Separator
32 9085-9000-000 / 0312
zur / for
Ersatzteilanfrage Ersatzteilbestellung
Spare part inquiries Spare part orders
An / To
GEA Mechanical Equipment
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Am Neuländer Gewerbepark 6
D-21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Besteller / Orderer
Firma / Company
Name
Straße, Haus-Nr.
Street, house no.
PLZ, Ort / ZIP, City
Telefon / Phone
Fax
Gewünschte Lieferzeit:
Desired delivery time:
Kommentar:
Remarks:
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 33
zur / for
Ersatzteilanfrage Ersatzteilbestellung
Spare part inquiries Spare part orders
Serien-
WSM-Auftrags-Nr. Nr.
WSM Order No.: Serial No. Typ Type
Kundenauftrags-Nr.
Customer Order No.
Pos. (falls
vorhanden) Bestellnummer Menge Bezeichnung
Item (if Part-No. Qty. Description
available)
®
Westfalia Separator
34 9085-9000-000 / 0312
®
Westfalia Separator
GEA Mechanical Equipment
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde
Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@geagroup.com, www.westfalia-separator.com
BW-MV-direkt
Magnetventile direktgesteuert
Direct acting solenoid valves DEUTSCH
ENGLISCH
Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung sorgfältig
durch.
Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt werden.
Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!
Before installing and maintaining your valve, read this manual carefully.
Installation and maintanance is allowed for skilled employees only.
Please pay attention to the safety advices!
-1-
BW-MV-direkt
Alle Rechte an Texten und Bildern, auch die der Übersetzung, sind vorbehalten.
Dieses Handbuch darf nicht, auch nicht in Auszügen, in irgendeiner Form (Druck, Fotokopie, Mikrofilm oder weitere
Verfahren) ohne schriftliche Zustimmung reproduziert oder unter Verwendung elektronischer Systeme verarbeitet,
vervielfältigt oder verbreitet werden.
The property rights of all texts and pictures are subject to MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH. It is not allowed to change
or duplicate even parts of it without written permission. We do not assume responsibility for correctness and integrity.
Colours of original products can differ from images.
-2-
BW-MV-direkt
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Seite / page
Zu dieser Anleitung 4
This manual
Abkürzungen und Symbole 4
Shortcuts and symbols
Leistungsbeschreibung 5
Specification of service
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung 5
Intended usage
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung 5
Storage, transport, disposal
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen 5
Terms of general application
Gerätebeschreibung 6
Device description
Wartung 6
Maintenance
-3-
DEUTSCH BW-MV-direkt
Zu dieser Anleitung
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kundenbetreuer bei
MIT.
Wir bitten Sie, sich regelmäßig über aktualisierte Versionen dieser Anleitung zu informieren.
Diese Anleitung unterliegt nicht der Revisionierung und stellt lediglich den zum Zeitpunkt des
Drucks aktuellen Informationsstand der MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH dar. Aktuelle
Informationen zu Ihrem Produkt können Sie jederzeit unter www.systemarmaturen.de
abrufen oder telefonisch bei Ihrem zuständigen Kundenbetreuer anfordern.
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH behält sich Änderungen an der Armatur sowie
Erweiterungen und Änderungen der vorliegenden Anleitung, die dem technischen Fortschritt
dienen, vor.
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente
Information beachten
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
-4-
BW-MV-direkt DEUTSCH
Leistungsbeschreibung
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung
Direktgesteuerte Magnetventile der Baureihen GMV48, 5200, 7200, 7300, 7500, 2138, 2148,
2162, 2167, 2197, 3162, 3163, 3197 und FMV 2300 sind zum Einsatz im industriellen
Bereich geeignet. Die Magnetventile besitzen bei fachgerechter Montage der optional
lieferbaren Stecker eine Schutzart von IP65. Die Verteiler ermöglichen das Schalten
neutraler gasförmiger und flüssiger Medien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien müssen für
das eingesetzte Medium und den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.
Verletzungsgefahr
Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in die Anschlüsse der Armatur kann zu
schweren Verletzungen führen und sollte unbedingt vermieden werden!
MIT-Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie Feuchtigkeit
oder Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst kurz vor Montagebeginn
zu entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei
untergebracht werden.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss nehmen – bitte
informieren Sie uns unverzüglich, wenn die Ware bereits mit beschädigter Verpackung bei
Ihnen eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmittelbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und
sollte eine Prüfung der technischen Parameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte
Mängel sind unverzüglich nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als
genehmigt.
Warenmängel oder Abweichungen der Menge müssen spätestens 7 Tage nach Erhalt der Ware
schriftlich angezeigt werden, andernfalls erlischt der Gewährleistungsanspruch!
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen
-5-
DEUTSCH BW-MV-direkt
Gerätebeschreibung
1 - Steckerschraube
2 - Mutter
3 - Steckdose
4 - Steckdosendichtung
5 - elektrischen Anschlüsse
6 - Wellscheibe
7 - Scheibe
8 - Spule
9 - Tubus
10 - Anker
11 - Feder
12 - Gehäuse
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines direktgesteuerten Magnetventils
Der elektrische Anschluss darf nur von einer hierfür ausgebildeten Fachkraft erfolgen!
-6-
BW-MV-direkt DEUTSCH
Wichtig!
Die Standardventile sind immer stromlos geschlossen (NC)!
Einbau
In der Regel ist die Einbaulage mit stehendem Magneten in waagerechter Leistung vorgeschrieben.
Pfeilrichtung am Gehäuse mit Fließrichtung des Mediums vergleichen. Vor der Montage, Rohrleitung mit
Druckintervallen durchspülen. Bei verschmutzten Medien unbedingt einen Schmutzfänger möglichst nach
dem Ventileingang vorsehen. Wird ein Ventil mit Muffenanschluss montiert, Spule nicht als Hebel
benutzen. Ein Verspannen des Ventilgehäuses durch Einsatz von unsachgemäßem Werkzeug oder
Dichtungsmaterial oder durch nicht fluchtende Rohrleitungen muss vermieden werden. Bitte benutzen Sie
ausschließlich passendes Werkzeug an den Schlüsselflächen des Gehäuses!
Elektrischer Anschluss
Die Magnetsysteme des Standardprogramms haben einen Steckeranschluss oder eine Kabeleinführung
zum Klemmkasten an der Magnetspule. Vor Anschluss der Stromzufuhr die vorgeschriebene Stromart
und Spannung auf Typenschild und Lieferschein beachten. Spannungstoleranz +/-10%. Die
Einschaltdauer beträgt 100%ED. Als Dauerbetrieb (DB) gilt die Funktion, bei der die Spule solange
eingeschaltet bleibt bis die Belastungstemperatur erreicht ist. Achtung - Verbrennungsgefahr! Die
Oberflächen der Magnetspulen können bei Betrieb sehr heiß werden! Elektrische Anschlüsse vor
Feuchtigkeit schützen. Bei Freiluftmontage eine ausreichende Abdeckung vorsehen. Die Schutzart IP 65
ist nur für eine kurze Feuchtigkeitsbelastung ausgelegt. Elektrische Anschlüsse nur durch Fachpersonal
vornehmen lassen. Anschlusskabel entsprechend dem Einsatzfall und den örtlichen Begebenheiten (z.B.
erhöhte Temperaturen) auswählen. Bei zündfähiger Atmosphäre (Ex-Schutz) unbedingt die
Bestimmungen der Zulassungsbehörde beachten.
Anschlussplan
Erdanschluss
-7-
DEUTSCH BW-MV-direkt
Mögliche Störfälle!!
Bei Fehlfunktionen überprüfen Sie, ob der Ventilsitz, das Dichtungselement, der Anker und der Tubus
sauber sind.
-8-
ENGLISH
ENGLISH BW-MV-direkt
This manual
Intention of this manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve. This manual is for skilled
employees only. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve terminology and
that you can read technical documents.
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer advisor at
MIT!
Please check regularly for updated versions of this document. This manual is not audited
and represents only the current information of MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH at the
time of print. You can get current information of your product at any time on the internet:
www.systemarmaturen.de.
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH declares that it reserves its right to modify both the
manual and the valve if necessary for technical advancement.
Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.
Supply items
needed!
-4-
BW-MV-direkt ENGLISH
Specification of service
Intended usage
Direct acting solenoid valves of the type GMV4800, 5200, 7200, 7300, 7500, 2138, 2148,
2162, 2197, 3162, 3163, 3197 and FMV 2300 made by MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik
GmbH are suitable for the producing industries. The valves have protection class IP65
when you use the optional deliverable plugs of MIT.
The valves are used for switching neutral gaseous and liquid media. The medium and
temperature range and pressure have to be suitable to the body and sealing materials.
Danger of injury
Don´t put parts of your body or other parts into the valve. This can cause heavy injuries
and should be avoided!
MIT-products are protected by packing against external influences such as humidity or dirt.
We recommend removing this packing just before assembly in order to protect the devices
against impurities.
During storage make sure that the devices are accommodated dry and dirt-free.
We can only take influence on the transport process with your assistance - please inform
us immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packing! Examination of technical
parameters and a visual product check should take place emidiately after delivery.
Subsequent complains can not be excepted.
The warranty expires if product failings or quantity divergences are not announced in
writing within 7 days after receipt of goods!
Please ensure that no humidity gets into the pipings. Automated valves need a special
attention in time of initial operation! These devices can be tested at MIT Moderne
IndustrieTechnik GmbH only under workshop conditions. Security positions should be
simulated and tested straight.
-5-
BW-MV-direkt
ENGLISH
Device description
Activity description
Installation of a direct acting solenoid valve
You don't need any special tools to connect the solenoid valve with your piping system.
-6-
BW-MV-direkt ENGLISH
Direct acting solenoid valves are always in the state "normally closed". In rest position the plunger locks
the seat only by spring force. When the solenoid is energized the plunger with its sealing is directly lifted
from the seat.
IMPORTANT!
Our common solenoid valves are always in the state "normally closed"!
Installation
Normally you have to install your solenoid valve with the solenoid in upright position and in a horizontal
piping.
Please compare the arrow on the body with the flow direction of your medium. Before installation keep
in mind to rinse your piping with pressure interval. If you have media with particles we recommend to
use a strainer directly in front of the solenoid valve. If you mount a valve with muffle connection don't
use the coil as hand lever. Avoid twisting of the valve body - this can be caused by wrong tools, sealings
or non-flush pipelines. Remind to use suitable tools at the spanner flats only.
Electric Connection
Our common solenoids have a plug connection or a cable entry point to the terminal box. Please mind
the required current and voltage before connection - you can find them on the type label or the bill of
delivery. The tolerance of voltage is +/- 10%. The duty time is 100%. The continous duty is the time
when the solenoid is energized until the load temperature is reached. Caution - risk of burnig! The
surfaces of the solenoids may become extremely hot! Protect the electric connection from humidity. If
the valve is mounted outside arrange for adequate cover. Protection class IP65 is only for short periods
of humidity. Choose the adequate connection cable according to the surrounding area and the local
conditions, e.g. high temperature. If you have ignitable atmosphere you have to follow the regulations of
your local accreditation agency.
Wiring diagram
Ground
-7-
ENGLISH
BW-MV-direkt
Maintenance
Possible failures
First of all check the arrow on the body with your medium flow, the voltage, the place of installation and
the working pressure!
Also check if the valve seat, the sealing, the plunger and the tube are clean.
-8-
BW-MV-direkt
-9-
BW-MV-direkt
Kontakt / Contact:
Email: MIT@Systemarmaturen.de
Internet: www.systemarmaturen.de
- 10 -
Mounting and Operating Manual
Butterfly Valves
All rights reserved. END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG claims copyright over this documentation.
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded, reproduced nor passed to third parties without the written
aggreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG. This restriction also applies to the corresponding drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right to change parts of the butterfly valves at any time without prior
or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change without notice.
This publication has been written with great care. However, END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.KG cannot be held
responsible, either for any errors occuring in this publication or for their consequences.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance of the properties is given.
Edition: 11/02
2 http://www.end.de 11/02
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 4
2 General Advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.2 Inward monitoring 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Warranty 5
2.5 Symbols and their signification 6
3 Safety advice 7
3.1 Personal safety 7
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting 7
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting 7
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing 8
3.2 Device safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
5 Butterfly Valve 11
5.1 General 11
5.2 Corresponding use 11
5.3 Operation 11
5.4 Mounting/Disassemble 11
5.4.1 Mounting of the snap-in disc and the handle 12
5.4.2 Mounting of a wafer type butterfly valve 14
5.4.3 Mounting of a LUG type butterfly valve 15
6 Maintenance 16
11/02 http://www.end.de 3
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
Dear assembler / user,
these operation and installation manuals are intended to give you the knowledge, which is
necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the butterfly valves
rapidly and correctly.
Please read these instructions carefully and pay particular attention to the advice and warning
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the butterfly valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the butterfly valves we shall be pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation
manual.
Yours
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG
4 http://www.end.de 11/02
General Advice
2 General Advice
2.1 Validity
This mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard versions of the butterfly valves
and their variants.
Please check directly after delivery the butterfly valves for any transport damages and deficiencies
and with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of parts.
2.3 Complaints
Claims for replacement or goods which relate to transport damage can only be considered valid if
the delivery company is notified without delay.
In case of returns (because of transport damage / repairs), please make a damage protocol and
send the parts back to the manufacturer, if possible in the original packaging.
2.4 Warranty
For our butterfly valves we give a warranty period in accordance with the sales contract.
The end of the normal duration of life of the wearing parts represents no defect.
The warranty and guarantee rules of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG are applicable.
11/02 http://www.end.de 5
Symbols and their Signification
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices; this also includes
advices for averting health risks. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices, this also includes
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
This spanner identifies the description of actions which you should carry out.
6 http://www.end.de 11/02
Safety Advice
3 Safety advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the butterfly valves
are mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must take into account particular safety aspects in
each case!
If, for example, a butterfly valve works a slide in an operational chemical plant, the potential haz-
ards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only being carried out for test
purposes an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room!
We wish to point out expressly that the mounting, adjusting and at accessories the pneumatical
and electrical installation of the butterfly valves must be carried out by trained specialist person-
nel having mechanical, pneumatical and electrical knowledge!
Secure that the machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directive after the mounting and
installing of the butterfly valves.
Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair.
If appropriate, isolate the devices / machines / plant from the mains.
Check (for example in chemical plants) whether the switching off of devices / machines / plant
will cause potential danger.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the butterfly valve (in a plant which is in operation) inform
the shift forman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in order,
for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good time
by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machines
/ plant.
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up of the devices /
machines / plant.
Observe the respective relevant professional safety and accident prevention regulations when
carrying out the mounting / repair work.
Check the correct functioning of the safety equipment (for example the emergency push off but-
tons/ safety valves, etc)!
As a result of the starting (pneumatic, electric or by hand) of the butterfly valves the flow of
gases, steam, liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that, as a result of the
starting or the test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the
environment!
11/02 http://www.end.de 7
Safety Advice
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up or shutting down
of the device / machine / plant.!
By ending the adjustment check the correct function and should the occasion arise the position
of the butterfly valve.
Check, whether the butterfly valve will be closed totally, if the control signals the appropriate
limit stop!
Through suitable measures, prevent links being trapped by moving actuating elements!
Check the right function of all safety devices (for example emergency push off buttons / safety
valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions described in
this documentation!
Adjusting switches on butterfly valves with options (e.g. actuators, solenoid valves, limit
switches) there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrician or a person having adequate
training, who is aware of the potential hazard!
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the butterfly valve will be under pressure.
Before disassembling the butterfly valve some essential points should be clarified!
• Will the butterfly valve to be disassembled be replaced by another immediately?
• If appropriate, does the production process of the plant needed to be stopped?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassembly?
If necessary, inform the shift foreman/ safety engineer or the manager about the maintenance
or repair without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chemicals or a
discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
You have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the butterfly valve is mounted.
Switch off pilot pressure and the power supply and relieve the pressure in the pipes.
In case of defect in the butterfly valve make contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
If you ascertain a damage of the butterfly valve, isolate the device from the mains. Please observe
the safety advices.
8 http://www.end.de 11/02
Safety Advice
Do not mount, start or adjust the butterfly valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the butterfly valve and the tightness
of the pipe connections.
Also check the function of the accessories e.g. actuators, limit switches, etc.
In order to maintain this condition, as installer / user you must carry out your task in accordance
with the description in these instructions, technically correctly and with the greatest possible
precision .
We assume, as a trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
Satisfy yourself that the butterfly vales will only be used within their admissible limiting value
(see the technical data) .
The butterfly valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their construction!
The butterfly valves must be used within the values specified in the technical data!
The operating of the butterfly valve outside the nominal temperature range could destroy the
seals and the bearings.
The operating of the butterfly valves outside the nominal pressure range could destroy the inner
parts and the body.
Do not mount, start or adjust the butterfly valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the butterfly valve and the tightness
of the pipe connections.
Also check the function of the accessories e.g. actuators, limit switches, etc.
11/02 http://www.end.de 9
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
The butterfly valves will be provided with a name-plate, which permits a definite identification of the butterfly
valve and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not displaced or changed.
10 http://www.end.de 11/02
Butterfly Valves
5 Butterfly Valve
5.1 General
Before you are mount, adjust, start, operate or disassemble a butterfly valve you have to read
the
Safety advices
If you have nor read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
Butterfly valves will be used to control and to cut off media flow.
It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the material of the butterfly valve will be
resistant. It should also be used for pulverised and past-like media and pouring goods if it suited
to the butterfly valve. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the nominal
temperature range should causes damages on the butterfly valve especially on the seals.
5.3 Operation
The butterfly valve will be opened or closed by using a handle or actuator (option). The snap-in
handle of a hand actuated butterfly valve have to been snapped out during the operation. The
disc has 9 resp. 10 snap-in positions in which the lever could click in, to prevent an inadvertent
misplace.
During the closing operation take care that there won`t be insert any objects or limbs into the
armature. Heavy injuries or damages will be the consequence. If it`s necessary you have to
install a protective device.
5.4 Mounting/Disassemble
The mechanical installation of the butterfly valves differs by the variants of the body. The wafer
type butterfly valve will be squeezed between to flanges and the lug type is able to be mounted
directly on flanges.
11/02 http://www.end.de 11
Butterfly Valves
At butterfly valves which will be actuated by hand the snap-in disc and the handle will be enclosed
the package. Before installing the butterfly valve you have to mount the handle and the snap-in
disc.
Observe the flow direction: the handle should point at the flow direction.
Remove the package and the protective devices (eg. caps and plugs). Take care that there will be
no parts of the package or other parts in the armature.
Clean up the pipes in which the butterfly valve will be mounted. Pollution could affect the safety in
operation and the duration of life of the butterfly valve.
The flanges have to be align parallel and centircally and must have carefully worked surfaces.
o.k.
o.k.
operation position
Fig. 5.1 - Butterfly valves, mounting of the snap-in disc and the handle (Fig.: Art. TA534010)
12 http://www.end.de 11/02
Butterfly Valves
The butterfly valve will be squeezed between two flanges. The sealing takes places by the sleeve
of the butterfly valve other sealing compounds are not allowed. Take care that there won`t be
insert any rests of sealing compounds or other pollution into the armature.
The flanges would not been welded into the pipes if the armature is mounted. The increasing
temperatures will destroy the sleeve of the butterfly valve.
At polluted media we recommend to install the butterfly valve horizontally. In this case the lower
disc half have to close in the flow direction.
o.k.
sectional drawing
Fig. 5.2 - Butterfly valves, mounting at pollute media (Fig.: Art. TA534010)
11/02 http://www.end.de 13
Butterfly Valves
In the following description we assume that you have welded the flanges at the end of the pipes
and they are cooled down.
Adjust the disc in a not totally closed position so that the disc won`t be stand out off the body.
Put the butterfly valve between the flanges. The butterfly have to been insert between the flanges
easily so that the sleeve won`t be destroyed.
Align the butterfly valve and put fit screws through the borings of the flanges.
Screw nuts onto the screws and tighten them equaly slightly and crosswise.
Check whether the disc of the butterfly valve will be open and close easily. Let the disc a little bit
open.
Tighten all the screws crosswise and check the function of the butterfly valve again. Observe the
max. torque of the screws.
Fig. 5.3 - Butterfly valves, mounting of a wafer type butterfly valve (Fig.: Art. TA534010)
14 http://www.end.de 11/02
Butterfly valves
In the following description we assume that you have welded the flanges at the end of the pipes
and they are cooled down.
Adjust the disc in a not totally closed position so that the disc won`t be stand out off the body.
Put the butterfly valve in front of the flange and tighten the screws slightly and crosswise.
Check whether the disc of the butterfly valve will be open and close easily. Let the disc a little bit
open.
Tighten all the screws crosswise and and check the function of the butterfly valve again. Observe
the max. torque moment of the screws.
You have to install a protective device, to prevent the insertion of any objects or limbs into the
butterfly valve.
Attention: When using the butterfly valve as end piping the nominal working pressure will be
decreased.
Fig. 5.4 - Butterfly valves, mounting of a LUG - type butterfly valve (Fig.: Art. TA534010/M)
11/02 http://www.end.de 15
Butterfly Valves
6 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down the butterfly valve you have to read the
Safety advice
If you have nor read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
On normal accounts the butterfly valve is maintenance free. In periodical turns the controlling of
the function and the tightness should happen:
At a leaky stem seal or sleeve you have to disassemble the butterfly valve and sent it back to the
manufacturer.
Don`t try to disassemble the sleeve of the butterfly vale by yourself. Heavy injuries or damages
could be the consequence.
In case of a defect of the valve make a contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back or these operation and installation manual.
If you determinate that there is a damage to the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant!
However before doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
16 http://www.end.de 11/02
Notes
11/02 http://www.end.de 17
(1)
7
Declaration in conformity
Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(2)
as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(3) This declaration apply to the article groups with the nominal sizes:
Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size
Butterfly valves NG DN32 ... DN100 VO DN32 ... DN200 Non-return valves
HA DN50 ... DN300 Ball valves VS DN32 ... DN200 AR 1¼" ... 2"
TA DN40 ... DN300 AG 1¼" ... 2" VT DN32 ... DN100 CK3003 DN65 ... DN200
WA DN50 ... DN300 BK DN32 ... DN100 VU 4" CK5003 DN32 ... DN200
WM DN50 ... DN300 IK 1¼" ... 2" ZA 1¼" ... 4" CK5100 DN65 ... DN250
Gate valves IL 1¼" ... 4" ZA DN32 ... DN100 CK5200 DN65 ... DN250
AB 1¼" ... 2" IW 1¼" ... 2" ZB 1¼" ... 2" CW5400 DN65 ... DN250
AE 1¼" ... 3" KA 1¼" ... 3" ZB DN32 ... DN50 EB 1¼" ... 3"
AE DN32 ... DN80 PD 1¼" ... 2" ZD 1¼" ... 4" EB DN32 ... DN80
CA5014 DN100 ... DN300 TB 1¼" ... 4“ ZD DN32 ... DN100 RG1300 DN32 ... DN100
CA5015 DN65 ... DN300 TF DN32 ... DN200 ZE 1¼" ... 4" RG33xx DN32 ... DN200
CA5214 DN40 ... DN200 TH 1¼" ZE DN32 ... DN100 RK DN32 ... DN400
CD5010 DN32 ... DN200 VD 1¼" ... 4" ZF 1¼" ... 4" TD 4"
CV3010 DN32 ... DN150 VD DN32 ... DN100 ZG 1¼" ... 2" Strainer
CV5010 DN32 ... DN200 VH 1¼" ... 2" ZH 1¼" ... 2" AS 1¼” ... 3”
CV5020 DN32 ... DN200 VH3100 1¼" ... 2" ZK DN32 ... DN100 AS DN32 ... DN200
Pressure reducer VK DN32 ... DN200 ZL 1¼" ... 3" EA 1¼" ... 3"
SD Ǫ" ... 2" VK/PN40 DN32 ... DN200 ZM 1¼" ... 2" EA DN32 ... DN80
Pressure relief valves VL 1¼" ...2", 3" ZP DN32 ... DN200
NG 1¼" ... 1½" VN 1¼" ... 2" ZU 1¼" ... 3"
(5) Herewith we declare that the above-mentioned articles in the conditions of our delivery are in conformity with the regula-
tions of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EG.
Declaration without signature or company stamp shall not be valid. The declaration may be circulated only without alternation.
Extracts or alternations are subject to approval by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG
Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 342 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 321
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-999 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
Technische Daten Specification
Artikel:
BAUFORM DESIGN WA / WM
1-teiliges Zentriergehäuse, mit auswechsel- Body consists of 1 part, with exchangeable
barer Manschette zum Einklemmen zwischen seat to be mounted between two flanges acc.
zwei Flansche nach EN 1092-1 Typ 11 Form to EN 1092-1 Typ 11 Form B (PN10/PN16);
B (PN10/PN16); andere auf Anfrage. others on request. Absperrklappe
PN 10/16
BAULÄNGE FACE TO FACE LENGTH
Nach EN 558-1 Reihe 20. Acc. to EN 558-1 R20.
WERKSTOFFE MATERIALS
Gehäuse: GG-25 Body: GG-25
GGG-40 GGG-40
Edelstahl 1.4408 Stainless steel 1.4408 Type:
Scheibe: GGG-40 Disc: GGG-40
(Nylon beschichtet) (Nylon coated) WA / WM
Edelstahl 1.4408 Stainless steel 1.4408
Wellendichtung: NBR / POM Stem seal: NBR / POM
Welle: Edelstahl 1.4401 Shaft: Stainless steel 1.4401 Butterfly valve
Manschette: EPDM Seat: EPDM
NBR NBR PN 10/16
FKM FKM
Alle Angaben sind freibleibend und The above information is intended for guidance
unverbindlich! only and the company reserves the right to
change any data herein without prior notice!
*Flansche PN16 - DN65 werden in 4-Loch- *Flanges PN16 - DN65 will be delivered in
Ausführung geliefert! 4-hole execution!
Größere Nennweiten
auf Anfrage.
Bigger sizes on
request
Hinweis Advice
Bei den in dieser Dokumentation beschrieben Produkten, in der von uns The products descript in this documentation in the conditions of our
gelieferten Form, handelt es sich weder um Maschinen gemäß Artikel delivery are no machinery according to annex 2 paragraph a respec-
2 Absatz a noch um unvollständige Maschinen gemäß Artikel 2 Absatz tively no partly completed machinery according to annex 2 paragraph
g im Sinne der Richtlinie 2006/42/EG über Maschinen. g of the directive 2006/42/EC on machinery.
Dok.-Nr.: KAT-WA -2/5 07.11.07 - Änderung: Betriebsdruck FKM
10
11
1
8
Zentrierhilfe * S
H
Q
Ø
* DN80
ØR
C
M
* DN200 - DN300
ØD L
ab DN100 *
G
H1
Ød
SW
Ø
P
DN C L H M H1 E ØD G ØP ØQ ØR S Ød SW W kg*
50 50 43 143 65 204 19 96 70 F07 124 114 23 10 11 200 3,0
65 65 46 155 71 216 19 110 70 F07 127 145 23 10 11 200 3,8
80 80 46 162 77 223 19 124 70 F07 159 150 23 10 11 200 4,0
Dok.-Nr.: KAT-WA -4/5 07.11.07 - Änderung: Betriebsdruck FKM
100 91 52 181 107 242 19 148 70 F07 190,6 175 23 10 11 200 5,2
125 115 56 197 122 258 19 180 70 F07 216 210 27 10 14 250 7,3
150 140 56 210 140 271 19 208 70 F07 242 235 24 10 14 250 8,2
200 186 60 240 165 308 24 259 100 F10 298,5 290 27 12 17 355 13,5
250 239 68 286 201 354 24 320 100 F10 362 350 27 12 19 355 21,2
300 288 78 309 234 377 24 370 100 F10 431,8 400 29 12 22 355 32,5
E
H
C
M
N L
ØD
ØB
G
W
Ød
H1
SW
Ø
P
PN 16
DN C L H M H1 E G ØP Ød ØD SW W
N n ØB kg
50 57 43 143 65 204 19 70 F07 10 96 11 M16 4 125 200 3,4
65 * 70 46 155 71 216 19 70 F07 10 110 11 M16 4 145 200 4,0
80 82 46 162 77 223 19 70 F07 10 124 11 M16 8 160 200 4,5
100 102 52 181 89 242 19 70 F07 10 148 11 M16 8 180 200 7,6
Dok.-Nr.: KAT-WA -5/5 07.11.07 - Änderung: Betriebsdruck FKM
125 126 56 197 112 258 19 70 F07 10 180 14 M16 8 210 250 9,5
150 148 56 210 123 271 19 70 F07 10 208 14 M20 8 240 250 10,4
200 193 60 240 150 308 24 100 F10 12 259 17 M20 12 295 355 17,5
250 244 68 286 179 354 24 100 F10 12 320 19 M24 12 355 355 26,5
300 294 78 309 216 377 24 100 F10 12 370 22 M24 12 410 355 43,5
* Flansche PN16 - DN65 werden in 4-Loch-Ausführung geliefert!
Flanges PN16 - DN65 will be delivered in 4-hole execution!
SCHUTZART PROTECTION
IP 65 nach DIN 40050 IP 65 according to 40050
KABELVERSCHRAUBUNG CONNECTION
1x M20x1,5 (IP 65) 1x M20x1,5 (IP 65)
SCHALTFUNKTION CONTACT
2 Schließer/Öffner 2 closing/opening contact
IP 65
Dok.-Nr.: KAT-RE-1/2 26.06.02. - Änderung: Schaltplan geändert
Abmessungen /
Dimension
64 152
M12x1,5
74
103
M20x1,5
30
Namur 80 x 30
Namur 130 x 30
*
1) Der Anschlussplan zeigt den Endschalter in Zwischenstellung, Schalter sind nicht betätigt!
The terminal plan shows the limit switch in intermediate position, switches are not actuated!
SAFE SAFE-P
(Series 900) (Series 920)
SAFE-TC SAFE-TCP/TCS
(Series 940) (Series 960/950)
Contents
1.0 General information on operating 6.0 Putting the valve into operation ............. 2-10
instructions ..................................................2-2 7.0 Care and maintenance............................. 2-11
2.0 Notes on possible dangers........................2-2 7.1 Setting instructions ............................................ 2-11
2.1 Significance of symbols ...................................... 2-2 7.1.1 Removing the cap ......................................2-11
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information ............. 2-2 7.1.2 Changing the set pressure “without”
3.0 Storage and transport ...............................2-3 spring change ......................................... 2-12
7.1.3 Changing the set pressure “with”
4.0 Description..................................................2-3 spring change ......................................... 2-12
4.1 Scope of applications .......................................... 2-3
7.2 Representation ................................................. 2-14
4.2 Operating principles ............................................ 2-3
8.0 Troubleshooting ....................................... 2-15
4.3 Diagram............................................................... 2-4
4.3.1 Parts list ..................................................... 2-5
9.0 Troubleshooting table ............................ 2-15
4.4 Technical data - remarks ..................................... 2-6
10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part .. 2-17
4.5 Marking ............................................................. 2-7
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee ............................. 2-17
5.0 Installation...................................................2-8
5.1 General notes on installation............................... 2-8
4.0 Description
4.1 Scope of applications
Safety valves are used to protect pressurised systems.
ATTENTION !
- Refer to the data sheet for applications, limits on use and possibilities.
- Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials.
- The valves are designed for standard operating conditions. If conditions exceed
these requirements, e.g. aggressive or abrasive media, the operator should
state the higher requirements when ordering
- Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject
to TRD 110.
- When media in Fluid Group 1 are used, seal exteriors must be designed so that
they pose no danger to humans or the environment.
- Open safety valves (open bonnet / open cap) are not permissible for fluids,
dusty atmospheres, open air use or for any Group 1 fluids in accordance with
Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.
The special markings on the valve must be taken into account.
Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions.
4.2 Operating principles
Safety valves are safety devices designed to prevent the pressure in any pressurised
system from exceeding the maximum permissible pressure by more than the permissible
tolerance of, usually +10%.
Fig. 1
Vent hole
Vent hole G1/8
G1/4
Lever Disc
Fig. 2
Notified
body
Approval
Set pressure Adjusting services
Serial-No.
Fig.-No./Type NB-stamp
EAC- Size ASME/UV-stamp CE-marking
marking
Safety valve (ASME)
Notified
body
Serial-No.
Year of manufacture
Manufacturer
Set pressure
Capacity/Unit
Disc design: SCFM = air
E = EPDM -35°C up to 150°C lb/h = steam
V = Viton (FPM) -20°C up to 180°C gal/min = water
N = Neoprene -30°C up to 100°C
S = SHR -20°C up to 220°C
Fig. 3: St = Stellitiert -60°C up to 450°C
Type test plates
Mechanic No.
BA/BQ
5.0 Installation
5.1 General notes on installation
The following points should be taken into account besides the general principles governing
installation work:
ATTENTION !
- Remove flange covers if present.
- The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles
- Note installation position with reference to flow, see mark on valve.
- Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation
- Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are
avoided.
- Protect valves from dirt during construction work.
- Connection flanges must mate exactly.
- Connecting bolts for pipe flanges should be mounted preferably from the
counter flange side (hexagon nuts from the valve side).
At DN15-32: If valves should be mounted directly to valves, the upper flange
connecting bolts should be preferably executed with studs and hexagon nuts on
both sides.
- Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, bonnets must not be used to
take external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as
connecting points for lifting gear.
- Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used.
See data sheet for weights.
- The blow-off line shall be sufficiently large to ensure that the internal back-
pressure while blowing-off does not exceed 10% (on request max. 15%) of the
set pressure. (Exception: safety valves with metallic bellow for back-pressure
compensation).
- If back pressure exceeds 10% (on request max. 15%) of set pressure, the
safety valve must be fitted with a metallic bellow seal for back pressure
compensation. The maximum back pressure must be specified by the
manufacturer. If necessary a leak detector should be provided to monitor the
back pressure compensating metallic bellow seal, but the leak detector must
not block the vent hole. With a closed vent hole the balanced piston loses it‘s
function (refer to Fig. 2).
- The ventilation hole in the bonnet of safety valves with a metallic bellow seal
must remain open as a matter of principle, although in the case of Group I fluids
(PED 2014/68/EU) a non-isolatable pipeline must be connected to remove the
medium safely (without back pressure if the bellow seal is damaged. The vent
hole must not be blocked by any leak detector used.
- No pipe sections or screws must protrude into the spring bonnet through the
inspection connection. Blockage hazard!
- The drainage system shall be adequate to remove the condensate.
- Blockage of the drainage system by dirt or foreign bodies shall be avoided.
- Freezing, sticking or blocking of the safety valve must be avoided at all costs. If
necessary use a heating jacket and/or stainless steel bellow with or without a
rupture disk.
- Safety valves shall be installed with vertical spindle. Differing valves of series
950 with set pressure > 5 bar can also be installed horizontally. Valves marked
with „Einbau nur horizontal (Installation only horizontal)“ shall be installed
horizontally (series 950 ≤5 bar set pressure).
- Flange gaskets shall be fitted concentrically and not restrict the flow cross
section.
- Keep the shaft of the spindle-unit free from paint (open bonnet / cap).
- Blow-off lines shall be laid with gradient.
- The ratio pao/po shall be taken into account when dimensioning the system.
- Safety valves shall be equipped with support tongues to absorb high reaction
forces.
- Pressure losses in the line to the safety valve shall not exceed 3%. This shall be
considered for selection of appropriate changeover valves.
- Ensure that adequate drip pans are used if setting media in Fluid Group
pursuant to PED 2014/68/EU.
- Planners / construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and
installing products.
- The valves are designed for application, not influenced from weather.
- For application outside or in adverse environments like corrosion-promoting conditions
(sea water, chemical vapours, etc.), special constructions or protective measures are
recommended.
- Refer to appropriate TRD 421, AD2000-A2, DIN, ASME Code rules for piping and
installation.
- Remove transport fasteners and protective caps for inlet and outlet immediately before
installation.
- Water shall be drained from the safety valve and blow-off line via the blow-off line
(drainage points always at the lowest point).
Support
Bellow
Drip pan
fig. 5
(by 85% from the set pressure) to ensure that the valve works correctly.
- The safety valve must be lifted from time to time in line with current regulations
(The intervals at which this must be done depends on various factors so that no
generally applicable interval can be specified)
- Original parts only should be fitted as spares as a matter of policy.
- In safety valves with an open spring bonnet there is a danger of being crushed
between the spring windings during lifting and setting.
- Lift the safety valve stem briefly (releasing the lever suddenly) to eliminate slight leaks due
to particles between the seat and disc.
- If this does not eliminate the leak, the sealing surfaces of the seat and/or disc have been
damaged.
This can only be rectified at our works or by an authorised contractor.
- With valves corresponding to Figures 901, 921 and 941, the lever must always be
returned to the original position after lifting the safety valve.
- With Fig. 951 and 961 the lift button must be pressed down again after lifting.
- The manufacturer accepts guarantee liabilities only if tampering by third parties is
prevented.
7.1 Setting instructions
ATTENTION !
The following work must only be carried out by authorised specialist workshops
or at the operator’s own responsibility with monitoring by an independent agency
(e.g. TÜV).
7.1.1 Removing the cap
ATTENTION !
If there is back pressure or during setting/lifting, medium may be discharged from
the open bonnet, or into the adjusting screw area if the bonnet is closed.
ATTENTION !
When changing to the cap without lifting device (series 911, 923, 943), the
spindel cap (pos. 19) must be removed.
Open caps
- Remove slit pin (pos. 40), bolt (pos. 39).
- Extract lifting lever (pos. 41).
- Remove screw (pos. 38).
- Unscrew cap (pos. 29).
Closed caps
- Press lifting lever (pos. 36) towards bonnet (pos. 11) and against stop.
- Unscrew cap (pos. 28).
ATTENTION !
- Torques must be observed:
M10 16-25 Nm screw joint BR940 100 Nm
M12 30-40 Nm screwed seat BR940 180 Nm
M16 70-90 Nm bonnet BR950/960 60 Nm
M20 150-175 Nm
- Change seals.
- Fit bonnet (pos. 11/42) and reset the set pressure; make sure spring setting range is
appropriate.
- Secure spring setting by means of lock nut (pos. 21).
- Assemble lifting device.
- If necessary, replace both spring plates (pos. 26) and use longer studs (pos. 3) when
fitting a spring for a higher set pressure.
- Further information obtainable from the manufacturer.
Only for series 900: DN20-100 (except safety valves with ASME approval)
ATTENTION !
When changing the set pressure and fitting a new spring, note that safety valves
with set pressures between 0.2 and 1.5 bar have a greater lift.
Therefore:
Set pressure in the range Spring change only in
the range
0.2 to 1.5 bar 0.2 to 1.5 bar
> 1.5 bar > 1.5 bar
SAFE-TCS
SAFE-TCP
SAFE-TC
Bellow
Closed cap
Open cap
fig. 6
8.0 Troubleshooting
In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and
adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
-
It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.
ARI-SAFE
Standard safety valve
for the heating technology
• Type-test approved acc. to
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / DIN EN 12828 / TRD 721
• TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D/G/H Figure 903
• TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D Figure 904 Fig. 903 904
Page 14
ARI-SAFE-P
Standard safety valve D/G/F Fig. 900 Fig. 940
• Type-test approved acc. to
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2
• TÜV · SV · . . -811 · D/G Figure 921-924
• TÜV · SV · . . -811 · F Figure 921/923 Fig. 921 922 923 924
Page 20
ARI-SAFE-TC
Full lift safety valve D/G
Standard safety valve F
• Type-test approved acc. to
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2 / TRD421
• TÜV · SV · . . -995 · D/G Figure 941-943
• TÜV · SV · . . -995 · F Figure 941/943 Fig. 941 942 943
Page 26
ARI-SAFE-TC
Standard safety valve
for the heating technology
• Type-test approved acc. to
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / DIN EN 12828 / TRD 721
• TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D/G/H Figure 945
Fig. 920 Fig. 950/960
• TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D Figure 946 Fig. 945 946 Page 30
ARI-SAFE-TCP
Standard safety valve D/G/F
• Type-test approved acc. to
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · D/G Figure 961-963
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · F Figure 961/963 Fig. 961 962 963
Page 34
ARI-SAFE-TCS Features:
Standard safety valve D/G/F • Direct loaded with spring
• Type-test approved acc. to • Wear resistant seat/disc
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2 • Precision disc alignment and guide
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · D/G Figure 951-953 • Possible with soft seal disc
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · F Figure 951/953 Fig. 951 952 953 • Possible with EPDM bellows
ALSO FOR HORIZONTAL APPLICATION • Possible with stainless steel bellows
Page 38
• ARI-SAFE-TC/TCP/TCS:
All common thread types
Edition 02/17 - Data subject to alteration - Regularly updated data on www.ari-armaturen.com! Data sheet 900005 englisch (english)
ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-- Full lift safety valve D/G, Standard safety valve F
Fig. ... .901 Fig. ... .902 Fig. ... .911 Fig. ... .912
closed lifting device, open lifting device, gastight cap, open lifting device,
closed bonnet open bonnet closed bonnet closed bonnet
Flangeholes /
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter Temperature range Flange
-thickness tolerances
12.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN16/16 EN-JL1040 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +300°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533/2533
23.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN25/16 (PN25/10) EN-JS1049 DN200/300 - 250/350 -10°C to +350°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2534/2533
25.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN40/16 EN-JS1049 DN20/32 - 250/350 -10°C to +350°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2535/2533
34.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN25/16 (PN25/10) 1.0619+N DN200/300 - 250/350 -10°C to +450°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2544/2543
35.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN40/16 1.0619+N DN15/25 - 250/350 -10°C to +450°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545/2543
55.901 / 911 PN40/16 1.4408 DN15/25 - 100/150 -60°C to +400°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545/2543
Construction
Safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded
Requirement
Acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2, material selection observe TRB 801 No. 45!
Type-test approval
Full lift safety valve:
Fig. 901/902/911/912 TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G
(acc. to VdTÜV-leaflet 663)
Standard safety valve: Fig. 901/911 TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD2000-A2.
Details required
Medium gasform: Mass flow (kg/h), molar mass (kg/kmol), Isotropic exponent, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Medium liquid: Mass flow (kg/h), density (kg/m3), viscosity, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-Safety valve, Figure ..., DN .../..., PN ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...bar
DN15/25 - 100/150 optional:
standard: without metal bellows
with metal bellows (refer to page 42)
Superimposed back pressure no backpressure allowed on request
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (higher on request) on request
DN 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
(barg) > 10 - 20 > 35 - 40 > 16 - 22 > 14 - 19 > 9 - 14 > 5,7 - 8,2 > 5,5 - 7,4 > 2,4 - 2,7 > 3,0 - 4,5
(barg) > 20 - 25,9 > 22 - 28 > 19 - 25 > 14 - 19 > 8,2 - 12 > 7,4 - 11 > 2,7 - 3,1 > 4,5 - 6,0
(barg) > 25,9 - 40 > 28 - 34 > 19 - 24 > 12 - 17 > 11 - 16 > 3,1 - 4,0 > 6,0 - 7,0
(barg) > 34 - 40 > 17 - 24 > 16 - 21 > 4,0 - 4,8 > 7,0 - 8,5
(barg) > 24 - 27 > 21 - 26 > 4,8 - 5,6 > 8,5 - 10,0
> 5,6 - 6,8 > 10,0 - 11,5
Information / restriction of technical rules need to be observed! > 6,8 - 7,8 > 11,5 - 13,0
ARI-Valves of EN-JL1040 are not allowed to be operated in systems acc. to TRD 110. > 7,8 - 9,5 > 13,0 - 14,0
A production permission acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 is available > 9,5 - 11,0 > 14,0 - 15,0
(acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 EN-JL1040 is not allowed.) >11,0 - 13,0 > 15,0 - 16,0
The engineer, designing a system or a plant, is responsible for the selection of the correct valve. > 13,0 - 15,0 > 16,0 - 20,0
Resistance and fitness must be verified > 15,0 - 17,5
(contact manufacturer for information, refer to Product overview and Resistance list). > 17,5 - 21,0
> 21,0 - 25,0
(barg) > 7,7 - 10 > 4,6 - 6,3 > 4,6 - 5,4 > 4 - 5,5 > 4,5 - 5,6 > 4,5 - 8,4 > 4,6 - 5,9 > 4,5 - 5,8 > 4,2 - 4,9
Fig. 901/911
(barg) > 10 - 16 > 6,3 - 8,4 > 5,4 - 7 > 5,5 - 6,4 > 5,6 - 7,5 > 8,4 - 10 > 5,9 - 8 > 5,8 - 7,5 > 4,9 - 5,6
(barg) > 16 - 18,5 > 8,4 - 10,2 > 7 - 9 > 6,4 - 7,9 > 7,5 - 10 > 10 - 11,5 > 8 - 10 > 7,5 - 8,9 > 5,6 - 7 --
(barg) > 18,5 - 26 > 10,2 - 13 > 9 - 11,7 > 7,9 - 11,5 > 10 - 12,5 > 11,5 - 16 > 10 - 18 > 8,9 - 10,5 > 7 - 8
(barg) > 26 - 40 > 13 - 17 > 11,7 - 16 > 11,5 - 18,5 > 12,5 - 16 > 16 - 18,5 > 18 - 24 > 10,5 - 13 > 8 - 9,3
(barg) > 17 - 27,5 > 16 - 22 > 18,5 - 25 > 16 - 22 > 18,5 - 23 > 24 - 26 > 13 - 14 > 9,3 - 11,5
(barg) > 22 - 30 > 11,5 - 13
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 13 18 22,5 29 36 45 58,5 72 90 106 125 165 200
A0 (mm2) 133 254 398 661 1018 1590 2688 4072 6362 8825 12272 21382 31416
l (mm) 80 85 100 110 115 120 140 160 180 200 225 300 325
l1 (mm) 90 95 105 115 140 150 170 195 220 250 285 305 340
H (mm) 260 270 280 330 390 435 545 610 690 845 890 1105 1175
H (Bellows design) (mm) 290 310 335 390 445 500 620 690 770 -- -- -- --
X (mm) 150 150 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 500 500 500 500
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408 -- --
C
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408 521 600
(Widthupport
1.0619+N (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332 362 408 521 600
tongues)
1.4408 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332 -- -- -- --
(inch) G1/4" G3/8"
Drainhole with plug
Standard for EN-JL1040, EN-JS1049 1.0619+N, optional at 1.4408
Weights
standard (kg) 7 8,5 10 14 20 28 40 53 80 125 165 280 430
optional: Bellows design (kg) 7,5 9,5 11,5 16 22,5 32 47 59 90 -- -- -- --
Flanges
PN16 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 -- --
ØD1 PN25 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 360 425
PN40 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235 270 300 375 450
PN10 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 445 505
ØD2
PN16 (mm) 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405 460 520
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 -- --
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- 18 18 18 19 20 22 24 24 27 29 37 40
b1
1.0619+N (mm) 16 20 20 20 21 22 24 26 28 31 34 37 40
1.4408 (mm) 16 16 16 18 19 20 22 22 23 -- -- -- --
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 30 32 -- --
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 31 33 33 35
b2
1.0619+N (mm) 18 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 27 29 33 35
1.4408 (mm) 18 15 16 17 17 17 17 19 19 -- -- -- --
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533 / 2543 / 2545 / 28605 / 28607, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
Standard-Flangeholes
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350
ØK (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 400 460
PN10 DIN 2532
n x Ød (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 12x22 16x22
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355 410 470
PN16 DIN 2533
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 1) 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 12x22 12x26 12x26 16x26
ØK (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 310 370 -- --
PN25 DIN 2533
n x Ød (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 12x26 12x30 -- --
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 320 385 -- --
PN40 DIN 2545
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 8x26 8x26 12x30 12x33 -- --
1) also with 8 bore holes acc. to DIN EN 1092-1/-2 possible.
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of the given
Pressure-temperature-ratings
temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
EN-JS1049 25 (bar) on request 25 24,3 23 21,8 20 17,5 -- --
EN-JS1049 40 (bar) on request 40 38,8 36,8 34,8 32 28 -- --
acc. to manufacturers standard -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.0619+N 25 (bar) 18,7 25 23,9 22 20 17,2 16 14,8 8,2
1.0619+N 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1
acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.4408 40 (bar) 40 40 36,3 33,7 31,8 29,7 28,5 27,4 --
1) Studs and nuts made of A4-70 (at temperatures below -10°C)
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G variable: DN15-100; 250 < 3,5 bar, DN125-200 < 4,0 bar)
DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G 0,74 0,7 0,75 0,7
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F 0,52 0,54 0,48 0,45 0,56 0,52
20
21 (barg) 1210 2320 3620 6020 9250 14500 24500 37100 57900 76000 105800 197693
22 (barg) 1265 2420 3790 6290 9700 15150 25600 38800 60600 79500 110900 206658
24 (barg) 1375 2635 4120 6840 10500 16450 27850 42100 65900 86500 120600 224640
25 (barg) 1431 2740 4280 7120 10950 17100 28950 43800 90200 125500 233648
26 (barg) 1486 2850 4450 7390 11350 17800 30050 93700 130300
27 (barg) 1541 2950 4620 7670 11820 18460 31220 96950
28 (barg) 1597 3060 4780 7950 12250 19100 32300
30 (barg) 1708 3270 5120 8500 13100 20450 34550
32 (barg) 1819 3490 5450 9060 13950 21800 36800
34 (barg)
40 (barg)
22
24 (barg) 1835 3515 5490 9120 14060 21970 37100 56200 87900 115300 160400 299717
25 (barg) 1909 3655 5710 9490 14620 22850 38600 58500 120000 166900 311743
26 (barg) 1983 3800 5930 9850 15190 23730 40100 124600 173300
27 (barg) 2057 3930 6160 10240 15770 24630 41650 129350
28 (barg) 2130 4080 6370 10600 16320 25500 43100
30 (barg) 2277 4360 6810 11320 17450 27250 46100
32 (barg) 2425 4640 7250 12050 18570 29000 49100
34 (barg) 2572 4925 7700 12790 19700 30800 52050
40 (barg) 3014 5770 9030 14477 23810 36100 61000
21
24 (bar) 18,04 36 56,2 93,4 144 225 338 512 800 1040 1443 3130
25 (bar) 18,41 36,7 57,4 95,3 147 229 345 522 1059 1473 3194
26 (bar) 18,78 37,4 58,5 97,2 150 234 352 1080 1502
27 (bar) 19,13 38,2 59,6 99 153 238 358 1100
28 (bar) 19,49 38,9 60,7 101 155 243 365
30 (bar) 20,17 40,2 62,9 104 161 251 375
32 (bar) 20,83 41,5 64,8 108 166 259 380
34 (bar) 21,47 42,8 66,9 111 171 268 400
40 (bar) 23,29 46,4 72,5 124,8 185,4 289,7 435
Fig. ... .901 Fig. ... .902 Fig. ... .911 Fig. ... .912
closed lifting device, open lifting device, gastight cap, open lifting device,
closed bonnet open bonnet closed bonnet closed bonnet
Type-test approval
Full lift safety valve:
Fig. 901/902/911/912 TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G
(acc. to VdTÜV-leaflet 663)
Standard safety valve: Fig. 901/911 TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F
Construction / Application
Safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded; steam, gases, vapours and liquids
Requirement
acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 421 / AD2000-A2
Sizing
Calculation acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD-leaflet A2
Details required
Medium: Gas Mass flow (kg/h), molar mass (kg/kmol), temperature (°C), set pressure (bar), back gauge pressure (bar)
Medium: Liquid Mass flow (kg/h), density (kg/m3), viscosity, temperature (°C), set pressure (bar), back gauge pressure (bar)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-SN ANSI - safety valve, Figure ..., Nominal diameter .../..., ANSI ..., Material ..., Set pressure ... bar
standard: without metal bellows 1" x 2" - 4" x 6" optional: with metal bellows (refer to page 42)
Superimposed back pressure no backpressure allowed on request
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (gauge) (higher on request) on request
Coefficient of discharge Kdr VdTÜV (Values for D/G variabel: 1" - 4" < 3,5 bar, 6" < 4,0 bar)
1 1/2"x2"
NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
1 1/2"x2 1/2"
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G (bar) 0,74 0,70
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F (bar) 0,54 0,48 0,45
acc. to ANSI -59°C bis 38°C 93°C 149°C 204°C 260°C 315°C 343°C 371°C 399°C 427°C
SA351CF8M ANSI150 (bar) 19 16,5 14,8 13,6 11,7 9,7 8,7 7,6 6,5 --
SA351CF8M ANSI300 (bar) 49,6 43 38,6 35,5 33 31,2 30,5 30,0 29,4 --
NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x2" 1 1/2"x2 1/2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 22,5 29 29 36 45 58,5 90 90 106 125
A0 (mm2) 398 661 661 1018 1590 2688 6362 6362 8825 12272
H (mm) 280 330 330 390 435 545 690 690 845 890
H (with stainless steel bellows) (mm) 335 390 390 445 500 620 770 770 -- --
X (mm) 150 200 200 250 300 350 500 500 500
C (Width of support tongues) (mm) -- -- -- -- 204 242 332 362 405
(inch) G1/4" G3/8"
Drainhole with plug
Optional, not standard
Weights
Standard (kg) 12 18 18 23 30 47 80 82 140 170
Option: stainless steel bellows (kg) 13,5 20 20 25,5 34 54 90 92 -- --
Standard-Flangeholes
NPS 1" 1 1/2" 2" 2 1/2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10"
ØK (mm) 79 98 120,5 140 152,5 190,5 241,5 298,5 362
ANSI150
n x Ød (mm) 4 x 16 4 x 16 4 x 19 4 x 19 4 x 19 8 x 19 8 x 22 8 x 22 12 x 25
ØK (mm) 89 114,5 127 -- 168 200 270 -- --
ANSI300
n x Ød (mm) 4 x 19 4 x 22 8 x 19 -- 8 x 22 8 x 22 12 x 22 -- --
1 1/2"x2"
NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
1 1/2"x2 1/2"
19
20 (barg) 3460 5750 5750 8850 13800 23350 55300 72600 101000
21 (barg) 3620 6020 6020 9250 14500 24500 57900 76000 105800
22 (barg) 3790 6290 6290 9700 15150 25600 60600 79500 110900
24 (barg) 4120 6840 6840 10500 16450 27850 65900 86500 120600
25 (barg) 4280 7120 7120 10950 17100 28950 90200 125500
26 (barg) 4450 7390 7390 11350 17800 30050 93700 130300
27 (barü) 4620 7670 7670 11820 18460 31220 96950
28 (barg) 4780 7950 7950 12250 19100 32300
30 (barg) 5120 8500 8500 13100 20450 34550
32 (barg) 5450 9060 9060 13950 21800 36800
34 (barg) 5800 9650 9650 14850 23250 39100
40 (barg)
19
20 (barg) 4610 7660 7660 11800 18400 31150 73700 96800 134600
21 (barg) 4830 8020 8020 12370 19300 32650 77300 101400 141000
22 (barg) 5050 8390 8390 12930 20200 34150 80800 106000 147500
24 (barg) 5490 9120 9120 14060 21970 37100 87900 115300 160400
25 (barg) 5710 9490 9490 14620 22850 38600 120000 166900
26 (barg) 5930 9850 9850 15190 23730 40100 124600 173300
27 (barü) 6160 10240 10240 15770 24630 41650 129350
28 (barg) 6370 10600 10600 16320 25500 43100
30 (barg) 6810 11320 11320 17450 27250 46100
32 (barg) 7250 12050 12050 18570 29000 49100
34 (barg) 7700 12790 12790 19700 30800 52050
40 (barg) 9030 14477 14477 23810 36100 61000
18
19 (barg) 49,9 82,9 82,9 128 200 300 710 923 1284
20 (barg) 51,3 85,3 85,3 131 205 308 730 949 1320
21 (barg) 52,6 87,4 87,4 135 210 316 748 973 1350
24 (barg) 56,2 93,4 93,4 144 225 338 800 1040 1443
25 (barg) 57,4 95,3 95,3 147 229 345 1059 1473
26 (barg) 58,5 97,2 97,2 150 234 352 1080 1502
27 (barg) 59,6 99 99 153 238 358 1100
28 (barg) 60,7 101 101 155 243 365
30 (barg) 62,9 104 104 161 251 375
32 (barg) 64,8 108 108 166 259 390
34 (barg) 66,9 111 111 171 268 400
40 (barü) 72,5 124,8 124,8 185,4 289,7 435
Flangeholes /
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter Temperature range Flange
-thickness tolerances
12.903 (max. 10 bar) PN16/16 EN-JL1040 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533/2533
25.903 PN40/16 EN-JS1049 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2535/2533
35.903 PN40/16 1.0619+N DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545/2543
Construction
Standard safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded metal seat with EPDM insert, EPDM-bellows, closed spring bonnet with control hole, open lifting device,
stainless steel seat and spindle
Application
Acc. to DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
Requirement
acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 721 Part 6, material selection observe TRD!
• Fig. 12.903 (EN-JL1040) max. 10 bar
• > 10 bar Fig. 25.903 (EN-JS1049) or Fig. 35.903 (1.0619+N)
Type-test approval
Spring loaded: Fig. 903 TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D/G/H
Sizing
acc. to TRD Part 6.2.5 (see capacity-tables Figure 903)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-spring loaded, Figure ..., DN .../..., PN ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...barg
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 12.903 Fig. 25.903 Fig. 35.903
1 Body EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N
2 Seat X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
3 Studs 25CrMo4, 1.7218
4 Spindle guide X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
7 x Gasket Pure graphite (CrNi laminated with graphite)
8 Hexagon nut C35E, 1.1181
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
12 Disc X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / EPDM
14 x Spindle X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
17 Adjusting screw X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X14CrMoS17+QT, 1.4104+QT
29 Cap, open EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030
37 x Compression spring FDSiCr / 51CrV4, 1.8159
41 Lever, open EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030
43 Bellows EPDM
└ Spare parts
(barü) > 8,5 - 19 1) > 3,6 - 5 > 3,6 - 5 > 3,6 - 5 > 3 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 2,95 2,7 - 3,3
Fig. 903
(barü) > 19 - 28 > 5 - 9 > 5 - 9 > 5 - 9 > 3,6 - 5 > 2,95 - 4 3,3 - 4,1
(barü) > 28 - 35 > 9 - 16 1) > 9 - 16 1) > 9 - 14 1) > 5 - 9 > 4 - 5,7 4,1 - 5,5
(barü) > 35 - 40 > 16 - 22 > 16 - 22 > 14 - 19 > 9 - 14 1) > 5,7 - 8,2 5,5 - 7,4
(barü) > 22 - 28 > 22 - 28 > 19 - 25 > 14 - 19 > 8,2 - 12 1) 7,4 - 11 1)
(barü) > 28 - 34 > 19 - 24 > 12 - 17 11 - 16
(barü) > 17 - 24 16 - 21
(barü) > 24 - 27 21 - 26
1) Fig. 12.903 max. 10 bar; > 10 bar 25.903 or 35.903
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 18 22,5 29 36 45 58,5 72 90 106 125
A0 (mm2) 254 398 661 1018 1590 2688 4072 6362 8825 12272
l (mm) 85 100 110 115 120 140 160 180 200 225
l1 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 170 195 220 250 285
H (mm) 270 280 330 390 435 545 610 690 845 890
X (mm) 150 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 500 500
C EN-JL1040 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408
(Width support EN-JS1049 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408
tongues) 1.0619+N (mm) -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332 362 408
Drainhole with plug (optional) (inch) G1/4" G3/8"
Weights
standard (kg) 8,5 9,5 13,5 20 26 39 53 82 125 165
Flanges
PN16 (mm) 220 250 285
ØD1 105 115 140 150 165 185 200
PN40 (mm) 235 270 300
ØD2 PN16 (mm) 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405
EN-JL1040 (mm) 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26
b1 EN-JS1049 (mm) 18 18 18 19 20 22 24 24 27 29
1.0619+N (mm) 20 20 20 21 22 24 26 28 31 34
EN-JL1040 (mm) 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 30 32
b2 EN-JS1049 (mm) 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 31 33
1.0619+N (mm) 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 27 29
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533 / 2543 / 2545 / 28605 / 28607, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
Standard-Flangeholes
DN 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250
ØK (mm) 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355
PN16 DIN 2533
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 1) 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 12x22 12x26
ØK (mm) 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 -- --
PN40 DIN 2545
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 8x26 8x26 -- --
1) also with 8 bore holes acc. to DIN EN 1092-1/-2 possible.
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of the given
Pressure-temperature-ratings
temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
EN-JS1049 40 (bar) on request 40 38,8 36,8 34,8 32 28 -- --
acc. to manufacturers standard -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.0619+N 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1
1) Studs and nuts made of A4-70 (at temperatures below -10°C)
6 barg
(kW) 426 666 1100 1700 2660 4500 6820 10600 14000 19400
(kg/h) 800 1250 2075 3200 4995 8440 12790 20000 26220 36450
6,5 barg
(kW) 454 709 1180 1810 2840 4790 7260 11300 14900 20700
(kg/h) 850 1330 2210 3400 5320 9000 13600 21300 27900 38800
7 barg
(kW) 481 752 1250 1930 3000 5080 7700 12000 15800 22000
(kg/h) 904 1415 2345 3615 5650 9550 14470 22600 29660 41250
7,5 barg
(kW) 509 795 1320 2030 3180 5370 8140 12700 16700 23200
(kg/h) 957 1495 2485 3820 5980 10100 15300 23900 31350 43600
8 barg
(kW) 536 837 1390 2140 3350 5660 8580 13400 17600 24500
(kg/h) 1060 1660 2755 4245 6630 11200 16950 26500 34800 48400
9 barg
(kW) 590 921 1530 2360 3685 6230 9435 14740 19340 26900
(kg/h) 1165 1820 3025 4665 7290 12300 18650 29150 38250 53200
10 barg
(kW) 643 1000 1670 2570 4010 6790 10300 16000 21100 29300
(kg/h) 1270 1985 3300 5080 7940 13400 20300 31750 41600 58000
11 barg
(kW) 695 1085 1800 2780 4340 7340 11100 17400 22800 31700
(kg/h) 1375 2150 3570 5500 8590 14500 22000 34350 45100 62700
12 barg
(kW) 745 1165 1940 2990 4670 7890 12000 18700 24500 34000
(kg/h) 1480 2310 3840 5920 9250 15600 23650 37000 48500 67500
13 barg
(kW) 798 1250 2070 3190 4990 8430 12800 20000 26200 36400
(kg/h) 1580 2475 4110 6340 9900 16700 25350 39600 52000 72300
14 barg
(kW) 850 1325 2200 3390 5300 8970 13600 21200 27900 38700
(kg/h) 1690 2640 4385 6760 10550 17800 27000 42200 55400 77000
15 barg
(kW) 900 1405 2330 3590 5620 9500 14400 22500 29500 41000
(kg/h) 1790 2800 4655 7170 11200 18950 28700 44800 58800 81800
16 barg
(kW) 950 1480 2460 3790 5930 10000 15200 23700 31100 43300
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G/H variable: DN20-100 < 3,5 bar / DN125-150 < 4 bar)
DN1 / DN2 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
TÜV · SV · . . - 688 · D/G/H (bar) 0,74 0,70
Flangeholes /
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter Temperature range Flange
-thickness tolerances
12.904 PN16/16 EN-JL1040 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533/2533
Construction
Standard safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded, EPDM-bellows, closed bonnet with control hole, open lifting device, stainless steel seat and spindle
Application
For low pressure steamgenerators up to 1 bar,
acc. to DIN 4750 and DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
Requirement
acc. to TRD 721 Part 5
Type-test approval
Low pressure steam - safety valve: Fig. 904 TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D
Sizing
refer to "Capacity".
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-Low pressure steam - safety valve, Figure ..., DN .../..., PN ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...barg
DN1 / DN2 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 18 22,5 29 36 45 58,5 72 90 106 125
A0 (mm2) 254 398 661 1018 1590 2688 4072 6362 8825 12272
l (mm) 85 100 110 115 120 140 160 180 200 225
l1 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 170 195 220 250 285
H (mm) 270 280 330 390 435 545 610 690 845 890
X (mm) 150 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 500 500
C (Width support tongues) (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408
Drainhole with plug (inch) G 1/4" G 3/8"
Weights
standard (kg) 8,5 9,5 13,5 20 26 39 53 82 125 165
Flanges
ØD1 PN16 (mm) 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285
ØD2 PN16 (mm) 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405
b1 EN-JL1040 (mm) 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26
b2 EN-JL1040 (mm) 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 30 32
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
Standard-Flangeholes
DN 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250
ØK (mm) 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355
PN16
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 12x22 12x26
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of the given
Pressure-temperature-ratings
temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C* -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
0,4 barg (kg/h) 110 172 286 440 688 1163 1762 2753 3380 4700
0,5 barg (kg/h) 125 196 325 501 783 1325 2006 3135 3858 5365
0,6 barg (kg/h) 142 223 370 569 889 1503 2277 3557 4317 6004
0,7 barg (kg/h) 158 248 412 634 990 1675 2537 3964 4748 6603
0,8 barg (kg/h) 173 271 450 693 1082 1830 2772 4331 5201 7233
0,9 barg (kg/h) 179 292 485 746 1166 1971 2986 4666 5616 7809
1 barg (kg/h) 203 317 526 811 1270 2140 3245 5070 6030 8385
Conversionrates: 1 kW = 860 kcal/h* = 0,86 Mcal/h* = 3,6 MJ/h * not lawful units
1 Mcal/h* = 1000 kcal/h* = 1,163 kW
Fig. ... .921 Fig. ... .922 Fig. ... .923 Fig. ... .924
closed lifting device, open lifting device, gastight cap, open lifting device,
closed bonnet closed bonnet closed bonnet open bonnet
Flangeholes /
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter Temperature range Flange
-thickness tolerances
12.921 / 922 / 923 / 924 PN16 EN-JL1040 DN15 - 100 -10°C to +300°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533
35.921 / 922 / 923 / 924 PN40 1.0619+N DN15 - 100 -10°C to +450°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545
55.921 / 923 PN40 1.4408 DN15 - 100 -60°C to +400°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545
Construction
Safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded
Requirement
Acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2, TRD 421, observe TRB 801 No. 45 at material selection!
Type-test approval
Standard safety valve: Fig. 921/922/923/924 TÜV · SV · . . -811 · D/G
Standard safety valve: Fig. 921/923 TÜV · SV · . . -811 · F
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD2000-A2.
Details required
Medium gasform: Mass flow (kg/h), molar mass (kg/kmol), Isotropic exponent, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Medium liquid: Mass flow (kg/h), density (kg/m3), viscosity, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-P - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ..., PN .. , Material ........, Set pressure .... barg
standard: without metal bellows optional: with metal bellows (refer to page 42)
Superimposed back pressure no backpressure allowed on request
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (higher on request) on request
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
(barg) > 1,9 - 2,5 > 1,9 - 2,5 > 2,7 - 3,7 > 2 - 3,3 > 1,8 - 2,7 > 1,8 - 2,5 > 2,7 - 3,4 > 2,6 - 3,2 > 2,4 - 3,1
Fig. 921/922/923/924
(barg) > 2,5 - 3,5 > 2,5 - 3,5 > 3,7 - 5 > 3,3 - 5,2 > 2,7 - 4,3 > 2,5 - 3,2 > 3,4 - 4,5 > 3,2 - 4,2 > 3,1 - 4
(barg) > 3,5 - 5 > 3,5 - 4 > 5 - 8 > 5,2 - 8 > 4,3 - 6 > 3,2 - 4,5 > 4,5 - 5,5 > 4,2 - 5,5 > 4 - 5
(barg) > 5 - 7 > 4 - 5,5 > 8 - 10,5 > 8 - 11,5 > 6 - 9 > 4,5 - 8,5 > 5,5 - 6,8 > 5,5 - 6,5 > 5 - 8
(barg) > 7 - 10 > 5,5 - 7 > 10,5 - 15 > 11,5 - 16,5 > 9 - 12 > 8,5 - 13 > 6,8 - 8,5 > 6,5 - 9 > 8 - 11
(barg) > 10 - 16 > 7 - 10,5 > 15 - 23 > 16,5 - 22 > 12 - 17 > 13 - 17 > 8,5 - 14 > 9 - 12 > 11 - 17,5
(barg) > 16 - 25 > 10,5 - 17 > 23 - 35 > 22 - 30 > 17 - 30 > 17 - 23 > 14 - 23 > 12 - 16,5 > 17,5 - 27,5
(barg) > 25 - 33 > 17 - 25 > 35,1 - 40 > 30 - 40 > 30 - 40 > 23 - 34 > 23 - 34 > 16,5 - 20 > 27,5 - 40
(barg) > 33 - 40 > 25 - 37 > 34 - 40 > 34 - 40 > 20 - 33
(barg) > 37 - 40 > 33 - 40
(barg) > 6 - 9 > 8 - 12 > 6 - 8 > 8 - 11 > 5,7 - 10 > 5 - 7 > 4,3 - 5,9 > 5,9 - 7 > 6,5 - 10
Fig. 921/923
(barg) > 9 - 14 > 12 - 21 > 8 - 12,5 > 11 - 14,5 > 10 - 16 > 7 - 10,5 > 6,9 - 7,5 > 7 - 9 > 10 - 18
(barg) > 14 - 26 > 21 - 27,5 > 12,5 - 16 > 14,5 - 21 > 16 - 22 > 10,5 - 15,5 > 7,5 - 8,8 > 9 - 11 > 18 - 35
(barg) > 26 - 30 > 27,5 - 40 > 16 - 20,5 > 21 - 40 > 22 - 31 > 15,5 - 20 > 8,8 - 14 > 11 - 14,7
(barg) > 30 - 40 > 20,5 - 30 > 31 - 40 > 20 - 40 > 14 - 21 > 14,7 - 18,8
(barg) > 30 - 40 > 21 - 30 > 18,8 - 35
(barg) > 30 - 40
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 12 12 15 18 20 29 36 44 55
A0 (mm2) 113 113 177 254 314 661 1018 1520 2376
l (mm) 90 95 100 105 115 125 145 155 175
H (mm) 260 260 270 285 290 290 340 400 450
H (Bellows design) (mm) 285 285 300 325 330 345 400 455 515
X (mm) 130 130 130 150 150 150 200 250 300
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332
Y
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332
(Width support
1.0619+N (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332
tongues)
1.4408 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332
Weights
standard (kg) 5 5 5,5 8 9,5 11,5 15,5 20,5 33
optional: Bellows design (kg) 5,4 5,4 6 9 10,5 12,8 17,5 23 37
Flanges
PN16 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220
ØD
PN40 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235
EN-JL1040 (mm) 14 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24
b 1.0619+N (mm) 16 18 18 18 18 20 20 22 24
1.4408 (mm) 16 18 18 18 18 20 20 22 24
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533 / 2545, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
Standard-Flangeholes
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240
PN16
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 1) 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250
PN40
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 8x26 8x26
1) also with 8 bore holes acc. to DIN EN 1092-1/-2 possible.
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of the given
Pressure-temperature-ratings
temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
acc. to manufacturers standard -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.0619+N 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1
acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.4408 40 (bar) 40 40 36,3 33,7 31,8 29,7 28,5 27,4 --
1) Studs and nuts made of A4-70 (at temperatures below -10°C)
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G variable: < 3 bar)
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
TÜV · SV · . . -811 · D/G 0,37 0,34 0,37 0,34 0,37 0,34
TÜV · SV · . . -811 · F 0,26 0,23 0,26 0,23 0,26 0,23
16
18 (barg) 445 445 640 920 1235 2390 4000 5500 8600
20 (barg) 490 490 705 1020 1365 2640 4430 6080 9500
22 (barg) 540 540 775 1110 1495 2890 4850 6660 10400
24 (barg) 585 585 840 1210 1630 3140 5270 7240 11300
25 (barg) 609 609 875 1260 1690 3270 5480 7530 11760
26 (barg) 630 630 910 1310 1760 3400 5700 7820 12200
28 (barg) 680 680 975 1405 1890 3650 6120 8400 13100
30 (barg) 730 730 1040 1505 2020 3900 6550 8990 14000
32 (barg) 775 775 1110 1600 2150 4160 6980 9580 15000
35 (barg)
36 (barg)
40 (barg)
22
24 (barg) 781 781 1121 1121 2170 4190 7030 9650 15100
25 (barg) 812 812 1167 1167 2250 4360 7310 10040 15680
26 (barg) 844 844 1211 1211 2340 4530 7595 10400 16300
28 (barg) 907 907 1302 1302 2520 4860 8160 11200 17500
30 (barg) 969 969 1390 1390 2690 5200 8720 12000 18700
32 (barg) 1032 1032 1480 1480 2870 5540 9290 12750 19900
35 (barg) 1126 1126 1620 1620 3130 6040 10130 13900 21700
36 (barg) 1155 1155 1665 1665 3215 6220 10420 14300 22360
40 (barg) 1283 1283 1840 1840 3560 6880 11500 15850 24700
20
22 (bar) 7,37 7,37 10,19 14,7 20,5 38,1 66,3 87,7 137,0
24 (bar) 7,7 7,7 10,64 15,33 21,4 39,8 69,3 91,6 143,1
25 (bar) 7,86 7,86 10,86 15,64 21,8 40,6 70,7 93,3 146,0
26 (bar) 8,0 8,0 11,06 15,92 22,2 41,3 72,0 95,1 148,6
28 (bar) 8,3 8,3 11,47 16,52 23,1 42,9 74,7 98,7 154,2
30 (bar) 8,6 8,6 11,88 17,1 23,9 44,4 77,3 102,2 159,7
35 (bar) 9,28 9,28 12,83 18,47 25,8 47,9 83,5 110,4 172,5
36 (bar) 9,4 9,4 13,0 18,7 26,1 48,7 84,7 111,9 174,9
40 (bar) 9,92 9,92 13,71 19,75 27,6 51,3 89,3 118,0 184,4
Construction
Safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded
Requirement
acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2, TRD 421
Type-test approval
Full lift safety valve:
Fig. 941/942/943 TÜV · SV · . . -995 · D/G
(acc. to VdTÜV-leaflet 995)
Standard safety valve: Fig. 941/943 TÜV · SV · . . -995 · F
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD2000-A2.
Details required
Medium gasform: Mass flow (kg/h), molar mass (kg/kmol), Isotropic exponent, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Medium liquid: Mass flow (kg/h), density (kg/m3), viscosity, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TC - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... bar
standard: without metal bellows optional: with metal bellows (refer to page 42)
Superimposed back pressure no backpressure allowed on request
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (higher on request) on request
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 25.941/942/943 Fig. 55.941/943
1 Body EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
2 Screwed seat X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
4 Spindle guide X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
7 x Gasket Pure graphite (CrNi laminated with graphite)
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
12 Disc X39CrMo17-1+QT, 1.4122+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
14 x Spindle X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
17 Adjusting screw X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X2CrNiMo17-12-2, 1.4404
27 x Sealing ring CuFA X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
28 Cap, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
35 Lift fork EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
36 Lever, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
37 x Spring FDSiCr / 51CrV4, 1.8159 X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310
41 Lever, open EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 --
43 Bellows (optional) EPDM
55 Bellows unit (optional) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
61 Coupling X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
70 Balanced piston (optional) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1 1/4"
d0 (mm) 12 15 18
A0 (mm2) 113 177 254
GE (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1"
GA (inch) 3/4" 1" 1 1/4"
b (mm) 15 16 18
l (mm) 50 50 50
l1 (mm) 53 55 58
H (mm) 260 260 260
H (Bellows design) (mm) 295 295 300
X (mm) 120 120 120
C (mm) 69 69 69
Weights
standard (kg) 3,5 3,5 3,8
optional: Bellows design (kg) 4,4 4,4 4,7
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of the given
Pressure-temperature-ratings
temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JS1049 40 (bar) on request 40 38,8 36,8 34,8 32 28 -- --
acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 -60°C to <-10°C -10°C to 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.4408 40 (bar) 40 40 36,3 33,7 31,8 29,7 28,5 27,4 --
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G variable: < 3,5 bar)
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . -995 · D/G 0,64 0,60 0,75
TÜV · SV · . . -995 · F 0,45 0,42 0,53
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter (inlet) Temperature range Thread
25.945 PN40 EN-JS1049 DN15 - 25 -10°C to +120°C DIN ISO 228 Part 1
25.946 PN40 EN-JS1049 DN15 - 25 -10°C to +120°C DIN ISO 228 Part 1
Construction
Standard safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded disc with EPDM Standard safety valve, spring-/weight loaded, direct loaded with
insert, EPDM-bellows, closed spring bonnet with control hole, open EPDM-bellows, closed bonnet with control hole, open lifting device,
lifting device, stainless steel seat and spindle stainless steel seat and spindle
Application
For low pressure steamgenerators up to 1 bar,
acc. to DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
acc. to DIN 4750 and DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
Requirement
acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 721 Part 6 acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 721 Part 5
Type-test approval
Spring loaded: TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D/G/H Low pressure steam - safety valve: TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D
Sizing
Acc. to TRD 721 Part 6.2.5, refer to "Capacity". refer to "Capacity"
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TC - spring loaded, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., ARI-SAFE-TC - Low pressure steam - safety valve, Figure ...,
PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... barg DN ... / ..., PN .. / ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...barg
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 25.945/946
1 Body EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
2 Screwed seat X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
4 Spindle guide X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
7 x Gasket Pure graphite (CrNi laminated with graphite)
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
12 x Disc X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
14 x Spindle X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
17 Adjusting screw X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
29 Cap, open EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
37 x Spring FDSiCr
41 Lever, open EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
43 Bellows (optional) EPDM
61 Coupling X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN (inlet) 15 20 25
(barg) > 1,35 - 2,2 > 1,35 - 2,1 > 1,5 - 2,1
(barg) > 2,2 - 3,3 > 2,1 - 3 > 2,1 - 2,6
Spring loaded
Fig. 945
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1 1/4" 1" x 1 1/2"
d0 (mm) 12 15 18 18
A0 (mm2) 113 177 254 254
GE (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1"
GA (inch) 3/4" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2"
b (mm) 15 16 18 18
l (mm) 50 50 50 50
l1 (mm) 53 55 58 58
H (mm) 260 260 260 260
X (mm) 120 120 120 120
Weights
standard (kg) 3,5 3,5 3,8 3,8
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of the given
Pressure-temperature-ratings
temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C* -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JS1049 40 (bar) on request 40 38,8 36,8 34,8 32 28 -- --
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G/H variable: < 3,5 bar)
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . - 997 · D/G/H (bar) 0,64 0,60 0,75
6 (barg)
(kW) 164 240 432
(kg/h) 307 450 810
6,5 (barg)
(kW) 174 256 460
(kg/h) 325 480 860
7 (barg)
(kW) 185 271 488
(kg/h) 348 509 917
7,5 (barg)
(kW) 195 286 516
(kg/h) 370 540 970
8 (barg)
(kW) 206 302 543
(kg/h) 410 600 1075
9 (barg)
(kW) 227 332 598
(kg/h) 450 655 1180
10 (barg)
(kW) 247 362 651
(kg/h) 490 715 1290
11 (barg)
(kW) 267 391 705
(kg/h) 530 775 1395
12 (barg)
(kW) 287 421 757
(kg/h) 570 835 1500
13 (barg)
(kW) 307 449 809
(kg/h) 610 890 1605
14 (barg)
(kW) 326 478 860
(kg/h) 650 950 1710
15 (barg)
(kW) 346 506 911
(kg/h) 690 1010 1820
16 (barg)
(kW) 365 534 962
Fig. ... .961 Fig. ... .962 Fig. ... .963 Fig. ... .961 / Fig. ... .962
closed lifting device open lifting device gastight cap optional with lever
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD2000-A2
Details required
Medium gasform: Mass flow (kg/h), molar mass (kg/kmol), Isotropic exponent, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Medium liquid: Mass flow (kg/h), density (kg/m3), viscosity, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TCP - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... bar
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 67.961/962/963 Fig. 57.961/963
1 Body GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
4 Spindle guide X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
7 x Gasket Pure graphite (CrNi laminated with graphite)
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
12 Disc X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
14 x Spindle X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
17 Adjusting screw X2CrNiMo17-12-2, 1.4404
27 x O-ring FPM
28 Cap, closed GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
29 Cap, open GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
30 Cap, gastight EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
Lever, closed
36 EN AC-4420 (Al)
(optional: Fig. ... .961 / Fig. ... .962)
37 x Spring FDSiCr X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310
65 Coupling X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
66 O-ring FPM
67 Lift button X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 1/2" 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1/2" 3/4" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1"
d0 (mm) 12 12 12 12 12 12
A0 (mm2) 113 113 113 113 113 113
GE (inch) 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1"
GA (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1"
b (mm) 15 15 16 16 16 18
l (mm) 42 47 42 47 50 50
l1 (mm) 34 34 34 34 34 34
H (mm) 189 189 189 189 189 189
X (mm) 100 100 100 100 100 100
Weights
standard (kg) 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of the given
Pressure-temperature-ratings
temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 -60°C to <-10°C -10°C to 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.4581 100 (bar) 50 100 98 93,3 88,5 83,3 80,4 78 --
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G variable: < 4 bar)
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · D/G 0,30
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · F 0,23
35
40 (barg) 784 784 784 1040 1040 1040 8,79 8,79 8,79
45 (barg) 883 883 883 1165 1165 1165 9,33 9,33 9,33
50 (barg) 983 983 983 1295 1295 1295 9,83 9,83 9,83
55 (barg) 1085 1085 1085 1420 1420 1420 10,31 10,31 10,31
60 (barg) 1185 1185 1185 1550 1550 1550 10,77 10,77 10,77
65 (barg) 1290 1290 1290 1675 1675 1675 11,21 11,21 11,21
70 (barg) 1400 1400 1400 1800 1800 1800 11,63 11,63 11,63
75 (barg) 1500 1500 1500 1930 1930 1930 12,04 12,04 12,04
80 (barg) 2055 2055 2055 12,44 12,44 12,44
85 (barg) 2185 2185 2185 12,82 12,82 12,82
90 (barg) 2310 2310 2310 13,19 13,19 13,19
95 (barg) 2438 2438 2438 13,5 13,5 13,5
100 (barg) 2565 2565 2565 13,76 13,76 13,76
Fig. ... .951 Fig. ... .952 Fig. ... .953 Fig. ... .951 / Fig. ... .952
closed lifting device open lifting device gastight cap optional with lever
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD2000-A2
Details required
Medium gasform: Mass flow (kg/h), molar mass (kg/kmol), Isotropic exponent, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Medium liquid: Mass flow (kg/h), density (kg/m3), viscosity, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TCS - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... bar, Installation position ....
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 67.961/962/963 Fig. 57.961/963
1 Body GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
7 x Gasket Pure graphite (CrNi laminated with graphite)
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
12 Disc X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
14 x Spindle X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
17 Adjusting screw X2CrNiMo17-12-2, 1.4404
27 O-ring FPM
28 Cap, closed GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
29 Cap, open GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
30 Cap, gastight EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
Lever, closed
36 EN AC-4420 (Al)
(optional: Fig. ... .951 / Fig. ... .952)
37 x Spring FDSiCr X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310
63 Guide bush X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
65 Coupling X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
66 O-ring FPM
67 Lift button X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 1/2" 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1/2" 3/4" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1"
d0 (mm) 12 12 12 12 12 12
A0 (mm2) 113 113 113 113 113 113
GE (inch) 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1"
GA (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1"
b (mm) 15 15 16 16 16 18
l (mm) 42 47 42 47 50 50
l1 (mm) 34 34 34 34 34 34
H (mm) 189 189 189 189 189 189
X (mm) 100 100 100 100 100 100
Weights
standard (kg) 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of the given
Pressure-temperature-ratings
temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 -60°C to <-10°C -10°C to 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.4581 100 (bar) 50 100 98 93,3 88,5 83,3 80,4 78 --
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G variable: < 3 bar)
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · D/G 0,26
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · F 0,19
35
40 (barg) 680 680 680 901 901 901 7,26 7,26 7,26
45 (barg) 765 765 765 1010 1010 1010 7,71 7,71 7,71
50 (barg) 852 852 852 1120 1120 1120 8,12 8,12 8,12
55 (barg) 940 940 940 1230 1230 1230 8,52 8,52 8,52
60 (barg) 1030 1030 1030 1340 1340 1340 8,90 8,90 8,90
65 (barg) 1120 1120 1120 1450 1450 1450 9,26 9,26 9,26
70 (barg) 1200 1200 1200 1560 1560 1560 9,61 9,61 9,61
75 (barg) 1300 1300 1300 1675 1675 1675 9,95 9,95 9,95
80 (barg) 1785 1785 1785 10,27 10,27 10,27
85 (barg) 1895 1895 1895 10,59 10,59 10,59
90 (barg) 2005 2005 2005 10,90 10,90 10,90
95 (barg) 2110 2110 2110 11,16 11,16 11,16
100 (barg) 2220 2220 2220 11,36 11,36 11,36
1.4408, 0,5 bar X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571 / FPM Viton (FKM) -20 °C to +180 °C V
12 Disc
1.4581 0,5 bar X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571 / CR Neoprene -30 °C to +100 °C N
1,0 bar 1) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571 / SHR -20 °C to +220 °C S
0,5 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / EPDM -35 °C to +150 °C E
0,5 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / FPM Viton (FKM) -20 °C to +180 °C V
SA216WCB 12 Disc
0,5 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / CR Neoprene -30 °C to +100 °C N
1,0 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / SHR -20 °C to +220 °C S
Fig. 950/960 with soft sealing disc max. 40 bar 1) Fig. 900 DN20 min. 2,0 bar
Vent hole
Vent hole G1/8
G1/4
Rupture disc
Lock bushing Test gag (Sizing refer to page 40.)
GL
X -- -- X X X -- -- X
Germanischer Lloyd
LROS (LRS)
X -- -- X X X -- -- --
Lloyds Register of Shipping
SELO (SQLO)
X X X X X X X X X
China / Chine
ASME Code
-- -- -- X -- -- -- -- --
Section VIII-Division 1 (UV-stamp)
Canada Registration
X -- -- X -- -- -- -- --
(UV-stamp)
EAC
X X X X X X X X X
Russland / Russia
RMROS (RS)
X X X X X X X X X
Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Promatomnadzor
X X X X X X X X X
White russia (Rep. of Belarus)
Prombezpeka
X X X X X X X X X
Ukraine
Rostechnadzor (Gosgortechnadsor)
X X X X X X X X X
Russland / Russia
Single approvals
Arbejdstilsynet
X X X X X X X X X
Danish emploment protection
ABS
X X X X X X X X X
American Bureau of Shipping
AIB Vincotte
X X X X X X X X X
Belgien / Belgium
IBR
X -- -- X X X -- -- --
Indien Boiler Regulations
ISPESL
X X X X X X X X X
Italien / Italy
RINA
X -- -- X X X -- -- --
Italien / Italy
Stoomwezen
X X X X X X X X X
Niederlande / Netherlands
NK
X X X X X X X X X
Japan
UDT
X X X X X X X X X
Polen / Poland
Special features: - Project administration of the calculation and product data incl. spare part drawings concerning to project and tag number.
- Direct output or calculation and product data in PDF format.
- Product data could be taken for a direct order.
- SI- and ANSI-units with direct conversion to another databank.
- Settings with over pressure or absolute pressure.
- All ARI valves are integrated in a databank.
- Direct access relating to the product on data sheets, operating instructions, pressure-temperature-diagram, controller characteristics,
spare part drawings and CAD-symbols on the website.
- Operation in company networks possible (no complex installations on individually PC‘s necessary).
- Extensive catalogue extending over several product groups.
To ARI-Armaturen to the att. of Mrs./Mr. ............................................................................ Fax No. +49 52 07 / 994 - ...................................................
If the type of bursting disc is not yet determined, we are offering our assistance for sizing.
Please send us the questionnaire containing the appropriate data.
Necessary data
Medium:
..................................................................................
□ liquid □ gas
Temperature: ....................°C
Safety valve
Type / Figure: ....................................... Set pressure: .................................... bar(g)
Nominal diameter:
(Input / Output) DN .............. / ................ Flow diameter d0: .................................... mm
Nominal pressure:
(Input / Output) PN .............. / ................ Flow cross-section A0: .................................... mm2
Certified coefficient of
discharge Kdr (αw): ....................................
Rupture disc
Bursting pressure: ....................................... bar(g) Material: □ 1.4401
(Bursting pressure = Set pressure of the safety valve) □ Nickel
Tolerance: □ + 10% □ Inconel
□ Monel
□ .......%
□ Aluminium
Quantity: piece □ Teflon foil medium side
(incl. reserve) (minimum 3 pieces recommended)
□ other ................................
TÜV-approval: □ yes □ no
All rights reserved. END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG claims copyright over this documentation.
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded , reproduced nor passed to third parties without the
written agreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG . This restriction also applies to the corresponding
drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right or change parts of the valves and armatures at any time without
prior or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change without notice.
This publication has been written with great care. However, END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.KG cannot be held
responsible, either for any errors occuring in this publication or for their consequences.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance or the properties is given.
Edition: 01/2012
2 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 4
2 General advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.2 Inward monitoring 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Guarantee 5
2.5 Symbols and their signification 6
3 Safety advice 7
3.1 Personal advice 7
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting 7
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting 7
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing 8
3.2 Device safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
5 Ball valves 11
5.1 General 11
5.2 Corresponding use 11
5.3 Operation 11
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly 11
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection 12
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection 13
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the center part of the ball valve 13
5.4.2.2 Welding of the connection ends 14
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the center part 15
5.4.3 Mounting with flanged connection 16
5.5 Maintenance 17
5.5.1 Readjusting of the gland 18
5.5.2 Exchange of the ball and the sealing 19
5.5.2.1 3-part ball valve with threaded or welded connection 19
5.5.2.2 Multiple part ball valve with flanged connection 22
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 3
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
Dear assembler / user,
these operation and installation manuals are intended to give you the knowledge, which is
necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the ball valves rapaidly
and correctly.
Please read these instructions carefully and pay particular attention to the advice and warning
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the ball valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the ball valves we shall be pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation manual.
Yours
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG
4 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
General advice
2 General advice
2.1 Validity
These mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard version of the ball valves.
Please check
• directly after delivery the ball valves for any transport damages and defi-
ciencies.
• with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of parts.
2.3 Complaints
Claims for replacement or goods which relate to transport damage can only be considered valid if
the delivery company is notified without delay.
In case of returns (because of transport damage / repairs), please make a damage protocol and
send the parts back to the manufacturer, if possible in the original packaging.
2.4 Warranty
For our ball valves we give a guarantee period in accordance with the sales contract.
The end of the normal duration of life of the wearing parts represents no defect.
The warranty and guarantee rules of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG are applicable.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 5
Symbols and their signification
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices; this also includes
advices for averting health risks. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices, this also includes
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these papgraphs without fail!
This spanner identifies the description of actions which you should carry out.
6 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Safety advice
3 Safety advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the armatures and
valves are mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must take into account particular safety
aspects in each case!
If, for example, a pneumatic actuator works a slide in an operational chemical plant, the potential
hazards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only being carried out for
test purposes an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room!
We wish to point out expressly that the mounting, adjusting and at accessories the pneumatical
and eletrical installation of the armatures and valves must be carried out by trained specialist
personnel having mechanical, pneumatical and electrical knowledge!
Secure that the machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directice after the mounting and instal-
ling of the armatures and valves.
Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair.
If appropriate, isolate the devices / machines / plant from the mains.
Check (for example in chemical plants) whether the switching off of devices / machines / plant
will cause potential danger.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the armature / valve (in a plant which is in operation)
inform the shift forman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in
order, for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good
time by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machi-
nes / plant.
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up of the devices /
machines / plant.
Observe the respective relevant professional safety and accident prevention regulations when
carrying out the mounting / repair work.
Check the correct functioning of the safety equipment (for example the emergency push off but-
tons/ safety valves, etc)!
As a result of the starting (pneumactic, electric or by hand) of the armatures and valves the flow
of gases, steam, liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that, as a result of
the starting or the test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the
environment!
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 7
Safety advice
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up or shutting down
of the device / machine / plant.!
By ending the adjustment check the correct function and should the occasion arise the position
of the slide / valve / flap.
Check, whether the slide / valve / flap will be closed totally, if the control signals the appropriate
limit stop!
Through suitable measures, prevent links being trapped by moving actuating elements!
Check the right function of all safety devices (for example emergency push off buttons / safety
valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions discribed in
this documentation!
Adjusting switch on armatures and valves with options (e.g. actuators, solenoid valves, limit
switches) there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrican or a person having adequate
training, who is aware of the potntial hazard!
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the armature / valve will be under pressure.
If necessary, inform the shift foreman/ safety engineer or the manager about the maintenance
or repair without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chemicals or a
discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
Observe that some valves / armatures are able to enclose the pressured medium e.g. the ball
in the ball valve. You have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the armture/valve is
mounted.
Switch off pilot pressure and the power supply and relieve the pressure in the pipes.
In case of defect in the armature/valve make contact to the supplier. The telephone number will
be found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
8 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Safety Advice
If you ascertain a damage of the armature/valve, isolate the device from the mains. Please
observe the safefy advices.
Do not mount, start or adjust the armature/valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the armature/valve and the tightness
of the pipe connections.
Also check the function of the accessories e.g. actuators, limit switches, etc.
The armatures/valves
• are quality products which are produced in accordance to the recognized industrial
regulations.
• left the manufacturer`s work in a perfect safety condition.
In order to maintain this condition, as installer / user you must carry out your task in accordance
with the description in these instructions, technically correctly and with the greatest possible
precision .
We assume, as a trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
Satisfy yourself that the armatures/vales will only be used within their admissible limiting value
(see the technical data) .
The armatures/valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their construction!
The armatures/valves must be used within the values specified in the technical data!
The operating of the armature/valve outside the nominal temperature range could destroy the
sealings and the bearings.
The operating of the armatures/valves outside the nominal pressure range could destroy the inner
parts and the body.
Never remove a cap or a other component part if the armature/valve will be under pressure.
Do not mount, start or adjust the armature/valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the armature/valve and the tightness
of the pipe connections.
Also check the function of the accessories e.g. actuators, limit switches, etc.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 9
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
In some cases the armatures/valves will be provided with a name- plate, which permitts a definite identification
of the armatures/valves and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not be
displaced or changed
0062
10 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball Valves
5 Ball valves
5.1 General
Before you are mount, adjust, start, operate or disassemble a ball valve you have to read the
Safety advices
If you have not read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
In some cases you have to install an equalization boring into the ball, that there will be no overpres-
sure between the body and the ball by changing temperatures.
5.3 Operation
The ball valve will be open or close totally by using a handle or an pneumatic or electric actuator
(option).
During the operation of the ball valve take care that there won`t be insert any objects or limbs
into the armature. Heavy injuries or damages will be the consequence. If it is necessary you have
to install a protective device.
The mechanical installation will be same at all variants of the ball valve. There will be differences
in the type of connection.
Observe the flow direction: the handle should point at the flow direction.
Remove the package and the safety devices (e.g. caps or plugs). Take care that there will be no
parts of the package or other parts in the armature.
Clean up the pipes in which the ball valve will be mounted. Pollution could affect the safety in
operation and the duration of life of the armature. If necessary you have to install a Y- strainer in
front of the ball valve.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 11
Ball valves
Before lay on sealing compounds, check the hardly screwing by the pipes into the valve body.
Lay on the correct sealing compounds on the pipes end. By using PTFE-ribbon or hemp sealings
observe the screw direction. Don`t use sealing compounds which are not prescribed for your
employment.
Screw the pipes into the connection ends of the valve. Don`t use the handle as a lever.
Strike up the pipes with pressure after that time the manufacturer of the sealing compounds pre-
tends to harden it.
sealing compound
harden
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.1 - ball valves, mounting threaded connection (Fig.: Art. TB111025)
12 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
Before welding you have to disassemble the center part of the ball valve to prevent the sealings
from damages.
Clamp the valve between a vice carfully. By using guard plates you can prevent the damage of the
ends of the body.
Loosen the nuts crossvice and remove the screws out of the body.
Take the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball. Put the
parts aside carefully. To attach the center parts and the connection ends at a later mounting you
can sign the parts.
G y
o. K an
& C erm .de
bH n · G end
Gm use st@
ren ha · po
atu Oeyn d.de
D -Arm Bad w.en
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h
N
PE
F·O OS
E
AU
·CL
ZU
Fig. 5.2 - ball valves, mounting welded connection, disassembly of the center part (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 13
Ball Valves
The center part of the ball valve must be substitute by a distance part as long as the center part
during the welding.
By welding the valve body with the pipes observe appropriate demands and guide lines.
The safety demands by welding are depending on the place and the position of the point of weld.
Welding the parts at a serviceable device/machine/plant the potential of danger is as higher as
welding the parts in a welding room.
If appropriate, inform the shift foreman/safety engineer or the works manager and the fire brigade
of your factory.
By welding observe your own national guide lines about safety and pevention of accidents.
Fig. 5.3 -ball valves,mouting welded connections, welding of the connection ends(Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
14 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
Before mounting the center part let the connection ends cool down.
Insert the center part between the connection ends. Attach the center parts to the right connec-
tion ends.
Observe the correct seat of the sealings and that there will be no pollution in the seats of the seal-
ings and in the ball.
Insert the screws into the borings of the connection ends.Tighten the nuts equally and crosswise.
Observe the max. torque of the screws.
G y
o. K man
& C er d.de
bH n · G en
Gm se st@
en hau po
tur yn e ·
r ma d Oe nd.d
D-A Ba w.e
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h cool down !
N
PE
F·O OS
E
AU
·CL
ZU
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.4 - ball valves, mounting welded connections, mounting of the center part of the ball valve (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 15
Ball valves
In the following discription we assume that you have mounted the flanges at the end of the pipes
and the ball valve (welded flanges) and they are cooled down.
Insert the ball valve and the flange sealings between the flanges.
Align the flange borings und put fit screws through the borings.
Put fit nuts on the screws and tighten them equally and crossvice. Observe the required and the
max. torque of the ball valve, the flanges, the flanges seals and the screws.
G y
o. K an
& C erm .de
bH n · G end
Gm use st@
ren ha · po
D
atu Oeyn d.de
-Arm Bad w.en
EN 2547 ://ww
cool down !
3 ttp
h
N
F·OPE
AU SE
·CLO
ZU
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.5 - ball valves, mounting flanged connection (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
16 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.5 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down the valves you have to read the
Safety advice
If you have not read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
On normal accounts the ball valve is maintenance free.In periodical turns the controlling of the
function and the tightness should happen:
Depending on the version of the ball valve for decreasing tightness at the stem the gland could be
readjust. See also chapter 5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
Ball valves in a multiple part design could be disassemble to exchange the seals and/or the ball.
See also chapter: 5.5.2. „Exchange of the ball and the sealings“.
In case of a defect of the valve make a contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back or these operation and installation manual.
If you ascertain a demage of the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant! However before
doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 17
Ball valves
By keeping the nominal pressure you have to tighten up the screw of the gland until the tightness
of the the gland will be restored
After the readjusting the ball of the valve must be able to move slightly.
At ball valves with spring forced sealings or o-ring sealings at the stem the readjustment isn`t
necessary.
o.k. tightness
Fig. 5.6 - ball valves, readjusting of the gland (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
18 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
For decreasing tightness the ball and/or the sealings of the ball valve could be exchange. The
availability of the spare parts kit you can see in the data sheet of your ball valve.
Corresponding to the wear of the parts exchange the sealings and the ball. By the replacement of
the ball you should also exchange the sealing.
In the following description we assume, that your ball valve will be actuated by hand. If your ball
valve will be actuated be a pneumatic or electric actuator, please also observe the opration and
installation manual of the actuator.
Cut off the media flow and relieve the media pressure.
If it`s necessary remove the additional limt switches and gear boxes.
At 3-part ball valve it will do when you remove the center part of the ball valve. Loosen the nuts
crosswise and remove the screws out of the body.
Take the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball. Put the
parts aside carefully.
. KG ny
Co rma e
H & · Ge end.d
mb en
n G aus post@
a ture eynh .de ·
rm d O nd
D-A Ba w.e
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h
N
PE
F·O SE
AU
·CLO
ZU
Fig. 5.7 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of th center part (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 19
Ball valves
Observe that ball valves could enclose medium inside the ball.
Take the parts aside carefully. Place a mark on the body and the connection ends that you will be
able to join the correct parts by a subsequent mounting.
Remove the ball seals and the ball out of the body.
Perhaps you have to turn the handle to remove the ball out of the body. Do not insert any limbs into
the ball valve. Heavy injuries will be the consequences.
Loosen the nut of the handle and take the handle and all discs und washers aside.
Depending on the version of the ball valve loosen the nut on the stem or loosen the gland nut
Remove the stem and all other sealings, washers and discs out of the body.
Throw away the old pieces by observing the appropriate demands and guide lines.
& er .de
. K ny
bH n · G end
Co ma
@
G
n G us st
re ha o
tu yn · p
e
ma Oe .de
Ar d d
D- Ba .en
m
EN 547 www
32 tp:/
ht
SE
LO
·C
N
ZU
PE
F·O
AU
Fig. 5.8 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the inner parts (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
20 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
Make the stem with the new sealings and discs complete.
Depending on the version of the ball valve mount the other sealings, discs and spring washers at
the stem, and screw the nut or the gland nut onto the stem.
Insert the ball into the body. The dihedral of the stem must engage in the grove of the ball. If need
be you have to turn the stem.
Put the handle onto the stem. Observe the correct function of the limit switches and take care that
the handle and the boring of the ball will align.
Fix the nut of the handle onto the stem and tighten it.
Put the ball sealings and the ball into their seats at the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that
you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball.
Before mounting the center part clean the connection ends at the end of the pipes.
Move the center part of the body between the connection ends. If need be arange the center parts
to the correct connection ends.
Insert the screws into the borings of the connection ends.Tighten the nuts equally and crosswise.
Observe the max. torque of the screws.
If need be adjust the gland of the stem. Please read the advices at chapter
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 21
Ball valves
Remove the ball valve out of the pipes. Loosen the flange screws and pull the screws out of the
flange.
Throw away the old pieces by observing the appropriate demands and guide lines.
Dismantle the ball balve. Depending on the version of the ball valve:
• you have to screw out the screw of the body, or
• you have to screw the screw joint out of the body.
Observe that ball valves could enclose medium inside the ball.
Put the parts aside carefully. Place marks on the parts that you will be able to join the correct parts
by a subsequent mounting of the ball valve.
Remove the ball sealing and the ball out of the body.
. KG any
& Co Germ d.de
bH ·
Gm sen st@en
uren nhau · po
mat d Oey d.de
D-Ar en
EN 547 Bawww.
32 tp://
ht
N
PE
F·O E
AU OS
·CL
ZU
Fig. 5.9 - Ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the ball valve (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
22 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
Perhaps you have to turn the handle to remove the ball out of the body. Do not insert any limbs into
the ball valve. Heavy injuries will be the consequences..
Loosen the nut of the handle and take the handle and all discs und washers aside.
Depending on the version of the ball valve loosen the nut on the stem or loosen the gland nut
Remove the stem and all other sealings, washers and discs out of the body.
Throw away the old pieces by observing the appropriate demands and guide lines.
& erm .de
. K ny
bH n · G nd
Co a
Gm e e
n us t@
G
re ha pos
atu eyn e ·
rm d O d.d
D-A Ba .en
EN 547 ww
32 p://w
htt
SE
LO
·C
EN
ZU
OP
F·
AU
Fig. 5.10 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the inner parts (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 23
Ball valves
Make the stem with the new sealings and discs complete.
Depending on the version of the ball valve mount the other sealings, discs and spring washers at
the stem, and screw the nut or the gland nut onto the stem.
Place the first ball seal into the seat in the body.
Insert the ball into the body. The dihedral of the stem must engage in the grove of the ball. If need
be you have to turn the stem.
Place the second ball seal into the seat in the body.
Assemble the ball valve. Depending on the version of the ball valve:
• you have to join the parts of the body together and to screw them up with the fit
screws; or
• you have to screw up the screw joint with the body.
Put the handle onto the stem. Observe the correct function of the limit switches and take care that
the handle and the boring of the ball will align.
Fix the nut of the handle onto the stem and tighten it.
Before mounting the center part clean the connection ends at the end of the pipes.
Insert the ball valve with new flange sealings between the flanges.
Align the flange borings und put fit screws through the borings.
Put fit nuts on the screws and tighten them equally and crossvice. Observe the max. torque of the
screws.
If need be adjust the gland of the stem. Please read the advices at chapter
24 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Notes
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 25
6 Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(1)
Declaration in conformity
(2)
fi by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
as defined
(3) This declaration apply to the article groups with the nominal sizes:
Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size
Butterfly valves
fl NG DN32 ... DN100 VL 1¼" ...2", 3" ZU 1¼" ... 3"
HA DN50 ... DN300 Ball valves VN 1¼" ... 2" Non-return valves
TA DN40 ... DN300 AG 1¼" ... 2" VO DN32 ... DN200 AR 1¼" ... 2"
WA DN50 ... DN300 BK DN32 ... DN100 VS DN32 ... DN200 CK3003 DN65 ... DN200
WM DN50 ... DN300 EK 1¼" ... 3" VT DN32 ... DN100 CK5003 DN32 ... DN200
Gate valves GD 1¼" ... 2" VU 4" CK5100 DN65 ... DN250
AB 1¼" ... 2" IK 1¼" ... 2" ZA 1¼" ... 4" CK5200 DN65 ... DN250
AE 1¼" ... 3" IL 1¼" ... 4" ZA DN32 ... DN100 CW5400 DN65 ... DN250
AE DN32 ... DN80 IW 1¼" ... 2" ZB 1¼" ... 2" EB 1¼" ... 3"
CA5014 DN100 ... DN300 KA 1¼" ... 3" ZB DN32 ... DN50 EB DN32 ... DN80
CA5015 DN65 ... DN300 PD 1¼" ... 2" ZD 1¼" ... 4" RG1300 DN32 ... DN100
CA5214 DN40 ... DN200 PE 1¼“ ... 4“ ZD DN32 ... DN100 RG33xx DN32 ... DN200
CD5010 DN32 ... DN200 TB 1¼" ... 4“ ZE 1¼" ... 4" RK DN32 ... DN400
CV3010 DN32 ... DN150 TF DN32 ... DN200 ZE DN32 ... DN100 TD 4"
CV5010 DN32 ... DN200 TH 1¼" ZF 1¼" ... 4" Strainer
CV5020 DN32 ... DN200 VD 1¼" ... 4" ZG 1¼" ... 2" AS 1¼” ... 3”
Pressure reducer VD DN32 ... DN100 ZH 1¼" ... 2" AS DN32 ... DN200
SD ⅜" ... 2"
⅜ VH 1¼" ... 2" ZK DN32 ... DN100 EA 1¼" ... 3"
SD DN32 ... DN80 VH3100 1¼" ... 2" ZL 1¼" ... 3" EA DN32 ... DN80
Pressure relief valves VK DN32 ... DN200 ZM 1¼" ... 2"
NG 1¼" ... 1½" VK/PN40 DN32 ... DN200 ZP DN32 ... DN200
and all variations of these articles
(5) Herewith we declare that the above-mentioned articles in the conditions of our delivery are in conformity with the regula-
tions of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EG.
(8) numbers:
Certicate Quality Management System: INT110198DE
of System approval PED:
Certicate 2011/70.10.1777/P
Declaration without signature or company stamp shall not be valid. The declaration may be circulated only without alternation.
Extracts or alternations are subject to approval by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG.
(5) Herewith we declare that the above-mentioned articles in the conditions of our delivery are in conformity with the regula-
tions of Article 3 Part 3 of the directive 97/23/EG. These products bear no CE mark, but are in line to the good engineering
practice designed and manufactured.
Declaration without signature or company stamp shall not be valid. The declaration may be circulated only without alternation.
Extracts or alternations are subject to approval by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG.
Manual de instrucciones
2/2-Wege-Magnetventil Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung Proper Usage Utilisatio
Operating instructions
für neutrale Medien
Bitte beachten Sie die Hinweise dieser Betriebsanleitung To ensure the proper function of the device and promote Af
2/2-way solenoid valve sowie die Einsatzbedingungen und zulässigen Daten ge- long service lift, you must comply with the information in pe
for neutral media mäß Datenblatt Typ 5281, damit das Gerät einwandfrei these Operating Instructions and the application conditions and contenues
Èlectrovanne à 2/2 voies funktioniert und lange einsatzfähig bleibt. Bei Nichtbeachtung specifications provided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet. Usage of d’utilisation
dieser Hinweise sowie bei unzulässigen Eingriffen in das Gerät the device in a manner that is contrary to these Operating technique
pour fluides neutres entfällt jegliche Haftung unsererseits, ebenso erlischt die Garantie Instructions or the application conditions and specifications tions et d’i
r 24V
Válvula magnética de 2/2 pasos auf Geräte u. Zubehörteile! Das Gerät dient ausschließlich als 2/ provided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet is improper and will void déclinons
2 V o para medios neutrales 2-Wege-Magnetventil für die lt. Datenblatt zulässigen Medien. your warranty. This device serves exclusively as a 2/2-way les access
ge 1 lid with
Eine andere oder darüber hinausgehende Benutzung gilt als solenoid valve for the media stated to be permissible on the data vanne 2/2
o l t a y
nicht bestimmungsgemäß. Für hieraus resultierende Schäden sheet. Any other use is considered improper use. Bürkert will Une autre
V R va pply onl
haftet Bürkert nicht. Das Risiko trägt allein der Anwender. not be responsible for any improper use of the device. considérée
U
dommages
/
UL er su
toute respo
o w ACHTUNG! ATTENTION!
s2p
• Halten Sie sich bei Einsatzplanung und Betrieb des • Be sure to observe generally accepted safety rules •
clas
Gerätes an die einschlägigen allgemein anerkannten when planning, installing and using this device. For
sicherheitstechnischen Regeln. example, take suitable measures to prevent
• Treffen Sie geeignete Maßnahmen, um unbeabsichtig- unintentional operations of the device.
tes Betätigen oder unzulässige Beeinträchtigungen • Do not impair the operation of the device. •
auszuschließen. • Do not attemp to detach or unscrew any lines or
• Beachten Sie, daß in Systemen, die unter Druck valves in the system that are under pressure, and
Notice d'utilisation
stehen, Leitungen und Ventile nicht gelöst werden always be sure to switch off the voltage supply •
Betriebsanleitung
dürfen. Schalten Sie vor Eingriffen in das System in before working on the system.
jedem Fall die Spannung ab! • When attaching the coil to the plug socket, be sure
• Achten Sie auf den einwandfreien Sitz der Dichtung the seal is properly seated.
beim Verschrauben der Spule mit der Geräte- • Jammed coils can cause coil overheating with AC!
steckdose. • For explosion-proof models, data from the conformity •
• Festsitzender Kern bewirkt bei Wechselspannung certificate PTB No. 00ATEX 2129 X must also be
(AC) Spulenüberhitzung! complied with! •
• Bei Ausführungen mit Explosionsschutz sind zusätz-
lich die Angaben der Konformitätsbescheinigung PTB WARNING! •
Nr. 00ATEX 2129 X zu beachten. • Do not touch the coil during use as it becomes very
hot.
WARNUNG!
• Verletzungsgefahr! Bei Dauerbetrieb kann die Spule •
sehr heiß werden.
Fluid Control Systems
Sécurité Seguridad Sicherheit Sicherheit
Utilisation conforme aux prescriptions Utilización con arreglo a las disposiciones Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad
e the proper function of the device and promote Afin que l’appareil puisse fonctionner parfaitement et Se ruega observar las indicaciones contenidas en este Ma-
vice lift, you must comply with the information in pendant longtemps, veuillez observer les instructions nual de instrucciones así como las condiciones de uso y datos Spannungsfreie Montage / Voltage-free assembly Fluidischer Anschluß / Fluid connection
nstructions and the application conditions and contenues dans cette notice d’utilisation ainsi que les conditions admisibles con arreglo a la hoja de servicio Tipo 5281, de modo que el Montage sans tension / Montaje libre de tensión Raccordement fluidique / Conexión fluídica
vided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet. Usage of d’utilisation et les données admissibles mentionnées dans la fiche aparato funcione impecablemente y permanezca durante largo tiempo
anner that is contrary to these Operating technique du type 5281. En cas d’inobservation de ces instruc- apto para el empleo. La inobservancia de estas indicaciones así como
e application conditions and specifications tions et d’interventions non autorisées dans l’appareil, nous las inter-venciones inadmisibles en el aparato suponen la declinación
ype 5281 Data Sheet is improper and will void déclinons toute responsabilité et la garantie couvrant l’appareil et por nuestra parte de toda clase de responsabilidad, además de la
his device serves exclusively as a 2/2-way les accessoires s’éteint! L'appareil sert uniquement d’électro- extinción de la garan-tía de los aparatos y de las piezas de los accesorios.
the media stated to be permissible on the data vanne 2/2 voies pour les fluides admis selon la fiche technique. El aparato sirve ex-clusivamente como válvula magnética de 2/2 pasos
use is considered improper use. Bürkert will Une autre utilisation ou une utilisation excédant ce contexte sera para los medios autorizados según la hoja de datos. Cualquier otra
ble for any improper use of the device. considérée comme non conforme aux prescriptions. Pour les utilización que vaya más ella no será conforme a las disposiciones.
dommages qui en résulteraient, le fabricant/fournisseur décline El fabricante / suministrador no es responsable de los daños que de ello
toute responsabilité. L’utilisateur seul en assume le risque. pudieran resultar. El riesgo corresponde únicamente al usuario. 0 bar, psi, kPa Du
Dir rchflu
ATTENTION! ATTENTION! ¡ATENCIÓN! Se ectio ß
re to observe generally accepted safety rules • Pour la planification de l’utilisation et l’exploitation de • Para la planificación y operación del aparato atenerse Se s d'é n flo
n
ntid cc
planning, installing and using this device. For l’appareil, veuillez vous en tenir aux règles applicables a las correspondientes reglas generales y re- o d ou
ep
as
ple, take suitable measures to prevent et généralement reconnues en matière de technique conocidas de la técnica de seguridad.
entional operations of the device. de sécurité. • Tomar las medidas apropiadas para excluir
ot impair the operation of the device. • Prenez les mesures nécessaires pour exclure tout accionamien-tos no intencionados o perjuicios Elektrischer Anschluß / Electrical connection
ot attemp to detach or unscrew any lines or actionnement involontaire ou des altérations inadmisibles; prestar atención a que en el caso de Raccordement électrique / Conexión eléctrica
s in the system that are under pressure, and inadmissibles. sistemas que se encuentren bajo presión no deben
s be sure to switch off the voltage supply • Notez qu’il n’est pas permis de desserrer des desconec-tarse conducciones y válvulas.
e working on the system. conduites ou des vannes se trouvant sous pression • Antes de proceder a intervenciones en el sistema
attaching the coil to the plug socket, be sure dans des systèmes! Avant d’intervenir dans le desco-nectar siempre la tensión.
eal is properly seated. système, coupez l’alimentation électrique dans tous • Prestar atención al asiento impecable de la empaque-
med coils can cause coil overheating with AC! les cas! tadura al atornillar la válvula con la caja de enchufe
xplosion-proof models, data from the conformity • Veillez à ce que le joint repose parfaitement lorsque para aparatos eléctricos.
icate PTB No. 00ATEX 2129 X must also be vous visserez la bobine avec le connecteur. • Con tensión alterna (AC), el macho de asiento duro
lied with! • Un noyau bloqué provoque en cas d’alimentation en provoca sobrecalentamiento de la bobina!
tension alternative (AC) une surchauffe de la bobine! • En las ejecuciones con protección debe tenerse
WARNING! • Dans les exécutions antidéflagrantes, les indications adicio-nalmente en cuenta los datos de la declaración
ot touch the coil during use as it becomes very de l'attestation de conformité PTB N° 00ATEX 2129 X de con-formidad PTB n° 00ATEX 2129 X.
doivent observées en plus.
AVERTISSEMENT! ¡AVISO!
• Risque de blessure! En cas de fonctionnement • ¡Peligro de lesiones! En estado de operación continua
permanent, la bobine peut devenir très chaude. la bobina puede ponerse muy caliente.
Sicherheit Technische Daten Technische Daten
Boîtier/Caja
Gehäuse/Housing Laiton/Latón
Messing/brass Acier fin/Acero inoxidable
Edelstahl/Stainless steel
Dichtwerkstoff Temp.
Matériau d’étanchéité Temp.
Sealing material Medium
Material de estanqueidad Fluide/Medio
NBR -10 .. +90 °C
NBR -10 .. +90 °C
EPDM -40 .. +120 °C
EPDM -40 .. +120 °C
0 bar, psi, kPa Du FKM -10 .. +120 °C
FKM -10 .. +120 °C
Dir rchflu
Se ectio ßrich Nennweite/Nominal size Dimension nominale
Se s d'é n flow tung
n
ntid cc Anchura nominal
o d oule
ep Wirkungsweise
as ment
o Circuit function Fonctionnement
A Funcionamiento
A
Typ/ Type
Type/Tipo
MADE IN GERMANY
MADE IN GERMANY
5281 A 13,0 FKM MS 5281 A 13,0 FKM MS
Beispiel 0,2 -16 bar 0,2 -16 bar
24V 50-60Hz 8W Exemple 24V 50-60Hz 8W
Example
Ejemplo
450000Y W14UN
450000Y W14UN
E-mail: info@de.buerkert.com
International
Contact addresses can be found on the internet at:
Die Kontaktadressen finden Sie im Internet unter: max. 5 Nm
Les adresses se trouvent sur internet sous :
www.burkert.com Bürkert / Company / Locations
Schmutzfänger
Dirt trap
O-Ring
Collecteur d’impuretés
Joint torique Ge
Anillo en O Sentido de paso
en
Schutzleiterfunktion / Protective conductor function /
Fonctionnement du conducteur de protection / Función del Sc
conductor de protector Alw
Nach Spulenmontage immer prü- con
fen! flow Ra
Always test function after assembly of d cas
tion ida
of coil! irec nque tec
/ D ta
Toujours vérifier après montage de ng t / Es Co
htu
la bobine! ric men de
¡Tras el montaje de bobina hfluß oule tier
rc c
pruébese siempre la function¡ Du s d’é
n
se
Widerstand Prüfspannung Prüfstrom Rohrleitungen reinigen
resistance test voltage test current Cleaning the piperuns
résistance tension d’essai courant d’essai Nettoyer les conduites
intensidad tensión de prueba corriente de prueba
Limpieza tuberías
max. 0,1 Ω 12 V 1A
Operating Instructions 0512/13_EU-ML_00803312 12/05/1'M
Montage Montage Störungen Ersatzteile
sembly/ Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Troubleshooting / Dérangements / Averías Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza
e beliebig / Any assembly position / Position Abdichtung Einschrauben der Rohrleitungen / Screwing in the pipe Spannung und Stromart prüfen!
age quelconque / Sentido de montaje Seal connections Check the voltage and type of current!
al Etanchéification Vissage les conduites / Averías las tuberías Vérifier la tension et le genre de courant! Spulensatz
tung Atornillado Comprobar tensión y clase de corriente!
rection Coil kit
préférentielle PTFE
lodo
Jeu de bobines
Juego de bobina
Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza de repuesto Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza de repuesto Spare parts/Pièces de rechange/Pieza de repuesto
TECHNICAL DATA
Materials Valves Type 5281, DN13
Valve block Brass (alternative: Cv-value valves 4.0 m³/h (1.11 l/sec)
brass, nickel-plated) Operating voltage 24 V DC (alternative: 120 V AC)
Coil jacket PA Voltage tolerance 10 %
Armature guide tube Stainless steel Nominal power 8 W per valve
Seal material EPDM / (alternative Nominal operating Long-term operation;
FKM) mode duty cycle 100 %
Medium Water Electrical connection Plug tabs DIN 43650 A
Media temperature -10 to +80 °C with pre-wired device
Ambient temperature max. +55 °C sockets incl. 1.6 m of cable
Medium feed pressure max. 10 bar Degree of protection IP 65 with device socket
Pressure control range 1 to 6 bar Special feature Manually actuated valves
Operating range 1 to 6 bar Filter sieve 0.25 mm stainless steel
Connections Block fixing with 2 screws M8x50
Input E G 3/4 internal thread through housing drill holes
Output A1 M22x1.5; external Installation position of any, preferably drives at top
Output A2 M14x1.5; external block
A
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
A differential pressure of 0.5 bar is required to open the full valve cross section.
The minimum pressure at the system input is 1 bar.
OF VALVE
A 2/2-way valve, pilot-operated,
normally closed
DIMENSIONS [MM]
DESCRIPTION
The valve block consists of a brass
block, two or three valves of Type
Front view 5281 with manual actuation, a pres-
sure controller, a dirt trap (with 0.25
mm sieve) and a pressure gauge.
Valve V 1 is used as a safety valve at
the inlet and - if present - directs the
medium to the pressure controller.
Otherwise, the valve position is
sealed by a cover plate. Ball valve,
tube and dirt trap form a module that
can be rotated through 180° when
necessary, enabling medium feed
from the opposite side.
The valve seats are integrated in the
block. The block operates so that the
same respective water flow is applied
to each valve output in parallel opera-
tion. The water volumes flowing
through the valves can be adjusted
Rear view
via the set-point of the pressure con-
troller. The pressure gauge indicates
the set pressure.
The block is fixed in place with 2 hex-
agonal socket head screws via the
drill holes in the valve block.
Legend
V1 optional cover plate or safety valve (solenoid valve Type 5281, DN13);
the double block with cover plate is presented in the graphic
V2, V3 dosing valves
VS lock screw for sieve
SW7 external hex. screw (SW7 - wrench size 7) for setting the pressure set-point value
Version III:
with plastic housing
Union connection G 1/8 "and G 1/4"
www.burkert.com p. 1/4
TFU006
p. 2/4
TFU006
Item no.
Ø Cover
D (inch)
[m3/h]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Kvs
A
&
1/2 140.00 76.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 1.27 788 439
3/4 160.00 90.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 2.27 788 440
1 180.00 95.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 3.60 788 441
$
1 1/4 200.00 110.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 5.80 788 442
%
1 1/2 220.00 120.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 9.10 788 443
"
2 250.00 130.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 14.00 788 444
!
Version II
E
Port con-
Delivered without
nections
Item no.
A (inch)
[m3/h]
pressure gauge.
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Kvs
G
D
B
D
3/4 180.00 89.00 98.00 54.00 58.00 2.27 770 991
1 205.00 88.50 99.50 54.00 58.00 3.60 770 992
A
C
F
Spare parts Version I and II B
Item no.
Spare
parts
p. 3/4
TFU006
Item no.
R (inch)
nection
[m3/h]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
H
Kvs
H
H
A
B
1/2 140.00 80.00 89.00 58.00 2.40 770 977
3/4 160.00 90.00 89.00 58.00 3.10 771 854
R "
1 180.00 100.00 111.00 64.00 5.80 771 855
1 1/4 200.00 105.00 111.00 64.00 5.90 771 856
h
1 1/2 225.00 130.00 173.00 126.00 12.60 771 857
2 255.00 140.00 173.00 126.00 12.00 771 858
B
Item no.
Version IV
(plastic body, with threaded ports G 1/8 and G 1/4)
X
operating
threaded
pressure
Item no.
[bar] 1)
port
LTA
output pressure.
To find your nearest Bürkert office, click on the orange box www.burkert.com
p. 4/4
Hydraulic characteristics
1 Flow velocity diagram
The steps to take for selecting the correct size are as follows:
V (m/s)
5 · The total flow rate is calculated from the number and type
4 of appliances present by taking the sum of the individual
3 flow rates.
2
Example:
1
One living unit with 1 bathroom
1 bidet G = 6 l/min
1/2” 3/4” 1 shower G = 9 l/min
0,5
1 wash basin G = 6 l/min
0,4
1 wc with cistern G = 6 l/min
0,3
1 kitchen sink G = 12 l/min
0,2 1 washing machine G = 12 l/min
Gtot = 51 l/min
0,1
No appliances = 6
0,2
0,5
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
10
Flow rate
5
10
20
50
100
0,5
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
10
Flow rate
Example:
5
10
20
50
100
Bath tub, kitchen sink, dishwashing machine 12 l/min for Gds = 21 l/min 1/2” ∆p = 0,8 bar
Shower 9 l/min (see indications on diagram 2)
Wash basin, bidet, washing machine, w.c. with cistern 6 l/min
Intended use
The user must comply with the information in these operating instruc- Safety instructions
tions to ensure that the device functions perfectly and safely and has Do not operate the block without first releasing the manual con-
a long service life and must observe the operating conditions and trols of the valves, otherwise the coils may burn out!
permitted data according to the data sheet and rating plate. The gen- Never exceed the maximum media input pressure; otherwise
eral rules of technology must be observed for application planning and there is a danger of bursting!
operation of the device. Unintentional actuation or unacceptable im- Do not install the valve block in a twisted position, as this may
pairments must be prevented by taking suitable measures. result in mechanical stress and impairment of the block function!
Observe the specified screw tightening torques when changing
Caution! Only authorized technicians using suitable tools may work spare parts.
on the block. Caution risk of hot surfaces! The solenoid drives may become
very hot during prolonged operation.
Operating principle of the single valves
Electrical connection
A 2/2-way solenoid valve, The electrical connection is made with device sockets using pre-
pilot-controlled, assembled cables (cable length 1.60 m).
A closed when de-energized (NC) Make the correct connections and carefully connect the ground
wires.
Ensure that the flat seal is correctly fitted between the coil and
Structure device socket! The tightening torque for fastening screws of the
The valve block consists of a brass block, two or three valves of Type device socket is 1 Nm.
5281 with manual control, a pressure controller, a dirt trap (with 0.25
mm sieve) as well as a pressure gauge. Valve V1 is used – if fitted - Start-up/pressure setting
as a safety valve at the input and conveys the medium into the pres- Before starting up the electrical system, release all manual con-
sure controller. Ball valve, hose and dirt trap form one module which trols on the valves.
can be rotated by 180° if required and therefore allows media connec- Build up the media pressure. During the initial start-up the pres-
tion from the opposite side. sure gauge indicates 6 bar (factory setting).
The valve seats are integrated in the block. The block operates in Set the required pressure using the set-point value screw A/F7
such a way that each valve output is supplied in parallel operation with on the pressure controller. The set pressure is indicated on the
the same water current. The volume of water flowing through the pressure gauge.
valves can be adjusted using the set-point value of the pressure con- Apply the operating voltage and start the process.
troller. The pressure gauge indicates the set pressure.
If faults occur
Technical data Check electrical connections, operating voltage, wire connec-
Also observe the specifications on the rating plate! tions, operating pressure and installation and rectify any errors.
Medium Water If the valve still does not switch, please contact your Bürkert
Media temperature -10 to +80 °C Service representative.
Ambient temperature max. +55 °C
Operating voltage of valves 24 V DC
Nominal power of valves 8 W per valve Components / wire connections
Orifice of valves DN 13
Media input pressure max. 10 bar
Pressure control range 1 to 6 bar
Kv value water valves 4.0 m³/h (1.11 l/sec)
Installation
Check that the operating conditions comply with the performance
data of the block! E G 3/4; inside SW7 hexagon head A/F7
Before performing any work on the block, ensure that it is de- A1 M22x1.5; outside for setting the
energized and depressurized! A2 M14x1.5; outside set-point pressure
Before installing the block, clean the line connections and the V1 optional cover plate value
ends of the hose! or safety valve MS 2 mounting screws
(cover plate here) M8x50 with 6 mm
The installation position is freely selectable.
Recommendation: Solenoid drives of the dosing valves face up. V2, V3 dosing valves Hexagon socket
VS lock screw
Attach the block by screwing two hexagonal socket head screws
for sieve
M8x50 through the designated 9 mm holes.
Connect the outputs. Ensure that the connection points are tight.
BA-10168_EN_01_2015-06-25.docx/bi Page 1 of 3
Operating instructions
Solenoid valve block for water distribution Project 10168
Spare parts
Item Designation Order no. Check the O-ring (22x2.5 mm) for damage. An undamaged O-
1 Pressure controller installation set 788 692 ring can be reused. A defective O-ring must be replaced (see
2 Ball valve G 3/4 inside/inside 781 755 spare parts).
3 Pressure gauge 787 035 Moisten the O-ring before installation and ensure that the O-ring
4 Filter sieve VA; 0.25 mm 788 812 is fitted properly during installation.
5.1 O-ring on filter lock screw – EPDM 9353 4827 Caution! Do not use any oil or grease!
5.2 O-ring on filter lock screw – FKM 902 478 Place the sieve unit - now offset by 180° - on the housing so that
6.1 O-ring on sieve unit – EPDM 786 525 the locking pin fits into the guide hole in the housing.
6.2 O-ring on sieve unit – FKM 790 667 Fix the sieve unit using the 2 fastening screws and washers.
7.1 Coil set 126 434 Tighten the fastening screws (see figure for “torques”).
7.2 Coil set – EEx 133 547 Reconnect the pressure and power.
8.1 Valve actuator – EPDM 145 458
8.2 Valve actuator – FKM 143 574 Sieve unit:
9.1 Wearing parts set – EPDM 624 014
9.2 Wearing parts set – FKM 624 019
10.1 Core, complete – EPDM 631 964
10.2 Core, complete – FKM 606 396
11 Device socket, assembled for V3 786 346
12 Device socket, assembled for V2 786 347
13 Device socket, assembled for V1 788 105
14 Both ends of hose fitted with union nut M30x2 786 122
Locking pin in first hole
Conversion and repair work (ex works)
Safety instructions second hole for locking pin (for 180° rotation)
Caution! Only authorized technicians using suitable tools may
work on the block.
Before starting work, order the required spare parts according to Changing the filter sieve (see figure of valve block 2)
the order table. If the filter sieve is very dirty, it should be cleaned or changed.
Before performing any work on the block, ensure that it is de-
energized and depressurized! Valve block 2:
Valve block 1:
BA-10168_EN_01_2015-06-25.docx/bi Page 2 of 3
Operating instructions
Solenoid valve block for water distribution Project 10168
Changing the pressure gauge and ball valve Changing a pilot control diaphragm in the valve
The pressure gauge and the manual ball valve are screwed in with (see also information in the operating instructions Type 5281)
thread sealant (Loctite 542 or 577). The diaphragm is an important element for pilot control of the valve.
Use the square head or hexagon head on the components to The diaphragm is subject to natural wear.
screw them out and in. Change the diaphragm as follows.
Before screwing in the parts, place a little Loctite 542 or 577 on Have a new diaphragm ready.
the thread and screw in the parts to form a good seal. De-energize and depressurize the block.
Mark the mounting position of the actuator with respect to the
housing.
Spare parts sets for the valve Type 5281 Loosen the fastening screws (tool Tx20) between actuator and
housing.
Remove the valve actuator.
Note the installation position and remove the diaphragm.
If required, clean the valve housing.
Coil set Insert the new diaphragm into the housing collar in the correct
SET1 position so that the middle plate of the diaphragm with the larger
diameter is visible.
Place the valve actuator in the correct position.
Attach the actuator and tighten the 4 screws crosswise (see
figure for “torques”).
Reconnect the pressure and power.
Valve actuator
Core, complete
BA-10168_EN_01_2015-06-25.docx/bi Page 3 of 3
Rückschlagventile DEUTSCH
check valves
ENGLISH
Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung sorgfältig durch.
Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt werden.
Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!
Before installing and maintaining your valve, read this manual carefully.
Installation and maintenance is allowed for skilled employees only.
Please pay attention to the safety advices!
BW-RVA
Alle Rechte an Texten und Bildern, auch die der Übersetzung, sind vorbehalten.
Dieses Handbuch darf nicht, auch nicht in Auszügen, in irgendeiner Form (Druck, Fotokopie, Mikrofilm oder
weitere Verfahren) ohne schriftliche Zustimmung reproduziert oder unter Verwendung elektronischer Systeme
verarbeitet, vervielfältigt oder verbreitet werden.
The property rights of all texts and pictures are subject to MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG. It is
not allowed to change or duplicate even parts of it without written permission.
- DE 2 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Sicherheitshinweise
Sicherheitshinweise für die Montage und Inbetriebnahme: Die Inbetriebnahme der Armatur darf erst
erfolgen, wenn die Bestimmungen der MRL 2006/42/EG für die Gesamtmaschine erfüllt sind.
Alle Montage-, Wartungs- und Reparaturarbeiten an den Armaturen dürfen nur von autorisiertem und
qualifiziertem Fachpersonal durchgeführt werden.
Eigenmächtige Veränderungen sowie die Verwendung von nicht Originalersatzteilen schließen eine
Haftung für die daraus resultierenden Schäden aus.
Wenn eine Armatur aus einer Rohrleitung ausgebaut werden muss, kann Medium aus der Leitung
oder aus der Armatur austreten. Bei gesundheitsschädlichen oder gefährlichen Medien muss die
Rohrleitung vollständig entleert sein, bevor die Armatur ausgebaut wird. Vorsicht bei Rückständen,
die nachfließen könnten.
Zum Anschluss des Rückschlagventils an Ihr Rohrsystem benötigen Sie passende Schlüssel!
Alle Arbeiten dürfen nur an einer drucklos und stromlos geschalteten Armatur erfolgen.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass das verwendete Dichtmittel für das Durchfluss-Medium geeignet ist!
- DE 3-
DEUTSCH BW-RVA
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Sicherheitshinweise..........................................................................................................................................3
Inhaltsverzeichnis .............................................................................................................................................4
Zu dieser Anleitung...........................................................................................................................................5
Ziel der Anleitung ............................................................................................................................................5
Aktuelle Dokumentation ..................................................................................................................................5
Gültigkeit der Anleitung...................................................................................................................................5
Abkürzungen und Symbole.............................................................................................................................5
Leistungsbeschreibung....................................................................................................................................6
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ................................................................................................................6
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ...................................................................................................................6
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen.....................................................................................................................6
Gerätebeschreibung .........................................................................................................................................7
Wartung .............................................................................................................................................................7
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ....................................................................................................................................8
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Rückschlagventils mit Gewindeanschluss ..........................................8
- DE 4 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Zu dieser Anleitung
Ziel der Anleitung
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kundenbetreuer bei MIT.
Aktuelle Dokumentation
MIT erklärt die Konformität gemäß Konformitätserklärung. Die Konformitätserklärung kann bei
Bedarf angefordert werden.
Wir bitten Sie, sich regelmäßig über aktualisierte Versionen dieser Anleitung zu informieren.
Diese Anleitung unterliegt nicht der Revisionierung und stellt lediglich den zum Zeitpunkt des
Drucks aktuellen Informationsstand MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG. Aktuelle
Informationen zu Ihrem Produkt können Sie jederzeit unter www.systemarmaturen.de abrufen.
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG behält sich Änderungen an der Armatur sowie
Erweiterungen und Änderungen der vorliegenden Anleitung, die dem technischen Fortschritt
dienen, vor.
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente
Information beachten
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
- DE 5-
DEUTSCH BW-RVA
Leistungsbeschreibung
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung
Rückschlagventile der Baureihe RVA (Artikel 114266) der MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH
& Co. KG sind zum Einsatz im industriellen Bereich geeignet. Die Armaturen ermöglichen das
Absperren neutraler, gasförmiger und flüssiger Medien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien
müssen für das eingesetzte Medium und den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.
MIT-Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie Feuchtigkeit oder
Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst kurz vor Montagebeginn zu
entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei untergebracht
werden. Lange Lagerzeiten können eine Erhöhung des Losbrechmomentes zu Folge haben. Erst
nach Betätigung der Armatur wird das Nenndrehmoment wieder erreicht.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir jedoch nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss nehmen – bitte
informieren Sie uns unverzüglich wenn die Ware bereits mit beschädigter Verpackung bei Ihnen
eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmittelbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und sollte eine
Prüfung der technischen Parameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte Mängel sind
unverzüglich nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als genehmigt.
Das Verpackungsmaterial und die Armatur sind nach den örtlichen gesetzlichen Bestimmungen
und Verordnungen sachgerecht zu entsorgen. Auf die Beachtung der abfallrechtlichen
Bestimmungen bei der Entsorgung der aus der Anlage entnommenen Stoffe wird hingewiesen.
Warenmängel oder Abweichungen der Menge müssen spätestens 7 Tage nach Erhalt der Ware
schriftlich angezeigt werden, andernfalls erlischt der Gewährleistungsanspruch!
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchgespült werden.
Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei der Inbetriebnahme! Diese
Geräte können im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingungen getestet und eingestellt werden.
Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert und getestet werden. Die Endlagen
(offen/geschlossen) müssen überprüft und ggf. nachjustiert werden! Zusätzliche Wegschalter
oder andere elektrische Geräte zur Stellungsrückmeldung ebenfalls auf richtige Justierung
überprüfen!
- DE 6 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Gerätebeschreibung
Wartung
Wir empfehlen ihnen, bei einem defekten einteiligen Rückschlagventil die ganze Armatur
auszutauschen!
- DE 7-
DEUTSCH BW-RVA
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Rückschlagventils mit Gewindeanschluss
Zum Anschluss des Rückschlagventils an Ihr Rohrsystem benötigen Sie passende Schlüssel!
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass das verwendete Dichtmittel für das Durchfluss-Medium geeignet
ist!
Rückschlagventil in die Rohrleitung einschrauben, dabei auf die Durchflussrichtung des Mediums
achten!
Aushärtezeit des Dichtmaterials abwarten, erst dann die Rohrleitung mit Druck beaufschlagen.
- DE 8 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Kontakt:
Email: MIT@Systemarmaturen.de
Internet: www.systemarmaturen.de
- DE 9-
ENGLISH BW-RVA
Assembly, maintenance and repairing of the valves are allowed for authorised and qualified
professionals only.
Modifications of the valve and the use of non-authorized spare parts exclude the liability of resulting
damage.
National directives for the prevention of accidents as well as local safety instructions of the user are
paramount and are not replaced by this document.
It is not allowed to use the valves, if the operating conditions do not match the pressure-temperature-
diagram and the medium resistance.
If you demount a valve in a piping, medium may drop out. Therefore, if the medium is hazardous to
health, the piping must be emptied completely. Be careful with residues that may flow out later.
For connecting the valve to the piping system a suitable wrench is required.
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds means are suitable for the flowing
medium!
Danger of injury! Do not put parts of your body or other things into the valves. This can cause
heavy injuries and should be absolutely avoided!
Residue of the operating medium may cause danger. If necessary wear safety shoes, gloves and
glasses.
- EN 10 -
BW-RVA ENGLISH
Content
Translation of the original installation and maintenance manual............................................................... 10
Safety instructions .......................................................................................................................................... 10
Content ............................................................................................................................................................ 11
This manual ..................................................................................................................................................... 12
Intention of this manual................................................................................................................................. 12
Latest documentation ................................................................................................................................... 12
Validity of the manual ................................................................................................................................... 12
Shortcuts and symbols ................................................................................................................................. 12
Specification of service .................................................................................................................................. 13
Intended usage ............................................................................................................................................. 13
Storage, transport, disposal .......................................................................................................................... 13
Terms of general application ........................................................................................................................ 13
Device description .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................... 14
Activity description ......................................................................................................................................... 15
Installation of a check valve with threaded connection ................................................................................. 15
EN 11-
ENGLISH BW-RVA
This manual
Intention of this manual
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer advisor at MIT!
MIT declares the conformity with a declaration of conformity. Please order it if required.
Please check regularly for updated versions of this document. This manual is not audited and
represents only the current information of MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. at the time
of print. You can get current information of your product at any time on the internet:
www.systemarmaturen.de.
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG declares that it reserves its right to modify both
the manual and the valve if necessary for technical advancement.
Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.
Supply items
needed!
- EN 12 -
BW-RVA ENGLISH
Specification of service
Intended usage
The check valves of the series RVA (article 114266) made by MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik
GmbH & Co. KG are suitable for the producing industries. The armatures allow the distribution of
neutral gaseous and liquid media. The housing and sealing compounds must be suitable for the
assigned medium and temperature range.
Danger of injury! Don´t put parts of your body or articles into the armature. This can cause
heavy injuries and should be absolutely avoided!
MIT-products are protected by packing against external influences such as humidity or dirt. We
recommend removing the packing only briefly before beginning of assembly in order to protect
the devices against impurities.
During storage it is to be made certain that the devices are dry and dirt-free accommodated.
After a long period of storage the breakaway torque may increase. After opening and closing the
valve manually for one time the rated breakaway torque can be reached again
We can only take influence on the transport process with your assistance - please inform us
immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packing! Examination of technical parameters
and a visual product check should take place immediately after delivery. Subsequent complains
can not be accepted.
The packaging material and the valve need to be properly disposed of according to the local legal
requirements and regulations.
Please consider the waste legislation requirements for the disposal of substances withdrawn from
the system.
Goods faults or divergences of the amount must be indicated at the latest 7 days on receipt of
the product in writing, otherwise the guarantee claim expires!
Please ensure that no humidity gets into the piping. Automated valves need a special attention in
time of initial operation! These devices can be tested at MIT only under workshop conditions.
Security positions should be simulated and tested straight. The final positions must be checked
(opened/closed) and be re-adjusted if necessary! Additional switches or other electric devices to
the position feedback must be likewise checked for correct alignment.
EN 13-
ENGLISH BW-RVA
Device description
Maintenance
- EN 14 -
BW-RVA ENGLISH
Activity description
Installation of a check valve with threaded connection
For connecting the valve to the piping system a suitable wrench is required.
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds are suitable for the flowing
medium!
Screw pipe ends into the threaded ends of the check valve, pay attention to the flow direction of
the medium.
Do not give pressure on the piping before the sealing material is hardened.
EN 15-
BW-RVA
Contact:
Email: MIT@Systemarmaturen.de
Internet: www.systemarmaturen.de
- EN 16 -
Mounting and Operating Manual
Non-Return valves
Swing-Check valves
All rights reserved. END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG claims copyright over this documentation.
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded, reproduced nor passed to third parties without the writ-
ten agreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG. This restriction also applies to the corresponding drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right to change parts of the non-return valves / swing check valves
at any time without prior or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change
without notice.
This publication has been written with great care. However, END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.KG cannot be held
responsible, either for any errors occuring in this publication or for their consequences.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance of the properties is given.
Edition: 11/02
2 http://www.end.de 13.11.02
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 4
2 General Advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.2 Inward monitoring 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Guarantee 5
2.5 Symbols and their signification 6
3 Safety Advice 7
3.1 Personal advice 7
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting 7
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing 8
3.2 Device safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
13.11.02 http://www.end.de 3
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
Dear assembler / user,
these operation and installation manuals are intended to give you the knowledge, which is
necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the non-return valves /
swing-check valves rapidly and correctly.
Please read these instructions carefully and pay particular attention to the advice and warning
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the non-return valves
/ swing-check valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the non-return valves / swing-check valves we shall be
pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation
manual.
Yours
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG
4 http://www.end.de 13.11.02
General Advice
2 General Advice
2.1 Validity
This mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard versions of the non-return valves /
swing-check valves and their variants.
Please check directly after delivery the non-return valves /swing-check valves for any transport
damages and deficiencies and with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of
parts.
2.3 Complaints
Claims for replacement or goods which relate to transport damage can only be considered valid if
the delivery company is notified without delay.
In case of returns (because of transport damage / repairs), please make a damage protocol and
send the parts back to the manufacturer, if possible in the original packaging.
2.4 Warranty
For our non-return valves / swing-check valves we give a guarantee period in accordance with
the sales contract.
The end of the normal duration of life of the wearing parts represents no defect.
The warranty and guarantee rules of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG are applicable.
13.11.02 http://www.end.de 5
Symbols and their signification
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices; this also includes
advices for averting health risks. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices, this also includes
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
This spanner identifies the description of actions which you should carry out.
6 http://www.end.de 13.11.02
Safety Advice
3 Safety Advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the non-return valves
/ swing-check valves are mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must take into account par-
ticular safety aspects in each case!
If, for example, a non-return valve / swing-check valve works a slide in an operational chemical
plant, the potential hazards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only
being carried out for test purposes an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room!
We wish to point out expressly that the mounting, adjusting and at accessories the pneumatical
and electrical installation of the butterfly valves must be carried out by trained specialist person-
nel having mechanical, pneumatical and electrical knowledge!
Secure that the machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directive after the mounting and
installing of the ball valves.
Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair.
If appropriate, isolate the devices / machines / plant from the mains.
Check (for example in chemical plants) whether the switching off of devices / machines / plant
will cause potential danger.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the butterfly valve (in a plant which is in operation) inform
the shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in order,
for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good time
by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machines
/ plant.
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up of the devices /
machines / plant.
Observe the respective relevant professional safety and accident prevention regulations when
carrying out the mounting / repair work.
Check the correct functioning of the safety equipment (for example the emergency push off but-
tons/ safety valves, etc)!
As a result of the starting of the non-return valves / swing-check valves the flow of gases, steam,
liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that, as a result of the starting or the
test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the environment!
13.11.02 http://www.end.de 7
Safety Advice
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up or shutting down
of the device / machine / plant.!
By ending the adjustment check the correct function and should the occasion arise the position
of the non-return valve / swing-check valve.
Check, whether the armature will be closed totally, if the control signals the appropriate limit
stop!
Through suitable measures, prevent links being trapped by moving actuating elements!
Check the right function of all safety devices (for example emergency push off buttons / safety
valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions discribed in
this documentation!
Adjusting switches on ball valves with options (e.g. actuators, solenoid valves, limit switches)
there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrician or a person having adequate
training, who is aware of the potential hazard!
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the non-return vales / swing check valves will be
under pressure.
If necessary, inform the shift foreman/ safety engineer or the manager about the maintenance
or repair without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chemicals or a
discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
You have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the butterfly valve is mounted.
Switch off pilot pressure and the power supply and relieve the pressure in the pipes.
In case of defect in the non-return vales / swing check valves make contact to the supplier. The
telephone number will be found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
8 http://www.end.de 13.11.02
Safety Advice
If you ascertain a damage of the non-return vales / swing check valves, isolate the device from
the mains. Please observe the safety advices.
Do not mount, start or adjust the non-return vales / swing check valves if itself, the pipes or a
mounted actuator will be damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the non-return vales / swing check
valves and the tightness of the pipe connections.
Also check the function of the accessories e.g. actuators, limit switches, etc.
In order to maintain this condition, as installer / user you must carry out your task in accordance
with the description in these instructions, technically correctly and with the greatest possible
precision .
We assume, as a trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
Satisfy yourself that the non-return vales /swing check valves will only be used within their
admissible limiting value (see the technical data) .
The non-return vales / swing check valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their
construction!
The non-return vales / swing check valves must be used within the values specified in the techni-
cal data!
The operating of the non-return vales / swing check valves outside the nominal temperature
range could destroy the seals and the bearings.
The operating of the non-return vales / swing check valves outside the nominal pressure range
could destroy the inner parts and the body.
Do not mount, start or adjust the non-return vales / swing check valves if itself, the pipes or a
mounted actuator will be damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the non-return vales / swing check
valves and the tightness of the pipe connections.
Also check the function of the accessories e.g. actuators, limit switches, etc.
13.11.02 http://www.end.de 9
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
In some cases the armatures/valves will be provided with a name- plate, which permitts a definite identification
of the armatures/valves and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not be
displaced or changed.
END-Armaturen
END-ArmaturenGmbH GmbH & Co. KG KG
& Co.
D-32547
D-32547BadBadOeynhausen
Oeynhausen
+49
+49(0)5731
(0)5731- 7900-0 • www.end.de
- 7900-0 www.end.de
Art.Nr.:
Art.Nr.: ZA310028-ED620632
ZA310028-ED620632
Serial: 313857
Serie: ARMAU813857
Pressure range (PS): 16 bar
Betriebsdruck (PS): 16 bar
Pilot pressure:
Steuerdruck:
6-8
6...8 bar G/DN: 2”
bar
Temperature
Volt: rangeHz:(TS): -30°C ... +180°C
Fluidgruppe 1
Size (DN):
Temperatur (TS): -30...+180°C 50 / G2"
Testing pressure
Prüfdruck (PT): (PT):
60 bar 60 bar
Herstellungsdatum:
Fluidgroup: 25.11.2009 1 0062
Date of manufacturing: 11.2002
0062
10 http://www.end.de 13.11.02
Non-Return valves, Swing-Check valves
5.1 General
Before you mount /disassemble, adjust or commission a non-return valve or a swing-check valve
you must have read the
Safety advice
If you have not read the safety advices until now please read these important advices now and
turn back to this point.
Non-return valves and swing-check valves are used to prevent the back-flow of media.
It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the material of the valves and the material
of the sealings will be resistant. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the
nominal temperature range should causes damages on the valves especially on the seals.
5.3 Operation
The mechanical mounting is identical in all variants. It differs only by the type of connection.
Observe the flow direction which is specified on the valve body. The installation of a swing-check
valves will have take place that the flap of the swing-check valve will close by the force of gravity
automatically.
Please observe that that the installation of the swing-check valve / non-return valve will have influ-
ence on the opening pressure.
Remove all transport safety devices (e.g. plugs or caps). Observe that there won`t be any parts of
the package or other pollution in the armature.
Before mounting swing-check valve / non-return valve clean up the pipes. Pollution will reduce the
safety and the duration of life of the armature.
o.k. o.k.
Fig. 5.1 - non-return valve, swing-check valve, installation (Fig.: Art. TR100025).
13.11.02 http://www.end.de 11
Non-Return valves, Swing-Check valves
Before lay on sealing compounds, check the hardly screwing by the pipes into the valve body.
Lay on the correct sealing compounds on the pipes end. By using PTFE-ribbon or hemp seals
observe the screw direction. Don`t use sealing compounds which are not prescribed for your
employment.
Strike up the pipes with pressure after that time the manufacturer of the sealing compounds pre-
tends to harden it.
sealing compound
harden!
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.2 - non-return valves, swing-check valves, mounting with threaded connection (Fig.: Art. BH120025)
Before welding the valve between the pipes you have to disassemble the bonnet of the non-return
valve first, to prevent the damage of the seals.
12 http://www.end.de 13.11.02
Non-Return valves, Swing-check valve
Clamp the valve between a vice carefully. By using guard plates you can prevent the damage of
the ends of the valve body.
Screw the bonnet out of the body. By doing this be very careful, because there will be a resilience
on the bonnet. Take the spring and the inner part out of the bonnet and put the parts aside.
resilience
Fig. 5.3 - non-return valves, swing check valve, disassembly of the bonnet and the inner parts (Fig.: Art. EB310064)
By welding the valve body with the pipes observe appropriate demands and guide lines.
The safety demands be welding are depending on the place and the position of the point of weld.
Welding the parts in a serviceable device/machine/plant the potential of danger is as higher as
welding the parts in a welding room.
If appropriate inform the shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager and the fire brigade
of your factory.
By welding observe your own national guide lines about safety and the prevention of accidents.
13.11.02 http://www.end.de 13
Non-Return valves, Swing-Check valves
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.4 - non-return valves, swing-check valves, welding of the body (Fig.: body of Art. EB310064)
Before mounting the bonnet and the inner parts let the body cool down.
Insert the inner parts and the spring into the body. Take care about the correct placement of the
inner parts and the spring.
Screw the bonnet into the body. Check the correct position of the sealing at the bonnet and take
care that there will be no pollution on the sealing or on the seat.
cool down
o.k.
Fig. 5.5 - non-return valve, swing-check valve, mounting of the bonnet and the inner parts (Fig.: Art. EB310064)
14 http://www.end.de 13.11.02
Non-Return valves, Swing-Check valves
In the following description we assume that you have mounted the flanges at the end of the pipes
and the valve (welded flanges) and they are cooled down..
Push the valve between the flanges by using the appropriate seals. This process must happen
easily to avoid the damage of the seals.
Align the borings of the flanges and put some fit screws through the holes. Screw the fit nuts onto
the screws and tighten them up crosswise.
Fasten all screws crosswise and check the function of the valve. Observe the maximum torque of
the screws.
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.6 - non-return valves, swing-check valve, mounting with flanged connection (Fig.: Art. KU3000xx)
5.5 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down a non-return valve / swing-check valve you have to read the
Safety advice
If you have not read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this page.
In case of a defect of the valve make a contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back or these operation and installation manual.
If you determinate that there is a damage to the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant!
However before doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
13.11.02 http://www.end.de 15
Notice
16 http://www.end.de 13.11.02
Notice
13.11.02 http://www.end.de 17
6 Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(1)
Declaration in conformity
(2)
as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(3) This declaration apply to the article groups with the nominal sizes:
Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size
Butterfly valves NG DN32 ... DN100 VO DN32 ... DN200 Non-return valves
HA DN50 ... DN300 Ball valves VS DN32 ... DN200 AR 1¼" ... 2"
TA DN40 ... DN300 AG 1¼" ... 2" VT DN32 ... DN100 CK3003 DN65 ... DN200
WA DN50 ... DN300 BK DN32 ... DN100 VU 4" CK5003 DN32 ... DN200
WM DN50 ... DN300 IK 1¼" ... 2" ZA 1¼" ... 4" CK5100 DN65 ... DN250
Gate valves IL 1¼" ... 4" ZA DN32 ... DN100 CK5200 DN65 ... DN250
AB 1¼" ... 2" IW 1¼" ... 2" ZB 1¼" ... 2" CW5400 DN65 ... DN250
AE 1¼" ... 3" KA 1¼" ... 3" ZB DN32 ... DN50 EB 1¼" ... 3"
AE DN32 ... DN80 PD 1¼" ... 2" ZD 1¼" ... 4" EB DN32 ... DN80
CA5014 DN100 ... DN300 TB 1¼" ... 4“ ZD DN32 ... DN100 RG1300 DN32 ... DN100
CA5015 DN65 ... DN300 TF DN32 ... DN200 ZE 1¼" ... 4" RG33xx DN32 ... DN200
CA5214 DN40 ... DN200 TH 1¼" ZE DN32 ... DN100 RK DN32 ... DN400
CD5010 DN32 ... DN200 VD 1¼" ... 4" ZF 1¼" ... 4" TD 4"
CV3010 DN32 ... DN150 VD DN32 ... DN100 ZG 1¼" ... 2" Strainer
CV5010 DN32 ... DN200 VH 1¼" ... 2" ZH 1¼" ... 2" AS 1¼” ... 3”
CV5020 DN32 ... DN200 VH3100 1¼" ... 2" ZK DN32 ... DN100 AS DN32 ... DN200
Pressure reducer VK DN32 ... DN200 ZL 1¼" ... 3" EA 1¼" ... 3"
SD Ǫ" ... 2" VK/PN40 DN32 ... DN200 ZM 1¼" ... 2" EA DN32 ... DN80
Pressure relief valves VL 1¼" ...2", 3" ZP DN32 ... DN200
NG 1¼" ... 1½" VN 1¼" ... 2" ZU 1¼" ... 3"
(5) Herewith we declare that the above-mentioned articles in the conditions of our delivery are in conformity with the regula-
tions of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EG.
Declaration without signature or company stamp shall not be valid. The declaration may be circulated only without alternation.
Extracts or alternations are subject to approval by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG.
(5) Herewith we declare that the above-mentioned articles in the conditions of our delivery are in conformity with the regula-
tions of Article 3 Part 3 of the directive 97/23/EG. These products bear no CE mark, but are in line to the good engineering
practice designed and manufactured.
Declaration without signature or company stamp shall not be valid. The declaration may be circulated only without alternation.
Extracts or alternations are subject to approval by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG
Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 342 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 321
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-999 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
Westfalia Separator
Operating and installation instructions
Straight through control valves - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446
Contents
1.0 General information on operating 7.0 Care and maintenance................................... 6
instructions ..................................................... 2 7.1 Replacement of stem sealings ............................... 6
2.0 Notes on possible dangers............................ 2 7.1.1 PTFE V-ring unit design ..................................... 6
2.1 Significance of symbols ..........................................2 7.1.2 Stuffing box packing design ............................... 7
7.1.3 Bellows seal design ........................................... 8
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information .................2
7.2 Tightening torques.................................................. 8
3.0 Storage and transport ................................... 2 7.2.1 Tightening torques for hexagon nuts ............... 8
4.0 Description...................................................... 3 8.0 Troubleshooting ............................................. 8
4.1 Scope of applications ..............................................3
9.0 Troubleshooting table .................................. 9
4.2 Operating principles ................................................3
10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part ...... 10
4.3 Technical data .........................................................3
4.4 Marking ...................................................................3
5.0 Installation....................................................... 4
5.1 General notes on installation...................................4
5.2 Requirements at the place of installation ................5
5.3 Installation instructions concerning actuators .........5
6.0 Putting the valve into operation.................... 6
4.0 Description
4.1 Scope of applications
Valves are used for „controlling the flow of liquids, gases and vapours in chemical and other
processing plants and for plant engineering“.
ATTENTION !
- Refer to the data sheet for applications, limits on use and possibilities.
- Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials.
- The valves are designed for standard operating conditions. If conditions exceed
these requirements, e.g. aggressive or abrasive media, the operator should
state the higher requirements when ordering.
- Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject
to TRD 110.
The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.
The special markings on the valve must be taken into account.
Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions.
Plug Customer-specific
design information
Serial-No. Stem sealing
Material of Year of manufacture clear speech
internal parts (1. and 2. position)
Fig. 1
According to the Pressure Equipment Directive table 6, annex II, valves without safety
function are only allowed to bear the CE-marking DN32 onwards.
5.0 Installation
5.1 General notes on installation
The following items should be taken into account besides the general principles governing
installation work:
ATTENTION !
- Remove flange covers if present.
- The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles.
- Note installation position with reference to flow, see mark on valve.
- Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation.
- Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are
avoided.
- Protect valves from dirt during construction work.
- Connection flanges must mate exactly.
- Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, hoods must not be used to
take external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as
connecting points for lifting gear.
- Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used.
Refer to data sheet for weights.
- Keep the thread and shaft of the stem free from paint.
- Centre gaskets between the flanges.
- Strainers or filters should be installed before the valves.
8.0 Troubleshooting
In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and
adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
- It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.
-
Westfalia Separator
Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Customer Support Center
Am Neuländer Gewerbepark 6
21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Contents
1.0 General information on operating instructions... 2 5.4 Electrical connection.......................................... 10
2.0 Notes on possible dangers ................................... 2 5.4.1 Connection ......................................................11
2.1 Significance of symbols ....................................... 2 5.5 Settings ............................................................. 12
5.5.1 Torque and travel switches.............................. 12
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information .............. 3
6.0 Putting the actuator into operation ................... 12
3.0 Storage and transport............................................ 3
7.0 Care and maintenance ........................................ 13
4.0 Description ............................................................. 4
4.1 Field of application ............................................... 4 8.0 Troubleshooting................................................... 13
4.2 Method of functioning........................................... 4 9.0 Troubleshooting table ........................................ 14
4.3 Technical data ...................................................... 5 10.0 Dismantlement of thrust actuator ................... 15
4.4 Dimensions .......................................................... 5
5.0 Installation ............................................................. 6
5.1 General installation data ...................................... 6
5.2 Manual operation ................................................. 8
5.3 Installation instructions for mounting to valves..... 9
5.3.1 Mounting for valve-lift up to 30 mm
(yoke version) ..................................................... 9
ATTENTION !
... Warning of dangerous voltage.
Exposed to injury!
Don’t touch the turning handwheel when the motor is running.
Exposed to injury!
Don’t put your hand into the up or downwards moving
appliance.
4.4 Dimensions
ARI-PREMIO 1,6 kN
Stroke distance max. 30 mm
Fig. 1
ATTENTION !
- A voltage is induced in the thrust actuator motor. This induction voltage may be
higher than the operating voltage.
- For this reason relays and electronic load relays for thrust actuator control
require a protective circuit. The contacts of unprotected relays may stick after a
while.
- This may result in reversed directions of rotation or defective switch-off
Where relay points and electronic load relays are particularly sensitive a coil should be
connected in series additionally to each relay point.
Recommended coil:
Toroidal coil 2mH / 2A
- Contactors of 16A and upwards do not need a safety circuit.
- Check thrust actuator for damage prior to fitting.
Damaged parts must be replaced by original spares.
- Existing operating instructions for valve.
- Complete valve with crossarm.
- Valve cone approximately in mid lift position - on no account supported inside a seat!
- Electrical installation in accordance with current regional regulations.
- Conductor cross-section selected to correspond to the given drive power and existing line
length.
Correct Incorrect
Fig. 2
With the motor in the stationary state, the thrust actuator can be run in the retracted and
extended state with the manual operating device firmly meshed with the gear.
Proceed as follows:
- Turn manual operation device (pos. 50.130) by wrench or similar tool ...
... in clockwise direction --> extending spindle.
... in counter-clockwise direction --> retracting spindle.
Fig. 3
turn
Fig. 4
To mount the thrust actuator to a valve having a nominal lift of up to 30mm, proceed
as follows:
- Screw coupling (pos. 50.27) out of torsion safety feature (pos. 50.32) of thrust
actuator (not illustrated).
- Position valve cone approximately in mid lift position.
Fig. A: - Turn flat hexagon nut if not present on valve spindle.
Fig. A-B: - Slip coupling (pos. 50.27) over valve spindle.
- Screw threaded bush (pos. 50.87) matching the valve onto the valve spindle in
accordance with setting dimension (Y) and lock with hexagon nut.
ATTENTION !
Setting dimension (Y) and fitting-projection (X) are measured with
inserted valve spindle. This means for
- 2-way valves at closed valve,
- 3-way valves with mixing plug at closed way B,
- 3-way valves with diverting plug at closed way A
After measuring put the valve plug back in the mid lift position!
- Setting dimension (Y) for fitting-projection (X) 60 and 83mm = 102mm.
Fig. C: - Place thrust actuator (pos. 50) on valve.
- Mount thrust actuator (pos. 50) on fitting with two T-head bolts (pos. 50.19), two
washers (pos. 50.20), two spring washers (pos. 50.21), two hexagon nuts
(pos. 50.22).
Fig. D/E: - Turn the hexagon nut (pos. 50.130) by a screw wrench and use it to move out
the thrust actuator until the driving spindle (pos. 50.30) comes to rest on the
threaded bush (pos. 50.87).
Fig. F: - Screw the coupling (pos. 50.27) firmly into the torsion safety feature
(pos. 50.32) and secure in place using grub screw M6 (pos. 50.35).
- Run valve to lowest position.
- Clip lift dial (pos. 50.23) onto yoke in such a way that top edge of torsion safety
feature is in alignment with tip of arrow mark on lift dial.
- Run valve to both final positions and check to ensure that these are safely
reached
- Carry out electrical connection (see point 5.4).
5.4 Electrical connection
Fig. 5
ATTENTION !
- Work on electrical systems or equipment must only be carried out by qualified
electricians or by trained individuals under the guidance and supervision of a
qualified electrician in compliance with regional electrical requirement and
regulations.
- When connecting the thrust actuator the supply line must be disconnected from
the mains (not live) during connection work. It must be impossible to switch the
power on unintentionally while the mains are disconnected in this way. Failure
to comply may result in death, serious injury or substantial damage to property.
To connect the thrust actuator up to the electrical power supply, proceed as follows:
- Run the thrust actuator a few mm out of the lower final position applying the manual
operating device.
- Loosen hexagon screw in hood, carefully remove hood in upward direction.
- Remove blind plug fom the cable connection.
- Insert the connection line through this cable inlet until sufficient conductor length is
available up to the corresponding terminals; then tighten the cable connection until the
connecting cable is clamped in place inside it.
- Strip connecting cable approx. 1-1.5 cm above cable inlet.
- Strip the individual conductors approx. 5mm away from the end and fit with conductor end
sleeves.
- Connect protective conductor of connecting cable up to protective conductor terminal of
thrust actuator.
- Connect neutral N/MP conductor of connecting cable up to terminal 1/N of thrust-actuator
terminal strip.
- Connect pulse line for move-out connecting rod up to terminal 11 of thrust-actuator
terminal strip.
- Connect pulse line for move-in connecting rod up to terminal 14 of thrust-actuator terminal
strip.
- Place hood on carefully from above and mount firmly onto thrust actuator with hexagon
screw and rubber gasket.
- Connect supply line to mains and run thrust actuator to each of the final positions so as to
check whether the final-position travel switches effect switching off, also checking to see
whether the direction of movement on the thrust actuator corresponds to the desired
direction.
- If the directions of movement are contrary to those desired, the pulse lines governing the
move-in and move-out connecting rod will need to be exchanged.
ATTENTION !
- The settings of the load-dependent travel switches must on no account
whatsoever be changed!
Westfalia Separator
Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Customer Support Center
Am Neuländer Gewerbepark 6
21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Application
For fluid and gaseous media (non-corrosive to brass and bronze),
which are not highly viscous and do not tend to polymerize
Pressure Limitations
Steady pressure: 75% of full scale value
Cyclic pressure: 65% of full scale value
Temporary: full scale value
How to Order:
For ordering gauges from stock1) simply state the ordering number
Temperature Limitations as follows:
Ambient temperature: -20 / +60 °C (-4 / +140 °F) Bottom connection Center back
Pressure ranges
Medium temperature: max. +60 °C (+140 °F) connection
bar Ordering number (stock):
Further information about advantages, applications, specifications, temperature
limitations and pressure ranges of Bourdon tube pressure gauges, accuracy classes -1-0 L-631002 L-631102
1.0 and 1.6 according to EN, can be found in our model overview 1000
-1/+3 L-631005
0-4 L-631013 L-631113
Standard Configuration 0-6 L-631014 L-631114
Process Connection 0-10 L-631015 L-631115
G ¼ B (¼" BSP) bottom connection brass
0-16 L-631016 L-631116
Bourdon Tube 0-25 L-631017 L-631117
• up to 40 bar = bronze, C-form, soft soldered
0-40 L-631018 L-631118
• 60 bar and up = bronze, helical, silver brazed
0-60 L-631019 L-631119
Movement 0-100 L-631020 L-631120
Brass / German silver
0-160 L-631021 L-631121
Dial 0-250 L-631022 L-631122
Aluminum alloy, black figures, white background 0-400 L-631023 L-631123
1)
Examples for Ordering Information:
Pressure ranges -1/0 and 0/4 to 0/600 bar are available from stock (without
obligation). For all the other pressure ranges a minimum order quantity of 10 •50 x RgG 63–1, 0-2.5 bar 1)
pieces and the actual delivery time has to be considered. •50 x RgG 63–1 rmFr, 0-160 bar, ¼" NPT 1)
The information in this leaflet is given in good faith, but we reserve the right to make changes without notice.
1112 -03/06 P. 2 of 2 • ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, Tel. +49(0)2803/9130–0, mail@armaturenbau.com • MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, Tel. +49(0)3774/58–0, mail@manotherm.com
Operating Instruction Pressure Gauges
Selection Criteria, Set-up Options, Installation and Operating Instructions
Contents
Page Page
1. Important Note, Scope 1 7. Operation 7
2. Measuring Units, Construction of 8. Maintenance and Repair 8
Pressure Gauges and Chemical Seals 1 9. Electrical Accessories 8
3. Selection Criteria 3 10. Storage 8
4. Accessories 5 11. Installation in potentially explosive areas 8
5. Set-up Options 6 11.1 General Information 8
6. Installation 6 11.2 Marking for explosive area 8
Sales and Export South, West, North Subsidiary Company, Sales and Export East
ARMATURENBAU GmbH MANOTHERMBeierfeldGmbH B1
Manometerstraße 5 • D - 46487 Wesel-Ginderich Am Gewerbepark 9 • D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld
Tel.: +49 (0) 28 03/ 91 30–0 • Fax: +49 (0) 28 03/ 10 35 Tel.: +49 (0) 37 74/ 58–0 • Fax: +49 (0) 37 74/ 58–545 02/14
armaturenbau.com • mail@armaturenbau.com manotherm.com • mail@manotherm.com
Operating Instruction Pressure Gauges
Selection Criteria, Set-up Options, Installation and Operating Instructions
Tip of the
Dial bourdon tube Toothed
Zero dead stop quadrant
Pointer
Link
Upper
Link screw measuring Connecting
flange rod
Pointer Toothed quadrant
Overrange
protector Upper movement plate
Stem
Process connection
(socket)
(here) radial bottom
Diaphragm,
connection Lower horizontal
measuring
Process connection,
flange
radial bottom con-
nection
Pressure Gauge with Diaphragm Capsule Pressure Gauge with Vertical Diaphragm
Capsule Connecting rod
Diaphragm,
Pointer vertical Dial
Process Pointer
connection
Movement (here) bottom
connection Movement
Process Dial
connection
(here) centre
back connection
Pressure Gauge in line with Safety Requirements according to EN 837-1, S3 (formerly DIN 16 006 Part 1 and Part 2)
B1 - 02/14 EN - p. 2 of 8 ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, tel.: +49 (0) 2803/9130-0, e-mail: mail@armaturenbau.com MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, tel: +49 (0) 3774/58-0, e-mail: mail@manotherm.com, 01/14 DE
Operating Instruction Pressure Gauges
Selection Criteria, Set-up Options, Installation and Operating Instructions
2.3 Types of Chemical Seals
3. Selection Criteria Bourdon tube pressure gauges are applied for pressure
The user has to ensure that the proper pressure gauge ranges from 0.6 bar to 4,000 bar, generally in the accu-
is selected regarding indication range and type (e.g. racy classes 0.6 to 2.5.
resistance of the materials against medium, atmosphere The influence of temperature changes on the indication
and temperature, overrange protection etc.). The regu- mainly depends on the temperature coefficient (TEC=
lations applying to the particular application as well as change in stiffness caused by change in temperature)
EN 837-2 have to be regarded. of the modulus of elasticity of the bourdon tube.
Depending on the material, the accuracy error caused
3.1 Principles of Measurement by differing temperatures lies between 0.3 % and
The pressure gauges described in this operating instruc- 0.4 % per 10 K.
tion contain measuring elements that deform elastically Diaphragm Pressure Gauges
when subjected to pressure.This motion is transferred to The diaphragms are corrugated and circular shaped.
a movement. Due to their robustness and easy handling, The pressure acts on one side of the diaphragm. The
these instruments (pressure gauges) are widely used in deflection of the diaphragm is a measure for the pres-
pressure measurement. sure. Diaphragms have a relatively high restoring force.
The measuring elements are generally made of copper Therefore, the influence of additional accessories is lower
alloys or alloyed steel. compared to bourdon tube gauges. Due to the annular
Pressure Gauges with Bourdon Tube fixing arrangement of the diaphragm it is less sensitive
Bourdon tubes are circular bent tubes with an oval cros- to vibrations. Diaphragms can be protected against high
section. The pressure that is to be measured acts on the overload, by supporting the measuring unit. They can be
interior of the tube so that the tube's oval cross section protected against corrosive media by applying coatings or
approaches a circular form. The hoop stress produced foils. Diaphragm gauges can be applied to an advantage
by this deformation causes the arced Bourdon tube with highly viscous and crystallising media, as extended
to open. The end of the bourdon tube that is not fixed connection bores, open connection flanges or purge
performs a motion, which is a measure for the pressure. holes allow for cleaning options.
For pressure ranges up to 40 bar, circular bent bourdon
tubes with a torsion angle of 270° are generally used. There are gauges with horizontal diaphragm and
For higher pressure ranges, helical bourdon tubes with with vertical diaphragm, i.e. where the diaphragm
several torsions are applied. is placed in parallel to the dial. For pressure ranges
Bourdon tubes have a relatively low restoring force. < 0.6 bar, diaphragms with a diameter of 160 mm are
generally used, whereas for higher pressure ranges
Therefore, when using additional accessories such diaphragms with a diameter of 100 mm are used. Due
as indicating pointers, limit switch contact assemblies to the annular fixing arrangement of the diaphragm, the
or potentiometric transducers, their influence on the deviation in indication caused by temperature changes is
indication has to be taken into account. significantly greater compared to bourdon tube gauges.
Diaphragm pressure gauges are applied for pressure
Pressure gauges with a bourdon tube can only be pro- ranges from 10 mbar to 25 bar in the accuracy classes
tected against overload to a limited extent, by supporting of 1.6 and 2.5, exceptionally also in 4.0.
the elastic element at a specific pressure limit.
B1 - 02/14 EN - p. 3 of 8 ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, tel.: +49 (0) 2803/9130-0, e-mail: mail@armaturenbau.com MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, tel: +49 (0) 3774/58-0, e-mail: mail@manotherm.com, 01/14 DE
Operating Instructions Pressure Gauges
Selection Criteria, Set-up Options, Installation and Operating Instructions
Capsule Pressure Gauges
A diaphragm capsule consists of two corrugated, cir- In both cases, the susceptibility to contamination is
cular shaped diaphragms or a diaphragm and a base disadvantageous. Attenuators at the movement only
plate that are assembled pressure tight at the edge. decelerate the pointer fluctuation. Fluid filled cases
The pressure is introduced at the centre of one of the dampen the fluctuation of the measuring element and
diaphragms and acts on the inside of the capsule. The reduce the wear of the moving parts.
hereby produced lifting movement is a measur for the
pressure. Temperature
Capsule pressure gauges are not suited for liquid media. If the temperature of the medium at the measuring point
They can be applied for pressure ranges from 2.5 mbar deviates from the operating temperature specified for the
to 600 mbar in accuracy classes from 0.6 to 1.6. pressure gauge (see section 7., as well as EN 837-1,
The deviation in indication caused by changes in tem- -2, -3), a measuring line with sufficient length, a siphon
perature can lie between 0.3 % and 0.4 % per 10 K, or a chemical seal with capillary line must be connected
depending on the material. upstream to the pressure gauge.
The influence on the indication owing to deviating instru-
3.2 Pressure Ranges ment temperatures from +20 °C must be considered.
The operating pressure should lie in the middle third of
the pressure range of the gauge. The maximum pressure Highly Viscous, Crystallising and Solid-Containing
load should not exceed 75 % of the full scale value at Media
steady load or 65 % of the full scale value at dynamic For measurements of highly viscous, crystallising or
load, cf. EN 837-2. solid-containing media, the use of diaphragm or bourdon
tube pressure gauges with attached chemical seal (see
3.3 Accuracy Limits section 4.4) is recommended.
The error limits for pressure gauges are defined in
EN 837-1 (bourdon tube gauges) and EN 837-3 (capsule Corrosive Media
and diaphragm gauges – formerly DIN 16 005). If corrosive media can be kept away from the measuring
Pressure gauges of the classes 0.1 to 0.6 and higher element by separating agents, then standard pressure
are preferably used in laboratories and workshops for gauges may be used. Otherwise, the selection of suitable
accurate measurements. material is mandatory, whereby the user must provide
Pressure gauges of the classes 1.0 and 1.6 are mainly the manufacturer with every information on the materials
used for measurements on machines and production that are compatible with the medium under the specific
facilities. measuring conditions, cf. EN 837-2, 4.3.
Pressure gauges of the classes 2.5 and 4.0 are used for Due to the restricted choice of materials for the elastic
monitoring tasks without special accuracy requirements. elements, diaphragm pressure gauges with a protective
lining possibly have to be used, or chemical seals made
3.4 Conditions of Usage of media resistant materials need to be connected
When selecting pressure gauges the selection criteria upstream to a bourdon tube pressure gauge.
and installation recommendations in accordance with
EN 837-2 (formerly DIN 16 005 Part 1 and Part 2) as well Safety
as the instructions provided here, especially in sections A higher risk exists, for example, with gases and fluids
3.4.1, 3.4.2 and 5. must be considered. under high pressure. In case of leakage or bursting of
The use of pressure gauges which do not meet the pressure-retaining components, employees standing
actual operating conditions, can cause great conse- in front of the window of the instrument, should not be
quential damages. endangered by medium emerging to the front. Safety
pressure gauges with a blow-out device at the rear, for
3.4.1 Pressure Media Properties example a blow-out back, provide for protection (see fig.
Pressure History on page 2, at the bottom).
Rapid pressure changes or pressure strokes should not With hazardous media, for example
act abruptly on the measuring element. – oxygen
Pressure strokes must not exceed the pressure limits – acetylene
specified for the pressure gauges. If necessary, overload – combustible substances
protection (see section 4) must be connected upstream. – toxic substances
Pressure changes of >10% of the full scale value per as well as refrigerating units, compressors etc., the
second impair the readings of the measured values. applicable regulations must be considered.
Moreover, this will severely reduce the service life of
the pressure gauges. In such cases, attenuators must In accordance with EN 837-1, 9.7 fluid filled pressure
be provided. gauges must be equipped with blow-out devices (version
With snubbers (restrictor screw or adjustable snubber) S1, or S2 resp. S3 according to EN 837-1).
the inlet cross section can be significantly reduced,
thus delaying the change in pressure in the measuring
element. The installation of an integrated restrictor screw
(reduction of the cross section of the measuring element)
is also possible.
B1 - 02/14 EN - p. 4 of 8 ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, tel.: +49 (0) 2803/9130-0, e-mail: mail@armaturenbau.com MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, tel: +49 (0) 3774/58-0, e-mail: mail@manotherm.com, 01/14 DE
Operating Instructions Pressure Gauges
Selection Criteria, Set-up Options, Installation and Operating Instructions
B1 - 02/14 EN - p. 5 of 8 ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, tel.: +49 (0) 2803/9130-0, e-mail: mail@armaturenbau.com MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, tel: +49 (0) 3774/58-0, e-mail: mail@manotherm.com, 01/14 DE
Operating Instructions Pressure Gauges
Selection Criteria, Set-up Options, Installation and Operating Instructions
Table 1 State of medium fluid gaseous
fluid partly fully gaseous partly fully
State of the filling in the measuring degassing degassing condensed condensed
line (humid)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11
B1 - 02/14 EN - p. 6 of 8 ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, tel.: +49 (0) 2803/9130-0, e-mail: mail@armaturenbau.com MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, tel: +49 (0) 3774/58-0, e-mail: mail@manotherm.com, 01/14 DE
Operating Instructions Pressure Gauges
Selection Criteria, Set-up Options, Installation and Operating Instructions
For instruments with thread connection, an installation 7. Operation
with clamping sleeve or union nut is recommended, in Shut-off devices should be opened slowly in order to
order to allow for proper readability. avoid sudden pressure peaks when putting into ope-
Instruments with flange connections are fitted to the ration.
counter flange and secured with suitable screws. Ensure
that the screws are firmly tightened. Application Range
The connections must be tight. Therefore, sealings The application range for steady loads is indicated on
made of suitable medium-resistant material should be the dial of many pressure gauges by a pressure limit
used for the connection. indication mark (see EN 837-1, EN 837-3).
For the sealing of pressure measurement connections At steady load bourdon tube pressure gauges of nomi-
with cylindrical thread spigots, flat sealing rings accor- nal case sizes 100, 160 or 250 are loadable to the full
ding to EN 837-1 or profile packings, resp. lense-type scale value. At dynamic load only the 0.9-fold as peak
sealing rings for corresponding high pressure connec- load of that pressure is permissible, for pressure ranges
tions have to be applied at the sealing surface. Tapered of 0/2500 bar and 0/4000 bar only 2/3 max. of the full
threads (e.g. NPT-threads) are sealed additionally with scale pressure value. Bourdon tube pressure gauges
sealants such as for example PTFE-tape (cf. EN 837-2). are overrange protected up to 1.3 of the full scale value
(instruments with the ranges 0/2500 bar and 0/4000 bar
can only be loaded to their full scale value!).
cylindrical thread tapered thread At steady load bourdon tube pressure gauges of nominal
case sizes 40, 50, 60, 63, 80 and 72x72 are loadable up
to 3/4 of the full scale value, at dynamic load up to 2/3
wrench flats maximum of the full scale value and only temporarily to
the full scale value.
sealing in the
sealing surface thread Diaphragm pressure gauges with vertical diaphragm are
loadable to the full scale value at steady load, at dynamic
load to the 0.9-fold of the full scale value.
For pressure gauges with pressure ranges of < 6 bar and Diaphragm pressure gauges with horizontal diaphragm
with a pressure relief vent Ø of 13 mm at the top of the are overrange protected to the 5-fold of the full scale
case, it is recommended to cut off the fitting at the filling value (custom-made instruments also higher), but never
plug in order to allow for internal pressure compensation higher than 40 bar.
through venting of the gauge.
Capsule pressure gauges are loadable to the full scale
If the pressure gauge is positioned below the pressure value at steady load, at dynamic load maximum to the
relief vent, the measuring line should be rinsed thorough- 0.9-fold of the full scale value. Just as bourdon tube
ly before putting into operation. pressure gauges they are 1.3-fold overrange protected
(custom-made instruments also higher).
During pressure tests on pipes or vessels, the pressure
gauge must not be exposed to higher loads than indi- Zero Point Check
cated by the pressure limit indication mark on the In order to check the zero point of the pressure gauge
dial; resp. the pressure limit at steady load, specified during operation, the required shut-off device has to be
for the pressure gauge, should not be exceeded (see closed (see section 4.) and pressure is relieved. The
section 7.). pointer must rest within the zero range indicated by I.
If the pointer comes to rest outside this range, a perma-
With diaphragm gauges the clamping bolts for the upper nent deformation of the measruing unit can be assumed,
and lower flange must not be unloosened. which has to be checked thoroughly in order to avoid
The connections between pressure gauge and chemical accidents caused by measuring errors. Therefore, the
seal and possibly between chemical seal and capillary pressure gauge should be replaced and, if necessary,
line are not to be released. returned to the manufacturer for checking and repair.
Before removing the pressure gauge, the measuring Pressure Range Check
unit must be depressurised. Possibly the pressure must If the pressure range indication has to checked during
be relieved on the measuring line. Residues of the operation, the pressure gauge is separated from the
medium in demounted pressure gauges can endanger process via the required shut-off device with test port
personnel, facilities and the environment. Therefore, (see section 4.), and a test pressure is applied to the
precautionary measures must be taken. gauge. The error limits according to EN 837-1 resp.
EN 837-3 apply.
(Electrical accessories: see section 9).
Temperature-Resistance
The permissible operating temperatures of the pressure
gauge must not be exceeded.
B1 - 02/14 EN - p. 7 of 8 ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, tel.: +49 (0) 2803/9130-0, e-mail: mail@armaturenbau.com MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, tel: +49 (0) 3774/58-0, e-mail: mail@manotherm.com, 01/14 DE
Operating Instructions Pressure Gauges
Selection Criteria, Set-up Options, Installation and Operating Instructions
The temperature resistance resp. the permissible If specified, suitable switch amplifiers or multifunctional
operating temperature generally lies between -40 °C to relais must be used (e.g. for instruments with inductive
+60 °C maximum (cf. EN 837-1 and EN 837-3 ), whereas contacts). The valid operating instructions must be
unfilled gauges with brazed bourdon tubes withstand considered.
measuring temperatures of up to +100 °C or with shiel-
ded arc welded bourdon tubes in stainless steel cases 10. Storage
up to +200 °C. During storage, the pressure gauges should remain
Special versions that are labelled accordingly (tA / tR) in their original packaging and be stored protected
can be suitable for higher temperatures. against damages caused through external influences.
Note: These are only pieces of information on tempera- After possible temporary removal of a pressure gauge
ture resistance of the materials resp. the soldered joints (e.g. for a test), it should be replaced in the original
or welded seams. The information on indication errors packging for further storage.
due to deviation from the reference temperature has to
be considered! In general, during storage the minimum temperature
Further details ca be found in our model overview 1000 should not fall below -40 °C and the maximum tem-
for bourdon tube pressure gauges. perature should not exceed +60 °C (cf. EN 837-1 and
EN 837-3).
© 2014 ARMATURENBAU GmbH and MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH · Technical changes, replacement of materials and printing errors excepted!
Cleaning Temperature
When rinsing the measuring line, the permissible ope- 11. Installation in Potentially Explosive Areas
rating temperature of the pressure gauge (see above) 11.1 General Information
must not be exceeded. If necessary, the gauge has to Pressure Gauges are mechanical pressure measuring
be shut-off or removed. instruments and when operated as intended, do not
The maximum cleaning temperature tR of pressure show sources of ignition. Versions made of stainless
gauges with chemical seals must not be exceeded. steel and with laminated safety glass are suitable for
application in areas of category 2 and 3 according to the
8. Maintenance and Repair
ATEX-Directive 94/9/EC. For applications in category 1
In general, pressure gauges are maintenance-free. (e.g. installation to Zone 0), only pressure gauges with
integrated, type-approved flame arresters, our model
They should only be repaired by the manufacturer. Adapt-FS, are suitable. This protection system prevents
Before returning an instrument for repair, all wetted a flame penetration at deflagration of explosive vapor-air
parts must be cleaned thoroughly, especially regarding resp. gas-air mixtures of explosion groups IIA, IIB and
hazardous media (see also section 6.). The repair IIC in an upstreamed volume of max. 0.2 l. The flame
order should include a description of the medium resp. arrester "Adapt-FS" is certified with
a declaration of contamination. IIG IIC PTB 12 ATEX 4001 X
9. Electrical Accessories on condition that the operating pressure does not ex-
Installation and electrical connections should only be ceed 1.1 bar abs. and the operating temperature does
performed by trained engineering personnel. not exceed 60 °C.
Instruments with electric accessories are marked with
a nameplate that indicates the electrical connection of To avoid heating of the measuring elements of bourdon
the instrument. tube pressure gauges, dynamic load is not allowed with
Consideration of load limits is obligatory. Exceeding of gaseous media!
load limits can cause damage.
The national and international safety regulations (e.g. 11.2 Marking for Explosive Area
VDE 0100) must be considered during installation, Pressure gauges without limit switch contacts for
starting up and operation of the instruments. application in potentially explosive areas, are marked
as follows:
It must be ensured that the cable diameters match the Example: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
nominal widths of the sealing inserts. Screw fittings must Type RCh 100 – 3
be tightened firmly. Only then compliance with certified Manufacturer ARMATURENBAU
protection standards can be ensured. In versions with Manometerstraße 5 • D-46487 Wesel
angular plugs, plug connectors or terminal boxes, the
centrally arranged fixing screws must be tightened Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
hand-tight.
Type RCh 100 – 3
For the connection of pressure transmitters DMU, only
shielded cables are to be used in order to conserve the II 2Gc
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). The shield of the
II 2Dc
cable must be connected with the case resp. with the
ground terminal of the angular plug.
Temperature range -25…+75 °C
The CE-mark according to EMC-guidelines on instru- (content binding, partition free)
ments with magnetic contact only applies, when the
frequency of operation does not exceed 5 switching Please contact the manufacturer in case of uncertain-
cycles per minute. ties.
B1 - 02/14 EN - p. 8 of 8 ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, tel.: +49 (0) 2803/9130-0, e-mail: mail@armaturenbau.com MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, tel: +49 (0) 3774/58-0, e-mail: mail@manotherm.com, 01/14 DE
NAE 8256
ENGINE PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER
Swiss based Trafag is a leading international supplier of high quality
sensors and monitoring instruments for measurement of pressure
and temperature. The engine and shipbuilding pressure transmitter
NAE 8256 features the extremely robust and stable thin-film-on-steel
sensor element. The NAE 8256 is the smallest pressure transmitter of
its kind with ship approvals. The wide temperature range from -40°C
up to +125°C and triple overpressure safety makes it the first choice
in rough environments such as marine applications.
04/2017
Applications Features
N Shipbuilding N Measuring accuracy 0.3 %, 0.5 %
N Engine manufacturing N Completely welded steel sensor system without additional
Hydraulics
Subject to change
Technical Data
Measuring principle Thin film on steel Media temperature –40°C ... +125°C
Measuring range 0 ... 10 to 0 ... 600 bar Ambient temperature –40°C ... +125°C
0 ... 150 to 0 ... 7500 psi
Output signal 4 ... 20 mA Approval / conformity ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, KRS, NKK, RINA,
RMRS
Accuracy @ 25°C typ. 0.5 %: ± 0.5 % FS typ.
0.3 %: ± 0.3 % FS typ.
8256 . XX XX XX XX XX XX
Measuring Pressure Over Burst
Pressure
Over Burst
measurement measurement
range 1) pressure pressure pressure pressure
range range
[bar] [bar] [psi] [psi]
[bar] [psi]
0 ... 10 30 200 78 0 ... 150 450 2500 G8
0 ... 16 48 200 79 0 ... 200 600 2500 GA
0 ... 25 75 300 80 0 ... 250 750 2500 G9
0 ... 40 120 300 81 0 ... 300 900 4000 HA
0 ... 60 180 400 82 0 ... 400 1200 4000 H0
0 ... 100 300 500 83 0 ... 500 1200 4000 H1
0 ... 160 480 750 85 0 ... 1000 3000 5000 H2
0 ... 250 750 1000 74 0 ... 1500 4500 7000 H3
0 ... 400 1000 2000 84 0 ... 2000 6000 10000 H5
0 ... 600 1500 2500 86 0 ... 3000 9000 14500 G4
0 ... 5000 12500 21750 H4
0 ... 7500 18750 29000 H6
Electrical Male electrical plug, industrial standard, contact distance 9.4 mm, Mat. PA 01
connection Male electrical plug M12x1, 4-pole, Mat. PA 32
Male electrical plug M12x1, 5-pole, Mat. PA 35
1)
See electrical connection
Accuracy (%)
2 2
1 1
0 0
-1 -1
-2 -2
-3 -3
-4 -4
-5
-6 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
-7 Temp. (°C)
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 max. typ. TEB (-25...+85)
Temp. (°C)
max. typ. TEB (-25...+85)
27.5 7 28 10.2
3 2
4
Ø 18.8
3
M12x1
Ø 18.8
9.4
2 1
4
1
8256.XX.XXXX.01.XX.XX 8256.XX.XXXX.32.XX.XX
28 10.2
5 3 2
4 M12x1
1 Ø 18.8
8256.XX.XXXX.35.XX.XX
21 26 20.1
M10x1
1/4“ NPT
G1/4"
Seal
SW19
SW19
SW19
Ø 21
Ø 21
DIN 3869
Ø21
54 ... 60 max. 5 mm 26
~Ø20
M3
27
8256.XX.XXXX.XX.XX.33 8256.XX.XXXX.XX.XX.34
90 E1
Output signal
2 2 1 1 4
1 4 3 2 1
4 3 4 4 5
8256.xx.xxxx.xx.19
Rmin 125°C
800
600
400
200
...
0 ....
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Additional information
Documents Data sheet www.trafag.com/H72305
Instructions www.trafag.com/H73303
Flyer www.trafag.com/H70684
FT14
Ball Float Steam Trap ½" (DN15) to 1" (DN25)
Installation and Maintenance Instructions
1. General
safety information
2. General
product information
3. Installation
4. Commissioning
5. Operation
6. Maintenance
7. Spare parts
Printed in the
IM-S02-13 STUK
Issue 11 © Copyright 2005
1
1. General safety information
Safe operation of the unit can only be guaranteed if it is properly installed, commissioned
and maintained by a qualified person (see Section 11 of the attached Supplementary
Safety Information) in compliance with the operating instructions. General installation
and safety instructions for pipeline and plant construction, as well as the proper use of
tools and safety equipment must also be complied with.
Warning
The cover gasket contains a thin stainless steel support ring which may cause physical
injury if not handled and disposed of carefully.
Isolation
Consider whether closing isolating valves will put any other part of the system or
personnel at risk. Dangers might include; isolation of vents and protective devices or
alarms. Ensure isolation valves are turned off in a gradual way to avoid system shocks.
Pressure
Before attempting any maintenance consider what is or may have been in the pipeline.
Ensure that any pressure is isolated and safely vented to atmospheric pressure before
attempting to maintain the product, this is easily achieved by fitting Spirax Sarco
depressurisation valves type DV (see separate literature for details). Do not assume
that the system is depressurised even when a pressure gauge indicates zero.
Temperature
Allow time for temperature to normalise after isolation to avoid the danger of burns and
consider whether protective clothing (including safety glasses) is required.
Disposal
This product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated with the disposal of this
product providing due care is taken.
2 IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11
2. General product information
2.1 General description
The FT14 is an SG iron ball float steam trap with integral automatic air venting facility.
It is available with screwed or flanged horizontal connections with flow from right to left (R-L)
or left to right (L-R). The screwed version is also available with vertical connections (FT14V)
with flow downwards.
If required the flanged version can be modified on site to the vertical orientation.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
FT14 (R-L) screwed FT14C (R-L) screwed
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
FT14 (R-L) flanged FT14C (R-L) flanged
IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11 3
2.3 Sizes and pipe connections
½", ¾" and 1" screwed BSP or NPT.
DN15, DN20 and DN25 standard flange PN16, ANSI 150, JIS 10 and KS 10.
Temperature °F
200 400
150 300
100 Steam
200
saturation
50 curve 100
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Pressure bar g
The product must not be used in this region.
4 IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11
3. Installation
Note: Before actioning any installation observe the 'Safety information' in Section 1.
Refering to the Installation and Maintenance Instructions, name-plate and Technical Information
Sheet, check that the product is suitable for the intended installation.
3.1 Check materials, pressure and temperature and their maximum values. If the maximum
operating limit of the product is lower than that of the system in which it is being fitted,
ensure that a safety device is included in the system to prevent overpressurisation.
3.2 Determine the correct installation situation and the direction of fluid flow.
3.3 Remove protective covers from all connections and the protective film from all name-plates
before installation on steam or other high temperature applications.
Installation note:
- If the trap is to discharge to atmosphere ensure it is to a safe place, the discharging fluid
may be at a temperature of 100°C (212°F).
- The trap must be fitted with the float arm in a horizontal plane so that it rises and falls
vertically, therefore the arrow on the name-plate must point downwards.
- Unless specified, traps will be supplied with horizontal connections and with
right to left flow (R-L). Traps can be supplied with vertical connections with flow
from top to bottom or horizontal connections with flow from right to left (R-L) or left to
right (L-R).
- The connection orientation can be changed on site by undoing the four cover bolts
and moving the cover to the preferred orientation. A new gasket must always be fitted.
- Minimum withdrawal distance to remove cover is 105 mm (4.13").
IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11 5
4. Commissioning
After installation or maintenance ensure that the system is fully functioning. Carry out tests on
any alarms or protective devices.
5. Operation
The float trap is a continuous discharge trap, removing condensate the instant it forms. On
start-up, the thermostatic air vent allows air to bypass the main valve preventing the system air
binding. Hot condensate will close the air vent tightly, but as soon as it enters the main chamber
of the trap, the float rises and the lever mechanism attached to it opens the main valve - keeping
the system drained of condensate at all times. When steam arrives, the float drops and closes
the main valve. Float traps are renown for their high start-up load handling capability, clean
tight shut-off and resistance to waterhammer and vibration.
6. Maintenance
Note: Before actioning any maintenance program observe
the 'Safety information' in Section 1.
Warning
The cover gasket contains a thin stainless steel support ring which may
cause physical injury if not handled and disposed of carefully.
6 IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11
6.4 How to fit the Steam Lock Release (SLR) assembly:
- Unscrew the complete SLR assembly (12) and (14).
- Remove the SLR gasket (13).
- Replace the SLR assembly and washer with new ones.
- Reset the SLR to the desired bleed rate.
Table 1 Recommended tightening torques
or
Item Nm (lbf ft)
mm
Frame
Seat
16
2 6 5 11 10 7 1" only 8 3
Main valve
assembly
Fig. 6
IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11 7
7. Spare parts
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn in broken line are not
supplied as spares.
Available spares
Main valve assembly with float 3, 5, 6, 7 (2 off), 8, 10, 11, 16 (1" only)
Air vent assembly 3, 6, 9
Steam lock release unit and air vent assembly (FT14C only) 3, 6, 9, 12 + 14, 13
Cover gasket (packet of 3) 3
Maintenance kit 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16 (1" only)
16
6 5 11 10 7 1" only 8 3
Main valve assembly
Fig. 7
8 IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11
Inductive sensor NJ5-11-N-G
Dimensions
M14x1
Ø 11
14
31
3
19
0102
Model Number
NJ5-11-N-G
Features
• Comfort series
• 5 mm not embeddable
Technical Data
• Usable up to SIL2 acc. to IEC 61508
General specifications
Switching element function NAMUR, NC
Connection Rated operating distance sn 5 mm
Installation not embeddable
Output polarity NAMUR
Assured operating distance sa 0 ... 4.05 mm
BN Reduction factor rAl 0.4
L+
Reduction factor rCu 0.3
Reduction factor r304 0.85
BU Nominal ratings
L- Nominal voltage Uo 8V
Switching frequency f 0 ... 3000 Hz
Hysteresis H typ. 5 %
Current consumption
Measuring plate not detected ≥ 3 mA
Measuring plate detected ≤ 1 mA
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ... 100 °C (-13 ... 212 °F)
Mechanical specifications
Connection type cable PVC , 2 m
Core cross-section 0.34 mm2
Housing material Stainless steel 1.4305 / AISI 303
Sensing face PVDF
Protection degree IP68
General information
Use in the hazardous area see instruction manuals
Category 2G; 1D
Compliance with standards and directives
Standard conformity
NAMUR EN 60947-5-6:2000
Standards EN 60947-5-2:2007
IEC 60947-5-2:2007
Approvals and certificates
UL approval cULus Listed, General Purpose
Date of issue: 2012-02-09 112726_eng.xml
ATEX 2G
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Device category 2G for use in hazardous areas with gas, vapour and mist
Directive conformity 94/9/EG
Standard conformity EN 60079-0:2006, EN 60079-11:2007
Ignition protection "Intrinsic safety"
Use is restricted to the following stated conditions
CE symbol 0102
Ex-identification ¬ II 2G Ex ia IIC T6
Maintenance No changes can be made to apparatus, which are operated in hazardous areas.
Repairs to these apparatus are not possible.
Special conditions
Protection from mechanical danger When used in the temperature range below -20 °C the sensor should be protected
from knocks by the provision of an additional housing.
Electrostatic charging Electrostatic charges must be avoided on the mechanical housing components.
Dangerous electrostatic charges on the mechanical housing components can be
avoided by incorporating these in the equipotential bonding.
112726_eng.xml
Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47 Date of issue: 2012-02-09
ATEX 1D
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Widerstandsthermometer
Typ W083
Messbereich von -40 °C bis +200 °C.
© SiKA • Ba_W083.pdf 12/2011.
SiKA Dr.Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG y Struthweg 7–9 y D-34260 Kaufungen y Germany
℡ +49 5605 803-0 y +49 5605 803-54 y info@sika.net y www.SIKA.net
Widerstandsthermometer
Inhaltsverzeichnis Seite
0 Hinweise zur Betriebsanleitung ................................................................................. 3
1 Gerätebeschreibung.................................................................................................. 4
1.1 Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ........................................................................ 5
2 Sicherheitshinweise .................................................................................................. 6
3 Aufbau und Funktion .................................................................................................7
4 Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers ......................................................................8
4.1 Einbauhinweise .......................................................................................................8
4.2 Montage ..................................................................................................................8
5 Elektrischer Anschluss ............................................................................................ 10
5.1 Anschlussvarianten ............................................................................................... 11
5.2 Überprüfung des Oberflächenwiderstandes (Ausführung W083…X) .................... 11
6 Wartung, Reinigung und Probleme ......................................................................... 12
7 Demontage und Entsorgung ................................................................................... 13
8 Schutzrohre............................................................................................................. 13
9 Werkstofftabelle ...................................................................................................... 14
10 Technische Daten ................................................................................................... 14
11 Abmessungen ......................................................................................................... 15
12 Herstellererklärung.................................................................................................. 16
Urheberschutzvermerk:
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Betriebsanleitung, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhalts
sind verboten, soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz.
Alle Rechte für den Fall der Patent-, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vor-
behalten.
Sollten Sie Probleme oder Fragen haben, wenden Sie sich an Ihren Lieferanten oder direkt
an:
1 Gerätebeschreibung
Das Widerstandsthermometer hat zwei, redundant aufgebaute Pt100 Temperatursensoren.
Es dient der Fernüberwachung von flüssigen und gasförmigen Medien in Rohrleitungen oder
Behältern, sowie Maschinen oder Anlagen.
Die beiden Sensoren des Widerstandsthermometer befinden sich an der gleichen Messstelle.
Baugruppen:
Die wichtigsten Baugruppen des Widerstandsthermometer sind der Anschlusskopf und das
Tauchrohr.
Anschlusskopf:
Der Anschlusskopf dient dem Anschluss des
elektrischen Temperatursensors für die Fernüber-
wachung. In ihm befindet sich der Messeinsatz.
Tauchrohr:
Das Tauchrohr dient dem Prozessanschluss der An-
lage oder Maschine. Es wird im Bereich der Mess-
stelle eingebaut.
Bei Anwendungen mit besonderen Belastungen ist der
Einbau von Schutzrohren erforderlich.
Messstelle:
Die Temperaturmessung erfolgt im unteren Teil des Tauchrohres. Dort befinden sich die
temperaturempfindlichen Bereiche des Messeinsatzes (J § 3 "Aufbau und Funktion").
Ausführungen:
Das Widerstandsthermometer ist in den Ausführungen W083 und W083…X lieferbar. Die
Ausführung W083…X kann im Ex-Bereich eingesetzt werden.
Typenschild:
Auf dem Typenschild finden Sie die wichtigsten Daten und das Anschlussbild des gelieferten
Widerstandsthermometers.
W083:
W083…X:
Lieferumfang:
• 1x Widerstandsthermometer.
• 1x Betriebsanleitung.
• ggf. Verpackung oder Transportschutz.
Zubehör:
• Schutzrohre nach DIN 43772:2000.
Ausführung W083…X:
Das Widerstandsthermometer W083…X ist für den Einsatz in Bereichen mit explosions-
fähiger Atmosphäre vorgesehen.
ª Beachten Sie die weiterführenden Informationen in § 12 "Herstellererklärung".
ª Beachten Sie die nachfolgenden Maßnahmen:
Zündtemperatur des zu überwachenden Mediums:
ª Die Zündtemperatur des zu überwachenden Mediums muss mindestens 10 K
oberhalb des Temperaturbereichs liegen. Beim W083…X also ≥ 210 °C.
Wackelkontakt an elektrischen Anschlüssen:
ª Anschluss des Gerätes an einen bescheinigten eigensicheren Stromkreis.
2 Sicherheitshinweise
Bevor Sie das Widerstandsthermometer installieren, lesen Sie diese Betriebsanleitung
sorgfältig durch. Werden die darin enthaltenen Anweisungen, insbesondere die Sicher-
heitshinweise nicht beachtet, können Gefahren für Mensch, Umwelt, Gerät und Anlage
die Folge sein.
Die Widerstandsthermometer entsprechen dem aktuellen Stand der Technik. Dies betrifft die
Genauigkeit, die Funktionsweise und den sicheren Betrieb der Geräte.
Um eine sichere Bedienung zu gewährleisten, ist sachkundiges und sicherheitsbewusstes
Verhalten der Bediener erforderlich.
SiKA gewährt persönlich oder durch entsprechende Literatur Hilfestellung für die Anwendung
der Produkte. Der Kunde prüft die Einsetzbarkeit des Produktes auf der Basis unserer
technischen Informationen. In kunden- und anwendungsspezifischen Tests überprüft der
Kunde die Eignung des Produktes für seinen Verwendungszweck. Mit dieser Prüfung gehen
Gefahr und Risiko auf unseren Kunden über; unsere Gewährleistung erlischt.
Qualifiziertes Personal:
Das Personal, das mit der Inbetriebnahme und Bedienung des Widerstandsthermometers
beauftragt wird, muss eine entsprechende Qualifikation aufweisen. Dies kann durch
Schulung oder entsprechende Unterweisung geschehen.
Dem Personal muss der Inhalt der vorliegenden Betriebsanleitung bekannt und jederzeit
zugänglich sein.
Der elektrische Anschluss darf nur von einer Elektrofachkraft vorgenommen werden.
Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise:
Bei allen Arbeiten sind die bestehenden nationalen Vorschriften zur Unfallverhütung und
Sicherheit am Arbeitsplatz einzuhalten. Vorhandene interne Vorschriften des Betreibers
sind zu beachten, auch wenn diese nicht in dieser Anleitung genannt werden.
Schutzart nach DIN EN 60529:
Achten Sie darauf, dass die Umgebungsbedingungen am Einsatzort die Anforderungen
der angegebenen Schutzart (J § 10 "Technische Daten") nicht überschreiten.
Setzen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer keinen mechanischen Beanspruchungen aus.
Verwenden Sie es niemals als Haltegriff oder Trittfläche.
Verwenden Sie das Widerstandsthermometer nur in einwandfreiem Zustand. Be-
schädigte oder fehlerhafte Geräte müssen sofort überprüft und ggf. ersetzt werden.
Verwenden Sie bei Montage, Anschluss und Demontage des Widerstandsthermometers
nur passende Werkzeuge.
Typenschilder oder sonstige Hinweise auf dem Gerät dürfen weder entfernt noch un-
kenntlich gemacht werden, da sonst jegliche Garantie und Herstellerverantwortung er-
lischt.
Spezielle Sicherheitshinweise:
Warnhinweise, die sich speziell auf einzelne Funktionsabläufe oder Tätigkeiten beziehen,
finden Sie vor den entsprechenden Stellen in dieser Betriebsanleitung.
c
Anschlusskopf und Tauchrohr:
d
Kopfgehäuse.
Deckel mit Dichtung, Schrauben und Zahn-
e
scheiben.
Kabelverschraubung mit Dichtung und Druckring.
f
g
Kontermutter.
Tauchrohr mit Gewindeanschluss.
h
Messeinsatz:
i
Klemmsockel
j
Fühlerleitungen und Sensorrohr.
2x Pt100 Temperaturfühler.
4.1 Einbauhinweise
Die Messstelle muss sich in der Mitte der Rohr- Achten Sie bei Isolierungen auf ein aus-
leitung befinden. reichend langes Tauchrohr.
Zu kurze oder zu lange Tauchrohre führen zu
einer falschen Temperaturanzeige.
Ausführung W083…X:
Das Widerstandsthermometer W083…X ist durch den Einbau in eine metallische Rohrleitung
oder einen metallischen Behälter in den Potenzialausgleich mit einzubeziehen.
4.2 Montage
GEEIGNETE WERKZEUGE:
Verwenden Sie nur geeignete Werkzeuge der passenden Größe.
Einbau:
ª 1. Abdichten ª 2. Einsetzen
Anzugsmoment: 55 + 5 Nm
Anzugsmoment: 55 + 5 Nm
5 Elektrischer Anschluss
Im Anschlusskopf des Widerstandsthermometers wird der Messeinsatz elektrisch angeschlossen.
Dabei wird die Anschlussleitung mit dem Klemmsockel des Messeinsatzes verbunden.
ª 1. Lösen Sie die Schrauben des Deckels. ª 4. Führen Sie die Anschlussleitung durch
ª 2. Nehmen Sie den Deckel mit Schrauben, die Überwurfmutter und den Klemmein-
Zahnscheiben und Dichtung vom Kopf- satz in das Kopfgehäuse.
gehäuse ab. ª 5. Stülpen Sie die Abschirmung der Leitung
ª 3. Lösen Sie die Überwurfmutter der über den Klemmeinsatz.
Kabelverschraubung. ª 6. Stecken Sie den Klemmeinsatz in den
Gewindestutzen. Sichern Sie den
Klemmeinsatz mit der Überwurfmutter.
ª 7. Schließen Sie die Anschlussleitung ent- ª 9. Setzten Sie den Deckel mit Dichtung auf
sprechend dem Anschlussbild an das Kopfgehäuse.
(J § 5.1 "Anschlussvarianten"). Achten Sie auf den richtigen Sitz der
ª 8. Ziehen Sie die Kabelverschraubung fest. Dichtung des Deckels.
Achten Sie darauf, dass die Anschluss- ª 10. Drehen Sie die Schrauben fest.
leitungen zugfrei sind!
Ausführung W083…X:
Das Widerstandsthermometer darf nur an einem bescheinigten eigensicheren Stromkreis
betrieben werden. Das Abklemmen der Anschlussdrähte innerhalb des Ex-Bereiches ist
aufgrund der bescheinigten Eigensicherheit zulässig.
Überprüfen Sie den Oberflächenwiderstand beim Widerstandsthermometer nach Durch-
führung des elektrischen Anschlusses (J § 5.2").
5.1 Anschlussvarianten
Der Temperaturfühler des Messeinsatzes ist mit dem Klemmsockel verbunden. Der An-
schluss erfolgt am Klemmsockel.
FARBMARKIERUNG:
Die Klemmen des Sockels sind farblich markiert. Ist keine Farbe an der Klemme vor-
handen, so entspricht dies "weiß" im Anschlussbild.
ª Verbinden Sie die Anschlussleitung mit dem Klemmsockel entsprechend dem Anschluss-
bild ihres Widerstandsthermometers.
Pt 100:
2-Leiter
Reinigung:
ª Reinigen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer mit einem trockenen oder feuchten anti-
statischem Tuch.
ª Verwenden Sie beim Reinigen keine scharfen Gegenstände oder aggressive
Reinigungsmittel.
Probleme:
Welche Probleme Sie wie beheben können, ist in der nachfolgenden Tabelle ausgeführt.
Demontage:
ª Entfernen Sie die elektrischen Anschlüsse.
ª Bauen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer mit passenden Werkzeugen aus.
Entsorgung:
KEIN HAUSMÜLL!
Das Widerstandsthermometer besteht aus unterschiedlichen Werkstoffen. Es darf nicht
zusammen mit Hausmüll entsorgt werden.
oder
8 Schutzrohre
Bei Anwendungen mit besonderen Belastungen muss ein zusätzliches Schutzrohr, nach
DIN 43772:2000, verwendet werden.
9 Werkstofftabelle
Bauteil W083 Bauteil
benetzt
Kopfgehäuse Aluminium Druckguss
Deckel Aluminium Druckguss
Dichtung NBR
Deckelschrauben (Zahnscheiben)
Kontermutter Messing 2.0401
Tauchrohr mit
Edelstahl 1.4571 X
Gewindeanschluss
Kabelverschraubung:
- Überwurfmutter Messing vernickelt
- Klemmeinsatz Polyamid
- O-Ring CR / NBR
- Gewindestutzen Messing vernickelt
10 Technische Daten
Bitte beachten Sie die Angaben auf dem Typenschild.
Kenndaten W083
Messbereich -40…200 °C
Genauigkeit Klasse B
Ansprechzeit 25 °C ---> 90 °C: 15 s (vorläufig)
t90 in Wasser
Temperaturfühler
- Sensor 2x Pt100/B/2 • IEC 751
- Nennwiderstand 100 Ω
bei 0 °C ±0,3 °C
- zulässiger Messstrom 1 mA
Ausführung W083…X
Maximaler Strom Ii = 20 mA
Maximale Spannung Ui = 30 VDC
Prozessgrößen
Elektrischer Anschluss Anschlusskopf Form J, drehbar
mit Kabelverschraubung M16 x 1,5
Tauchrohr:
- Durchmesser 8 x 1 mm
- Länge 50 mm
- Material / Nenndruck Edelstahl 1.4571 / PN 40
Medium Verträglichkeit mit Tauchrohrmaterial muss gegeben sein,
siehe auch 8."Schutzrohre"
Mediumstemperatur siehe Messbereich
Umgebungstemperatur 0…70 °C
Prozessanschluss *1) G½A
Vibrationsbeständigkeit Kennlinie 2, 4g
Zulassungen ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, RINA, Class NK
11 Abmessungen
12 Herstellererklärung
Resistance thermometer
Type W083
Measuring range from -40 °C to +200 °C.
© SiKA • Ba_W083.pdf 12/2011.
SiKA Dr.Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG y Struthweg 7–9 y D-34260 Kaufungen y Germany
℡ +49 5605 803-0 y +49 5605 803-54 y info@sika.net y www.SIKA.net
Resistance thermometer
Copyright notice:
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this operating manual as well as the communication of
its contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.
If you have any problems or questions, please contact your supplier or contact us directly
at:
1 Device description
The Resistance thermometer has two redundant Pt100 temperature sensors. It is used for
the remote monitoring of liquid and gaseous media in pipes, tanks, machines or plants.
Both sensors of the Resistance thermometer located at the same measuring point.
Assemblies:
The most important assemblies of the Resistance thermometer are the connection head and
the immersion tube.
Connection head:
The connection head allows the connection of an
electrical temperature sensor for remote monitoring.
The measuring insert is to be found within it.
Immersion tube:
The immersion tube is used to create the process
connection to the installation or machine. It is installed
in proximity to the measuring point.
Use in particularly high-stress situations requires the
fitting of protective tubes.
Measuring point:
The temperature measurement is carried out in the lower part of the immersion tube. There are
the temperature-sensitive parts of the measuring insert (J § 3 "Construction and function").
Versions:
The Resistance thermometer is available in the W083 and W083…X versions. The W083…X
version can be used in explosion hazard areas.
Type plate:
The type plate contains the most important data and the connection diagram of the
Resistance thermometer supplied.
W083:
W083…X:
Scope of delivery:
• 1x Resistance thermometer.
• 1x Operating manual.
• Packaging or transport protection (if applicable).
Accessories:
• Protective tubes certified according to DIN 43772:2000.
Version W083…X:
The Resistance thermometer W083…X is intended to be used in areas with potentially ex-
plosive atmospheres.
ª Observe the additional information in § 12 "Manufacturer declaration ".
ª Observe the following requirements:
Ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored:
ª The ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored must be at least 10 K
higher than the temperature range. With the W083…X, this means ≥ 210°C.
Intermittent electrical connection:
ª Connect the device to a certified intrinsically safe circuit.
2 Safety instructions
Before you install the Resistance thermometer, read through this operating manual
carefully. If the instructions contained within it are not followed, in particular the safety
guidelines, this could result in danger for people, the environment, and the device and
the system it is connected to.
The Resistance thermometer correspond to the state-of-the-art technology. This concerns
the accuracy, the operating mode and the safe operation of the device.
In order to guarantee that the device operates safely, the operator must act competently and
be conscious of safety issues.
SiKA provides support for the use of its products either personally or via relevant literature.
The customer verifies that our product is fit for purpose based on our technical information.
The customer needs to carry out his/her own specific tests to ensure this device is suitable
for the intended application. With this verification all hazards and risks are transferred to our
customers; our warranty is not valid.
Qualified personnel:
The personnel who are charged for the installation, operation and maintenance of the
Resistance thermometer must hold a relevant qualification. This can be based on training
or relevant tuition.
The personnel must be aware of this operating manual and have access to it at all times.
The electrical connection should only be carried out by a fully qualified electrician.
c
Connection head and immersion tube:
d
Head housing.
Cover with gasket, screws and tooth lock
e
washers.
Cable fitting with gasket and compression ring.
f
g
Counter nut.
Immersion tube with threaded connector.
h
Measuring insert:
i
Terminal socket
j
Sensor wire and sensor tube.
2x Pt100 Temperature sensor.
The measuring point must be located in the If the pipe is lagged ensure that a long
centre of the pipe. enough immersion tube is used.
If the immersion tube is too short or too long it
will be impossible to gauge the temperature
accurately.
Version W083…X:
Integrate the Resistance thermometer W083…X in the potential equalisation system by in-
stalling it on a metallic pipe or a metallic tank.
4.2 Assembly
SUITABLE TOOLS:
Use only suitable tools of the correct size.
Installation:
ª 1. Sealing ª 2. Insert
Tightening torque: 55 + 5 Nm
Tightening torque: 55 + 5 Nm
5 Electrical connection
The measuring insert is connected inside the connection head of the Resistance thermometer.
The connecting cable is connected with the terminal socket of the measuring insert.
ª 1. Loosen the cover screws. ª 4. Guide the connecting cable into the
ª 2. Remove the cover complete with head housing through the union nut and
screws, tooth lock washers and gasket the terminal insert.
from the head housing. ª 5. Pull the cable shield over the seal ring.
ª 3. Loosen the union nut of the cable ª 6. Insert the seal ring into the threaded
connector. connector. Secure the sealing ring with
the union nut.
ª 7. Connect the cable according to the in- ª 9. Place the cover with gasket on the head
structions on the connection diagram housing.
(J § 5.1 "Connection types "). Ensure that the cover gasket is correctly
ª 8. Fully tighten the cable connection. positioned.
Ensure that the connecting cables are ª 10. Fully tighten the screws.
not under strain!
W083…X version:
The Resistance thermometer may only be used in combination with a certified intrinsically
safe electrical circuit. Disconnecting the connection wires within the explosion hazard
area is allowed due to the certified intrinsic safety.
Check the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer after making the electrical
connection (J § 5.2").
Pt 100:
2-wire
W083…X maintenance:
Visually inspect the Resistance thermometer at regular intervals (3 months) for corrosion
(aluminium oxidation).
ª Use a suitable cleaning product (e.g. aluminium cleaner) to remove any oxidation build-
up at the measuring points.
ª Check the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer (J § 5.2).
If the surface resistance is lower than the standard value, the Resistance thermometer may
continue to be used until the next maintenance event.
Otherwise the installation of the Resistance thermometer must be checked for contact prob-
lems.
If the standard value is still exceeded, the Resistance thermometer must be replaced.
Cleaning:
ª Clean the Resistance thermometer using a dry or damp antistatic cloth.
ª Never use sharp objects or aggressive cleaning agents to clean the device.
Problems:
The following table details what problems you can solve yourself and how to solve them.
Before disassembly:
Prior to disassembly, ensure that
the equipment is switched off and is in a safe and de-energised state.
the equipment is depressurised and has cooled down.
Disassembly:
ª Remove the electrical connectors.
ª Remove the Resistance thermometer using suitable tools.
Disposal:
NO HOUSEHOLD WASTE!
The Resistance thermometer consists of various different materials. It must not be
disposed of with household waste.
or
8 Protective tube
If the device is to be used for high-stress applications, then an additional protective tube certi-
fied according to DIN 43772:2000 is required.
9 Materials table
Component W083 Component-
wetted
Head housing Aluminium Druckguss
Head housing Aluminium Druckguss
Gasket NBR
Cover screw
(Tooth lock washers)
Conter nut Messing 2.0401
Immersion tube with
Edelstahl 1.4571 X
threaded connector
Cable gland:
- Union nut Messing vernickelt
- Terminal insert Polyamid
- O-ring CR / NBR
- Threaded connection Messing vernickelt
10 Technical data
Please observe the informations specified on the type plate.
Characteristics W083
Measuring range -40…200 °C
Accuracy Class B
Response time 25 °C ---> 90 °C: 15 s (temporarily)
t90 in water
Temperaturfühler
- Sensor 2x Pt100/B/2 • IEC 751
- Nominal resistance 100 Ω
at 0 °C ±0,3 °C
- permissible measuring current 1 mA
Version W083…X
Maximum current Ii = 20 mA
Maximum voltage Ui = 30 VDC
Process variables
Electrical connection Type J connection head, rotatable
with cable gland M16 x 1,5
Immersion tube:
- Diameter 8 x 1 mm
- Length 50 mm
- Material / Nominal pressure Stainless steel 1.4571 / PN 40
Medium Must be cleared for compability with immersion tube material,
see also 8."Protective tube "
Medium temperature see measuring range
Ambient temperature 0…70 °C
Process connection *1) G½A
Resistance to vibration Characteristic curve 2, 4g
Approvals ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, RINA, Class NK
11 Dimension
12 Manufacturer declaration
W083P220502J02WX
manufactured by
The resistance thermometer constitutes a simple electrical device for connection to a certified
intrinsically safe electrical circuit as described in EN 60079-11: 2007. The effective internal
inductances and capacitances are negligibly small.
The resistance thermometer is intended to be used in areas where a potentially explosive atmosphere
is present. The resistance thermometer may be used in Zone 1. The ignition energy of the potentially
explosive atmosphere may be less than 60 µJ (Explosion Group IIC).
The following additional requirements must be observed:
The ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored must be at least 10 K above the temperature
measuring range. This yields an ignition temperature of 210 °C (200 °C + 10K), corresponding to
Temperature Class T2.
It must be ensured that all metallic parts of the resistance thermometer are connected to the potential
equalisation system. This can for example be done by installing the device on a metallic piping
system. This must be ensured before the device is put into service.
Attachment in Zone 0:
To prevent potential ignition sources from becoming effective in the event of foreseeable or rare
disturbances, a protective tube compliant with DIN 43772: 2000 must be used as a protective
measure. If this protective tube is used, the device may be attached to equipment in Zone 0 explosion
hazard areas.
Electrical connection
Maximum currency Ii = 20mA;
Maximum voltage Ui = 30VDC
i.V.
Dipl.- Ing. K. Ulloth
(CE- Koordinator und Produktsicherheitsbeauftragter)
(Manager CE- Coordination and Safety Supervisor)
No. 2058-3002-101
Edition 0117
2058-3002-101 / 27.01.17
ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
GEA Deutschland
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
59302 Oelde, Germany
1 Technical data
…SD 1
…SD 2
…TC 1 1.3
…TC 2
…TC 3
…DA 10
…KE 10
…KE 10 Mineral oil
…SC 10 CLP 100 90 - 110 0015-0003-080
…SC 15 (2.5 litres)
…SD 6 2.5
…SD 8
…SD 18
…SE 10 or or or
…TC 10
…TC 20
…SC 18
…DA 20
…DC 20 ISO VG 46 41 - 51 Synthetic oil
2.25 ISO VG 68 61 – 75 0015-0020-010
…SC 20
…SE 20 ISO VG 100 90 - 110 (1 litre)
…SE 30
…DA 40
…DC 40
…SC 25
…SC 40
…SD 20
3.7
…SD 25
…SD 35
…SE 40
…SE 50
…TC 40
* Designation according to DIN 51502
Alpha EP 100
Alpha SP 100
CDX 30
Optigear BM 100
Optigear EP 100
Meropa 100 95
Meropa XL 100 100
DTE 25
46
Shell Tellus S2 V 46 46
Alcor DD 46
46
Rando HD 46 46
SHC 625 46
SHC 626 68
Omala S4 GX 68 68
RENOLIN UNISYN OL 46
46
(VDL 46)
RENOLIN UNISYN OL 68
(VDL 68)
68
RENOLIN UNISYN
CLP 68
RENOLIN UNISYN
100
CLP 100
Cetus PAO 46 46
Cetus PAO 68 68
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and operations in more than 50 countries.
Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innovative equipment and process technology.
GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 index.
GEA Germany
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 Tel +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com
59302 Oelde, Germany Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
Motors | Automation | Energy | Transmission & Distribution | Coatings
--
www.weg.net
Português 2
English 57
Español 111
Deutsch 167
57 Motores Elétricos
www.weg.net
If you have any questions regarding this manual please contact your local WEG branch,
contact details can be found at www.weg.net.
Table of Contents
1. Terminology......................................................................................................... 61
2. Initial Recommendations................................................................................ 62
2.1. Warning Symbol.......................................................................................................................... 62
2.2. Receiving Inspection................................................................................................................. 62
2.3. Nameplates................................................................................................................................... 63
3. Safety Instructions......................................................................................... 66
5. Storage.................................................................................................................. 73
5.1. Exposed machined Surfaces.................................................................................................. 73
5.2. Storage........................................................................................................................................... 73
5.3 Bearings.......................................................................................................................................... 74
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings..................................................................................................... 74
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings............................................................................................................ 74
ENGLISH
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings.................................................................................................... 75
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing.......................................................................................................................... 75
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE.............................................................................................................. 75
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement...................................................................................... 75
6. Installation.......................................................................................................... 78
6.1. Foundations.................................................................................................................................. 79
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING......................................................................................................................... 81
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 81
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors......................................................................................................... 81
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 82
6.3. Balancing....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4. Couplings....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4.1. Direct coupling......................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling.................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling......................................................................................................... 83
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors....................................................................................... 83
6.5. Leveling.......................................................................................................................................... 84
6.6. Alignment....................................................................................................................................... 84
6.7. Connection of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors.............................. 85
6.8. Connection of the cooling water system...................................................................... 85
6.9. Electrical connection............................................................................................................ 85
7. Commissioning..................................................................................................... 95
7.1. Initial Start-up ............................................................................................................................ 95
7.2. Operating conditions .............................................................................................................. 97
7.2.1.Limits of vibration .................................................................................................................... 98
8. Maintenance......................................................................................................... 99
8.1. General Inspection.................................................................................................................... 99
8.2. Lubrication................................................................................................................................... 99
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings...................................................................................... 100
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting.............................................................................................. 102
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting................................................................................................... 102
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases.............................. 102
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings......................................................................................................... 103
ENGLISH
1. Terminology
Balancing: the procedure by which the mass distribution of a rotor is checked and, if necessary, adjusted to
ensure that the residual unbalance or the vibration of the journals and/or forces on the bearings at a frequency
corresponding to service speed are within specified limits in International Standards.
[ISO 1925:2001, definition 4.1]
Balance quality grade: indicates the peak velocity amplitude of vibration, given in mm/s, of a rotor running free-
in-space and it is the product of a specific unbalance and the angular velocity of the rotor at maximum
operating speed.
Grounded Part: metallic part connected to the grounding system.
Live Part: conductor or conductive part intended to be energized in normal operation, including a neutral
conductor.
Authorized personnel: employee who has formal approval of the company.
ENGLISH
2. Initial Recommendations
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. Therefore, it is recommended that transportation, storage,
installation, operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Also the applicable procedures and relevant standards of the country where the machine will be installed must
be considered.
Noncompliance with the recommended procedures in this manual and other references on the WEG website
may cause severe personal injuries and/or substantial property damage and may void the product warranty.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual detailed information that covers all construction
variables nor covering all possible assembly, operation or maintenance alternatives.
This Manual contains only the required information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry out their
services. The product images are shown for illustrative purpose only.
For Smoke Extraction Motors, please refer to the additional instruction manual 50026367 available on the
website www.weg.net.
For brake motors, please refer to the information contained in WEG 50006742 / 50021973 brake motor manual
available on the website www.weg.net.
For information about permissible radial and axial shaft loads, please check the product technical catalogue.
The user is responsible for the correct definition of the installation environment and application
characteristics.
During the warranty period, all repair, overhaul and reclamation services must be carried out by WEG
ENGLISH
g Remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand to ensure that it rotates freely.
g Check that the motor has not been exposed to excessive dust and moisture during the transportation.
Do not remove the protective grease from the shaft, or the plugs from the cable entries. These protections must
remain in place until the installation has been completed.
2.3. Nameplates
The nameplate contains information that describes the construction characteristics and the performance of the
motor. Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2 show nameplate layout examples.
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Figure 2.2 - NEMA motor nameplate
3. Safety Instructions
The motor must be disconnected from the power supply and be completely stopped before conducting
any installation or maintenance procedures. Additional measures should be taken to avoid accidental
motor starting.
Professionals working with electrical installations, either in the assembly, operation or maintenance,
should use proper tools and be instructed on the application of standards and safety requirements,
including the use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) that must be carefully observed in order to
reduce risk of personal injury during these services.
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. It is recommended that transportation, storage, installation,
operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Always follow the safety, installation, maintenance and inspection instructions in accordance with the applicable
standards in each country.
ENGLISH
Eyebolts provided on the frame are designed for lifting the machine only. Do not use these eyebolts for
lifting the motor with coupled equipment such as bases, pulleys, pumps, reducers, etc.
Never use damaged, bent or cracked eyebolts. Always check the eyebolt condition before lifting the motor.
Eyebolts mounted on components, such as on end shields, forced ventilation kits, etc. must be used for lifting
these components only. Do not use them for lifting the complete machine set.
Handle the motor carefully without sudden impacts to avoid bearing damage and prevent excessive mechanical
stresses on the eyebolts resulting in its rupture.
To move or transport motors with cylindrical roller bearings or angular contact ball bearings, use always
the shaft locking device provided with the motor.
All HGF motors, regardless of bearing type, must be transported with shaft locking device fitted.
4.1. Lifting
Before lifting the motor ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly and the eyebolt shoulders are in
contact with the base to be lifted, as shown in Figure 4.1. Figure 4.2 shows an incorrect tightening of the
eyebolt.
Ensure that lifting machine has the required lifting capacity for the weight indicated on the motor nameplate.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.1 - Correct tightening of the eyebolt Figure 4.2 - Incorrect tightening of
the eyebolt.
The center-of-gravity may change depending on motor design and accessories. During the lifting
procedures the maximum allowed angle of inclination should never be exceeded as specified below.
Figure 4.3 - Maximum allowed angle-of-inclination for motor with one eyebolt.
Manual of Electric Motors 67
www.weg.net
There are two possible eyebolt arrangements (vertical and inclined), as shown below:
g For motors with vertical lifting eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.4, the maximum allowed lifting angle should not
exceed 45° in relation to the vertical axis. We recommend to use a spreader bar for maintaining the lifting
elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
45° Max.
Figure 4.4 - Maximum resulting angle for motors with two or more lifting eyebolts.
g For HGF motors, as shown in Figure 4.5, the maximum resulting angle should not exceed 30° in relation to the
vertical axis.
ENGLISH
30° Max.
g For motors fitted with inclined eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.6, the use of a spreader bar is required for
maintaining the lifting elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor
surface.
Always use the eyebolts mounted on the top side of the motor, diametrically opposite, considering the
mounting position. See Figure 4.8.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.8 - Lifting of HGF motors.
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts to start the motor rotation, as shown in Figure 4.11. This
procedure must be carried out slowly and carefully.
ENGLISH
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
2. Lower the hoist fixed to motor drive end while lifting the hoist fixed to motor non-drive end until the motor
reaches its equilibrium, see Figure 4.13.
3. Remove the hoist hooks from the drive end eyebolts and rotate the motor 180° to fix the removed hooks into
the two eyebolts at the motor non-drive end, see Figure 4.14.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.14 - Lifting HGF motors by the eyebolts at the non-drive end.
4. Fix the removed hoist hooks in the other two eyebolts at the non-drive end and lift the motor until the vertical
position is reached, see Figure 4.15.
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
1. Ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Install the first pair of eyebolts and lift the motor as shown in Figure 4.16;
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts for rotating the motor, as shown in Figure 4.18. This procedure
must be carried out slowly and carefully.
5. Storage
If the motor is not installed immediately, it must be stored in a dry and clean environment, with relative humidity
not exceeding 60%, with an ambient temperature between 5 ºC and 40 ºC, without sudden temperature
changes, free of dust, vibrations, gases or corrosive agents. The motor must be stored in horizontal position,
unless specifically designed for vertical operation, without placing objects on it. Do not remove the protection
grease from shaft end to prevent rust.
If the motor are fitted with space heaters, they must always be turned on during the storage period or when the
installed motor is out of operation. Space heaters will prevent water condensation inside the motor and keep
the winding insulation resistance within acceptable levels. Store the motor in such position that the condensed
water can be easily drained. If fitted, remove pulleys or couplings from the shaft end (more information are given
on item 6).
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.
ENGLISH
Packaging Type Frame sizes Maximum stacking quantity
IEC 63 to 132 Indicated on the top side of
Cardboard box
NEMA 143 to 215 the cardboard box
IEC 63 to 315
06
NEMA 48 to 504/5
IEC 355
Wood crate 03
NEMA 586/7 and 588/9
HGF IEC 315 to 630
Indicated on the packaging
HGF NEMA 5000 to 9600
Notes:
1) Never stack larger packaging onto smaller packaging.
2) Align the packaging correctly (see Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2).
3) The feet of the crates above should always be supported by suitable wood battens (Figure 5.3) and never stand on the steel tape or
without support (Figure 5.4).
4) When stacking smaller crates onto longer crates, always ensure that suitable wooden supports are provided to withstand the weight
(see Figure 5.5). This condition usually occurs with motor packaging above IEC 225S/M (NEMA 364/5T) frame sizes.
ENGLISH
5.3 Bearings
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings
We recommend rotating the motor shaft at least once a month (by hand, at least five revolutions, stopping the
shaft at a different position from the original one). If the motor is fitted with shaft locking device, remove it before
rotating the shaft and install it again before performing any handling procedure. Vertical motors may be stored
in the vertical or in horizontal position. If motors with open bearings are stored longer than six months, the
bearings must be relubricated according to item 8.2 before commissioning of the motor.
If the motor is stored for longer than 2 years, the bearings must be replaced or removed, washed, inspected
and relubricated according to item 8.2.
ENGLISH
The oil must always be removed when the motor has to be handled. If the oil mist system is not operating after
installation, fill the bearings with oil to prevent bearing rusting. During the storage period, rotate the shaft by
hand, at least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Before starting the motor,
all bearing protection oil must be drained from the bearing and the oil mist system must be switched ON.
The insulation resistance must be measured with a megohmmeter. The machine must be in cold state and
disconnected from the power supply.
To prevent the risk of an electrical shock, ground the terminals before and after each measurement.
Ground the capacitor (if any) to ensure that it is fully discharged before the measurement is taken.
It is recommended to insulate and test each phase separately. This procedure allows the comparison of the
insulation resistance between each phase. During the test of one phase, the other phases must be grounded.
The test of all phases simultaneously evaluates the insulation resistance to ground only but does not evaluate
the insulation resistance between the phases.
The power supply cables, switches, capacitors and other external devices connected to the motor may
considerably influence the insulation resistance measurement. Thus all external devices must be disconnected
and grounded during the insulation resistance measurement.
Measure the insulation resistance one minute after the voltage has been applied to the winding. The applied
voltage should be as shown in Table 5.3.
Table 5.3 - Voltage for the insulation resistance
Winding rated voltage (V) Testing voltage for measuring the insulation resistance (V)
< 1000V 500
1000 - 2500 500 - 1000
2501 - 5000 1000 - 2500
5001 - 12000 2500 - 5000
> 12000 5000 - 10000
The reading of the insulation resistance must be corrected to 40 °C as shown in the Table 5.4.
Measuring temperature Correction factor of the Measuring temperature of Correction factor of the
of the insulation insulation resistance the insulation resistance insulation resistance
resistance (°C) corrected to 40 °C (°C) corrected to 40 °C
10 0.125 30 0.500
11 0.134 31 0.536
12 0.144 32 0.574
13 0.154 33 0.616
14 0.165 34 0.660
15 0.177 35 0.707
16 0.189 36 0.758
17 0.203 37 0.812
18 0.218 38 0.871
19 0.233 39 0.933
20 0.250 40 1.000
21 0.268 41 1.072
22 0.287 42 1.149
23 0.308 43 1.231
24 0.330 44 1.320
25 0.354 45 1.414
26 0.379 46 1.516
27 0.406 47 1.625
28 0.435 48 1.741
29 0.467 49 1.866
30 0.500 50 2.000
The motor insulation condition must be evaluated by comparing the measured value with the values
indicated in Table 5.5 (corrected to 40 °C):
Table 5.5 - Evaluation of the insulation system
Limit value for rated voltage Limit value for rated voltage
Situation
up to 1.1 kV (MΩ) above 1.1 kV (MΩ)
Dangerous. The motor can not
Up to 5 Up to 100
be operated in this condition
5 to 100 100 to 500 Regular
100 to 500 Higher than 500 Good
Higher than 500 Higher than 1000 Excellent
The values indicated in the table should be considered only as reference values. It is advisable to log all
measured values to provide a quick and easy overview on the machine insulation resistance.
If the insulation resistance is low, moisture may be present in the stator windings. In this case the motor
should be removed and transported to a WEG authorized Service Center for proper evaluation and repair
(This service is not covered by the warranty). To improve the insulation resistance through the drying
process, see section 8.4.
ENGLISH
6. Installation
1. Insulation resistance: must be within the acceptable limits. See item 5.4.
2. Bearings:
a. Rolling bearings: oxidized bearings must be replaced. If no oxidation is detected, lubricate the bearings as
described in Item 8.2. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be replaced
before starting the motor.
b. Sleeve bearing: if sleeve bearing motors are stored longer than the recommended oil change interval, the
oil must be changed before machine starting. Don’t forget to remove the dehumidifiers when you drain the
oil from the motor and to fill it again with new oil before starting the machine. For more details, see item
8.2.
3. Operating conditions of the start capacitors: If single-phase motors are stored for a period of over two years,
it is recommended to change the start capacitors before motor starting since they lose their operating
characteristics.
4. Terminal box:
a. the inside of the terminal box must be clean and dry.
b. the contacts must be correctly connected and corrosion free. See 6.9 and 6.10.
c. the cable entries must be correctly sealed and the terminal box cover properly mounted in order to ensure
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
5. Cooling: the cooling fins, air inlet and outlet openings must be clean and unobstructed. The distance
between the air inlet openings and the wall should not be shorter than ¼ (one quarter) of the diameter of the
air inlet. Ensure sufficient space to perform the cleaning services. See item 7.
6. Coupling: remove the shaft locking device (where fitted) and the corrosion protection grease from the shaft
ENGLISH
end and flange just before installing the motor. See item 6.4.
7. Drain hole: the motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is at the lowest position (If there is any
indication arrow on the drain, the drain must be so installed that the arrow points downwards).
Motors supplied with rubber drain plugs leave the factory in the closed position and must be opened
periodically to allow the exit of condensed water. For environments with high water condensation levels and
motor with degree of protection IP55, the drain plugs can be mounted in open position (see Figure 6.1).
For motors with degree of protection IP56, IP65 or IP66, the drain plugs must remain at closed position (see
Figure 6.1), being opened only during the motor maintenance procedures.
The drain system of motors with Oil Mist lubrication system must be connected to a specific collection
system (see Figure 6.12).
Figure 6.1 - Detail of the rubber drain plug mounted in closed and open position.
8.Additional recommendations:
a. Check the direction of motor rotation, starting the motor at no-load before coupling it to the load.
b. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end down must be fitted with drip cover to protect them from liquids
or solids that may drop onto the motors.
c. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end up must be fitted with water slinger ring to prevent water
penetration inside the motor.
6.1. Foundations
The foundation is the structure, structural element, natural or prepared base, designed to withstand the
stresses produced by the installed equipment, ensuring safe and stable performance during operation. The
foundation design should consider the adjacent structures to avoid the influences of other installed equipment
and no vibration is transferred through the structure
The foundation must be flat and its selection and design must consider the following characteristics:
a) T
he features of the machine to be installed on the foundation, the driven loads, application, maximum
allowed deformations and vibration levels (for instance, motors with reduced vibration levels, foot flatness,
flange concentricity, axial and radial loads, etc. lower than the values specified for standard motors).
b) Adjacent buildings, conservation status, maximum applied load estimation, type of foundation and fixation
and vibrations transmitted by theses constructions.
If the motor is supplied with leveling/alignment bolts, this must be considered in the base design.
Please consider for the foundation dimensioning all stresses that are generated during the operation of
the driven load.
ENGLISH
The user is responsible for the foundation designing and construction.
The foundation stresses can be calculated by using the following equations (see Figure 6.2):
F1 = 0,5 * g * m - (4 * Tb / A)
F2 = 0,5 * g * m + (4 * Tb / A)
Where:
F1 F1
A
F2 F2
Figure 6.2 - Motor installed on concrete base Figure 6.3 - Motor installed on metallic base
A
The metallic and concrete bases may be fitted with sliding system. These types of foundations are generally
used where the power transmission is achieved by belts and pulleys. This power transmission system is easier
to assemble/disassemble and allows the belt tension adjustment. Other important aspect of this foundation
type is the location of the base locking screws that must be diagonally opposite. The rail nearest the drive
pulley is placed in such a way that the positioning bolt is between the motor and the driven machine. The other
rail must be placed with the bolt on the opposite side (diagonally opposite), as shown in Figure 6.4 .
After completing the installation, it is recommended that all exposed machined surfaces are coated with
suitable rust inhibitor.
Footless motors supplied with transportation devices, according to Figure 6.5, must have their devices
removed before starting the motor installation.
ENGLISH
least 1.5 times the bolt diameter. This thread engagement length should be evaluated in more severe
applications and increased accordingly.
Figure 6.6 shows the mounting system of a foot mounted motor indicating the minimum required thread
engagement length.
L = 1.5 x D
D
Figure 6.6 - Mounting system of a foot mounted motor
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors
The drawings of the flange mounting dimensions, IEC and NEMA flanges, can be checked in the technical
catalogue.
The coupling of the driven equipment to the motor flange must be properly dimensioned to ensure the required
concentricity of the assembly.
Depending on the flange type, the mounting can be performed from the motor to the driven equipment flange
(flange FF (IEC) or D (NEMA)) or from the driven equipment flange to the motor (flange C (DIN or NEMA)).
For the mounting process from the driven equipment flange to the motor, you must consider the bolt length,
flange thickness and the thread depth of the motor flange.
If the motor flange has tapped through-holes, the length of the mounting bolts must not exceed the
tapped through-hole length of the motor flange, thus preventing damage to the winding head.
For flange mounting the thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at least 1.5 times the bolt
diameter. In severe applications, longer thread engagement length may be required.
In severe applications or if large motors are flange mounted, a foot or pad mounting may be required in addition
to the flange mounting (Figure 6.7). The motor must never be supported on its cooling fins.
Figure 6.7 - Mounting method of flange mounted motors with frame base support
Note:
When liquid (for example oil) is likely to come into contact with the shaft seal, please contact your local WEG representative.
The mounting rods and the fan case wall must be sufficiently stiff to prevent the transmission of excessive
vibration to the machine set (motor & fan). Figure 6.8 shows the pad mounting system.
6.3. Balancing
Unbalanced machines generate vibration which can result in damage to the motor. WEG motors are
dynamically balanced with “half key” and without load (uncoupled). Special balancing quality level must be
stated in the Purchase Order.
The transmission elements, such as pulleys, couplings, etc., must balanced with “half key” before they
are mounted on the motor shaft.
The balance quality grade meets the applicable standards for each product line.
The maximum balancing deviation must be recorded in the installation report
6.4. Couplings
Couplings are used to transmit the torque from the motor shaft to the shaft of the driven machine. The following
aspects must be considered when couplings are installed:
g Use proper tools for coupling assembly & disassembly to avoid damages to the motor and bearings.
Whenever possible, use flexible couplings, since they can absorb eventual residual misalignments during the
g
machine operation.
The maximum loads and speed limits informed in the coupling and motor manufacturer catalogues cannot
g
be exceeded.
g Level and align the motor as specified in sections 6.5 and 6.6, respectively.
Remove or fix the shaft key firmly when the motor is operated without coupling in order to prevent
accidents.
Do not use roller bearings for direct coupling, unless sufficient radial load is expected.
Excessive belt tension will damage the bearings and cause unexpected accidents such as breakage of
the motor shaft.
Motors designed with sleeve bearings must be operated with direct coupling to the driven machine or a
ENGLISH
gearbox. Pulley and belts can not be applied for sleeve bearing motors.
Motors designed with sleeve bearings have 3 (three) marks on the shaft end. The center mark is the indication
of the magnetic center and the 2 (two) outside marks indicate the allowed limits of the rotor axial movement, as
shown in Figure 6.9.
The motor must be so coupled that during operation the arrow on the frame is placed over the central mark
indicating the rotor magnetic center. During start-up, or even during operation, the rotor may freely move
between the two outside marks when the driven machine exerts an axial load on the motor shaft. However,
under no circumstance, the motor can operate continuously with axial forces on the bearing.
Axial Clearance
For coupling evaluation consider the maximum axial bearing clearance as shown in Table 6.1.
The axial clearance of the driven machine and coupling influence the maximum bearing clearance.
* For Motors in accordance with API 541, the total axial clearance is 12.7 mm
The sleeve bearings used by WEG were not designed to support axial load continuously.
Under no circumstance must the motor be operated continuously at its axial clearance limits.
6.5. Leveling
The motor must be leveled to correct any deviations in flatness arising from the manufacturing process and the
material structure rearrangement. The leveling can be carried out by a leveling screw fixed on the motor foot or
on the flange or by means of thin compensation shims. After the leveling process, the leveling height between
the motor mounting base and the motor cannot exceed 0.1 mm.
If a metallic base is used to level the height of the motor shaft end and the shaft end of the driven machine, level
only the metallic base relating to the concrete base.
Record the maximum leveling deviations in the installation report.
6.6. Alignment
The correct alignment between the motor and the driven machine is one of the most important variables that
extends the useful service life of the motor. Incorrect coupling alignment generates high loads and vibrations
ENGLISH
reducing the useful life of the bearings and even resulting in shaft breakages. Figure 6.10 illustrates the
misalignment between the motor and the driven machine.
Motor shaft Driven machine shaft
Max.
misalignment
Driven machine
offset (mm)
Motor
offset (mm)
Alignment procedures must be carried out using suitable tools and devices, such as dial gauge, laser alignment
instruments, etc. The motor shaft must be aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
The maximum allowed eccentricity for a complete shaft turn should not exceed 0.03 mm, when alignment is
made with dial gauges, as shown in Figure 6.11. Ensure a gap between couplings to compensate the thermal
expansion between the shafts as specified by the coupling manufacturer.
Dial gauge
Reference
Line
GAP
Parallel alignment Angular alignment
If alignment is made by a laser instrument, please consider the instructions and recommendations provided by
the laser instrument manufacturer.
The alignment should be checked at ambient temperature with machine at operating temperature.
Pulley and belt couplings must be so aligned that the driver pulley center lies in the same plane of the driven
pulley center and the motor shaft and the shaft of the driven machine are perfectly parallel.
After completing the alignment procedures, ensure that mounting devices do not change the motor and
machine alignment and leveling resulting into machine damage during operation.
It is recommended to record the maximum alignment deviation in the Installation Report.
Inlet
ENGLISH
Drain
Outlet
Figure 6.12 - Oil supply and drain system of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors
Before connecting the motor, check if the power supply voltage and the frequency comply with the
motor nameplate data. All wiring must be made according to the connection diagram on the motor
nameplate. Please consider the connection diagrams in the Table 6.2 as reference value.
To prevent accidents, check if motor has been solidly grounded in accordance with the applicable standards.
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 L2 L3
Variable Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L36 L1
L1
L1 4 L252 L3
1 L2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2 L3 L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW L2 L3
SPEED L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2ROTA
ROTA L3
L11 L2
LOW
LOW L2
L33
SPEED
2SPEED
SPEED L3
L1
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 1 L2 L22
SPEED
L33
SPEED
SPEED L3
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1
L2
1 ROTAÇROTAÇ
ROTA
L2 2 L3 L3
LOW
44 5SPEED SPEED 66 HIGH 44 SPEED SPEED
55 66 MENOR
MENOR 44 ROTAÇ 55 66
LOW
LOW4 55 5SPEED 6 HIGH
HIGH 4 SPEED 5 66 MENOR 4 ROTAÇ 5 6
4
4LOW
4 5 SPEED 6
6 HIGH44 5 5SPEED 6 4 ROTA
4 5
5 6 6
4L1
411 L2 55522 6L3 6
633 4L14
411 L2 555
22 6L3 6
63 4
L14
411 L2 55522 6L 6
63
14 225 336 14 225 33 3 14 225 33 3
1
1LOW 2 SPEED 3 11 2 2SPEED 36 MENOR 1
1 ROTA 2 3 3
Δ - YY 1
11 22 33 2 3 HIGH 1
11 22 33 3 1
11 22 33 2
6 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Constant Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 L2
4 L25 L3 L3
L363 L1
L1
1
4 L25 L3L2 2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2 ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3
L33
L11 2SPEED 3 HIGH 1 L2 SPEED
2 3 MENOR ROTA 2
44 L2
LOW
LOW SPEED
55SPEED L3
66 HIGH
HIGH L144 SPEED 55 L3
SPEED
SPEED 6 MENOR
MENOR L144 ROTAÇ L2
ROTA 55 L6
Double Speed LOW
LOW44 5SPEED 5SPEED 6 6 HIGH
HIGH 44 SPEED 5 66 6 MENOR 4 ROTA 5
4LOW
4 5 SPEED
5 6
6 HIGH 4 5
4 5SPEED
5 6
6 MENOR 4
4 ROTA
4
5
5 6
5 66
Dahlander 441 L2
L1 552 6 L3633 4 411 L2
L1 552 6L3 633 441 L2
L1 552 6 63
1 1
14 225 336 2 114 225 3362 11
14 22 25 L3
1 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 3 1 ROTA 2 3 3
111LOW 22 SPEED 33 111 222SPEED
HIGH 33 MENOR 1
11 22 33 2
YY - Δ L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L22 L3
L1L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 63 L1 L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L363 L1L1
L1 41 L2 L25 L L
Constant Output L1
L1 LOW L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1 LOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3L3
LOW
L11 L2 2SPEED L33 HIGH L1 1 L2 SPEED
2 L3 3 MENOR L1 ROTA 2
LOW
LOW
LOW SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
SPEED
SPEED
SPEED MENORROTAÇ
MENOR ROTAL
L2
MENOR
7 88 ROTAÇ 99
77 8LOW 8LOW 99SPEED 77 88 HIGH 99HIGHSPEED 77 88 99 7 8
MENOR
7 8 ROTA 9
7 7 88 9 9 SPEED 77 8 8 99 SPEED
77 88 99 77
11 882L18 9
93 L
3
777
71 8
1 2L1
8 L293 L3
3
9 71 2
17 82 39 93L1 L2 7 71L3 8
1 822 99 93
3 777 1 822 2 99 L29 3
1 82 2 993 3 771 1 882 93 7711 82 3 1 3
117 82
4 28LOW
5 3
669SPEED11 17 82
4 28 93
5 3 9
6HIGH 17 82
SPEED
4 28 93
5 3669 11
447 22
11MENOR
4 5
2
58 3ROTA
5 36
3
3669
111
4 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 14 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
66
6 11
1
44
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 441 25 52 6 63
41
4 552 66 5 6 3 4 1 5 2 6 3 4
4 55 663
1 5 2 6 444 5
55 L3 66 6
44
L1 L258 L3 69 444 L2
L1 555 L3 666 4L1
4L1 L258 L3 69 L1L1
L1
L2
74 L2L2
L2 8 L3 L39
9 Δ - Y - YY L1
L1
L1
7
L1
4 L2 L2
L2 L3 6
L25L3 L3
L3 L1 7
L14 L2
L1 L2
L1 L25 L3
L2 L3
8 L3
L3
L36
9 L1
L1
ONLY
7
L14 L2 L2
L25L3
L2FOR
L3
L3
L3 6
L1
L1
L1 L25L3
MENOR
L2
MENOR L3 6
L3
L1 1 L2L2 L3 L1 L2 ONLY
L1 L2 FOR
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
MENOR
L2
MENOR 2L3 L3 3
LOW
LOWL1
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L3 3 HIGH
HIGH L11L2
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L33 L11 L2
ONLY
L1
ONLY L2FOR2FOR
L3L3 3 MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
L1 L2
LOW
LOW
LOW L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED
4 SPEED L3 6
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED L3 ONLY
STARTING
ONLYL1
STARTING
STARTING
ONLY L2FOR
FOR
5 L36
FOR
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
4
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR 5 L36
LOW
LOW
5 HIGH4SPEED 5 6 ONLY 4 FOR
STARTING
STARTING ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED ONLY FOR
STARTING
STARTING
STARTING
ROTAÇÃO
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED
L1 L211 11L3 2 2
2 3 3 HIGH
3 L1 L2 L3 66 SPEED 6 6 4 4 L15 5
4STARTING5L2 L3 L1 L2
ROTAÇÃO 11 L322 33
1 2 33
1 2 2 3 3 6 4 4 5 5 MENOR 11 2 2 3
LOW SPEED 111 222 333 HIGH SPEED 666 444ONLY 555 FOR 111 222 333
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 6 L2 L3
STARTING
4 5 ROTAÇÃO L1 1 L2 2 L3
Double Speed L1 L2
L1
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1
L1 L2
L2 L3
L
6 - LOWL1 L2
L1 L2
L2 SPEED L3
L3 HIGH
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
L2ROTA
ROTA
L3
L3
L3
Double Winding LOW
L1
LOW
L1
LOW
LOW
L2
L2
1 SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
2 L3
SPEED
L3
L3 3
HIGH
L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH
HIGH
L2
L2
6 SPEED
SPEED
SPEEDL3
4 L3
SPEED
L3 5
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 1 ROTA
L2
L2 ROTA
ROTA2 L
L3
L3 3
LOW L1 L2
SPEED HIGH L1 L2
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2
ROTA
LOW
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED MENOR ROTAÇ ROTA
LOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROT
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L
Equivalent table for lead identificationLOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROTA
Lead identification on the wiring diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NEMA MG 1 Part 2 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12
IEC 60034-8 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U3 V3 W3 U4 V4 W4
Single Speed
JIS (JEC 2137) - up to 6 terminals U V W X Y Z
JIS (JEC 2137) - above 6 terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U5 V5 W5 U6 V6 W6
Double Speed NEMA MG 1 Part 21) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
(Dahlander / IEC 60034-8 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
Double Winding) JIS (JEC 2137) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
1) NEMA MG 1 Part 2 defines T1 to T12 for two or more winding, however WEG adopts 1U to 4W.
If motors are supplied without terminal blocks, insulate the cable terminals with suitable insulation material that
meets the power supply voltage and the insulation class indicated on the motor nameplate.
Ensure correct tightening torque for the power cable and grounding connections as specified in Table 8.7
The clearance distance (see Figure 6.13) between non-insulated live parts with each other and between
grounded parts must be as indicated in Table 6.3.
Clearance distance
Clearance distance
ENGLISH
Clearance distance Clearance distance
Even when the motor is off, dangerous voltages may be present inside the terminal box used for the
space heater supply or winding energization when the winding is used as heating element.
Motor capacitors will hold a charge even after the power has been cut off. Do not touch the capacitors
and/or motor terminals, before discharging the capacitors completely.
After the motor connection has been completed, ensure that no tool or foreign body has been left inside
the terminal box.
Unused cable inlet holes in the terminal box must be properly closed to ensure the degree of protection
indicated on the motor nameplate.
The cable inlets used for power supply and control must be fitted with components (for example, cable-
glands and conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations in each country.
If the motor is fitted with accessories, such as brakes and forced cooling systems, these devices must
be connected to the power supply according to the information provided on their nameplates and with
special care as indicated above.
All protection devices, including overcurrent protection, must be set according to the rated machine conditions.
These protection devices must protect the machine against short circuit, phase fault or locked rotor condition.
The motor protection devices must be set according to the applicable standards.
Check the direction of rotation of the motor shaft. If there is no limitation for the use of unidirectional fans, the
shaft rotation direction can be changed by reversing any two of the phase connections. For single-phase motor,
check the connection diagram indicated on the motor nameplate.
Do not apply test voltage above 2.5 V on thermistors and current above 1 mA on RTDs (Pt-100)
according to IEC 60751 standard.
Figure 6.14 and Figure 6.15 show the connection diagram of the bimetal thermal protector (thermostats) and
thermistors, respectively.
The alarm temperature limits and thermal protection shutdowns can be defined according to the application;
however these temperature limits can not exceed the values in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4 - Maximum activation temperature of the thermal protections
Maximum temperature of the protection setting (°C)
Component Insulation class
Alarm Tripping
B - 130
Winding F 130 155
H 155 180
Bearing All 110 120
Notes:
1) The number and type of the installed protection devices are stated on the accessory nameplate of the motor.
2) If the motor is supplied with calibrated resistance, (for example, Pt-100), the motor protection system must be set according to the
operating temperatures indicated in Table 6.4.
ENGLISH
Table 6.5 - Equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω
-29 88.617 17 106.627 63 124.390 109 141.908 155 159.180
-28 89.011 18 107.016 64 124.774 110 142.286 156 159.553
-27 89.405 19 107.404 65 125.157 111 142.664 157 159.926
-26 89.799 20 107.793 66 125.540 112 143.042 158 160.298
-25 90.193 21 108.181 67 125.923 113 143.420 159 160.671
-24 90.587 22 108.570 68 126.306 114 143.797 160 161.043
-23 90.980 23 108.958 69 126.689 115 144.175 161 161.415
-22 91.374 24 109.346 70 127.072 116 144.552 162 161.787
-21 91.767 25 109.734 71 127.454 117 144.930 163 162.159
-20 92.160 26 110.122 72 127.837 118 145.307 164 162.531
-19 92.553 27 110.509 73 128.219 119 145.684 165 162.903
-18 92.946 28 110.897 74 128.602 120 146.061 166 163.274
-17 93.339 29 111.284 75 128.984 121 146.438 167 163.646
-16 93.732 30 111.672 76 129.366 122 146.814 168 164.017
-15 94.125 31 112.059 77 129.748 123 147.191 169 164.388
-14 94.517 32 112.446 78 130.130 124 147.567 170 164.760
-13 94.910 33 112.833 79 130.511 125 147.944 171 165.131
-12 95.302 34 113.220 80 130.893 126 148.320 172 165.501
-11 95.694 35 113.607 81 131.274 127 148.696 173 165.872
-10 96.086 36 113.994 82 131.656 128 149.072 174 166.243
-9 96.478 37 114.380 83 132.037 129 149.448 175 166.613
-8 96.870 38 114.767 84 132.418 130 149.824 176 166.984
-7 97.262 39 115.153 85 132.799 131 150.199 177 167.354
-6 97.653 40 115.539 86 133.180 132 150.575 178 167.724
-5 98.045 41 115.925 87 133.561 133 150.950 179 168.095
-4 98.436 42 116.311 88 133.941 134 151.326 180 168.465
-3 98.827 43 116.697 89 134.322 135 151.701 181 168.834
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
heaters (110-127/220-240 V), see Figure 6.17.
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.
Autotransformer
3 leads
Soft-starter
Star-Delta
6 leads Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Series/Parallel
Part Winding
9 leads
Autotransformer
ENGLISH
Soft-Starter
Star-Delta
Series/Parallel
12 leads Part Winding
Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Table 6.7 shows examples of possible indirect starting methods to be used according to the voltage indicated
on the motor nameplate and the power supply voltage.
Table 6.7 - Starting methods x voltage
Nameplate Operating Autotransformer Starting by series/ Part-winding Starting by
Star-delta
voltage voltage Starting parallel switch Starting soft-starter
220 V YES YES NO NO YES
220/380 V
380 V NO YES NO NO YES
220 V NO YES YES YES YES
220/440 V
440 V NO YES NO NO YES
230 V NO YES YES YES YES
230/460 V
460 V NO YES NO NO YES
380/660 V 380 V YES YES NO NO YES
220 V YES YES YES YES YES
220/380/440 V 380 V NO YES YES YES YES
440 V YES YES NO NO YES
The WQuattro line motors must be started direct on-line (DOL) or driven by a frequency inverter in scalar
mode.
The operation with frequency inverter must be stated in the Purchase Order since this drive type may
require some changes of the motor design.
The frequency inverter used to drive motors up to 690 V must be fitted with Pulse With Modulation (PWM) with
vector control.
When a motor is driven by a frequency inverter at lower frequencies than the rated frequency, you must reduce
the motor torque to prevent motor overheating. The torque reduction (derating torque) can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available on the site
www.weg.net.
g That the motor can supply max. 95% of its rated output;
Information on the selection of the power cables between the frequency inverter and the motor can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.
ENGLISH
Motors designed for rated voltages up to 690 V, when driven by frequency inverter, do not require the use of
dV/dT filters, provided that following criteria are considered.
Criteria for the selection of motors with round enameled wire when driven by frequency inverter 1
Inverter MTBP 3
Peak voltage at the dV/dt
Motor rated votage 2 Rise Time 3 Time between pulses
motor terminals (max) inverter output (max)
(min.) (min)
Vnom ≤ 460 V ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
460 < Vnom ≤ 575 V ≤ 1800 V ≤ 6500 V/µs
≥ 0,1 µs ≥ 6 µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 4 ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 5 ≤ 2200 V ≤ 7800 V/µs
Notes:
1. For the application of motors with round enameled wires designed for 690 < Vnom ≤ 1100 V, please contact WEG.
2. For the application of dual voltage motors, example 380/660 V, consider the lower voltage (380 V).
3. Information supplied by the inverter manufacturer.
4. When not stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
5. When stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
Table 6.8 - Criteria to be considered when using motor with prewound coils to be drive by frequency inverters
When motors are supplied with shaft grounding system, monitor the grounding brush constantly during
its operation and, when it reaches the end of its useful life, it must be replaced by another brush with the
same specification.
The non-compliance with the criteria and recommendations indicated in this manual may void the
product warranty.
Note:
to select the maximum allowed motor speed, consider the motor torque derating curve.
For more information on the application of frequency inverters, contact WEG or check the “Technical Guidelines
for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.
7. Commissioning
7.1. Initial Start-up
After finishing the installation procedures and before starting the motor for the first time or after a long period
without operation, the following items must be checked:
If the nameplate data (voltage, current, connection diagram, degree of protection, cooling system, service
g
If the motor driving system ensures that the motor speed does not exceed the max. allowed speed indicated
g
in Table 6.10.
g Measure the winding insulation resistance, making sure it complies with the specified values in item 5.4.
Inspect the motor terminal box for damage and ensure that it is clean and dry and all contacts are rust-free,
g
the seals are in perfect operating conditions and all unused threaded holes are properly closed thus ensuring
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
Check if the motor wiring connections, including grounding and auxiliary equipment connection, have been
g
carried out properly and are in accordance with the recommendations in item 6.9.
Check the operating conditions of the installed auxiliary devices (brake, encoder, thermal protection device,
g
oxidation is detected, relubricate the bearings as described in item 8.2. If the motors are stored for more than
two years, the bearings must be replaced before starting the motor.
g that the motor is not started or operated with axial or radial loads;
that if the motor is stored for a period equal or longer than the oil change interval, the oil must be changed
g
ENGLISH
before starting the motor.
g Inspect the capacitor operating condition, if any. If motors are installed for more than two years, but were
never commissioned, it is recommended to change the start capacitors since they lose their operating
characteristics.
g Ensure that the air inlet and outlet opening are not blocked. The minimum clearance to the nearest wall (L)
should be at least ¼ of the fan cover diameter (D), see Figure 7.1. The intake air temperature must be at
ambient temperature.
L
Please consider the minimum distances shown in the Table 7.1 as reference value
Table 7.1 - Minimum distance between the fan cover and wall
Frame size Distance between the fan cover and the wall (L)
IEC NEMA mm inches
63 - 25 0.96
71 - 26 1.02
80 - 30 1.18
90 143/5 33 1.30
100 - 36 1.43
112 182/4 41 1.61
132 213/5 50 1.98
160 254/6 65 2.56
180 284/6 68 2.66
200 324/6 78 3.08
225 364/5
85 3.35
250 404/5
444/5
280 445/7 108 4.23
447/9
L447/9
504/5
315 122 4.80
5006/7/8
5009/10/11
586/7
588/9
355 136 5.35
5807/8/9
5810/11/12
6806/7/8
400 147 5.79
6809/10/11
450 7006/10 159 6.26
500 8006/10 171 6.73
ENGLISH
g nsure correct water flow rate and water temperature when water cooled motors are used. See item 7.2.
e
g ensure
that all rotating parts, such as pulleys, couplings, external fans, shaft, etc. are protected against
accidental contact.
Other tests and inspections not included in the manual may be required, depending on the specific installation,
application and/or motor characteristics.
After all previous inspections have been carried out, proceed as follows to start the motor:
g Start the motor on no-load (if possible) and check the motor direction of rotation. Check for the presence of
any abnormal noise, vibration or other abnormal operating conditions.
g Ensure the motor starts smoothly. If any abnormal operating condition is noticed, switch off the motor, check
the assembly system and connections before the motor is started again.
g If excessive vibrations are noticed, check if the motor mounting bolts are well tightened or if the vibrations are
not generated and transmitted from adjacent installed equipment. Check the motor vibration periodically and
ensure that the vibration limits are as specified in item 7.2.1.
g Start the motor at rated load during a short time and compare the operating current with the rated current
indicated on the nameplate.
g Continue to measure the following motor variables until thermal equilibrium is reached: current, voltage,
bearing and motor frame temperature, vibration and noise levels.
g Record the measured current and voltage values on the Installation Report for future comparisons.
As induction motors have high inrush currents during start-up, the acceleration of high inertia load requires an
extended starting time to reach full speed resulting in fast motor temperature rise. Successive starts within
short intervals will result in winding temperature increases and can lead to physical insulation damage reducing
the useful life of the insulation system. If the duty cycle S1 / CONT. is specified on the motor nameplate, this
means that the motor has been designed for:
two successive starts: first start from cold condition, i. e., the motor windings are at room temperature and
g
The Troubleshooting Chart in section 10 provides a basic list of unusual cases that may occur during motor
operation with the respective corrective actions
96 Manual of Electric Motors
www.weg.net
For operating temperatures and altitudes differing from those above, the factors indicated in Table 7.2 must be
applied to the nominal motor power rating in order to determine the derated available output (Pmax = Pnom x
correction factor).
Table 7.2 - Correction factors for altitude and ambient temperature.
Altitude (m)
T (°C)
1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
10 0.97 0.92 0.88
15 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.86
20 1.00 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.83
25 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.85 0.81
30 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.78
35 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.88 0.84 0.80 0.75
40 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.80 0.76 0.71
45 0.95 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.81 0.78 0.74 0.69
50 0.92 0.90 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.72 0.67
55 0.88 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.70 0.65
60 0.83 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.70 0.67 0.62
65 0.79 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.62 0.58
70 0.74 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.58 0.53
75 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.53 0.49
80 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.48 0.44
Motors installed inside enclosures (cubicles) must be ensured an air renewal rate in the order of one cubic
meter per second for each 100 kW installed power or fraction of installed power. Totally Enclosed Air Over
ENGLISH
motors - TEAO (fan and exhaust / smoke extraction) are supplied without cooling fan and the manufacturer of
the driven machine is responsible for sufficient motor cooling. If no minimum required air speed between motor
fins is indicated on the motor nameplate, ensure the air speed indicated in the table 7.3 is provided. The values
shown in Table 7.3 are valid for 60 Hz motors. To obtain the minimum air speed for 50 Hz motors, multiply the
values in the table by 0.83.
Table 7.3 - Minimum required air speed between motor fins (metres/second).
Frame Poles
IEC NEMA 2 4 6 8
63 to 90 143/5 14 7 5 4
100 to 132 182/4 to 213/5 18 10 8 6
160 to 200 254/6 to 324/6 20 20 12 7
225 to 280 364/5 to 444/5 22 22 18 12
315 to 355 445/7 to 588/9 25 25 20 15
The voltage and frequency variations may affect the performance characteristics and the electromagnetic
compatibility of the motor. The power supply variations should not exceed the values specified in the applicable
standards. Examples:
ABNT NBR 17094 - Parts 1 and 2. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for a combined
g
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods.
g IEC 60034-1. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for combined variation in voltage and
frequency:
g Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency.
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods. For multivoltage motors (example 380-
415/660 V), a ±5% voltage variation from the rated voltage is allowed.
Manual of Electric Motors 97
www.weg.net
g NEMA MG 1 Part 12. The motor has been designed to be operated in one of the following variations:
g ±10% of the rated voltage, with rated frequency;
g ±5% of the rated frequency, with rated voltage;
g A combined variation in voltage and frequency of ±10%, provided the frequency variation does not exceed
±5%.
If the motor is cooled by ambient air, clean the air inlet and outlet openings and cooling fins at regular intervals
to ensure a free airflow over the frame surface. The hot air should never be returned to the motor. The cooling
air must be at room temperature limited to the temperature range indicated on the motor nameplate (if no room
temperature is specified, please consider a temperature range between -20 °C and +40 °C).
Table 7.4 shows the minimum required water flow for water cooled motors considering the different frame sizes
and the maximum allowed temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor. The inlet
water temperature should not exceed 40 °C.
Table 7.4 - Minimum required water flow and the maximum allowed
temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor
Motors fitted with oil mist lubrication systems can be operated continuously for a maximum of one hour after
ENGLISH
Considering the sun’s heat increases the operating temperature, externally mounted motors should always be
protected from direct sunlight exposure.
Each and every deviation from the normal operating condition (tripping of the thermal protection, noise and
vibration level increase, temperature and current rise) should be investigated and corrected by WEG Authorized
Service Centers.
Motors fitted with cylindrical roller bearings require a minimum radial load to ensure a normal operation.
For information regarding the radial preload, please contact WEG.
7.2.1.Limits of vibration
The vibration severity is the maximum vibration value measured at all positions and in all directions as
recommended in the standard IEC 60034-14. Table 7.5 specifies the limits of the maximum vibrations
magnitudes according to standard IEC 60034-14 for shaft heights IEC 56 to 400, for vibrations grades A and B.
The vibration severity limits in Table 7.5 are given as RMS values (Root Mean Square values or effective values)
of the vibration speed in mm/s measured in free suspension condition.
Table 7.5 - Recommended limits for the vibration severity according to standard IEC 60034-14
Shaft height [mm] 56 < H < 132 132 < H < 280 H > 280
Vibration Grade Vibration severity on elastic base [mm/s RMS]
A 1.6 2.2 2.8
B 0.7 1.1 1.8
Notes:
1-T he values in Table 7.5 are valid for measurements carried out with decoupled machines (without load) operated at rated voltage and
frequency.
2 - The values in Table 7.5 are valid regardless of the direction of rotation of the machine.
3-T he values in Table 7.5 are not applicable to single-phase motors, three-phase motors powered by a single-phase system or to
machines mounted in situ or coupled with inertia flywheels or to loads.
According to NEMA MG 1, the allowed vibration limit for standard motors is 0.15 in/s (peak vibration in in/s).
Note:
For the load operation condition, the use of the standard ISO 10816-3 is recommended for evaluating the motor vibration limits. In the
load condition the motor vibration will be influenced by several factors, such as, type of the coupled load, condition of the motor fixation,
alignment condition under load, structure or base vibration due to other equipments, etc.
8. Maintenance
The purpose of the maintenance is to extend the useful life of the equipment. The non-compliance with one of
these previous items can cause unexpected machine failures.
If motors with cylindrical roller or angular contact bearings are to be transported during the maintenance
procedures, the shaft locking device must always be fitted. All HGF motors, regardless of the bearing type,
must always be transported with the shaft locking device fitted.
All repairs, disassembly and assembly related services must be carried out only by qualified and well-trained
personnel by using proper tools and techniques. Make sure that the machine has stopped and it is
disconnected from the power supply, including the accessory devices (space heater, brake, etc.), before any
servicing is undertaken.
The company does not assume any responsibility or liability for repair services or maintenance operations
executed by non-authorized Service Centers or by non qualified service personnel. The company shall have no
obligation or liability whatsoever to the buyer for any indirect, special, consequential or incidental loss or
damage caused or arising from the company’s proven negligence
8.1. General Inspection
The inspection intervals depend on the motor type, application and installation conditions. Proceed as follows
during inspection:
g V
isually inspect the motor and coupling. Check if abnormal noises, vibrations, excessive heating, wear signs,
misalignment or damaged parts are noticed. Replace the damaged parts as required.
g Measure the insulation resistance according to the item 5.4.
g C
lean the motor enclosure. Remove oil spills and dust accumulation from the motor frame surface to ensure
a better heat transfer to the surrounding ambient.
g Check cooling fan condition and clean the air inlet & outlet openings to ensure a free air flow over the motor.
g Investigate the actual condition of the seals and replace them, if required.
ENGLISH
g D
rain the condensed water from inside the motor. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs to ensure the degree
of protection as indicated on the motor nameplate. The motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is
at the lowest position (see item 6).
g C
heck the connections of the power supply cables, ensuring the correct clearance distance between live and
grounded parts, as specified in Table 6.3.
g C
heck if the tightening torque of the bolted connections and mounting bolts meets the tightening torque
specified in Table 8.7.
g C
heck the status of the cable passages, the cable gland seals and the seals inside the terminal box and
replace them, if required.
g C
heck the bearing operating conditions. Check for the presence of any abnormal noise, vibration or other
abnormal operating conditions, like motor temperature rise. Check the oil level, the lube oil condition and
compare the workings hours with the informed life time.
g Record and file all changes performed on the motor.
Do not reuse damaged or worn parts. Damaged or worn parts must be replaced by parts supplied by
the manufacturer and must be installed as if they were the original parts.
8.2. Lubrication
Proper lubrication plays a vital role in the motor performance. Only use the grease or oil types, amounts and
lubrication intervals recommended for the bearings. This information is available on the motor nameplate and
the lubrication procedures must be carried out according to the type of lubricant (oil or grease).
When the motor is fitted with thermal protection devices for bearing temperature control, consider the operating
temperature limits shown in Table 6.4.
The maximum operating temperature of motors used in special applications may differ from those shown in
Table 6.4. The grease and oil disposal should be made in compliance with applicable laws in each country
Please contact WEG when motors are to be installed in special environments or used for special
applications.
The lubrication intervals specified in Table 8.1, Table 8.2, Table 8.3 and Table 8.4 consider an absolute
temperature on the bearing of 70 °C (up to frame size IEC 200 / NEMA 324/6) and 85 °C (for frame size IEC
225 / NEMA 364/5 and above), the motor running at rated speed, a motor mounted in horizontal position and
greased with Mobil Polyrex EM grease. Any variation of the parameters listed above must be evaluated.
ENGLISH
Table 8.3 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50Hz 60Hz
2 6314 27 3100 2100
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
6320 50 4500 4500
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T 4-8
6316 34 4500 4500
2 6314 27 3100 2100
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
6322 60 4500 4500
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6315 30 2700 1800
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8T and
6324 72 4500 4500
400 C/D/E 6809/10/11T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6220 31 2500 1400
6328 93 4500 3300
4
450 7006/10 6322 60 4500 4500
6328 93 4500 4500
6-8
6322 60 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
560 8806/10 4-8
*Upon request
630 9606/10 4-8
Table 8.4 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50 Hz 60 Hz
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8 and 4 4300 2900
NU320 50
315C/D/E 5009/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9 and 4 3500 2200
NU322 60
355C/D/E 5810/11/12 6-8 4500 4500
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and 4 2900 1800
NU324 72
400C/D/E 6809/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
4 2000 1400
450 7006/10 6 NU328 93 4500 3200
8 4500 4500
4 1700 1000
500 8006/10 6 NU330 104 4100 2900
8 4500 4500
4 75 2600 1600
560 8806/10 NU228 + 6228
6-8 106 4500 4500
4 92 1800 1000
630 9606/10 6 NU232 + 6232 120 4300 3100
8 140 4500 4500
For each increment of 15 ºC above the bearing temperature, the relubrication intervals given in the Table must
be halved. The relubrication interval of motors designed by the manufacturer for mounting in horizontal position,
but installed in vertical position (with WEG authorization), must be halved.
For special applications, such as: high and low temperatures, aggressive environments, driven by frequency
inverter (VFD - frequency inverter), etc., please contact WEG about the required amount of grease and the
relubrication intervals.
Motors without grease fittings must be lubricated in accordance with the existing Maintenance Plan. Motor
disassembly must be carried out as specified in Item 8.3. If motors are fitted with shielded bearings (for
example, ZZ, DDU, 2RS, VV), these bearings must be replaced at the end of the grease service life.
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting
To lubricate the bearings with the motor stopped, proceed as follows:
Motors with grease fittings must be stopped to be lubricated. Proceed as follows:
Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g
Pump in approximately half of the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate and run the motor for about
g
Lower again the grease inlet protection and reinstall the grease outlet protection.
g
To grease the motor while running, proceed as follows:
Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g
If Motors are provided with a spring device for grease removal, the grease excess must be removed by pulling
the rod and cleaning the spring until the spring does not remove more grease.
The used grease must have in its formulation corrosion and oxidation inhibitors.
g
In general terms, greases with the same type of soap are compatible to each other. However, depending on the
proportion of the mixture there may be incompatibility. In such a case, it is not recommended to mix different
types of greases without contacting the supplier or WEG beforehand.
102 Manual of Electric Motors
www.weg.net
The bearing lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes in the oil
properties are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked
every day and must be kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities should be used.
Note:
The HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust are supplied with grease lubricated DE-bearings and with oil lubricated NDE-
bearings. The DE-bearings must be lubricated according to recommendations in item 8.2.1. Table 8.5 specifies the oil type and the
amount of oil required for this motor lubrication.
Table 8.5 - Oil properties for HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust
ENGLISH
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin mineral oil with
400L/A/B e 6806/7/8T e 8000 DTA 40 / antifoam and
4-8 29320 37 SHC 629 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
additives
450 7006/10 4-8 29320 45
Oil outlet
The lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes on the oil properties
are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked every day
and kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities are to be used.
All repair services on motors should be always performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with
the applicable laws and regulations in each country. Always use proper tools and devices for motor
disassembly and assembly.
ENGLISH
Disassembly and assembly services can be carried out only after the motor has been disconnected
from the power supply and is completely stopped.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals inside the terminal box since capacitors can
retain electrical charge for long periods of time even when they are not connected directly to a power source or
when space heaters are connected to the motor or when the motor windings are used as space heaters.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals when they are driven by frequency inverter even
when they are completely stopped.
Record the installation conditions such as terminal connection diagram, alignment / leveling conditions before
starting the disassembly procedures. These records should be considered for later assembly.
Disassemble the motor carefully without causing scratches on machined surfaces or damaging the threads.
Assemble the motor on a flat surface ensuring a good support base. Footless motors must be fixed/locked on
the base to prevent accidents.
Handle the motor carefully to not damage the insulated components such as windings, insulated rolling
bearings, power cables etc.
Seal elements, such as joint seals and bearing seals should always be replaced when wear or damage is
noticed.
Motors with degree of protection higher than IP55 are supplied with joint and screw seal Loctite 5923 (Henkel)
Clean the components and apply a new coat of Loctite 5923 on the surfaces before assembly.
ENGLISH
mettallic stop/cord)
Hex bolt/hex socket bolt
- - - 8 to 15 18 to 30 25 to 40 35 to 50 -
(with flat seal)
Terminal blocks 1 to 1,5 1,5 to 4 3 to 6,5 6 to 9 10 to 18 15,5 to 30 30 to 50 -
Grounding terminals - 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 -
To prevent electrical shock, discharge the motor terminals immediately before, and after each
measurement. If the motor is equipped with capacitors, these must be discharged before beginning any
repair.
9. Environmental Information
9.1. Packaging
WEG electric motors are supplied in cardboard, plastic or wooden packaging. These materials can be recycled
and must be disposed according to the applicable laws and regulations in each country. All wood used in the
packaging of WEG motors come from the company reforestation program and is not submitted to any chemical
conservation treatment.
9.2. Product
Electric motors consist mainly of ferrous metals (steel plates and cast iron), non ferrous metals (copper and
aluminum) and plastic materials.
In general, electric motors have relatively long service live. However when they must be discarded, WEG
recommends to dismantle the motor, sort the different materials and send them for recycling.
No-recyclable materials should be disposed of at industrial landfills according to the applicable environmental
laws and regulations in each country, or co-processed in cement kilns or incinerated.
The recycling service providers, the disposal in industrial landfills, the waste co-processing or the incineration
process must be properly authorized by the state environment agency to carry out these activities.
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Three-phase
IEC frames 63 to 630
Nema frames 42, 48, 56 and 143 to 9610
……………
Single-phase
IEC frames 63 to 132
Nema frames 42, 48, 56 and 143 to 215
……………
when installed, maintained and used in applications for which they were designed, and in compliance with the relevant
installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions, comply with the requirements of the following European Directives
ENGLISH
Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
Regulation (EC) No 640/2009
Directive 2009/125/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (induction motors are considered inherently benign in terms of electromagnetic compatibility)
Standards:
EN 60034-1/2-1/5/6/7/8/9/11/12/14/30 and 60204-1
From 29/12/2009 on low voltage electric motors are no longer considered under the scope of the current Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC.
For those countries where there is not a WEG own operation, find our local distributor at www.weg.net.
Cod: 50033244 | Rev: 05 | Date (m/y): 04/2013
ISTRUZIONI D’USO E
MANUTENZIONE
DEI MOTORI ASINCRONI
OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORS
BETRIEBS-UND
WARTUNGSANLEITUNG
FÜR ASYNCHRONMOTOREN
MODES D’EMPLOI
ET ENTRETIEN
POUR MOTEURS ASYNCHRONES
INSTRUCCIONES PARA
EMPLEO Y MANUTENCIÓN DE
LOS MOTORES ASÍNCRONOS
MACCHINE ELETTRICHE ROTANTI • ELECTRIC ROTARY
MACHINES • ROTIERENDE ELEKTRISCHE DREH-
MASCHINEN • MACHINES ÉLECTRIQUES TOURNANTES
• MAQUINAS ELÉCTRICAS ROTATORIAS
ca
2 Motori asincroni trifasi autofrenanti. Costruzione chiusa. Ventilazione
esterna. Con freno elettromagnetico in corrente alternata. Grandezze 63
÷ 200. Potenze 0,15 ÷ 37 kW.
Asynchronous three-phase brake motors. Enclosed construction.
External ventilation. With alternate current electromagnetic brake. Size
63 to 200. Power 0,15 to 37 kW.
Drehstrom-Asynchronmotoren mit angebauter Bremse. Geschlossene Ausführung.
Oberflächenkühlung. Mit elektromagnetischer Drehstrom-Federdruck-Scheibenbremse.
Baugrössen 63 bis 200. Leistung 0,15 bis 37 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec frein. Construction fermée. Ventilation extérieure.
Frein électromagnétique en courant alternatif. Hauter d’axe 63 ÷ 200. Puissances 0,15 ÷ 37
kW.
Motores asíncronos trifásicos autofrenantes. Construcción cerrada. Ventilación exterior.
Con freno electromagnético en corriente alterna.Tamaños 63 ÷ 200. Potencias 0,15 ÷ 37
kW.
cch
2 Motori asincroni trifasi autofrenanti. Costruzione chiusa.
Ventilazione esterna. Con freno elettromagnetico in corrente continua
ad alta coppia. Grandezze 63 ÷ 112 – Potenze 0,15 ÷ 5,5 kW.
Asynchronous three-phase brake motors. Enclosed construction.
External ventilation. With direct current electromagnetic brake with
high torque. Sizes 63 to 112 – Power 0.,5 to 5,5 kW.
Drehstrom-Asynchronmotoren mit angebauter Bremse. Geschlossene Ausführung.
Oberflächenkühlung. Mit elektromagnetischer Gleichstrom-Einflächen-Scheibenbremse mit
höherem Bremsmoment. Baugrössen 63 bis 112 - Leistung 0,15 bis 5,5 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasées avec frein. Construction fermée. Ventilation extérieure.
Frein électromagnétique en courant continu avec couple élevé. Hauteur d’axe 63 ÷ 112 -
Puissances 0,15 ÷ 5,5 kW.
Motores asíncronos trifásicos autofrenantes. Construcción cerrada. Ventilación exterior.
Con freno electromagnético en corriente continua con alta torsion. Tamaños 63 ÷ 112 -
Potencias 0,15 ÷ 5,5 kW.
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
4
1U 1V 1W 1U 1V 1W
Motori a due velocità, doppio
avvolgimento
Two-speed motors, double winding
Polumschaltbare Motoren mit zwei
2U 2V 2W 2U 2V 2W getrennten Wicklungen
Moteurs à deux vitesses, double
bobinage
Motores de dos velocidades,
bobinado doble
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
5
1W2 1U2 1V2 1W2 1U2 1V2 Motori a due velocità, doppio avvol-
gimento doppia tensione coll. /
Two-speed motors, double winding
double voltage conn. /
1U1 1V1 1W1 1U1 1V1 1W1 Polumschaltbare Motoren mit zwei
getrennten Wicklungen zwei
Spannungen Schalt. /
Moteurs à deux vitesses, double bo-
2W2 2U2 2V2 2W2 2U2 2V2
binage double tension conn. /
Motores de dos velocidades,
bobinado doble tensión doble con.
2U1 2V1 2W1 2U1 2V1 2W1 /
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Alta velocità
High speed
Höhere Drehzahl
1U1 1V1 1W1 1U1 1V1 1W1 Grande vitesse
Velocidad alta
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
6 CUSCINETTI – BEARINGS – LAGER – ROULEMENTS – COJINETES
1 2 3 4
Motore tipo Poli Cuscinetto lato accoppiamento Cuscinetto lato opposto accoppiamento
Motor Type Poles Bearing coupling side Bearing opposite coupling side
Motor Typ Polzahl Lager A-Seite Lager B-Seite
Moteur type Pôles Roulement côté accouplement Roulement côte opposé à l’accouplement
Motor tipo Polos Cojinete lado acoplamiento Cojinete lado opuesto a l’acoplamiento
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
56 2-8 6201-2Z 6201-2Z 250M-T 2 6313-C3 6313-C3
63 2-8 6202-2Z 6202-2Z 250M-T 4-8 6314-2Z 6314-2Z
71 2-8 6203-2Z 6203-2Z 280S-T 2 6314-C3 6314-C3
80 2-8 6204-2Z 6204-2Z 280M-T 2 6314-C3 6314-C3
90S 2-8 6205-2Z 6205-2Z 280S-T 4-8 6316-C3 6314-C3
90L 2-8 6205-2Z 6205-2Z 280M-T 4-8 6316-C3 6314-C3
100L 2-8 6206-2Z 6206-2Z 315S-T 2 6314-C3 6314-C3
112M-T 2-8 6206-2Z 6206-2Z 315S-T 4-8 6317-C3 6314-C3
132S 2-8 6208-2Z 6208-2Z 315M 2 6314-C3 6314-C3
132M 2-8 6208-2Z 6208-2Z 315M 4-8 NU317 6317-C3
160M-T 2-8 6309-2Z 6308-2Z 315M-n 4-8 NU320 6317-C3
160M 2-8 6309-2Z 6309-2Z 355L-T 2 6317-C3 6317-C3
160L 2-8 6309-2Z 6309-2Z 355L-a 2 6317-C3 6317-C3
180M-T 2-8 6310-2Z 6309-2Z 355L-b 2 6317-C3 6317-C3
180L-T 2-8 6310-2Z 6309-2Z 355L-T 4-8 NU322 6320-C3
200L-T 2-8 6312-2Z 6311-2Z 355L-a 4-8 NU322 6320-C3
225M-T 2 6312-C3 6312-C3 355L-b 4-8 NU322 6320-C3
225S-T 4-8 6313-2Z 6313-2Z 400L 4-8 NU324 6322-C3
225M-T 4-8 6313-2Z 6313-2Z
18
ERSATZTEILE
15. Dichtung für Klemmenkastenunterteil
1. A-seitiges Lager 16. Klemmbrett
2. Befestigungsschraube für Lagerschild 17. Gewindestange / Spannbolzen
3. Wicklung 18. Paßfeder A-Seite
4. Ständergehäuse mit Paket 19. Befestigungsschraube für Lagerschild
5. Welle mit Rotor 20. Befestigungsschraube für Lüfterflügel
6. B-seitiges Lager 21. Seegerring für Lüfter
7. Ausgleichsfeder 22. Paßfeder Lüfterseite
8. B-seitiges Lagerschild 23. Seegerring für Kuggellager A-Seite
9. Lüfterflügel 24. Lagerabschlußdeckel innen, A-Seite
10. Lüfterhaube 25. Lagerabschlußdeckel innen, B-Seite
11. Befestigungsschraube für Lüfterflügel 26. Lagerabschlußdeckel außen, A-Seite
12. Befestigungsschraube für Klemmenkasten 27. Lagerabschlußdeckel außen, B-Seite
13. Klemmenkasten 28. “Telecamit” – Nachschmiereinrichtung
14. Kabelverschraubung 29. Lagerschild mit Flansch
CONTENTS Fertigungsprogramm 2
INDEX Betriebsanleitung 10
INDEX Schaltbilder 16
INDICE Lager 18
Nachschmierintervalle für Lager 18
Ersatzteile 19
Bearings 18 Cojinetes 18
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and
operations in more than 50 countries. Founded in 1881, the company is one of the
largest providers of innovative equipment and process technology. GEA Group is
listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 Index.